Home

Sony AWG2040 User's Manual

1. GPIB Cable IEEE STD 488 GPIB Connector Connector AWG2040 DSO e of mat FC o oo o ES Re 6666 o 0000 CHI Signal Generator OUT 500 Cable Figure 2 61 Connections for Example 5 AWG2040 User Manual 2 71 Operating Examples g Step 2 Adjust the amplitude of the signals from the signal generator sc that the waveform is displayed on the DSO screen with the amplitude and sweep speed shown in Figure 2 62 i AEA Era ror aren 200mV div 10ps div Figure 2 62 DSO Screen LOAD SAVE C Step 3 Press the MENU column LOAD SAVE button for the AWG2040 Device C Step 4 Select Device from the bottom menu C Step 5 Select GPIB from the side menu Srn At this point if the remote port is not GPIB or the GPIB is not configured for waveform transferring the message shown in Figure 2 63 will appear Select O K from the sub menu to change these settings for making transfer possible The GPIB configuration is not waveform Transfer and the Remote Port is not GPIB Are you sure of changing the parameters to match the transfer operation Figure 2 63 Confirmation Message asking if it is O K to change the remote port and GPIB configuration settings 2 72 Operating Examples Load o Step 6 Select Load from the bottom menu Tek TDS CH1 C Step 7 Use the general purpose knob to select the name of th
2. 439 j amp i ta rats 39 e Other ak eee waveform Edil eaine elect re idoses Open i Setting undo write Figure 4A 97 Table Display Screen 1 U Value Shows the data value Value indicated by a real number and the time or point value U for the current position of the upper line cursor The value in the displayed inverted field can be changed using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob 2 A Shows the time or point count between the upper and lower vertical bar cursors AWG2040 User Manual 44 135 EDIT Menu 4A 136 3 Data This shows the waveform data for the waveform point count or time The waveform data can be displayed as binary hexadecimal or decimal data depending which base has been selected If binary numbers have been selected the left end of the data is the most significant bit MSB 4 Horizontal Scroll Indicator Indicates which portion of the waveform is currently displayed on the screen The displayed inverted portion of the indicator shows the portion of the waveform currently being displayed 5 L Value Shows the data value Value indicated by a real number and the time or point value L for the current position of the lower line cursor 6 Upper Line Cursor The line that is brightly highlighted by the upper line cursor is active 7 MARKER Binary display of the state of Marker 1 and 2 for the waveform point or tim
3. 06 4A 20 Figure 44 150 Sample Correlation a auala 4A 20 Figure 44 151 FFT Window Selection Menu 4A 20 Figure 44 152 FFT Editor Menu Structure 4A 211 Figure 44 153 FFT Editor CRT DIS play ue oasits tied Scans aaa 4A 21 Figure 44 154 Menu Displayed When Draw is Selected 4A 211 Figure 44 155 Drawing a Magnitude 00 4A 211 Figure 44 156 Magnified Signal Display onsas sap aeniea iise 4A 21 Figure 4A 157 Low Pass Filter 00000000 aaa aa 4A 22 Figure 44 158 High Pass Filter 00000 000 0000 ccc cece ec ce eee 4A 22 Figure 44 159 Band Pass Filter 000 0 0000 ccc cece eee ee 4A 22 Figure 44 160 Band Cut Filter 0000 c ce ceeccceec cece eee 4A 22 Figure 44 161 Fundamental Odd and Even Components 4A 22 Figure 4B 1 SETUP Menu Structure 00 0 0 cece eee 4B 2 Figure 4B 2 SETUP Menu Graphic MOG o Since aagi Seopa ace 4B lt Figure 4B 3 SETUP Menu Text Mode 000 000 4B Figure 4B 4 Adding Data 00 cece ccc ccecccceseeecs 4B Figure 4B 5 Waveform Memory Divisions 4B Figure 4B 6 Clock and Waveform Points 00c0 005 4B 1C Figure 4B 7 Amplitude and Offset SOWING ai Jade dae wesc 4B 12 Figure 4C 1 MODE Menu Structure a oa 4C 2 Figure 4C 2 MODE Menu CRT Display 0 0 4C 4 Figure 4C 3 Output f
4. Constants kO is the frequency of the modulating signal k1 is the carrier frequency and k2 is the modulation factor Description This example shows a double sideband DSB amplitude modulated wave form with a modulation factor of 0 5 The modulating signal is a cosine wave Settings Waveform points 32000 Clock frequency 128 MHz Output time 0 25 ms Appendix C Sample Waveform Library Frequency Modulation FM WFM Made with the equation editor frequency modulation range 0 40us k8 25e3 signal frequency k1 100e6 carrier frequenc k2 60 12e3 frequency deviation Sin 2epi k xt k2 k0xs in 2 pi kO t FMWEM Figure C 10 Frequency Modulation Formula and Waveform Constants kO is the modulation signal frequency k1 is the carrier frequency and k2 is the frequency deviation Description kO is the frequency of the cosine wave that is used to modulate a sine wave of frequency k1 To assure that the phases match when this waveform is iterated the carrier frequency times the modulating signal period is set to be an integer The modulation index is given by k2 k0 Settings Waveform points 32768 Clock frequency 819 2 MHz Output time 40 us AWG2040 User Manual C 11 Appendix C Sample Waveform Library Pulse Width Modulation PWM WFM Made with the waveform editor 1 0879 1 8800 MARKERI 7 1 i HARKER i f H
5. MARKERT 0 More Por2 hin Standard Chose aaan i undo waveform write Figure 4A 20 Menu Display When Clock is Selected MARKERZ o Zoom Procedure C Step 1 Select Setting from the bottom menu C Step 2 Press the Horiz Unit key in the side menu to select Time EC Step 3 Select Clock from the side menu Step 4 Input the clock frequency with the numeric keys or the general purpose knob 4A 35 EDIT Menu Link to The default setting for clock frequency is 1 0 GHz The clock frequency set in this process will be displayed in the Internal Clock item in the SETUP menu via the waveform file When the clock frequency is changed even if you switch to table or timing display mode the clock frequency there is changed too Linking the Vertical Bar Cursors The Cursor Link to item appears when two or more waveforms are being edited simultaneously This item is used to link the movement of the vertical bar cursors in different editing areas For example when the cursors in editing area 1 are linked to those in editing area 2 moving the one of the cursors in editing area 1 will cause the corresponding cursor in editing area 2 to move the same distance The following diagram shows the menu con figuration m Waveform x Waveform xx Link Off Go Back Setting More 2 of 2 Cursor Link to i Figure 4A 21 shows a display
6. Figure E 6 Gated Mode Initial Test Hookup c Set oscilloscope controls Vertical CH1 CH2 coupling CH1 scale CH2 scale CHt input impedance CH2 input impedance Horizontal Sweep Trigger Source Coupling Slope Level Mode d Set function generator controls Function Mode Parameter Frequency Amplitude Offset Output CH1 CH2 DC 0 5 V div 2 V div 509 1 MQ 1 us div CH1 AC Positive OV Auto Square Continuous 1 Hz 40V 20V Off 2 Set the AWG2040 controls and select the waveform file a Initialize AWG2040 controls Push UTILITY gt Misc Contfig Re set to Factory0 K AWG2040 User Manual E 17 Performance Tests b Modify the AWG2040 default settings Cc n Push MODE Gated gt Polarity to highlight Positive Select the file a Push SETUP gt Waveform Sequence m Highlight the MODE WEM file using the general purpose knob Push ENTER to select the file 3 Turn on the AWG2040 CH1 output Push the CH1 button so that the LED above the CH1 output connector is on 4 Check gated mode with manual trigger Push and hold the AWG2040 MANUAL TRIGGER button and check that the oscilloscope continu ously displays a sine wave while the MANUAL TRIGGER button is pushed 5 Check gated mode with gate signal a b p Change the oscilloscope horizontal sweep setting to 200 ms div Set the oscilloscope trigger source to CH2 Apply gate sig
7. i 93 14 18 i EQUATION DIR 7 Delete EXP PBFA i CTION BIR LORENT P WFN M_DISK_ WFM Delete All o3 11 18 Bire Lock TRAN VOL WFN More 1of2 i T RS232C DateTime Mise Diag Cal MyRam GPIB Figure 4E 4 File and Directory Display in the Root Directory C Step 2 Select More 1 of 2 then Make Directory from the side menu The menu for naming the directory is displayed AWG2040 User Manual 4E 9 UTILITY Menu o Step 3 Use the general purpose knob to input a directory name of AWG2040 See Figure 4E 5 The method for inputting the directory name is the same as the method for inputting a file name in the waveform editor See Naming a File in the discussion of the waveform editor cS insert character So 3 D Move cursor Figure 4E 5 Directory Name Input ao Step 4 After you have input the directory name select O K from the sub menu The AWG2040 directory is created in the floppy disk Example Changing a Directory oO Step 5 Select Change Directory from the side menu oO Step 6 Use the general purpose knob to select the AWG2040 sub di rectory you just created from the directory list See Figure 4E 6 FUNCTION Figure 4E 6 Directory Displayed When Change Directory is Selected 4E 10 UTILITY Menu Rename Delete Delete All C Step 7 Select O K from the sub menu The curre
8. 4E 20 UTILITY Menu Catalog Memory Free 1955K8 Name Type Size Date amp Time Comment e EQU 686 Fie 10 52 WEN 66484 93 47 16 16 32 EH 686 93 14 10 10 52 WFM 17148 93 11 18 16 52 EQU 296 93 11 16 16 53 WPM 17332 93 11 18 16 53 EGU s539 93 tt 18 16 53 WM 20948 93 11 18 18 53 i EGU 296 93 11 18 16 54 EXPP WEN 9140 93 11 10 10 54 LORENT P EQU 296 93 11 10 10 54 LORENTP GEM 9149 93 73 16 10 54 MOV SRW ERU 530 93 17 16 18 54 M_DISK_W WEM 1343 93 11 18 16 55 iu 98 11 18 18 55 32948 S SQLLSIN EGU 608 93 11 18 18 55 LSOULSIN UFM 9140 93 11 18 16 56 Figure 4E 14 Catalog Files Files in a catalog can be displayed by the following sorting conditions Name Name Files are displayed by file name Name in ASCII code order Name2 Name Reverse Files are displayed by file name Name in reverse ASCII code order Time1 Time Files are displayed by creation date Date amp Time from newest to oldest Time2 Time Reverse Files are displayed by creation date Date amp Time from oldest to newest Typet Type Files are displayed by extension Type in alphabetical order Type2 Type Name Reverse Files are displayed by extension Type in alphabetical order and within each file type by name Name in reverse ASCII code order Type3 Type Time Files are displayed by extension Type in alphabetical order and within each file type by creation
9. Mis y Delete Key E Na YL LY SZ I SS INe A E C DIC D E pacman a Numeric Keys Unit Keys ENTER Key O Q Figure 2 9 Numeric Keys Unit Keys Delete Key and ENTER Key Numeric Input Examples Example 1 Clock frequency numeric input Clock in SETUP menu The vatte before input mode was 100 0000 kHz and is to be changed to 12 3 kHz Pressing the 17 2 3 and ENTER keys in order changes the input column this way Table 2 1 Numeric Value Input Example 1 tt tt aa Input Key Numeric Value Column Numeric Value Status 100 0000kHz Before input 1 1 a a ee O N 2 12 aaiae During input 12 Sr ag ashe nh ended Sete Sina EJ 3 3 12 3 A ac ag rede cae ENTER 12 30000kHz Entered When you press one of the numeric keys the instrument switches to numer ic input status and the value that has been entered is displayed in the input column preceded by an asterisk Enter other numbers as desired and then press the ENTER key to confirm the value Unless otherwise designated the unit that is used for numeric input will be the same as when numbers were previously entered Basic Menu Operation To change the unit to MHz press 1 2 3 and MHz us keys in order This changes the value to 12 30000 MHz The frequency is expressed by a seven digit number When a value has been entered pressing one of the un
10. sseeeee eee ee 4F 3 Figure 4F 3 Setting the Amplitude ss eeee renee eee 4F 5 Figure 4F 4 Setting the Offset 0 2 06 2 eee eee eee eee 4F 5 Figure 4F 5 Waveform Polarity 2 2 02 cece e eee ener eee AF 6 xix NOOO hPAOANDHRM A GOHROND HA OLA No hA Coan NU WOU A NUN ww List of Figures XX Figure 4F 6 Setting the Duty Value for a Pulse Wave 4F Figure A 1 Digital Output Connectors 00000 cece eee ee A Figure B 1 Trigger Delay 2 2 0 0 0 0 c cece ccc eee ccc eee e eas B Figure C 1 Gaussian Pulse Formula and Waveform C Figure C 2 Lorentz Pulse Formula and Waveform C Figure C 3 Sampling Function SIN X X Pulse Formula and WaVGtOrM iis Savas oc ape aatnnd Saahiababtesed seats ai C Figure C 4 Squared Sine Pulse Formula and Waveform C Figure C 5 Double Exponential Pulse Formula and Waveform C Figure C 6 Nyquist Pulse Formula and Waveform 07 Figure C 7 Linear Frequency Sweep Formula and Waveform Cc Figure C 8 Log Frequency Sweep Formula and Waveform Cc Figure C 9 Amplitude Modulation Formula and Waveform C 1 Figure C 10 Frequency Modulation Formula and Waveform C 1 Figure C 11 Pulse Width Modulation Waveform C 1 Figure C 12 Pseudo Random Pulse Waveform 05 C 1 Figure C 13 Waveform for Magnetic Disk Writing Signal
11. More O of 2 L Delete All l Rename Comment copy Dejete i Figure 2 30 Initial Menu File List Operating Examples Creating Arbitrary Waveforms Using the Point Draw Function Arbitrary waveforms can be created on the graphic display with the POINT DRAW function Use the following procedure to make a copy of the file SAMPLE 1 WFM created in the previous operation copy C Step 1 In the initial EDIT menu select Copy bottom menu The display used to enter the name of the copy of the file will appear as shown in Figure 2 31 SB as Beal _Kentinuous mode Catalog Memory Free 3884K8 Tyne Sive nate amp Time Comment i Copy SAMPLE 1 WFM to GARPLET wFM i Gaje 5 i meert character i Ge H Delete l Delete All H 7 Rename Comment D Figure 2 31 Entering a Name for the Copied File In this example you will name the copy SAMPLE 2 a i C Step 2 Press the Delete key on the front panel to delete the 4 in the file name 2 C Step 3 Press 2 dk C Step 4 Select O K from the side menu SAMPLE 1 will be copied as a new waveform file named SAMPLE 2 AWG2040 User Manual 2 41 Operating Examples Edit CURSOR 2 5 CO CURSOR 7 6 C2 2 42 6 ENTER 8 ENTER C C Step 5 Check to make sure that the SAMPLE 2 waveform file is dis pl
12. Catalog Entry forvard a wi i Go fo Move destination mode dumeric Enter Repeat i H f j Show i Unde Exh H Overview write i Figure 2 42 Sequence Example Show C Step 6 Select Show Overview from the bottom menu to verify the phase sequence waveform The sequence waveform is combined as the sequence SAM PLE 1 WFM twice and SAMPLE 4 WFM once See Figure 2 43 2 52 Operating Examples OPIB ped File Name gt Show Line gt Overview sii s sci Ho jo Continue i Operation i Gperation i pare l i oveni i Figure 2 43 Sequence Waveform Display With Show Overview Exits write Selected Continue o Step 7 After verifying waveform select Continue Operation from the Oper ation side menu to return the system to the previous sequence edit menu Exit i C Step 8 Select Exit Write from the bottom menu Write wie aa C Step 9 Select Write and Exit from the side menu oO Step 10 Input SAMPLE 5 as the name for this sequence file For details on how to input the file name see Step 24 in Example 3 in Creating a waveform file OR C Step 11 When you are finished inputting the file name select O K from the sub menu The sequence SAMPLE 5 SEQ file is saved to internal memory and the system returns to the initial menu AWG2040 User Manual 2 5 Operating Exampies New Autostep 2 54 Cr
13. EE f i Catalog Disk 4 free 1020KB ie Date amp Time Type Comment EN 44 93 11 18 09 28 FREQUENCY MODULATION WM 65038 03 11 18 09 28 93 13 18 09 33 GAUSSIAN PULSE 9 Change Directory Device E Disk Auto Load i Figure 2 16 Sample Waveform Library Disk Files Load All Step 6 Select Load All from the side menu The display shown in Figure 2 17 will appear 2 28 Operating Examples Be POSI cae Catalog Memory Free J460K8 Load Name Type ze Date amp Time WEM 93 11 18 09 30 Load 3 EQU 93 11 18 09 33 EXP AFM 93 11 18 89 33 Pe eck cat ol aFh EQU 93 11 18 00 28 FREQUENCY MODULATION a hf rH 93 11 18 8G 28 a r GAUSS P EQU 93 11 18 09 33 GAUSSIAN PULSE Load Alf ARAUSS P WEM 93 4118 09 33 sLIN SYP EOU 93 11 18 09 33 LINEAR FREQUENCY SWEEP ijy Catalog Gisk Free 870KB Type Size Date amp Time comment Q FOH 8 iFM sDLEXP EAI 11 18 89 ROCEXP WN 20582 93 11 18 09 33 DOUBLE EXPONENTIAL PULSE ah EQU Fd 93 11 18 09 28 FREQUENCY MODULATION ar M HFM 65638 93 11 18 89 28 sGAUSS P EQU 66 93 11 18 89 33 GAUSSIAN PULSE WFN 93 11 18 09 33 GAUSS_F Device Dis Figure 2 17 CRT Screen Display When Load Allis Selected All the files in the lower box on the screen are loaded into internal memory The loaded files are displayed in the int
14. ss eee eee eter eee eens 2 32 Figure 2 22 Connections in Example 2 eeee eee a 2 33 Figure 2 23 Channel On Off Buttons and Indicators 2 33 Figure 2 24 initial Menu 66 02 e cece teen rete eees 2 34 Figure 2 25 Waveform Editor Graphic Menu 6e seer eee 2 35 Figure 2 26 Setting the Point Value for the Right Side Vertical Bar Cursor sese ice cece er e eee eee e e nnn ee enee 2 36 Figure 2 27 Creating a Sine Waveform 06 se reer reece 2 37 Figure 2 28 Creating a Ramp Waveform seee reer ees 2 38 Figure 2 29 Naming a File sess eee eee cere n ene 2 39 Figure 2 30 Initial Menu File List 2 40 Figure 2 31 Entering a Name for the Copied File 2 41 Figure 2 32 Setting the Edit Range ssssressrrererertrret 2 42 Figure 2 33 Drawing a Waveform Using the Point Draw FUNCTION aseisti rinena irei iante natria iane ene enn Eeer 2 43 Figure 2 34 Connecting the Points 6 sete ree eee eee 2 44 Figure 2 35 Creating a Sine Wave 2 55 eee eee teens 2 45 xili N DON DA UQUP N OO amp Nowe ew N N v w In List of Figures xiv Figure 2 36 Sine Wave With Noise Added Figure 2 37 Equation Editor Menu Display Figure 2 38 Equation List Input a a naana Figure 2 39 Display of Compiled Waveform Data Figure 2 40 Initial Menu File List alaaa Figure 2 41 Sequence Editor Menu Display Figure 2 42 Sequence Example looo Figure 2 43 Sequence
15. AWG2040 User Manual 4A 209 EDIT Menu Saving Files and Exiting the Editor Exit Select Exit Write from the bottom menu Then select from the side menu to write save the edited file to the internal memory of the AWG2040 and exit from the editor When this is done the frequency domain data is converted into time domain data and saved as a waveform file The same procedure is used to save the file and exit from the FFT editor as for the waveform editor See Saving Files and Exiting the Editor in the section on the waveform editor FFT Editor Menu Structure The FFT Editor menu has the structure shown in Figure 4A 152 Bottom Menu Bottom Menu Side Menu r Right peak Operation Left peak Draw m Zoom m Low Pass High Pass Rectangle Filter F lik Band Pass Hanning Band Elim L Hamming OK Apply filter y Select FFT Editor Window ___ Blackman Cut under Harns Cancel E Delete Even m Blackman kimiter Delete Odd Triangle Shift Mag Undo r Write and Exit Exit Write SE Exit without Writing Write Figure 4A 152 FFT Editor Menu Structure 4A 210 EDIT Menu Menu Select Window Operation Right peak Left peak Draw Zoom Filter Limiter Cut under Delete Even Delete Odd Deleting even or odd components Shift Mag Menu Functions The following list shows the functions available for each menu item and the
16. space and and characters in the character menu can not be used in file names and can not be selected C Step 6 To enter the file name select O K To cancel that file name select Cancel from the side menu When the Waveform Size is a Multiple of 32 When O K is selected the file will be saved to the internal memory under the file name that has been entered and the initial menu will reappear The new file name will be displayed in the file list in the initial menu If Cancel is selected the name that has been entered will be disregarded and the editor screen will reappear 4A 23 EDIT Menu NOTE if there is already a waveform file in internal memory with the name the complied waveform file will be given a message is displayed asking if you are sure you want to overwrite the old file Overwriting erases the data in the old file When the Waveform Size is Not a Multiple of 32 At the waveform output stage the number of points in the waveform file is changed into a multiple of 32 and then the file is loaded into waveform memory As a result when a waveform whose size is not a multiple of 32 has been created with the editor when saving the file you select from the menu what to do about the fraction When O K is selected in Step 6 the following menu will appear waveform Advance mode Stopped Expand Expand with Clock i The data size does not fit to this inst
17. 9 Bottom Waveform Level Shows the bottom level for the waveform data displayed on the CRT 10 Marker Shows the timing for the marker signal The number to the right of the word MARKER indicates the state value for the marker at which the active vertical bar cursor the one displayed with a solid line locates 11 Left Vertical Bar Cursor The active cursor is displayed with solid lines and the non movable is dis played with broken lines The left cursor indicates the left starting point for editing 12 Right Vertical Bar Cursor Indicates the right end point for editing AWG2040 User Manual l 4A 31 EDIT Menu 13 Button Operations This area shows how the front panel buttons operate in this menu ESS Switch Cursor Press the CURSOR button to toggle the active vertical bar cursor be tween left and right CES Move Cursor The vertical bar cursor can be moved by pressing the CURSOR button Settings for the Waveform to be Edited Setting Before waveform data is created you must use the Setting item in the side menu to select the environment for editing The following settings are avail able View type Selecting the waveform data display format Waveform Points Setting waveform point count w Horiz Unit Setting horizontal axis units Ciock Setting clock frequency Cursor Link to Linking the vertical bar cursors a Grid Displaying a grid in the editing area NOTE These settings are the s
18. AWG2040 User Manual 4A 53 EDIT Menu 4A 54 C Step 5 Select Execute from the sub menu The section of the wave form between the vertical bar cursors will be scaled horizontally in the right direction from the left vertical bar cursor Figure 4A 33 shows a waveform expanded to x2 horizontally between the vertical bar cursors with the Factor Before Scale Horizontal After Figure 4A 33 Display Expanded Horizontally Vertical Scaling m E 00 Step 6 Press the Scale button in the sub menu to select Vertical Step 7 Select Origin from the sub menu Use the numeric keys or the general purpose knob to input the numeric value of the origin Origin This value is used as a reference when scaling vertically it may be set to any value between 1 0000 and 1 0079 for the full scale of the vertical axis Step 8 Select Factor from the sub menu Step 9 Use the numeric keys or general purpose knob to input the scaling factor Factor Factor can be set within the range 100 in steps of 0 01 A negative factor causes the waveform between the vertical bar cursors to produce a mirror image about the origin value Scaling with a factor under 1 00 and greater than 1 00 40 99 reduces the waveform vertically between the vertical bar cursors Scaling with a factor greater than 1 00 or less than 1 00 expands the waveform vertically between the vertical bar cursors Waveform data pus
19. Code Conversion Pattern 001000 100100 000100 00001000 00160100 Example oo pe Toor 100100 000100 00100100 001000 00001000 Code Conversion Output 00100100 Te 1411 4000 111000 000111 11000111 00111000 Appendix D Miscellaneous m user defined When user defined has been selected as the code for pattern setting from the Code selection menu the following pattern systems can be created by setting the values for Source Data Pattern Converted Code Initial Src Initial Code and Out 1 0 NRZ Intial Sr 0 Initial Code 0 Out 1 0 High Low Source Data Pattern Converted Code NRZi Intial Sr 0 Initial Code 0 Out 1 0 Invert Keep Source Data Pattern Converted Code 0 00 1 ot RZ intial Sr 0 Initial Code 0 Out 1 0 High Low Source Data Pattern Converted Code BIPHASE Intial Sr 0 Initial Code 0 Out 1 0 High Low Source Data Pattern Converted Code AWG2040 User Manual D 9 Appendix D Miscellaneous 2f intial Sr 0 Initial Code 0 Out 1 0 Invert Keep Source Data Pattern Converted Code MFM Intial Sr 0 Initial Code 0 Out 1 0 Invert Keep Source Data Pattern Converted Code Logical Operation in the waveform editor timing display it is possible to perform logical opera p tions for data on different data lines The following logical tables and timing charts show examples of eac
20. GHz ns p Nu ae e O LOAD SAVE MHz us C3 kHz ms mV O HN o L J N I Ne A A PS N AZ AA at O uTHuTy Jo Z uw A Q Bb rz QU ay LIX 69 Figure 2 2 Front Panel Button Detail 8 Menu Buttons and Indicators The MENU column comprises the SETUP MODE EDIT LOAD SAVE and UTILITY buttons To display one of these five main menus on the screen press the corresponding button in the MENU column The corresponding LED indicators show which menu has been selected Each of these menus is described in detail in Section 4A through 4F AWG2040 User Manual 2 5 Overview SETUP Menu Use the SETUP menu to set the following waveform output parameters clock source and frequency waveform sequence file selection filter ampli tude offset and marker level See Section 4B for more information MODE Menu Use the MODE menu to set the operating mode Operating modes consist of trigger modes Cont Triggered Gated and Burst Waveform Advance in which waveform output is performed for a sequence file in response to each trigger signal and Autostep in which the next waveform is set for output in response to an autostep signal In addition to these modes there is also an item equipped switch the system to the slave operation See Section 4C for more information EDIT Menu The EDIT menu in
21. Type of Function Waveform Calculation Method Sine wave Sine Substitute Triangle wave Triangle Add Add Square wave Square Multiply Mul Ramp wave Ramp Noise wave Noise DC DC Example Sine The data between the vertical bar cursors is replaced by a sine wave Add Sine A sine wave is added to the data between the vertical bar cursors Mul Sine The data between the vertical bar cursors is multiplied by a sine wave AWG2040 User Manual 4A 39 EDIT Menu 4A 40 Cycle Frequency Amplitude Offset Setting the Parameters for Function Waveforms The following parameters can be set for each type of function waveform designated with the Type command Note however that only amplitude and offset can be set for a Noise waveform while only offset can be set fora DC waveform Cycle 0 1 to 100 000 in 0 1 increments Frequency 200 Hz to f 5 f Clock frequency set with Setting menu item Amplitude 2 0079 if set to a negative number the waveform will have inverse polarity Offset 1 000 to 1 0079 Procedure 1 Creating a Sine Wave In this example you will replace the data between the vertical bar cursors with a sine wave The procedure begins at the initial menu level C Step 1 Select New Waveform from the side menu in the initial menu C Step 2 Select Standard Waveform from the bottom menu O Step 3 Check to make sure that the left and right vertical bar cursors are all the way to
22. Clock oO Step 5 Select Clock from the bottom menu peeing C Step 6 Select Internal Clock from the side menu 1 o 2 a KHzimsimV O O O Ga C Step 7 Use the numeric and unit keys to input 1 0 2 4 kHz in order to set the clock frequency to 1 024 MHz AWG2040 User Manual 2 57 Operating Examples Source External pee Amplitude 5 Hs GSC Ja ORED 2 58 C Step 8 Press the Source button in the side menu to select Internal g Step 9 Select Amplitude from the bottom menu C Step 10 Use the numeric and unit keys to input 5 V in order to set the voltage value for full vertical scale Figure 2 49 shows the menu displayed as a result of these settings tinuous mode f Amplitude ji vi SAMPLE T WER Period 1 68gG00ns Points 1624 8 25009 5092 Min 2500 58C2 y z Wave for clock Sequence i Figure 2 49 Setting Output Parameters This completes the output parameter setting Operating Examples Setting Operation Mode and Waveform Output Now use an oscilloscope to see what type of waveform is generated Con nect the AWG2040 to a oscilloscope using 50Q cables and 50Q terminations as shown in Figure 2 50 The waveform output for this instrument is cali brated for a 50Q load AWG2040 Oscilloscope MARKER 1 CH2 500 Termination CH1 500 Cable Figure 2 50 Connections for Example 3 Continu
23. Operating Examples Example 4 Loading and Saving Files LOAD SAVE Device O NVRam Save NOTE When the instrument is switched off the data in the internal memory is erased Accordingly it is necessary to copy any files that have been created or edited onto a floppy disk or into the instrument s internal non volatile memory NVRam In Example 4 you will load and save the file created in the previous opera tion LOAD menu Used to enter files from a floppy disk or the instrument s internal NVRam into the internal memory SAVE menu Used to save files that have been created or changed onto a floppy disk or the instrument s internal NVRam Saving Files To save files into internal non volatile memory NVRam perform the follow ing steps LJ Step 1 Press the LOAD SAVE button in the MENU column C Step 2 Select Device from the bottom menu C Step 3 Select NVRam from the side menu J Step 4 Select Save from the bottom menu Figure 2 57 shows the SAVE menu displayed AWG2040 User Manual 2 6 Operating Examples Save All 2 66 Free 3853K8 i Save Comment L SANPLE SEO SAMPLE G AST Ni Comment i l Catalog NVRam free 474KB f j i i Dev ead ve jauto Load CONVRai eo i Off Figure 2 57 SAVE Menu C Step 5 Select Save All from the side menu When Save All is select
24. Sequence Editor Menu Structure The Sequence Editor menu has the structure shown in Figure 4A 123 Bottom Menu Side Menu r Cut Line Copy to Buffer r Operation Paste from Buffer Show Catalog Entry 1 L Insert Contents of Sequence Sequence Editor Show Overview p Undo Write and Exit Exit Write Exit without Writing Write Figure 4A 123 Sequence Editor Menu Structure 1 This item appears in the side menu when a sequence file 0OX SEQ has been selected with Catalog in the menu 2 This item appears when Operation in the bottom menu has been selected Menu Functions The following list shows the functions available for each menu item and the page on which you can find a description of that function Table 4A 7 Menu Functions Editing functions Cut Line Cutting a line Copy to Buffer Copying a line 4A 172 Paste from Buffer Pasting a line 4A 172 Show Catalog Entry Insert Contens of Sequence Catalog file waveform display Inserting a sequence file Sequence file display Undoing the previous operation Saving files and exiting the sequence editor 4A 21 44 166 AWG2040 User Manual 4A 167 EDIT Menu 4A 168 Sequence Editor Menu Display Figure 44 124 shows the general sequence editor display A description for each callout follows GPIB File Name sesaees Line N Operation Catalog i SS
25. from Buffer i l Show 1 Catalog i Entry H 7 j _ Z torsard g i Show 2 overview undo Figure 2 41 Sequence Editor Menu Display SAMPLE 1 WFM C Step 2 Use the general purpose knob to select the waveform file from the Catalog to go on the first line of the Destination list Select SAM PLE 1 WFM here VALUE C Step 3 Press the VALUE button on the front panel The file SAMPLE 1 WFM will be inserted in the first line of the Destina tion list The inverted video cursor will move to the Repeat column on the same line 2 ENTER CC C Step 4 Now you will set the repetition count for the SAMPLE 1 WFM file to 2 Press 2 and ENTER in that order The inverted video cursor will move to the second line in the Destination list AWG2040 User Manual 2 51 Operating Examples SAMPLE 4 WFM C Step 5 Repeat Steps 2 through 4 to enter SAMPLE 4 WEM in the second line of the Destination list The repetition count for this file should be set to 1 since this is the default value there is no need to change it This completes the creation of the waveform sequence file Figure 2 42 shows the resultant display GPIB iCantinuous made Stopped File Name s arsses SEQ tine a a a Operation Destination Catalog i l SAMPLE WERT T Cut Line SAMPLE 2 WFM SAMPLE 3 WEM H j copy to Buffer fnserthy ER i Paste i from Buffer
26. g Step 11 If you would like to apply hysteresis to the reference wave form select Hysteresis and enter a value If hysteresis is not necessary this item should be set to 0 Hysteresis comparison uses a higher and lower signal level than the Source signal level the degree is determined by the value set with the Hysteresis item C Step 12 Select Execute from the sub menu Comparison Without Hysteresis The left part of Figure 4A 73 shows a comparison of a triangular wave for Waveform2 and a square wave for Waveform1 with the results output to the Waveform2 MARKER display area The figure on the right has been provided as an aid to understanding this process Comparison is only performed for the section of Waveform2 between the vertical bar cursors in other words from point 128 to point 895 Data outside this range is preserved as it was before comparison The figure on the right shows the default marker set at point 0 remains 1 44 93 EDIT Menu As there is less data in the Source waveform than the destination wave form data at level 0 in other words a straight line has been automati cally added from point 640 to point 895 in the Source waveform ySawasae 4925 pts Destination Waveform __ Comparison Area 7 Source Waveform _ Comparison Area I Zi stextese 3923 ms Vane 3 88 Figure 4A 73 Comparison Without Hysteresis Comparison With Hysteresis The
27. m Select Open Ri Waveform3 Another Waveform Cut Copy to Buffer Paste from Buffe m Line Set High Set Set Low t Set Pattern r Line Shift Value invert Line a Source Copy Line Se oi Destination Operation 4 Source Exchange Line Destination Source Logical Function Destination i Func Type Data Expand Factor Insert Other Waveform ShiftRegister Line Generator Register Contig User defined Code Config EDIT Menu Zoom t Setting t Undo Bottom Menu Side Menu Sub Menu Horizontal Zoom in _ Horizontal Zoom out Horizontal Zoom fit L_ Horizontal Pan Waveform Points Graphic t View type Timing Table Horiz Unit ia 3 Glock Waveformx L Cursor Link to Waveformxx L Link Off Grid r Pattern Standard m Step Figure 4A 79 2 3 4 Waveform Max 4 L_ Min 4 r Write and Close Close Write __ Close without Writing Write Waveform Editor Timing Display Menu Structure These items appear when two or more waveforms are being edited simultaneously with Another Waveform in the side menu under Select Open in the bottom menu These items appear when the displayed waveform data has been zoomed in the horizontal direction with Horizontal Zoom in in the side menu under Zoom in the
28. A format for output to a 9 pin or 24 pin dot matrix printer in ESC P graphic mode Epson Encapsulated Postscript format for black amp white image files EPS Mono A format used for output to HP Hewlett Packard inkjet printers TIFF format Thinkjet Selecting the Port Use this item to select the port from which the hard copy will be output Three choices are available Disk GPIB and RS232C Port Figure 4E 18 Port Selection Menu Procedure In this example you will get a hard copy of the SETUP menu in TIFF format from the Disk port C Step 1 Select Mise from the bottom menu C Step 2 Select Hardcopy from the side menu C Step 3 Select Format from the sub menu oO Step 4 Use the general purpose knob to select TIFF format C Step 5 Select Port from the sub menu C Step 6 Use the general purpose knob to select Dise C Step 7 Select Go Back from the sub menu C Step 8 insert a formatted disk into the disk drive of the instrument C Step 9 Display the SETUP menu on the screen C Step 10 Press the HARDCOPY button on the front panel UTILITY Menu Ahard copy of the screen will be saved The following message will appear in the message area Hardcopy in progress If you want to stop printing the hard copy in mid process press the HARDCOPY button again When the hard copy has been saved the following message will appear Saved in SETUPOOO TIF This
29. Prerequisites The AWG2040 meets the prerequisites listed on page E 7 Procedure 1 Install test hookup and set test equipment controls a Hook up the spectrum analyzer Connect the AWG2040 CH1 output connector through the coaxial cable adapter and DC Block to the input connector on the spectrum analyzer see Figure E 15 AWG2040 Spectrum Analyzer 2 Osseo HO ie Figure E 15 Sine Wave Initial Test Hookup b Set spectrum analyzer controls Center frequency 200 MHz Span 50 MHz div Vertical 10 dB div Reference level 0 dBm RF attenuation 20 dB Video filter 3 kHz Resolution BW 1 MHz Storage mode Peak 2 Set the AWG2040 controls and select the waveform file a Initialize AWG2040 controls Push UTILITY Misc gt Config gt Re set to Factory 0 K E 34 Performance Tests b Select waveform file Push SETUP gt Waveform Sequence a Turn the general purpose knob to highlight the SINE WFM file u Push ENTER 3 Turn on the AWG2040 CH1 output Push the CH1 button so that the LED above the CH1 output connector is on 4 Check harmonics and noise level a Check harmonics level m Check that the harmonics level of the spectrum displayed on the spectrum analyzer from 0 Hz to 400 MHz is 45 dBc or less b Check noise Level m Check that the noise level of the spectrum displayed on the spectrum analyzer from 0 Hz to 400 MHz is 50 dBc or less 5
30. cceseeeee seen eee n ene 4E 18 Setting the Display 0c cee e cece eee e eee ee etree ener es 4E 18 Setting the Display Brightness 2 20 62 50sec errr eens 4E 19 Setting the Order of Files 0000 0 eeeee eee e eee teers 4E 20 Date Time Display 2 0 ce eee eee eee ee ete enn e eens 4E 22 Configuration 0 ccc cece eee eer t eee e neers 4E 23 Factory Settings 0 0 6 2 cece eee cece etre teen eens 4E 23 Deleting Data From Memory 002s eee etree renee res 4E 24 Remote Port Settings 0 0 0 0 cece eee e eee eee teen nes 4E 24 Settings for Hard Copy Output 22 2 2 eee eee eee ee 4E 25 Selecting the Format 0 25sec eee eer ener eee e ees 4E 25 Selecting the Port 00 cece eee cree eee tenet ees 4E 26 Status Display 2 0 60 ccc cece eee eter e teen e eee 4E 28 System and GPIB RS 232 C Status 0 66 eee eee eee 4E 28 V O Event Reporting 0 0 06 6 een nee eet nee 4E 29 Diagnostics and Calibration 2 26 cee eee eee ete 4E 30 Diagnostics 0 cece eee eee pee ete cee teeter e ees 4E 30 Calibration 00 ccc eee ee eee teens 4E 31 Pattern Display For Instrument Adjustment 4E 32 Function Waveform Generator Mode 4F 4 General Description e cece eee ener een eens 4F 1 Function Generator Menu Structure ssssssereresres 4F 2 Function Generator Menu Display eeeeeee 4F 3 Setting the Output Waveform c cec
31. 4A 131 EDIT Menu GPIB 3 3 14 1 erin ee i 2 elim ge 3 HHHH 86 Timing 4 einn ge elit eg p 6 oli ee H Tabie 7 elimi 96 4 8 aint 88 9 annn oe Go Back 1 ett 68 1 1 Selects ration Open Ope ation l Figure 4A 95 Timing Display C Step 4 Select Go Back from the sub menu The system moves to the previous Setting side menu 4A 132 EDIT Menu Table Display Menu Structure Figure 4A 96 shows the menu configuration for the table display Bottom Menu Side Menu Sub Menu m Waveform Waveform 1 r Select Open p t Waveform3 1 L Another Waveform m Cut j t Copy to Buffer i Operation R E Paste from Buffer Insert Other Waveform r Waveform Points r Graphic View type Timing Table i i r Point Waveform Editor Horiz Unit Time Setting Clock 2 r Waveformx Cursor Link to 71 Waveformxx Link Off Binary Radix Hexadecimal Real iid gt Off ri On r Undo m Write and Close w Close Write _ _ Close without Writing Write Figure 4A 96 Waveform Editor Table Display Menu Structure 1 This item appears when two or more waveforms are being edited simultaneously with Another Waveform in the side menu under Select Open in the bottom menu 2 This item appears when Time has been selected for Horiz Unit in the side m
32. C Step 11 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to select Code g Step 12 Using the general purpose knob select NRZI o Step 13 Select O K from the sub menu The pattern that you have set in the preceding steps will appear between the vertical bar cursors See Figure 4A 85 EDIT Menu AWG2040 User Manual user defined Code Config ggg 1824 pts Value bala 78 PATA BATA tata wot DATA i DATA BATA BATA MARKER 0 HARKERZ Figure 4A 85 Setting Pattern Data User defined Code Config Users can define their own conversion tables for code conversion This function enables RLL codes etc to be freely defined For sample codes see Pattern Codes in Appendix D Conversion tables defined with this menu item are protected by the backup battery so they are preserved even after the power is turned off To reset this item to the factory default NRZ select Reset to Factory in the UTILITY menu Procedure The following process is used to create a user defined conversion table g Step 1 Perform steps 1 through 5 of the sample process for defining pattern data C Step 2 Select User defined Code Config from the side menu See Figure 4A 86 4A 113 EDIT Menu 44 114 id 2 z Operation initial Src L0 4 a initial Code High H f Out t70 CRS Inver
33. Calibration Setup Test Front Panel Execute ey T7 RS232C i Date Time GPIB Figure E 1 Diagnostics Menu b Run the diagnostics Select Execute from the side menu This executes all the AWG2040 diagnostics automatically c Wait The internal diagnostics do an extensive verification of AWG2040 functions While this verification progresses the screen displays the clock icon When finished the resulting status appears on the screen d Confirm that no failures are found Verify that no failures are found and reported on screen If the diagnostics displays FAIL as the result of any test consult a qualified service technician for further assistance 2 Return to regular service Push a button other than UTILITY in the MENU column to exit the diagnostic menu NOTE The interactive tests on the Diagnostics screen are for manufactur ing use at the factory Self Tests Calibration AWG2040 User Manual The AWG2040 includes internal calibration routines that check electrical characteristics such as amplitude offset and attenuation and adjust internal calibration constants as necessary This procedure describes how to do the internal calibration Equipment Required None Prerequisites Power on the AWG2040 and allow a 20 minute warmup period at an ambient temperature between 15 C and 25 C before doing this procedure Procedure 1 Verify that internal adjustments pass Do
34. Equation file NOTE Editor Extension Waveform Editor Equation Editor Sequence Editor Autostep Editor Split Join Waveform Editor WFM When option 09 is installed there are two additional functions a high speed convolution function and an FFT editor These allow you to perform convolution calculations and edit the waveform file within the frequency range Pressing the EDIT button in the MENU causes the initial menu to be dis played When you want to edit an existing file or create a new file you select the appropriate editor from this initial menu In this section we will briefly describe these editors Waveform Editor This editor is used to create and edit waveform files The waveform data display formats are graphic table and timing Equation Editor This editor is used to create and edit equation files Equation file data takes the form of mathematical equations An equation file is compiled to create a waveform file and to output the waveform Sequence Editor This editor is used to create and edit sequence files Sequence files as semble a number of waveforms or sequence files in order EDIT Menu 4A 2 Autostep Editor This editor is used to create and edit autostep files Autostep files are created by programming waveforms or sequence files Each time a step signal is received the waveform moves on to the next step in this program The waveform is output
35. Hado x i i i j write Figure 2 27 Creating a Sine Waveform CURSOR C Step 11 Press the CURSOR button to activate the right side vertical bar cursor 1 o 2 3 ENTER OOO Coc C Step 12 Press the following key sequence 1 0 2 3 ENTER This sets the point value of right cursor to 1023 CURSOR C Step 13 Press the CURSOR button to activate the left side vertical bar cursor 5 4 2 ENTER oe o Cc C Step 14 Press the following key sequence 5 1 2 ENTER This sets the point value of left cursor to 512 AWG2040 User Manual 2 37 Operating Examples Type Ramp Amplitude 1 ENTER Offset 5 ENTER amo co Execute 2 38 Go Step 15 Select Type from the side menu oO Step 16 Turn the general purpose knob to select Ramp J Step 17 Select Amplitude from the side menu C Step 18 Press 1 and ENTER in that order to set the ramp wave amplitude to 1 C Step 19 Select Offset from the side menu C Step 20 Press 5 and ENTER in that order to set the ramp wave offset to 0 5 C Step 21 Select Execute from the side menu A two cycle ramp waveform is created between the vertical bar cursors see Figure 2 28 GPIB Continuous mode Stopped 7 1924 pts i Bory Execute k A SRE Se eek Closes operation zoom Seuing undo K wei selects Open Figure 2 28 Creating a Ramp Waveform Operating Examples Cl
36. Step 2 Select Insert Other Equation from the side menu Oo Step 3 Use the general purpose knob to select the equation file to be inserted oO Step 4 After selecting the file press the O K side menu button to insert the selected file directly before the inverted cursor within the equation list Press the Cancel side menu button to cancel the selection and return the system to the equation editor AWG2040 User Manual 4A 161 EDIT Menu Setting Waveform Point Count Setting When Setting is selected from the bottom menu the number of waveform points for equation file compilation and waveform file creation can be set Figure 44 120 shows the menu for when Setting is selected GPIB on Triggered mode Stepped ile Name GAUSS P EQU 5 a ine f Setting Patige 6 1600S T Wwavetorn exp pia 2a 2ex PAR Points 1024 rnd Operation Compile 1 i Figure 44 120 Setting Waveform Point Size Waveform Bainis Procedure C Step 1 Select Setting from the bottom menu Ol Step 2 Use the numeric keys or the general purpose knob to set the number of waveform points The default value for the waveform point count is 1024 The waveform point count can be set to any value between 1 and 32 K However when the setting causes the calculated clock frequency to be greater than 1 024 GHz the clock frequency will be held to the maximum frequency of 1 024 GHz When the
37. This item appears when another editing area has been created by selecting Another Waveform item under Select Open in the bottom menu If Horizontal is selected for Scale in the sub menu New Size appears if Vertical is se lected Origin appears This item appears when the waveform on the screen has been zoomed in the horizontal direction by selecting the Horizontal Zoom in item under Zoom in the bottom menu This item appears when the waveform on the screen has been zoomed in the vertical direction by selecting the Vertical Zoom in item under Zoom in the bottom menu This item appears when Time has been selected for Horiz Unit in the side menu if Point is selected for Horiz Unit under Setting in the bottom menu Cycle appears if Time is selected for this item Frequency appears EDIT Menu Menu Select Open Operation Cut Copy to Buffer Paste from Buffer Draw Shift Scale invert Clip Marker Insert Other Waveform Single Waveform Math Dual Waveform Math Region Shift Multiple Copy Convolute Compare Zoom Setting View type Waveform Points Horiz Unit Clock Cursor Link to Grid Undo Standard Waveform Close Write AWG2040 User Manual Menu Functions The following list describes the functions for each of the menu items and gives the number of the page on which you can find a more detailed ex planation of that item Table 4A 2 Menu Functions Opening
38. Vertical Zoom fit Used to return to normal waveform size x1 Vertical Pan Used to scroll through the waveform when it is enlarged The process of vertical zooming is the same as that for horizontal zooming except that enlargement and reduction occur with respect to the center of the vertical axis Figure 4A 77 shows an example of a waveform before and after vertical zooming 4A 98 After Figure 4A 77 Vertical Zoom EDIT Menu Timing Display To show the timing display for the waveform editor using the View type item in the Setting menu Procedure C Step 1 Select Setting from the bottom menu C Step 2 Select View type from the side menu Three items will be displayed in the sub menu Graphic Timing and Table C Step 3 Select Timing from the sub menu The timing display of the waveform editor will appear See Figure 4A 78 GPIB Triggered mode Stopped setting BATA Graphic Closes write select on p tandard Open Operation Zoom waveform i Figure 4A 78 Timing Display C Step 4 Select Go Back from the sub menu The system moves to the previous Setting side menu AWG2040 User Manual 4A 99 EDIT Menu Timing Display Menu Structure Figure 4A 79 shows the menu configuration for the timing display Waveform Editor 4A 100 Bottom Menu Side Menu Sub Menu Waveform Slavo Waveform2
39. Waveform Sequence Through p 100 MHz Filter 50 MHz m 20 MHz 10 kHz SETUP Amplitude Offset m Marker 1 High Marker 1 Low Marker Level m Marker 2 High Marker 2 Low r Graphics Dispi RPEN Text Figure 4B 1 SETUP Menu Structure 1 This item appears in the menu in case that Stave in the bottom menu is selected in the MODE menu Under these circumstances only this item is displayed in the side menu 4B 2 SETUP Menu MENU Functions The following table shows the function of each menu item and the page to refer to for a more detailed explanation Table 4B 1 Menu Functions Setting clock source and frequency Waveform Sequence Filter Selecting a waveform or sequence file Setting filter Setting amplitude 4B 12 4B 13 4B 12 4B 13 Amplitude Setting offset Setting marker level Selecting the display format for the SETUP menu Marker Level Display SETUP Menu Display Figure 4B 2 shows the graphic mode for SETUP menu display A description for each callout follows 3 GPIB Continuous mode X Waveform ae Sequence OY Ieee PT Markera T j Harker Period 224ns Points 224 tax G s0000 300 Min 5890 50 2 i 7 iplay clock em Filter Amplitude Offset marear i al i x Text Figure 4B 2 SETUP Menu Graphic Mode AWG2040 User Manual 4B 3 SE
40. it is possible to edit the waveform data in various ways The side menu has four pages Select More to switch the side menu to the next page The following is a list of the items in the side menu and their functions a Cut Cutting waveform Copy to Buffer Copying waveform m Paste from Buffer Pasting waveform m Draw Draw function w Shift Shift function Scale Scaling function a Invert Invert function e Clip Clip function w Marker Setting a marker u insert Other Waveform Inserting other waveform Single Waveform Math Single waveform calculations Dual Waveform Math Calculations with other waveform data Region Shift Specified region shift function When editing two or more waveforms simultaneously three more items are added to the side menu and the size of the menu increases to four pages Multiple Copy Multiple copy a Convolute Convolution calculation Compare Comparing waveforms Items with have further low level side menu called sub menu Setting Editing Areas The editing operations available under Operation are all performed inthe editing area located between the left and right vertical bar cursors Before beginning the editing process you should define the editing area using the following procedure Procedure g Step 1 Select Operation from the bottom menu _ Step 2 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to make the left vertical cursor active soli
41. z Repeat the same procedure as step a and b to check the D1 to D7 output signals ae End procedure Turn off the DC power supply output and disconnect the DC power supply and oscilloscope This procedure checks the AWG2040 floating point processor This check requires that the AWG2040 has Option 09 installed Equipment Required None Prerequisites The AWG2040 meets the prerequisites listed on page E 7 Procedure Check that floating point processor test in internal diagnostics passes a Run the AWG2040 internal diagnostics Push the AWG2040 ON STBY switch two times so that the AWG2040 runs the power on diagnostics b Check the FPP test results When the AWG2040 finishes the FPP test check that the test result is Pass This completes the performance tests for the AWG2040 E49
42. 733 Hiei tiie og 138 BE 06 138 8 7480 8 6 139 ne nn 8 Be 139 DF 8g 139 2 7559 06 18 Heim 6 8 140 DF 28 140 8 7539 00 Binary Hexadecimal Real Figure 4A 98 Numeric Displays for Waveform Data oO Step 4 Select Go Back from the current sub menu The display returns from the Binary sub menu to the previous side menu 4A 138 EDIT Menu Editing Waveform Data Waveform data can be edited regardless of what item is selected in the bottom menu Procedure To move the line cursor to the data point to be edited C Step 1 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to move the line cursor C Step 2 When the CURSOR button is pressed the active line cursor is toggled between upper and lower O Step 3 Use the general purpose knob to move the active line cursor to the time or point value to be edited To enter waveform data Cl Step 4 Press the VALUE button on the front panel to input the wave form data with the set cardinal number Within the inverted display active line cursor is a block cursor The data in the block cursor can be changed O Step 5 Use the lt and buttons on the front panel to move the block cursor to the data to be changed When the block cursor is at the left end of the waveform data pressing the button moves the block cursor to marker for the previous wave form point or time value When the block cursor is at the right end of the waveform data pressing the gt button mov
43. C Figure C 14 Waveform for Magnetic Disk Readout C 4 Figure D 1 Linear Interpolation 0 00 0 0 c cece eee ees D Figure D 2 Point Padding 0 c ccc cece cece ee cee ees D Figure D 3 Point Compression 00 ccc cece ee ee eues D Figure D 4 Equation Differentiation 00000 0000 aanu esac aes D Figure D 5 Equation Integration 000000 0 00 cece cece cea ee D Figure D 6 Phase and Delay 0 000 c ccc cccceeeeeceeees D 1 Figure D 7 Concept of Convolution 0 00 000 cece eee D 1 Figure D 8 Square Window and Frequency Characteristic D 1 Figure D 9 Hanning Window and Frequency Characteristic D 1 Figure D 10 Hamming Window and Frequency Characteristic D 1 Figure D 11 Blackman Harris Window and Frequency Characteristic 02 c ca cased cana deeeid od ae need Gee eae cas D 1 Figure D 12 Blackman Window and Frequency Characteristic D 1 Figure D 13 Triangle Window and Frequency Characteristic D 1 Figure E 1 Diagnostics Menu 00ccceeeeceeeeeeeee E Figure E 2 Calibration Menu 0 0 ccc cece ce eccecueeus E Figure E 3 LOAD Menu 2 00 2 cc cece cece cece eseuneaves E 1 Figure E 4 Cont Mode Initial Test Hookup uaaa raaa E 1 Figure E 5 Triggered Mode Initial Test Hookup 0005 E 1 Figure E 6 Gated Mode Initial Test Hookup 0 0005 E 1 Figure E 7 Relationship between 1 Volt or Greater
44. Check Trigger to Marker delay a Check that the time TRIGGER rising edge to the MRKER1 rising edge is 48 ns or less Change the oscilloscope controls a Change the oscilloscope sweep to 500 ns div b Change the function generator to 800 kHz Check trigger holdoft a Gradually increment the function generator frequency from 800 kHz until the MARKER1 one period waveform during the TRIGGER two period waveform are displayed on the oscilloscope b Check that the time MARKER falling edge to rising edge is 500 ns or less End procedure Turn off the function generator output and disconnect the function generator and oscilloscope External CLOCK IN Check This procedure checks the AWG2040 response to an external CLOCK IN signal Electrical Characteristic Checked Auxiliary Input EXTERNAL CLOCK Sensitivity on page B 10 Equipment Required A 50 coaxial cable BNC connector a 50 Q coaxial cable SMB BNC connector an adapter BNC female female an oscilloscope a RF signal generator Prerequisites The AWG2040 meets the prerequisites listed on page E 7 Procedure 1 Install test hookup and set test equipment controls AWG2040 User Manual E 45 Petiormpnce Tests E 46 a Hook up oscilloscope Connect the AWG2040 CH1 output connec tor through a BNC coaxial cable to the CH1 vertical input connector on the oscilloscope b Hook up RF signal generator Connect the AWG2040 rear panel
45. Figure 4A 88 inverting Waveform Data State C Step 4 Select Go Back from the current sub menu The display returns from the Invert sub menu to the previous side menu Copying Lines Use Copy line to copy the waveform data between the designated vertical bar cursors from one data line to another data line Copy processing re places the previous value of the copy destination line with the data of the copy source The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Copy Line item 4A 121 EDIT Menu Peake ee 2826 pts 4A 122 Source Operation More 2 of 3 Copy Line aes Execute Procedure C Step 1 Move the vertical bar cursors to define the section of the data to be copied Then select Copy Line from the second page of the side menu More 2 of 3 oO Step 2 Select Source from the sub menu Turning the general purpose knob select the copy source data line or marker Source selects the waveform data copy source Data line DATA 7 DATA 0 or marker MARKER1 or MARKER2 can be selected C Step 3 Select Destination from the sub menu Turning the general purpose knob select the copy destination data line or marker Destination selects the destination to which the waveform data selected with Source will be copied Data line DATA 7 DATA 0 or marker MARKER1 or MARKER2 can be selected as the copy destination From the copy source to the copy des
46. Gated Burst trigger mode Waveform Advance mode Autostep mode or Slave mode by pressing the corresponding button in the bottom menu NOTE As the operating modes in function waveform generation FG mode is only continuous output the operating mode set with the MODE menu has no effect on operating mode for function wave form generation mode In the operating mode excluding Cont if the side menu STOP item is se lected during waveform output the output is stopped immediately and the system returns to the start of the waveform or sequence The same thing will happen if an external signal is applied through the STOP TRIG IN connector on the rear panel 40 5 MODE Menu cont Triggered 4C 6 Here is how each operating mode works Cont Mode As soon as Cont mode is selected continuous output of the specified waveform or sequence waveform begins No side menu is displayed while Cont is selected Triggered Mode In Triggered mode the designated waveform or sequence waveform is output once for each trigger received When this instrument goes into Triggered mode it waits for a trigger to be generated The trigger can be generated from the external trigger signal applied to the TRIGGER INPUT connector or by pressing the MANUAL button on the front panel During waveform output if the MANUAL button is pressed or the external trigger signal is generated such a trigger has no effect When Triggered is selected the
47. Hook up function generator Connect the adapter BNC T male to 2 female on TRIGGER INPUT through a coaxial cable to the function generator output see Figure E 19 AWG2040 User Manual E 41 Performance Tests AWG2040 Oscilloscope I lt issisistater o a E Pate 283 a LQOO D SSSsisiss a Dual Banana Adapter Figure E 19 Trigger Input Initial Test Hookup d Set oscilloscope controls Vertical CH1 Coupling CH1 Scale CH1 input Impedance Horizontal Sweep Trigger Source Coupling Slope Level Mode e Set DMM controls Mode Range Input f Set function generator controls Function Mode Parameter Frequency Amplitude Offset Output E 42 CH1 CH2 DC 1 V div 500 20 ns div CHi AC Positive OV Auto VDC Auto Front Square Continuous 100 kHz OV 1V On Performance Tests 2 Set AWG2040 controls and select the AWG2040 waveform file a Initialize AWG2040 controls Push UTILITY gt Misc gt Contfig gt Re set to Factory gt 0 K Modify AWG2040 default settings m Push MODE gt Gated Polarity to highlight Positive u Select Level from the side menu and turn the general purpose knob to select 0 V You can also use the numeric and units keys to select 0 V then push ENTER Select waveform
48. Select O K to delete the source file during expansion Select No to preserve the source file Select Cancel to cancel the expansion process No The source file will be left as is and the sequence file will be expanded into a waveform file at which point the initial menu will reap pear The expanded waveform file will be added to the file list in the initial menu An error in the expansion process will destroy that wave form file O K The source sequence file and all component files will be deleted and the sequence file will be expanded into a waveform file at which point the initial menu will reappear The expanded waveform file will be added to the file list in the initial menu An error in the expansion pro cess will destroy that waveform file Cancel The expansion process will be canceled and the initial menu will reappear 4A 13 EDIT Menu Waveform Editor Use the waveform editor to create or edit waveform files with the extension of WFM Waveform files contain waveform data marker signal data and the waveform output parameters set with the SETUP menu The waveform data display formats are graphic table and timing The editing functions dis played depend on the data display format In the waveform editor 0 to 254 in 8 bit resolution on the vertical axis is expressed as 1 0000 to 1 0000 with 255 as 1 0079 At this level there is no relationship to the Amplitude Offset setting in the SETUP menu u
49. Select Operation from the bottom menu C Step 12 Select DRAW from the side menu The first point will be drawn 2 Step 13 Press the VALUE button on the front panel to determine the direction in which the point cursor will move C Step 14 Using the general purpose knob move the point cursor to draw another point C Step 15 Select Add Draw Point from the sub menu The point will be confirmed and an _ will appear at that position g Step 16 Repeat steps 13 through 15 to determine other points An example is shown in Figure 2 33 Operation H Add Draw Point Delete Draw Point HARKERT 0 MARKER 6 Execute Sree Select seratio i Standard Close Open operation zoon Setting unde Waveform write Figure 2 33 Drawing a Waveform Using the Point Draw Function 2 43 Operating Examples a C Step 17 Select Smooth from the sub menu to turn smoothing ON Off Turning smoothing on selects spline interpolation in which the points that have been drawn and the curve outside the area defined by the left and right vertical bar cursors will be connected in a smooth curve Turning smoothing off selects linear interpolation in which the points that have been drawn and the curve outside the area defined by the left and right vertical bar cursors will be connected using straight lines lia C Step 18 Select Execute from the sub menu The points between the v
50. Source Waveform2 Display Area When the other waveform file for operation is selected from internal memory the waveform for that file will be displayed in this area along with the file name clock frequency and number of points making up the waveform 3 Destination Waveform Display Area The result of operations for Waveform and Waveform will be displayed in this area as a waveform The waveform point count will be the sum of the point count for Waveform1 and Waveform2 When the data is saved the clock frequency for Waveform1 will be saved to that file 4A 204 EDIT Menu Selecting a Waveform File waveform in this example you will select a waveform file for operation Procedure L Step 1 Select Waveform from the bottom menu C Step 2 Select Waveform from the side menu g Step 3 Using the general purpose knob select the waveform file for operation from the Select Waveform list and then select O K The waveform you have selected will be displayed in the Waveform display area under Source CJ Step 4 Select Waveform2 from the side menu Step 5 Using the general purpose knob select the other waveform file for operation from the Select Waveform list and then select O K The waveform you have selected will be displayed in the Waveform2 display area under Source riggered mode Source Destination waveform waveform foo a Select Waveform O Re SE DEZE WEM EXP WEM GAUSS WFM
51. Use this item to display the date and time C Step 1 Select Mise from the bottom menu C Step 2 Select Display from the side menu 2 Step 3 Press Date Time in the sub menu and select On The current date and time will be displayed in the upper right hand corner of the screen as shown in Figure 4E 16 4E 22 UTILITY Menu Reset to Factory EREE AWG2040 User Manual Date Time Display tee Figure 4 16 Date Time Display Configuration The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Contig item Reset to Factory Config Secure Erase Memory GPIB RS232C Remote Poi In this section we will discuss the Reset to Factory Secure Erase Memory and Remote Port items in the sub menu Factory Settings Select Reset to Factory to reset this instrument s settings to their factory values Procedure C Step 1 Select Misc from the bottom menu CO Step 2 Select Config from the side menu Cl Step 3 Select Reset to Factory from the sub menu go Step 4 The next message is displayed asking if it is OK to reset this instrument Reset to factory default Answer Cancel or O K When you select O K this instrument is reset to its factory settings and the SETUP menu is displayed Resetting the instrument to factory default settings will not affect the data stored in the internal memory and the non volatile RAM NVRam The factory settings are l
52. a message brighter than normal for easy visibility is displayed in this area This message does not require a response Remote commands can be used to enter a user designated message Basic Menu Operation Menu Operations Operations settings procedures and selection of parameters for waveform output are performed on this instrument by means of the system s menus When one of the MENU buttons in the center of the front panel is pressed the menu corresponding to that button will appear There are six menu buttons the five buttons used in arbitrary waveform generation mode SET UP MODE EDIT LOAD SAVE and UTILITY and below them the button used in function waveform generation mode F G See Figure 2 7 The menu items displayed on the screen are selected by pressing the corresponding bezel buttons at the bottom of the screen hereafter referred to as bottom buttons or to the right of the screen hereafter referred to as side buttons There are 7 bottom buttons and 5 side buttons When one of the buttons is pressed to select an item that item will be displayed inverted on the screen to indicate that it is operational See Figure 2 7 MENU Buttons SONY AWG2040 ARBITRARY WAVEFORM GENERATOR J O10 owr OfO Side Buttons ol Ie Bottom Buttons i as SEESEBEre LEARY eer ci te ENU Figure 2 7
53. bottom menu gt Config side menu gt Remote Port sub menu is set to RS232C or when GPIB UTILITY MENU GPIB bottom menu is set to anything other than Waveform Transfer Press ing O K in response to this message will cause these settings to be automatically changed to GPIB and Waveform Transfer respectively and the instrument will be ready for direct waveform transfer through the GPIB interface 4D 12 LOAD SAVE Menu Load without Preamble w C Step 5 Select Load from the bottom menu Oo Step 6 Using the general purpose knob select the channel and the O m name of the instrument from which the data wili be transferred from the Name column in the GPIB Source list at the bottom of the screen When waveform data is loaded into the internal memory of the AWG2040 a waveform file wili be created with the name shown in the Loaded as column Figure 4D 7 shows the GPIB Source list Catalog GPIB Source Name Nae TOS tH Tek TDS CH2 tek 10S i TB hi TOSCH3 AEM aa he AOS CH3 i Tek TOS REFI Tek TDS REF2 ek TDS REFS ek TDS REFA ek Figure 4D 7 GPIB Source List Step 7 Choose Select Source Address from the side menu and using the general purpose knob select the GPIB address for the instrument from which data is to be loaded Step 8 Select Load from the side menu Data transfer will begin and the transferred file will be added to the li
54. page on which you can find a description of that function Table 44 11 Menu Functions Selecting a window Entering the FFT Editor Editing in the frequency domain Searching for peaks Drawing magnitude and phase Zooming a signal Selecting a filter Selecting a limiter Cutting extraneous frequency components Sifting magnitudes Undo Canceling function execution Exit Write Saving files and exiting the editor Page 4A 208 4A 214 4A 215 4A 215 4A 219 4A 220 4A 222 4A 222 4A 222 4A 223 4 2 4A 21 4A 210 a AWG2040 User Manual 4A 211 EDIT Menu FFT Editor Menu Display Figure 4A 153 shows the general FFT editor display A description for each callout follows made Stopped Operation O GPAB File Name gt i o Freqt SO78MHZ f Magnitade 47 20720 pore Phase i7iagdeq GOmAZ anne a 30 27MHZ a eS 392r l Right f f write Figure 4A 153 FFT Editor CRT Display 1 File Name This is the name of the waveform file being edited 2 Freqi Magnitude Phase This section shows the frequency magnitude and phase for the position of the left vertical bar cursor Use the CURSOR button to toggle between the left and right vertical bar cursors Use the VALUE button to toggle between magnitude and phase A knob icon indicates that an item is active Magni tude values are expressed in dB and phase value
55. select Cancel When O K is selected the file is saved into internal memory with the changed file name and displayed in the file list on the CRT screen Select O K or Cancel to return to the initial menu NOTE If there is already a waveform file in internal memory with the name the compiled waveform file will be given a message is displayed asking if you are sure you want to overwrite the old file Overwriting erases the data in the old file Comment Input Select Comment to input a comment The input method for the comment is the same as that for Rename above The comment may be up to 24 charac ters long All the characters in the character menu can be used Copying a File Select Copy to display a menu for inputting the copy destination file name The input method for the file name is the same as that for Rename above 4A 9 EDIT Menu Deleting a File Delete Delete All Select Delete or Delete All to delete unnecessary files Delete deletes files in internal memory one at a time Delete AH deletes all the files in internal memory Procedure C Step 1 Use the general purpose knob to select the file to be deleted from the file list in the initial menu C Step 2 Select Delete from the bottom menu This instrument asks you if you are sure you want to delete the selected file See Figure 4A 4 GPIB Continuous mode Stopped Catalog gt Memory Free 3790KB Name Type Size Date amp Time Comment _ CHAMP E
56. shifted with the specified conditions Figure 4A 87 shows the screen before and after the data on line DATA 5 between the vertical bar cur sors is shifted 32 points to the right EDOTI pE TTA DATA os BATA BATA BATS invert DATA 2 DATA BATA BA MARKERT G Before Figure 44 87 Shifting Waveform Data o Step 5 Select Go Back from the current sub menu The display returns from the Shift sub menu to the previous side menu Inverting Waveform Data Use Invert to invert each data line or marker between the designated vertical bar cursors The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Invert item EDIT Menu r Line Operation More 2 of 3 Invert Go Back Execute Procedure C Step 1 Move the vertica bar cursors to define the section of the data to be inverted Then select Invert from the second page of the side menu More 2 of 3 C Step 2 Select Line from the sub menu Turning the general purpose knob select the data line or marker whose state is to be inverted C Step 3 Select Execute from the sub menu The state is inverted with the specified conditions Figure 4A 88 shows the screen before and after the data between the vertical bar cursors on line DATA 5 is inverted Copy Line AWG2040 User Manual MABKERDG After
57. the one enclosed bya box on the screen where editing is being performed The convolution process will take approximately 20 seconds NOTE The convolution process will take around 80 seconds for two waveforms consisting of 1024 points each the time will vary slightly depending on the type of waveform An instrument with Option 09 installed is equipped with the convolution waveform editor which performs convolution at high speed 1 BOR WAERTE LILET PL WRER2 meee Figure 4A 71 Convolution C Step 13 Select Go Back from the current sub menu The display moves from the Convolute sub menu to the side menu 4A 90 EDIT Menu Compare Comparing Waveforms The Compare item appears when two or more waveforms are being edited simultaneously It is used to compare the section of the waveform between the two vertical bar cursors in one editing area to the waveform between the vertical bar cursors in another editing area The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Compare item r Source Hysteresis m DATA Operation More 4 of 4 Compare _ Set Result to MARKER 1 Go Back MARKER 2 Execute See Opening and Selecting Editing Areas on page 4A 16 for more detailed information regarding how to designate multiple editing areas Depending on whether the result of comparison is displayed in the editing area or in the M
58. 10 Expanding a Sequence File D A Converter This is used to convert digital waveform data to an analog signal It has a resolution of 8 bits The reference voltage is changed to vary the output voltage continuously Digital Data Output The data and clock signal sent to the DAC pass through the buffer as is Opti on 03 after which they are output from the connector on the rear panel Data Length Generally outputting high precision high S N ratio waveforms requires an adequate number of data points For example when outputting triangular waveforms 512 points are needed to minimize the jaggedness of the waveform That is why the AWG2040 uses a DAC with a resolution of 256 8 bits for the vertical amplitude Figure 3 11 shows the relationship between the triangular wave resolution and the number of data points AWG2040 User Manual 3 13 Block Diagram Resolution in 256 t 256 256 Points Points Figure 3 11 Relationship Between Triangular Wave Resolution and Number of Data Points For a triangular wave extra waveform points beyond 512 are meaningless Also when a 1024 point sine wave is created the folding component level is approximately 48 dB The data length required depends on the waveform shape the S N ratio required the filter cutoff frequency and other such factors Therefore output the waveform on the oscilloscope spectrum analyzer or the like and check that the waveform is what you n
59. 12 09 048 O SAMPLE 5 SEQ Fe E SAMPLE 8 AST 554 8 Bevice CONVRam GPIB Catalog Memory free 237268 Load Name Type Size bate amp Time Comment CHIRP S WPS Resy I T BE 12 32 BJ EXPP WF 20948 Load 9144 9149 98 1912 12 33 A cae ge Load PHONE WEM 2000 without SINK_X 5 REM 32948 Preamble SOUS WM 9140 93 11 12 12 36 Catalog GPIB Loaded as ek WEM Tek TDS CH REM p Tek 10S CH Pe c KPY wee Ae Tek E e TDSREFA a Select E y Tek 2408 CHI 2400CH1 WFN Source Address f Device GPIB uta Load of aN TESE Figure 4D 3 LOAD Menu CRT Screen Display 4D 4 LOAD SAVE Menu AWG2040 User Manual 1 Internal memory file list This is a list of the files currently loaded into internal memory The list shows the file names the file types file sizes in bytes the date and time the file was created and a comment The space remaining in internal memory into which files can be loaded is displayed in the upper right hand corner ofthe list For the LOAD menu when a file is loaded into internal memory from mass memory or from another instrument through the GPIB interface that file is added to this list For the SAVE menu you can select files to save from this list to mass memory 2 Mass memory file list This list is displayed when mass memory has been selected for
60. 4A 147 EDIT Menu 44 148 Procedure In this example you will create a sine wave with a period of 1 ms using the following equation range 0 ims Time range sin 2 pi x Equation C Step 1 Select Operation from the bottom menu C Step 2 After range 0 in the equation list use the numeric keys and the unit keys to enter 1 ms The expression now reads range 0 1ms o Step 3 Using the general purpose knob select from the component menu 0 Step 4 Press VALUE or ENTER on the front panel The that you selected in the component menu will be inserted in front of the position of the caret cursor in the inverted line cursor in the equation list The expression now reads range 0 1ms Step 5 Press the key The inverted cursor will move to the next line Step 6 Using the general purpose knob select sin from the compo nent menu Step 7 Press VALUE or ENTER on the front panel The expression sin will appear on the screen Step 8 Using the numeric keys enter 2 The expression now reads sin 2 O O O8 O00 Step 9 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter pi x and The expression now reads sin 2 pi x Using the Front Panel Buttons in Editing The CURSOR and VALUE ENTER buttons are used to select the cursor to enter a selected component and to enter values with the numeric and unit keys Here are details on these functions CURSOR Button When you press the CURSOR button you can move the inverted curs
61. 4A 3 lists the differences between the Specified Region Shift function and the Shift function described on page 4A 51 Table 4A 3 Differences Between the Shift Operations Shift Rotates the area inside the range delim ited by the cursors Data point spacing Region Shift Shifts the area inside the range delim ited by the cursors to a different area item Area affected Amounts less than the data point spacing Shift amount Interpolation at inter section Interpolation performed None Data changed by manipulations performed from the Region Shift menu can be restored to the prior state for one operation only using the Undo item on the bottom menu If the result of the operation was not what was intended use the Undo function to restore the original data You can obtain optimal settings for shift parameters using the Undo function if the new shift parameters do not produce the desired results use Undo to cancel the operation Then enter new shift parameters and use Undo to cancel each operation until you achieve the desired results AWG2040 User Manual 4A 73 EDIT Menu 44 74 Shift Type Selection There are four types of specified region shifts The Type item selects which shift operation will be performed Right or Left shifts the selected region to the right or left respectively Expand moves the data out from the center Compress moves the data toward the center
62. AWG2040 AFG2020 Function Waveform Generator Hewlett Packard 54600 Series Digital Storage Oscilloscope HP54501A HP54502A HP54503A HP54504A HP54510A 54500 Series Digital Storage Oscilloscope HP54600A HP54601A HP54602A 94x0 Series Digital Storage Oscilloscope 9410 9414 9420 9424 9430 9450 DL1000 Series Digital Storage Oscilloscope DL1100 DL1200 E LeCroy Yokogawa Electric AWG2040 User Manual 4D 7 LOAD SAVE Menu Loading Files from Mass Memory into Internal Memory Load If Disk or NVRam has been selected for Device the LOAD menu appears when the Load item in the bottom menu is selected See Figure 4D 4 The internal memory file list is displayed on the upper screen and the list of files saved onto mass memory is displayed on the lower screen Gee Triggered mode 0 Stopped Catalog Memory Free gt 2372KB Name Type Comment fins WPA i P WMO g 93 11 17 PWEN O B140 98 11 12 12 3 MDISK 6 WPM 1348 93 11 12 12 MODS WEM 2006 93 44 12 12 32 SINK XP WEY 93 11 12 12 Name Type Size Date amp Time Comment e SAMPLE T WE Se Gtit 12 00 SAMPLE 2 WER 2948 2 34 11 12 83 SAMPLE 3 WFM 93 11 1 12108 SANPLE 4 EGU 93 14 1f 2247 AMPLE WEM SAMPLES SEIF SANPLE 6 AST 554 Change Directory Auto Load Figure 4D 4 LOAD Menu Procedure To Load files into internal memory from mass memory
63. Also note that if you use a window function with taper processing then carry out inverse Fourier transformation to make real time data that real time data is tapered AWG2040 User Manual D 15 Appendix D Miscellaneous The window functions are effective for investigating the frequency compo nents of the acquired waveform but the waveform after the window function is applied differs from the original waveform Square Wave Window The square wave window does not taper the time region data The filter shape in the frequency region is sin x x The Square wave window is appropriate for observing the frequency spectrum ol non repetitive signals The square wave window is also used for observing frequency components near DC 0 dB 3 dB Bandwidth 20 0 89 Highest 40 Side Lobe 50 Denn 13 dB Window Function Freq Magnitude Figure D 8 Square Window and Frequency Characteristic Hanning Window The Hanning window is a function derived from the cos function This window function has superior magnitude precision and leakage elimination characteristics 0 dB 3 dB Bandwidth 20 1 44 40 Highest Side Lobe 60 80 32 dB Window Function Freq Magnitude Figure D 9 Hanning Window and Frequency Characteristic D 16 Appendix D Miscellaneous Hamming Window The hamming window is similar to a hanning window but it suppresses more the transmissivity for the side lobes next to the transmitti
64. Buffer Show Catalog Entry Insert Contents of Sequence Appears when a sequence file has been selected with Catalog Cutting a Line Use Cut Line to cut outa line in the Destination list Procedure CJ Step 1 Select Operation from the bottom menu o Step 2 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel oO Step 3 Use the general purpose knob to select the line to be cut from the Destination list O Step 4 Select Cut Line from the side menu When Cut Line is selected the line displayed inverted in the Destina tion list is deleted This deleted line is put into the paste buffer To return the Destination list to its original state select Undo from the bottom menu or Paste from Buffer from the side menu Copying and Pasting a Line Use Copy to Buffer and Paste from Buffer items to copy a line in the Destination list and paste it to another line Procedure O Step 1 Select Operation from the bottom menu g Step 2 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel Use the general purpose knob to select the line to copy from the Destination list g Step 3 Select Copy to Buffer from the side menu When Copy to Buffer is selected the line displayed inverted in the Destination list is copied into the paste buffer This operation does not affect the display on the CRT O Step 4 Use the general purpose knob to specify the position to paste the copied line with the inverted display cursor The position for pasting is directly bef
65. Button Press the F G button to switch from arbitrary waveform generation mode to functional waveform generation mode Use this mode to select one of the standard function waveforms for waveform output and to set its parameters The functional waveforms include sine triangular square ramp and pulse waveforms You can set each function s parameters See Section 4F for further information Overview Side Panel LED Indicator Eject Button Figure 2 3 Side Panel 20 Floppy Disk Drive The floppy disk drive is used for saving and loading various types of files Files can be loaded or saved from to floppy disk using the LOAD SAVE menu When the disk drive is in operation the LED indicator is lit Remove a floppy disk by pressing the eject button NOTE Never press the eject button to eject the floppy disk while the disk drive indicator light is lit as the stored data may be corrupted and errors may result AWG2040 User Manual Overview Rear Panel Refer to Fig 2 5 21 s fe ar f aI P ol ie Ol e el eo oo fH O JS Y O 26 25 24 23 22 Figure 2 4 Rear Panel Overall View 21 Power Source Connector A power cord is connected to the power source connector 22 PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH When this switch is on power is
66. Check external trigger level accuracy m Decrement the function generaor offset level under 6V Gradually decrement the function generator offset level until a waveform is displayed on the oscilloscope m Check that the value displayed on the DMM is within 5 V 0 1 V when the waveform is first displayed 5 Change the hookup and set test equipment controls a Hook up the oscilloscope m Disconnect the BNC coaxial cable from the adapter BNC female to dual banana on the DMM output connector and connect it to the CH1 vertical input connector on the oscilloscope m Connect the AWG2040 MARKER1 output connector through the BNC coaxial cable to the CH2 vertical input connector on the oscilloscope see Figure E 20 AWG2040 Oscilloscope Figure E 20 Trigger to Marker Detay Initial Test Hookup b Set oscilloscope controls Vertical CH1 CH2 CH1 Scale 2 Vidiv CH1 Input Impedance 1 MQ CH2 Scale 1 Vidiv CH2 Input Impedance 50Q Horizontal Sweep 20 ns div 6 Set AWG2040 controls and select the ANG2040 waveform file a Modify AWG2040 settings u Push MODE gt Triggered E 44 Performance Tests 10 Fh b Select waveform file w Push SETUP gt Waveform Sequence m Turn the general purpose knob to highlight the MARKER WFM file m Push ENTER Change the function generator controls a Change the amplitude to 1 V
67. Device It contains all files that have been saved to mass memory The file data is the same as in 1 above For the LOAD menu you can select files to load from this list to the AWG2040 internal memory For the SAVE menu when a file is saved from internal memory of the instru ment to mass memory the saved file is added to this list 3 GPIB file list This list is displayed when GPIB has been selected for Device It shows ail other instruments connected to this instrument through the GPIB interface Waveform data can be sent to the internal memory of this instrument from the instruments shown in this list When waveform files are loaded in this manner a name appears in the Loaded as column 4D LOAD SAVE Menu Selecting the Device Device Use Device to select the source from which files are loaded into the AWG2040 internal memory and the destination to which files are saved from internal memory You may select Disk NVRam or GPIB Procedure C Step 1 Select Device from the bottom menu C Step 2 Select Disk NVRam or GPIB from the side menu The following items are listed in the side menu a Disk A floppy disk Files are saved to or loaded from a floppy disk in serted into the floppy disk drive on the right side of the instrument im NVRam The instrument s internal non volatile RAM NYRam GPIB The GPIB interface Used to transfer waveform data directly from CPIE another instrument to
68. Directory is displayed on the side menu and the current directory can be changed C Step 3 Select Save from the bottom menu Ol Step 4 Use the general purpose knob to select the file to be saved to mass memory from the internal memory file list 4D 10 LOAD SAVE Menu C Step 5 Select Save from the side menu The selected file is saved to the specified mass memory for a disk the current directory When Save All is selected from the side menu all the files in the internal memory are saved to the specified mass memory NOTE When Save or Save All is executed if there is already a file in the mass memory with the same name as a file to be saved the system asks you if you want to replace the file now in mass memory with the one to be saved Answer either O K or Cancel Saving Data in Text Format Save The Save as ASCII item appears in the side menu when an equation file Be Asch EQU has been selected from the list of files in internal memory and Disk has been selected for Device Use this item to save the binary format data in the equation file in MS DOS text format Files saved in this manner are denoted by the extension EQA after the file name See page 4D 14 for further information on EQA files The following items are written to the data of files saved in text format File Data Description COMMENT lt comment gt The comment written to the selected equation file EQU if any Th
69. End procedure Disconnect the spectrum analyzer AUX Output Checks This procedure checks the level and waveform of the MARKER Out signal the delay time from trigger signal to SYNC output and the delay time from trigger signal to BUSY output RN Electrical Characteristic Checked Auxiliary Output Marker Level SYNC Delay BUSY Delay on page B 8 Equipment Required Three 50 Q coaxial cable BNC connector a 50 Q coaxial cable SMB BNC connector an adapter BNC female female an adapter BNC T male to 2 female an adapter BNC female to dual banana a 50 Q precision terminator an oscilloscope a digital multimeter DMM and a function generator Prerequisites The AWG2040 meets the prerequisites listed on page E 7 Procedure 1 Install test hookup and set test equipment controls a Hook up the DMM Connect the AWG2040 MARKER1 output through a 50 Q coaxial cable a 50 Q precision terminator and an adapter BNC to dual banana to the DMM input connector see Figure E 16 AWG2040 User Manual E 35 Performance Tests E 36 Dual Banana Adapter 50 2 ool aod b olga O a Figure E 16 Marker Level Initial Test Hookup Set DMM controls Mode VDC Range Auto Input Front Output Off 2 Set the AWG2040 controls and select the waveform file a Initialize AWG2040 controls Push UTILITYMisc gt Config gt Re set to
70. Exit write Write and Exit o 2 56 You will now set the file for Step 2 oO Step 5 Select More 1 of 2 from the side menu to display the second page of the side menu Ol Step 6 Select Append New Step from the side menu The Step 2 display will appear C Step 7 Using the procedure described in Steps 2 4 above set the files for Step 2 Step For Figure 2 47 Setting the Files for Step 2 C Step 8 Select Exit write from the bottom menu C Step 9 Select Write and Exit from the side menu C Step 10 Enter SAMPLE 6 as the name for the autostep file For details on how to input the file name see Step 24 in Example 3 in Creating a waveform file C Step 11 When the file name has been entered select O K from the sub menu The autostep file that you have created will be saved in the internal memory under the name SAMPLE 6 AST and the initial menu will reap pear Operating Examples Setting the Output Parameters SETUP C Step 1 Press the SETUP button in the MENU column Figure 2 48 shows the SETUP menu displayed Sia Waveform Sequence TORE Per iod Points i Max Mim grr Clock Filter Japa Offset Figure 2 48 SETUP Menu a CJ Step 2 Select Waveform Sequence from the bottom menu Sequence SAMPLE 1 WFM C Step 3 Tum the general purpose knob to select the SAMPLE 1 WFM file ENTER GS CJ Step 4 Press the ENTER button on the front panel
71. Figure 4A 146 Bottom Menu Side Menu r Waveform 1 Waveform L Waveform 2 Fue iype m Convolution m Fu wp i Correlation Convolution o fi Mah m None Waveform Editor perauon pate L Differential i Execute Exit Write Figure 44 146 Convolution Waveform Editor Menu Structure Menu Functions The following list shows the functions available for each menu item and the page on which you can find a description of that function Table 4A 10 Menu Functions Selecting a waveform file Executing convolution correlation Saving files and exiting the editor Waveform 4A 206 4A 21 44 203 Operation Exit Write AWG2046 User Manual 4A 203 EDIT Menu Convolution Waveform Editor Menu Display Figure 44 147 shows the general convolution waveform editor display ear Source Destination Operation Fune type VNVo ION Correlation Math type Differential ty So Points K C Clock 1 09 Hz Convelye j Waveform 2 Pon iul gt Ff CORDS War S12 Fonts ka Clock 1e 89 Hz RELL wavetorn Figure 4A 147 Convolution Waveform Editor CRT Display 1 Source Waveform1 Display Area When the waveform file for operation is selected from internal memory the waveform for that file will be displayed in this area along with the file name clock frequency and number of points making up the waveform 2
72. Figure C 11 Pulse Width Modulation Waveform Description The waveform editor is used to create a ramp wave of 1000 periods and a sine wave of 1 period and these two waveforms are compared to create the PWM WFM waveform Settings Waveform points 32000 Clock frequency 1 0 GHz Output time 32 us C 12 Appendix C Sample Waveform Library Pseudo Random Pulse PRBS_15 WFM Made with the waveform editor 1 8076 1 0000 MARKERT 1 MARKER 1 Figure C 12 Pseudo Random Pulse Waveform Description An M series pseudo random signal is created using the waveform editor s timing display shift register generator function Register length 15 Points step 2 The encoding is NRZ To output repeatedly specify 16 output repetitions in the sequence wave form editor Settings Waveform points 65534 215 141 x2 Clock frequency 1 0 GHz Output time 65 534 us AWG2040 User Manual C 1 Appendix C Sample Waveform Library Waveform for Magnetic Disk Writing Signal MDSK_WR WFM Made with the waveform editor 10079 7 1 0009 MARKERI 8 foment MARKER2 1 Figure C Description ee 13 Waveform for Magnetic Disk Writing Signal Creates a worst case pattern with NRZ I modulation using the bit set func tion of the timing editor Worst case pattern 401010101 10101010A Pattern length 32 Points step 8 The encoding is NRZ I A signal with
73. Fuse Principal Power Switch Figure 1 1 Rear Panel Controls Used In Start Up AWG2040 User Manual Start Up Standard Option A1 Option A2 Option A3 North American Universal Euro UK Australian 115V 230V 230V 230V 2 R Option A4 Option A5 Option 1A Option 1B North American Switzerland North American North American 230V 230V 115V High Power 3 Phase Canadian Standards Association certification includes these power plugs for use in the North American power network Figure 1 2 Optional Power Cords 1 6 Start Up AWG2040 User Manual C Step 7 Press the ON STBY switch shown in Figure 1 3 on the lower left side of the front panel to switch on the power for this instrument This instrument needs to be warmed up for at least 20 minutes in order to operate at its optimum precision Once this instrument is installed it is typical to leave the PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH on and use the ON STBY switch as the power switch SONY al Cinai AWG2005 __ARBITRARY_WAVEFORM_GENERATOR ONISTBY Switch Figure 1 3 ON STBY Switch Start Up Start up Diagnostics Calibrations Oo Step 8 Check the results of the start up diagnostics calibrations When the power is applied to this instrument the start up diagnostics and calibration are carried out It checks whether the instrument is performing within its defined operating characteristics If all the diagnostic calibration items are completed
74. Gate Signal and Waveform Output Signal 0 00 0e0ee E 1 Figure E 8 Burst Mode Initial Test Hookup 0 000 E 1 Figure E 9 Waveform Advance Mode Initial Test Hookup E 2 Figure E 10 Autostep Mode Initial Test Hookup 0 E 2 Figure E 11 Slave Mode Initial Test Hookup 00 000 E 2 Figure E 12 Clock Frequency Accuracy Initial Test Hookup E 2 List of Figures AWG2040 User Manual Figure E 13 Figure E 14 Figure E 15 Figure E 16 Figure E 17 Figure E 18 Figure E 19 Figure E 20 Figure E 21 Figure E 22 Amplitude Accuracy Initial Test Hookup Pulse Response Initial Test Hookup Sine Wave Initial Test Hookup Marker Level initial Test Hookup Marker Waveform Initial Test Hookup 05 SYNC Delay Initial Test Hookup Trigger Input Initial Test Hookup Trigger to Marker Delay Initial Test Hookup External CLOCK IN Initial Test Hookup 5 Digital Data Out Initial Test Hookup E 29 E 32 E 34 E 36 E 38 E 40 E 42 E 44 E 46 E 48 AWG2040 User Manual List of Tables Table 2 1 Numeric Value Input Example 1 2 0 cece renee Table 2 2 Numeric Value Input Example 2 1 60 e ee ee Table 4 1 Sample Sequence Files 620s eee eee Table 4A 1 Menu Functions 0 666 c eee eee eee eee eee Table 4A 2 Menu Functions 660 e cece cere ee teens Tab
75. Menu Hardcopy Format AWG2040 User Manual D Step 2 Select Config from the side menu C Step 3 Press the Remote Port key in the sub menu and select either GPIB or RS232C The remote interface port that you have selected will be displayed on the left side of the status line at the top of the screen Settings for Hard Copy Output When you output a hard copy you can choose to either save the data displayed on the screen on a floppy disk as a file or output the data through the IEEE STD 488 GPIB or RS 232 C interface When you select Hardcopy from the side menu you can select the format for the hard copy and the output port The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Hardcopy item r BMP Epson Format EPS Mono Thinkjet Misc Hardcopy TIFF Disk Port GPIB L L RS232C Selecting the Format Use this item to select the output format for the hard copy You may select any one of five formats BMP Epson EPS Mono Thinkjet or TIFF Tous mage Tle Torna SC P 9 amp 24 pin dot matrix printer neapsulatod Postscript mono image nk jet p Figure 4E 17 Format Selection Menu Table 4E 3 shows the extension for each format and gives a brief description of that format 4E 25 UTILITY Menu 4E 26 Port Table 4E 3 Format Extensions Format Explanation A format for a Windows black amp white image file
76. Menu Buttons and Beze Buttons When you select the desired menu item the numeric input columns and the selections controlled by that menu are displayed To change the selections and numeric values use the numeric keys or general purpose knob AWG2040 User Manual 2 1 Basic Menu Operation When you select a menu item one of the following occurs The lower level menu is presented The desired item can be selected and may have these characteristics Each time the bezel button is pressed the selection changes A list is presented from which you can select a Numeric values can be input m The moment the menu item is selected the function is executed Menu Names The on screen menus are hierarchical This section will give the names of the menus in order from top first level to bottom Main Menus There are several different main menus Pressing one of the MENU buttons causes the corresponding main menu to appear Bottom Menu This menu is shown at the bottom of the screen These items can be se lected by pressing the corresponding bottom button Side Menu This menu is shown in the right hand side of the screen These items can be selected by pressing the corresponding side button Sub Menus These menus are shown below the side menu When an item in the side menu is followed by an ellipsis it indicates that that item has a sub menu listing additional choices Numeric I nput Generally numbers are entered usi
77. Number is selected for Divide by in the side menu under Split AWG2040 User Manual 4A 193 EDIT Menu Menu Functions The following list shows the functions available for each menu item and the Page on which you can find a description of that function Table 44 9 Menu Functions Split Join Waveform 4A 192 anne acememmeememeereennemenrnerneee a 44 194 EDIT Menu Split Join Waveform Editor Display Figure 44 141 shows the general split join waveform editor display GPIB rriggered mode Stopped Source Destination Split TEND i Sequence aveto SPLIT OO MEM JI SAMPLE 1 WFM P gplil_ LWEM SPLIT_O2 WEM Source SPLITLORWEB EES l E Delete Divide by j Size Source Destination insert Jayvefor Javefo Wavef M coms waveform eA SAMPLE S RFA insertion yaad Poms insertion 2048 Points Execute me Figure 4A 141 Split Join Waveform Editor CRT Display AWG2040 User Manual 4A 195 EDIT Menu 4A 196 1 Source Waveform Display Area When a waveform file is selected from the internal memory the waveform the file name and the point count are shown here 2 Destination File Name Area When a Split operation is executed and a file name is entered the se quence and waveform file names are shown here 3 Button Operations This area shows how the front panel buttons operate in this menu CURSOR s r CD Move destination When the CU
78. Press Divide by in the side menu and select either Size or Number When Size is selected Size will appear in a sub menu under Divide by This allows you to divide the file by waveform point count When Number is selected Number will appear in a sub menu under Divide by This allows you to divide the file in equal portions by the value designated with Number oO Step 6 Select either Size or Number from the side menu 4A 197 EDIT Menu 4A 198 oO Step 7 Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob enter a m m value for either Size waveform point count or Number enter divisor as the unit for splitting file Effective Range of Size and Number IN 100 N N waveform point count integer formed by rounding up values past the decimal point Step 8 Select Execute from the side menu You will be asked to enter a file name for the sequence file that will be created Step 9 Enter the file name To confirm the file name select O K To cancel the operation select Cancel When O K is selected a sequence file and the split waveform files will be created and listed in the Destination file name area Waveform file names will be the first five characters of the sequence file name fol lowed by a number and the waveform extention WFM for exam ple _00 WFM _01 WEM 02 WEM 99 WEM and so on When the waveform point count cannot be divided evenly a fraction will be creat
79. Step 6 Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob designate the first point for the range of data to be copied or cut C Step 7 Select To from the side menu oO Step 8 Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob designate the end point for the range of data to be copied or cut C Step 9 Select Execute from the side menu You will be asked to enter a file name for the waveform file that will be created C Step 10 Enter the file name To confirm the file name select O K To cancel the operation select Cancel If O K is selected a new waveform file will be created with the data copied or cut from the Source waveform This waveform will be dis played in the Destination waveform area If Cancel is selected the file will not be created and the previous Copy Cut menu will reappear 4A 199 EDIT Menu Source Waveform Destination Waveform CopyiCut N ims te fa en 0 512 1535 2047 0 1023 Source Waveform After Cut Cut rR g 1023 Figure 4A 144 Waveform File Data Before and After Copy Cut O Step 11 Select Exit from the bottom menu The Copy Cut menu will disappear and the initial EDIT menu will reappear The newly created waveform file will be added to the file list in the initial EDIT menu Goce inserting Waveform File insert Use Insert to insert the data for a file into another file to create a new file Procedure C Step 1 Select insert fro
80. Through 1V OV Characteris tic MARKER L WFM Markert 2 AUX Output T 1024 1GHz Through 1V ov Low level MARKER H WFM Markert 2 AUX Output in 1024 1GHz Through 1V ov High level MARKER WFM Marker1 2 AUX Output ae 1024 1 GHz Through 1V OV Pulse 1 Period Low 512 points ov High 512 points 2V TRIGGER WFM Marker1 2 Trigger Input 1024 1 GHz Through 1V ov Pulse 1 Period Low 1 point 0 V High 1023 points 2 V 10 DOUT WFM mm Digital Data OTU 1024 100 mHz Ouiput E 12 Performance Tests Operating Mode These procedures check operation of the Cont Triggered Gated Burst Waveform Advance Autostep and Slave modes Slave mode are optional Checks fast Check Cont Mode Electrical Characteristic Checked Operating mode Continuous on page B 3 Equipment Required A 50 Q coaxial cable and an oscilloscope Prerequisites The AWG2040 must meet the prerequisites listed on page E 7 Procedure 1 Install the test hookup and set test equipment controls a Hook up the oscilloscope Connect the AWG2040 CH1 output connector through the coaxial cable to the CH1 vertical input con nector on the oscilloscope see Figure E 4 AWG2040 Oscilloscope opecae S Bess o o B 2 Eaa do olga sO O a eS Figure E 4 Cont Mode Initial Test Hookup b Set the oscilloscope controls Vertical CH1 CH1 coupling DC CH1 scal
81. Trademarks Getting Started Overview ouesse Product Description Initial Inspection Power On Contents Start up Diagnostics Calibrations 0 sese re eee Power Off Operating Basics AWG2040 User Manual Introduction 5 Overview vo cece eens Front Panel Side Panel Rear Panel CRT Display Basic Menu Operation Menu Operations Menu Names Numeric Input Using the Front Panel Numeric Keys 60 0 cere eee tenes Using the General Purpose Knob 20s ee eee eee e eee Operating Examples Necessary Equipment 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 5 1 8 1 8 2 1 2 3 2 3 2 9 2 10 2 14 2 17 2 17 2 16 2 1 2 16 2 24 2 2 2 2 O OO UH GO ww nw OOO MD WU GE Uw Table of Contents Example 1 Setting the Date amp Time and Adjusting the Brightness 2 0 5 c ce cceeecenseacccucwsceuecees Setting the Date and Time Setting the Display Brightness Example 2 Output of a Waveform Using the Sample Waveform Library Disk cccceeseesevencuee Loading Sample Waveforms 00 0ccccecesaeees Example 3 Creating Files and Arbitrary Waveform Outputs 0 cece cece eee eueeeeeeees Creating a Waveform File 0 0 cece cece eee eee ees Creating Arbitrary Waveforms Using the Point Draw Function Creating Wavefor
82. Waveform Display With Show Overview Selected l ccc cece ees eeecceees Figure 2 44 Autostep Editor Menu Display Figure 2 45 File List 00 0 cc cece eee eee Figure 2 46 Setting Files 000 0000 00 Figure 2 47 Setting the Files for Step 2 o an eee ec ccc ee cee Figure 2 48 SETUP Menu 0 0 0 cece eee cee cecececeees Figure 2 49 Setting Output Parameters Figure 2 50 Connections for Example 3 n aaaea Figure 2 51 MODE Menu 00 00 ees eeeee Figure 2 52 Setting the Marker Default Figure 2 53 Menu Display When Triggered is Selected Figure 2 54 MANUAL Button and TRIGGER INPUT Connector Figure 2 55 Menu Display When Autostep is Selected Figure 2 56 Autostep File List Figure 2 57 SAVE Menu 0 00 nouanoua aaco enaa oua Figure 2 58 Files Saved in NVRam 0000000 cece eee ee Figure 2 59 Internal Memory File List Figure 2 60 Files Loaded into Internal Memory Figure 2 61 Connections for Example 5 Figure 2 62 DSO Screen 1 0 00 0 eco eee ce eee eee eeeeees Figure 2 63 Confirmation Message asking if it is O K to change the remote port and GPIB configuration settings Figure 2 64 GPIB Source List 2 0 0 0 00 ooo cece ceccee cece Figure 2 65 Screen When Pulse Set l l n oaaao Figure 2 66 Output Parameter Setting Display Figure 2 67 Connections for Example 6 Figure 3 1 Block Diagram 1 Figure 3 2 Block Diagram 2 Figure 3 3 Clock G
83. allows the user to create a custom conversion table See User defined Code Conversion later in this section For a description of the other codes see Pattern Codes in Appendix D Clearing Pattern Data Clear Use Clear Pattern from the sub menu to delete all of the pattern data that Pattern you have created AWG2040 User Manual 4A 111 EDIT Menu 4A 112 Sample Pattern Data Setting In the following example pattern data at DATA 3 Point Step 2 Code NRZI will be created in the area between the vertical bar cursors Procedure C Step 1 Select Set from the side menu C Step 2 Press the CURSOR bution on the front panel Oo Step 3 Using the general purpose knob move the vertical bar cursors to define the area in which the pattern will be set In this example we will set the left vertical bar cursor to 256 and the right vertical bar cursor to 767 C Step 4 Select Line from the sub menu Turning the general purpose knob select DATAS for which you want to set the pattern C Step 5 Select Set Pattern from the sub menu C Step 6 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to select Cursor Position C Step 7 Press the Key Data button in the sub menu to select 4 Bits E Step 8 Press 1 2 in that order Cursor Position i 39 C Step 9 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to select Point Step im Step 10 Using the general purpose knob set Point Step to 2 Qo Point Step EE
84. and C in the above formula are derived using the three points including those directly preceding and following the position to be derived 2 y Ax Bx C yo Ax Bx C y Ax Bx C Simplifying by letting x 1 X2 0 X3 1 gives y An B te we C y A B C This allows the coefficients A B and C to be derived as follows y A 25y 2 EE ar C yy Using these values the value y at position xp can be derived as follows yy yy x 0 2 BZ x 0 2 2 AWG2040 User Manual 4A 77 EDIT Menu Data value Add Replace Cursor Point Exclude Include Data Value This item selects how overlapping regions in the shift result are handled Add Adds the shifted data and the overlapping data x Replace Replaces the region with the shifted data When Type is Compress the data for points shifted beyond the center are lost Cursor Point This item selects whether the data boundary points are interpolated The selections are Exclude and include When the Cursor Point is Exclude the points on the left and right vertical bar cursors are not interpolated Figure 44 60 shows how the original data will appear when Exclude is selected following a shift to the right In this example the first and last data points remain at their original values You can minimize this error by inserting an appropriate anti aliasing filter Original Data Data Shifted to Righ
85. and selecting editing areas Editing waveforms in graphic display Cutting waveforms Copying waveforms Pasting waveforms Draw function Shift function Scaling function Invert function Clip function Setting a marker inserting other waveforms Single waveform caiculations Calculations with other waveform data Specified region shift function Multiple copy Convolution calculations Comparing waveforms Zooming waveforms Settings for the waveform to be edited Selecting the waveform data display format Setting waveform point count Setting horizontal axis units Setting clock frequency Linking the vertical bar cursors Displaying a grid in the editing area Undoing the previous operation Creating a standard function waveform Saving files and exiting the editor 4A 16 4A 44 4A 45 4A 46 4A 46 4A 48 4A 51 4A 53 4A 56 4A 58 4A 59 4A 62 4A 65 4A 70 AA 73 4A 81 4A 88 4A 91 4A 96 4A 32 4A 32 4A 33 4A 34 4A 35 4A 36 4A 38 4 2 4A 39 4A 21 Page 4A 29 EDIT Menu 44 30 Graphic Display Screen The general graphic display is shown in Figure 4A 18 A description for each callout follows a Gor aao sa aE See i ae er allan megap Operatic Copy to Buffer 1 from Buffer i roo d fo Paste i Setect 3 anaa i standard ting ra ji Zoom Setting Unda iwaveform write F i i Open Figure 4A 18 Gr
86. are of practical value in under standing the fundamental operating concepts of the AWG2040 Block Diagram Figure 3 1 shows a block diagram from the clock oscillator to the DAC Figure 3 2 shows a block diagram continuing on from Figure 3 1 to output In subsequent sections we will discuss each block in detail Marker 1 Marker 2 External Trigger Input Waveform Memory Memory Address Control Stop Trigger Input Slave Clock Digital Data Autostep Trigger Input Output External Input Option Clock Master Clock Output Clock Trigger Oscillator Control 1 024 GHz 1 kH CHE Le BUSY Output SYNC Output Figure 3 1 Block Diagram 1 AWG2040 User Manual 3x Block Diagram Filter Altenuator i CH1 Clock z Data g OUT Filter Attenuatoi Figure 3 2 Block Diagram 2 Block Diagram Clock Generator The SETUP menu allows you to choose whether the clock source is internal or external When internal is selected it is possible to set the frequency When external has been selected the signal connected to the CLOCK IN connector on the rear panel will be used as the clock The internal clock uses a DDS Direct Digital Synthesis clock generator It uses a divider to create a high quality clock signal with low jitter and 7 digit resolution between 1 024GHz and 1kHz Figure 3 3 shows the configura
87. bottom menu gt Config side menu gt Remote Port GPIB These are simple descriptions of the GPIB connection and GPIB configura GPIB tion setting For further details see the Programmer Manual GPIB Connection The cable from the GPIB controller computer is connected to the IEEE STD 488 connector on this instrument s rear panel Setting GPIB Configuration Devices on the GPIB bus must be configured compatibly in order to commu nicate Select GPIB from the bottom menu to set the GPIB configuration See Figure 4E 9 GPIB onager gered mode RODD T poi a IEEE Std 48S 2 1987 CEOL ICT The Function Subsets SH1 AHI TS L4 SR1 RL1 PPO DC1 BTI CO E2 Waveform Transfer s OM A RS2320 j Figure 4E 9 Menu Displayed When GPIB is Selected AWG2040 User Manual 4E 13 UTILITY Menu 4E 14 Tatk Listen Address Waveform Transfer n Talk Only Off Bus Use the side menu items to set the GPIB configuration and the address of this instrument This instrument can be set to one of four operating modes talk listen wave form transfer talk only or off bus However you should be aware that talk only and waveform transfer modes are not compliant with IEEE 488 2 1987 Talk Listen Select talk listen mode to communicate with the controller via the GPIB When the Talk Listen Address item is selected the operating mode for this instrument and other devices is set
88. by a number sign When a number sign is entered all characters after that until the end of the line are treated as a comment All of the items in the component menu can be used in a comment Characters The characters available in the component menu are the letters of the alphabet a z and several symbols amp A and _ These are used in comments Other items pi k J pi The circumferential ratio e Exponent for an implied 10 The range for numbers expressed in this scientific notation is from 5 9e 39 to 3 4e38 Examples 1e6 1 000 000 1e 3 0 001 EDIT Menu k The k0 k9 can be specified these are constants that may be used in equations Specifying a new value for the same k replaces the old value with the new one If no constant is defined for k this vaiue will be automatically set to 0 Equals sign is used with k constants Example kO 2 pi a Ends the line for the range or equation inserting a return in the middie of the line partitions it Functions Here are the functions that make up the equation sin cos The arguments for these trigonometric functions are in radians Example range 0 100 us cos 2 pi x overview Zi 1626 Points Clock 16240000 Hz 1 8 Figure 44 104 Trigonometric Function Waveform Expressed With Variable x AWG2040 User Manual 4A 151 EDIT Menu Example range 0 100 us
89. calculated clock frequency is less than 1 kHz it will be held to the minimum frequency of 1 kHz The following message will appear asking you to confirm that this is all right If it is select O K from the side menu In such cases the waveform period is different from the value designated with range it is equivalent to the clock period multiplied by the waveform point count The clock calculated xxxxx Hz The clock calculated xxxxx Hz is not supported by this instrument is not supported by this instrument The waveform will be output The waveform will be output with the maximum clock of 1 024e 09Hz with the minimum clock of 1000Hz t a Clock frequency more than 1 024 GHz Clock frequency less than 1 kHz 4A 162 EDIT Menu compile Compiling Equations into Waveform Data Use the Compile item to convert the assembied equation into waveform data and to create a waveform file This waveform file is given the same name as the equation file it was compiled from Procedure Here is the procedure for compiling the equation to make a waveform file oO Step 1 Select Compile from the bottom menu The equation is compiled The Busy icon is displayed on the status line of the CRT display to show that the compilation is being processed Cancel is displayed in the count menu Selecting this item cancels the compilation C Step 2 The equation is converted into waveform data and the wave form is display
90. connector is on Enable the function generator output Turn on the function generator output Check that the oscilloscope CH1 and CH2 displays same sine wave Disable the function generator output Turn off the function generator output Turn off the AWG2040 X and AWG2040 CH1 output Push the CH1 button so that the LED above the CH1 output connector is off Change the test hookup of the function generator Disconnect the BNC coaxial cable from the AWG2040 x TRIGGER INPUT connector And connect it to the AWG2040 TRIGGER INPUT connector Check master clock output Modify the AWG2040 X current setting Push MODE gt Slave Modify the AWG2040 current setting Push MODE gt TRIGGERED Turn on the ANG2040 X and AWG2040 CH1 output Push the CH1 button so that the LED above the CH1 output connector is on Performance Tests Enable the function generator output Turn on the function generator output m Check that the oscilloscope CH1 and CH2 displays same sine wave 7 End procedure Turn off the function generator output and disconnect the function generator oscilloscope and AWG2040 X Clock Frequency These procedures check the accuracy of the AWG2040 clock frequency Check Check Clock Frequency Accuracy Electrical Characteristic Checked Clock Generator Accuracy on page B 7 Equipment Required A 50 coaxial cable and a frequency counter Prerequisites The AWG2040 meets the prerequisites listed on p
91. connector through the coaxial cable io the CH1 vertical input con necior on the oscilloscope b Hook up the function generator a Connect the AWG2040 TRIGGER INPUT connector though a coaxial cable to the function generator output connector see Figure E 5 Performance Tests Function Generator AWG2040 Figure E 5 Triggered Mode Initial Test Hookup c Set the oscilloscope controls Vertical CH1 coupling CH1 scale CH1 input impedance Horizontal Sweep Trigger Source Coupling Slope Level Mode CH1 DC 0 2 V div 50 Q 500 ns div CH1 DC Positive 100 mV Auto d Set the function generator controls Function Mode Parameter Frequency Amplitude Offset Output Square Continuous 100 kHz 4V 2V Off 2 Set AWG2040 controls and select the waveform file a Initialize ANG2040 controls Push UTILITY Misc Config gt Re set to Factory gt 0 K b Modify the AWG2040 default settings a Push MODE Triggered Slope to select Positive slope AWG2040 User Manual E 15 Performance Tests E 16 c Select the file m Push SETUP Waveform Sequence Highlight the MODE WEM file using the general purpose knob Push ENTER to select the file 3 Turn on the AWG2040 CH1 output Push the CH1 button so that the LED above the CH1 output connector is on 4 Check triggered mode with manual triggering Push the AWG2040 MANUA
92. editor to edit an existing waveform file and create a new file Use the following procedure to open the editor Procedure C Step 1 Press the EDIT button in the MENU column The initial EDIT menu will appear g Step 2 Select More in the side menu to dispiay the third page of the side menu C Step 3 Select Split Join Waveform from the side menu The split join waveform editor screen will appear Exiting the Editor Use Exit in the bottom menu of the split join waveform editor to quit the editor and go back to the initial EDIT menu Saving files when you select Execute in the split join waveform editor you will be asked to enter a name for the file Enter the name and select O K to save the file 4A 192 EDIT Menu Split Join Waveform Editor Menu Structure The Split Join Waveform Editor menu has the structure shown in Figure 4A 140 Bottom Menu Side Menu Waveform r Leave Delete r Size L Number Source m Split Divide by Size Number t Execute m Waveform Operation eee i Copy Split Join l lL Cut Waveform a Copy Cut Editor nt From r To Execute Waveform Insertion insert l Insert to rT Execute Undo Exit Figure 4A 140 Split Join Waveform Editor Menu Structure 1 This item appears when Size is selected for Divide by in the side menu under Split 2 This item appears when
93. file a Push SETUP Waveform Sequence Turn the general purpose knob to highlight the TRGGER WFM file Push ENTER 3 Turn on the AWG2040 CH1 output Push the CH1 button so that the LED above the CH1 output connector is on a Check external trigger level accuracy Adjust oscilloscope controls Press and hold the AWG2040 MANU AL TRIGGER button and adjust the oscilloscope vertical and hori zontal position to display the waveform from the AWG2040 Release the MANUAL TRIGGER button Check external trigger level accuracy m Gradually increment the function generator offset level until a waveform is displayed on the oscilloscope a Check that the value displayed on the DMM is within 0 V 0 1V when the waveform is first displayed Modify AWG2040 settings Select Level from the side menu and turn the general purpose knob to select 5 V You can also use the numeric and units keys to select 5 V then push ENTER Check external trigger level accuracy Gradually increment the function generator offset level until a waveform is displayed on the oscilloscope m Check that the value displayed on the DMM is within 5 V 0 1 V when the waveform is first displayed Modify AWG2040 settings Select Level from the side menu and turn the general purpose knob to select 5 V You can also use the numeric and units keys to select 5 V then push ENTER AWG2040 User Manual E 43 Performance Tests f
94. following items will be displayed in the side menu u Slope w Level impedance STOP The Slope Level and Impedance items are used to set the trigger condi tions for the external trigger signal Figure 4C 3 shows the output for an external trigger signal External Trigger Signal Output Signal Figure 4C 3 Output for External Trigger Signal in Triggered Mode MODE Menu Gated Mode Gated Use Gated mode to control waveform or sequence output with a gate signal When this instrument goes into Gated mode it waits for a gate to be gener ated The gate signal is generated while the external gate signal applied through the TRIGGER INPUT connector is valid or while the MANUAL button on the front panel is held down In the case of the waveform output using the MANUAL button while the MANUAL button on the front panel is pressed the specified waveform or sequence is output When you let the MANUAL button go the waveform output stops When you press the MANUAL button again the waveform or sequence output resumes from the level where it left off While you are pressing the MANUAL button if you press any other button the instrument goes into the mode for the MANUAL button not being pressed In the case of waveform output using an external gate signal the designated waveform or sequence waveform is output while the external gate signal being applied through the TRIGGER INPUT connector is valid Wavef
95. for the pulse is 10 AC Power Source AC Line Power Fuse Rating 6 A first blow 250 V UL198G BAG or 5 A 1 250 V IEC127 Battery Type wy Li3 V 650 mAH Mechanical Characteristics Net Weight Standard Size Height 10 5 kg 164 mm 6 4 inches with feet 362 mm 14 3 inches with handle 491 mm 19 25 inches with front cover 576 mm 22 2 inches with handle extended Length B 6 Appendix B Performance Characteristics Warranted Characteristics Characteristics This section will describe the warranted characteristics of the AWG2040 These can be divided into two main categories electrical characteristics and environmental characteristics Performance Conditions The electrical characteristics are valid under the following conditions 1 The instrument must have been calibrated at an ambient temperature between 15 C to 25 C 2 The instrument must be in an environment whose limits are described in Environmental Characteristics 3 All tolerance limits apply after a 20 minute warm up and an execution of the self calibration 4 The instrument is operating at an ambient temperature between 10 C to 40 C unless otherwise noted Electrical Characteristics Description Clock Generator Stability 1 ppm year 15 C to 25 C Accuracy 1 ppm lt Phase noise 75 dBc Hzat 1 GHz 10 kHz offset Jitter 20 psrms at 1 G
96. from the side menu The degree of enlargement will increase each time the button is pressed When the maximum enlargement is reached the Horizontal Zoom in item will be disappeared The displayed inverted portion of the horizontal scroll indicator above the waveform editing area indicates which section of the waveform is currently being displayed on the screen Step 6 Select Horizontal Zoom out from the side menu The degree of enlargement will decrease each time the button is pressed When normal size x1 is reached the Horizontal Zoom out item will be disappeared C Step 7 Select the Horizontal Zoom in item once again to enlarge the waveform C Step 8 Select Horizontal Pan from the side menu This item enables you to scroll through the entire waveform by turning the general purpose knob The displayed inverted portion of the horizon tal scroll indicator above the waveform editing area indicates which section of the waveform is currently being displayed on the screen AWG2040 User Manual 4A 97 EDIT Menu Vertical Zoom in g Step 9 Turn the general purpose knob and check to make sure the waveform moves horizontally C Step 10 Select Horizontal Zoom fit from the side menu The waveform will revert to normal size x1 Vertical zooming When the waveform is enlarged vertically with the Vertical Zoom in item three new items will be added to the side menu Vertical Zoom out Used to reduce the waveform
97. g Step 7 Select Waveform2 from the side menu to designate this area as the destination for copying the area to which the waveform will be copied C Step 8 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel oO Step 9 Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob move the vertical bar cursors to set the area within which the waveform will be copied In this example we will set the left cursor to point 0 and the right cursor to point 1023 AWG2040 User Manual 4A 83 EDIT Menu 4A 84 GPIB Cantinuous mode f Selert Open favefornt sareaz BEM FEEIITTET Ti 1924 pts Another waveform Switch Cursor Operation Zoom Setting Figure 4A 66 Setting the Copy Destination To copy the waveform 2 Step 10 Select Operation from the bottom menu CJ Step 11 Select Multiple Copy from the fourth page of the side menu More 4 of 4 When three waveform areas have been designated in the waveform editor select one of the remaining two editing areas as the source for waveform copying with Source item in the sub menu Step 12 Select Interval from the sub menu Gh Step 13 Using the numeric keys set the interval value to 512 points When copying the section of a waveform between the vertical bar cur sors in one editing area to the area between the vertical bar cursors in another editing area the Interval value determines the interval at which the waveform will b
98. gt BT ont a A Figure 4A 160 Band Cut Filter The procedure below applies the filters to the signal Procedure C Step 1 Select Filter from the bottom menu g Step 2 Select Low Pass High Pass Band Pass or Band Elim from the side menu o Step 3 Press the VALUE button on the front panel and select the filter frequency field C Step 4 Using the general purpose knob or the numeric keys set the filter frequency C Step 5 Press the VALUE button on the front panel to select the filter slope field oO Step 6 Using the general purpose knob or the numeric keys set the filter slope Here octave oct indicates double the frequency For a band filter set the frequency and slope for both ends of the band o Step 7 After setting the filter frequency and slope select Apply filter from the side menu The specified filter is applied to the signal 4A 221 EDIT Menu Limiter 4A 222 xf Cut under Delete Even rm Delete Odd Selecting a Limiter Use Limiter to cut the frequency component below the limit level to cut the even or odd components on the discrete frequency axis or to shift the magnitude to the limit level When Limiter is selected from the bottom ment the following items will appear in the side menu a Cut under Delete Even a Delete Odd Shift Mag Cutting Extraneous Frequency Components Here is the procedure for using the Cut under item to remove
99. has been selected pressing the CURSOR button allows you to move the active vertical bar cursor a5 eS Move poiat cursor When Draw has been selected pressing the VALUE or ENTER button allows you to move the point cursor as 25 Switch point cursor dir When Draw has been selected pressing VALUE or ENTER button toggles the direction in which the point cursor moves from vertical to horizontal or vice versa Editing in the Frequency Domain Select Operation from the bottom menu to change the signal magnitude and phase in the frequency domain The following items will appear in the side menu Right peak Left peak Draw Editing Magnitude Here is the procedure for editing the magnitudes Procedure C Step 1 Select Operation from the bottom menu C Step 2 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to select the left right vertical bar cursor Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob move the active vertical bar cursor to the frequency to be edited g Step 3 Press the VALUE button on the front panel and select Magni tude The knob icon is displayed on the Magnitude side a Step 4 Using the general purpose knob or the numeric keys change the magnitude C Step 5 To change the magnitude for another frequency press the CURSOR button on the front panel and use the general purpose knob to move the active vertical bar cursor to the frequency to be edited Next repeat Steps 3 and 4 EDIT Me
100. it to another step Procedure O Step 1 Move to the step to be copied using the same procedure as in Cutting a Step above a Step 2 Select Copy Step from the side menu When Copy Step is selected the current step is placed in the paste buffer This item has no effect on the CRT display Step 3 Use the and buttons on the front panel or the Jump item in the bottom menu to move to the step to which the step in the paste buffer is to be pasted oO Step 4 Select Paste Step from the side menu EDIT Menu Insert New Step Append New Step i Insert Current SETUP Jump Step No m To First Step Te Last Step All of the steps after the one that has been pasted will move down one step Adding a Step Use Insert New Step and Append New Step when you wish to add a step to an autostep file being created Insert New Step Used to insert a step at the current step number For example suppose the current step number is Step 2 of 3 Selecting Insert New Step at this point will add a blank step at step 2 and the step display will read Step 2 of 4 Append New Step Used to add a step after the current step number For example suppose the current step number is Step 2 of 3 Selecting Append New Step at this point will add a blank step at Step 3 and the step display will read Step 3 of 4 inserting the SETUP Menu Waveforms and Output Parameters Use Insert Current SETUP to insert the
101. length may be set to any value between 2 and 32 The register length is displayed at the top of the shift register configuration menu as shown below In this example the shift register is made up of 32 items Register Length 28 Entering the Register Value and Setting Taps To enter the register value and set taps press the CURSOR button on the front panel and select Register Position A knob icon will be displayed to the left of the Register Position area Turn the general purpose knob to move the cursor The current location of the cursor is shown beside the Register Position item Register Position OE Taps Figure 4A 93 Register Values and Taps The numeric keys can now be used to enter the register value at the position of the cursor Press 0 to set the register value to 0 Press 1 to set the register value to 1 Pressing the VALUE button on the front panel toggles the tap between on and off Clearing All Taps Clear Use Clear All Taps in the sub menu to delete all taps that have been set All Taps AWG2040 User Manual 4A 127 EDIT Menu 4A 128 Set Maximal Linear Taps set AN Regs Setting the Maximum Length Code Series for Taps Set Maximal Linear Taps in the sub menu allows you to create M series maximum length code series bit strings M series bit strings are combined with several different kinds of tap arrangements The tap arrangement will change each time the Set Maximal Linear T
102. means that the hard copy has been saved to the floppy disk in TIFF format under the file name SETUPOOO File names and extensions will be assigned automatically based on the menu and the format of the hard copy File Name Extention I H l SETUP 000 TIF l a eae Name of screen menu Numbering being printed The file name is given the name of the screen menu being printed as shown below File Name SETUP Menu SEUP MODE EDIT LOAD SAVE UTILITY Numbers will range from 0 to 999 for each menu AWG2040 User Manual 4E 2 UTILITY Menu Status 4E 28 System Status Display The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Status item Misc Status System and GPIB RS 232 C Status Select System to display system and GPIB RS 232 C status window The system status comprises the instrument name firmware version number and installation data for each board The GPIB status is the address and configuration Status items other than the address and configuration are set by the remote controller The GPIB RS 232 C status display consists of the following items PSC Header Verbose Data and Debug In addition the cumulative power on time Up Time is displayed Procedure C Step 1 Select Mise from the bottom menu C Step 2 Select Status from the side menu C Step 3 Select System from the sub menu System and GPIB RS 232 C status data wil
103. menu and set the marker level Marker Use the numeric keys or the general purpose knob to set the desired marker level The High gt Low relationship is preserved during level setting Default Value Use this item to set the marker to the default level The default high level is 2 0V the default low level is 0 0V After setting the marker level select O K from the side menu The value for marker level will be updated to the value you have set AWG2040 User Manual 4A 189 EDIT Menu Operation 4A 190 cut Step Copy Step Paste Stap Editing Functions When you select Operation in the bottom menu the following items appear in the side menu a Cut Step a Copy Step m Paste Step a insert New Step n Append New Step insert Current Setup Cutting a Step Use Cut Step if you wish to delete a step in the autostep file that you have programmed Procedure O Step 1 Select Operation from the bottom menu oO Step 2 Using the and buttons on the front panel move to the step to be deleted C Step 3 Select Cut Step from the side menu When Cut Step is selected the current step is deleted All of the steps after the one that you have deleted will move up one step To restore this step to its original state select Undo from the bottom menu or Paste from Buffer from the side menu Copying and Pasting a Step Use the Copy Step and Paste Step items to copy a step in the program and paste
104. must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the respective warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service Tektronix will provide such service at Customer s site without charge during the warranty period if the service is performed within the normal on site service area Tektronix will provide on site service outside the normal on site service area only upon prior agreement and subject to payment of all travel expenses by Customer When or where on site service is not available Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix with shipping charges prepaid Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which the Tektronix service center is located Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges duties taxes and any other charges for products returned to any other locations This warranty shall not apply to any defect failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate maintenance and care Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a to repair damage resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install repair or service the product b to repair damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment or c to service a product that has been modified
105. ns or less to the trigger rising edge Channel 1 19 Change hookup Disconnect the coaxial cable to the SYNC OUT connec tor and connect the cable to the BUSY OUT connector on the rear panel of AWG2040 20 Check BUSY delay Check that the BUSY rising edge Channel 2 is delayed by 60 ns or less to the trigger rising edge Channel 1 21 End procedure Turn the function generator output off and disconnect the function generator and oscilloscope External Trigger Input This procedure checks the external trigger level accuracy delay time trigger Checks to marker and trigger holdoff of the AWG2040 Electrical Characteristic Checked Auxiliary Input TRIGGER Accuracy Delay Trigger Hold Off on page B 9 Equipment Required Three 50 coaxial cable BNC connector an adapter BNC T male to 2 female an adapter BNC female to dual banana an oscilloscope a digital multimeter DMM and a function generator Prerequisites The AWG2040 meets the prerequisites listed on page E 7 Procedure 1 Install test hookup and set test equipment controls a Hook up oscilloscope Connect the AWG2040 CH1 output connec tor through a BNC coaxial cable to the CH1 vertical input connector on the oscilloscope b Hook up DMM m Attach the adapter BNC T male to 2 female to AWG2040 TRIGGER INPUT m Connect the adapter BNC T male to 2 female through a coaxial cable and adapter BNC to dual banana to the DMM input connector c
106. number for the file currently being output 2 Channel Display Shows the channel for which the operating mode is to be set On the AWG2040 only CH1 is displayed 3 Waveform Sequence The name of the waveform or sequence file currently being output is shown This waveform or sequence file is selected with the SETUP menu Waveform Sequence item For Autostep mode the name of the waveform or sequence file for the Current output step in the selected autostep file is shown 4C 4 MODE Menu 4 List The contents of the waveform or sequence files specified in 3 above are displayed In Waveform Advance mode the name of the file being output is displayed in the list inverted 5 Operating Mode Status The operating mode set with the MODE menu is displayed There are seven operating modes Cont Triggered Gated Burst Waveform Advance Autostep and Slave 6 Trigger Status One of the following three trigger statuses is displayed in this column Stopped Displayed when no waveform or sequence file has been selected with the SETUP menu Waiting for Trigger Displayed when the waveform or sequence file has been selected with the SETUP menu and the system is waiting for the trigger or gate signal Running Displayed when the trigger or gate signal is generated and the waveform is output Setting the Operating Mode AWG2040 User Manual Select the operating output mode either Cont Triggered
107. or integrated with other products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TEKTRONIX RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Tektronix EC Declaration of Conformity Tektronix Holland N V Marktweg 73A 8444 AB Heerenveen The Netherlands declare under sole responsibility that the AWG2040 Arbitrary Waveform Generator meets the intent of Directive 89 336 EEC for Electromagnetic Compatibility Compliance was demonstrated to the following specifications as listed in the Official Journal of the European Communities EN 50081 1 Emissions EN 55022 Radiated Class B EN 55022 Conducted Class B EN 60555 2 Power Harmonics EN 50082 1 Immunity IEC 801 2 Electrostatic Discharge TEC 801 3 RF Radiated TEC 801 4 Fast Transients General Safety Summary Review the following safety precautions to avo
108. oscilloscope AWG2040 User Manual E 21 Performance Tests Check Autostep Mode Electrical Characteristic Checked Operating mode Autostep on page B 3 Equipment Required Two 50 Q coaxial cables BNC connector a 50 Q coaxial cable SMB BNC connector an adapter BNC T male to 2 female a function generator and an oscilloscope Prerequisites The AWG2040 meets the prerequisites listed on page E 7 Procedure 1 Install test hookup and set test equipment controls a Hook up the oscilloscope m Connect the AWG2040 CH1 output through a BNC coaxial cable to the oscilloscope CH1 vertical input connector b Hook up the function generator Attach the adapter BNC T male to 2 female to the AWG2040 TRIGGER INPUT connector Connect the function generator output through a BNC coaxial cable to the adapter on the AWG2040 TRIGGER INPUT connec tor a m Connect the AWG2040 rear panel AUTO STEP IN connector through a coaxial cable SMB BNC connector to the adapter on the AWG2040 TRIGGER INPUT connector see Figure E 10 to AUTO STEP IN SMB BNC Cable AWG2040 Oscilloscope Figure E 10 Autostep Mode Initial Test Hookup E 22 Qo Performance Tests AWG2040 User Manual c Set the oscilloscope controls Vertical CH1 coupling CH1 scale CH1 input impedance Horizontal Sweep Trigger Source Coupling Slope Level Mode d Set func
109. other change O Step 8 Using the general purpose knob select the instrument in the list from which data will be loaded O Step 9 Choose Select Source Address from the side menu and then use the general purpose knob to select the GPIB address for the instru ment from which files will be loaded C Step 10 Select Load from the side menu Data transfer will be per formed and the waveform file will be added to the list of files stored in internal memory at the top of the screen under the name shown in the Loaded as column 4D 14 LOAD SAVE Menu Auto Loading Auto Load Use the side menu of the Auto Load to automatically load files from the mass memory into the internal memory when the instrument is switched on Procedure C Step 1 Select Auto Load from the bottom menu C Step 2 Select an item from the side menu E From Disk When this instrument is switched on files are loaded bes automatically from the floppy disk to the internal memory of the instru ment In this case all the files in the AWG2040 directory are loaded If there is no AWG2040 directory no auto load is carried out This directo ry can be created with Disk on the UTILITY menu For details see the explanation in Using the Disk Menu in Section 4E UTILITY Menu iam From NVRam When this instrument is switched on all the files in the So wena non volatile memory are loaded automatically into the internal memory off Off Sw
110. position when a numeric vaiue or character is input using the general purpose knob The digit input numeric value is indicated at the underscore Hold down these arrow buttons to shift in succession 10 CURSOR Button and Indicator When the indicator is lit the function assigned to the CURSOR button is operational Use the CURSOR button to select a field or switch the active cursor The function of CURSOR button is different depending on each menu When a special function is assigned to the CURSOR button a de scription of the CURSOR button is displayed on the screen 11 VALUE Button and Indicator Press the VALUE button to light the LED indicator In this state inputting the numeric values or selecting the item can be done using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob After inputting or selecting press the VALUE button to enter the setting When a special function is assigned to the VALUE button an explanation of the VALUE button is displayed on the screen 12 General Purpose Knob Use this knob to set a variety of functions and numerical values on the instrument When a knob icon is displayed on the screen next to an item it indicates that the item can be controlled 13 Delete Key Use this key to delete the character just in front of the cursor Hold down the key to delete characters in succession 14 HARDCOPY Button Use this button to output a hard copy of the data displayed on the screen The hard copy can b
111. supplied to the standby circuit in the power system Press the ON STBY button on the front panel to supply power to the rest of the instrument 23 Fuse Holder A The power supply fuse is enclosed in the fuse holder The same fuse is used for both 115 V and 230 V systems A 6 A fast blow fuse is used 2 10 Overview AWG2040 User Manual NOTE When using the AWG2040 in Europe you should use an IEC ap proved fuse For details see Page 1 4 24 DIGITAL OUT Connector Option 03 This connector is used for output of the clock signal ECL level and the digital data DO D7 for the waveform to be output The output must be terminated to 2 V with a 50Q termination 25 MASTER CLK OUT Connector This connector is used for output of the master clock ECL level The output must be terminated to 2 V with a 50Q termination 26 SLAVE CLK IN Connector This connector is used for input of the slave clock ECL level The input is terminated to 2 V with a 50Q termination rsaxc O lei STOP TRIGIN AUTO STEPIN o Lo 6 Figure 2 5 Rear Panel Detail Overview 2 12 27 RS 232 C Connector The RS 232 C connector enables remote control by a computer via this serial interface 28 IEEE STD 488 Connector The IEEE STD 488 connector enables remote control by a computer via an IEEE STD 4
112. the general purpose knob to select the desired waveform or sequence file from the list Select waveform Sequence i ENR WE DEEP WEM S_SINWEM UDAMP WEM 4B 6 SETUP Menu C Step 3 After the file has been selected select O K in the sub menu The selected file will be confirmed and the waveform and file name will appear in the icon as shown in the figure below When the file is confirmed the output parameters for that file will be set automatically When a sequence file has been defined the output parameters for all of the sequence files or waveforms making up that se quence are ignored and the output parameters for the defined sequence file are used NOTE When a sequence file is selected if the waveform or sequence file making up the sequence is not in internal memory nothing is displayed in the waveform display area and the output switch is off In this case you must load the waveform or sequence file making up the sequence into internal memory Loading Waveform Files That Are Not a Multiple of 32 When creating or editing waveform files in the EDIT menu if you attempt to save a file whose waveform size is not a multiple of 32 four choices will appear Append 0 Expand Expand with Clock and Leave as itis With the first three items the file size is converted to a multiple of 32 and the file is saved to internal memory The last choice Leave as it is do
113. the AWG2040 These Characteristics values represent typical or average performance and are not absolutely guaranteed Filters Rise Time 10MHZz 35 ns 20MHz 17 ns 50MHz 7 0 ns 100MHz 3 5 ns Delay Delay from marker see Tdi in Figure B 1 1OMHz 20MHz 50MHz 12 ns Tomaz FO ns Through 25 ns Auxiliary Output MARKER Rise Fail Time within tns at 1 Vpp Marker Skew within 250 ps SYNC Signal Duration 100 ns see Tw1 in Figure B 1 JEES Auxiliary Input EXTERNAL CLOCK Delay 13 ns from external clock to marker Digital Data Out Option 03 Delay Data to Marker Clock to Data 2 0 ns see Td5 in Figure B 1 2 5 ns see Td6 in Figure B 1 Power Supply Battery Back Up Time AWG2040 User Manual B 13 Appendix C Sample Waveform Library itn Introduction The files listed below are included in the route directory of the sample wave form library disk that comes with the instrument All files are locked this is indicated by an asterisk before the file name a Representative Waveform Files There are 14 of these waveform files If a waveform file with the exten sion WFM has the same name as an equation file with the extension EQU the waveform file was derived by compiling that equation file 1 Gaussian Pulse GAUSS_PEQU C 2 GAUSS_PWFM D_EXPWFM 2 Lorentz Pulse LORENTZ EQU C 3 LORENTZ WFM 3 Sampling Function SIN X X Pulse S
114. the Polarity to Invert on the AWG2040 side menu and note the value displayed on the DMM c Check the difference of the two values n Check that the difference of the two values is in the range of 20 mV 2 2 mV AWG2040 User Manual E 249 Performance Tests E 30 d Set the AWG2040 amplitude m Enter numeric value of 200 Push 2 0 and 0 key in this order a Push kHz ms mvV key e Operate the AWG2040 control and note the reading on DMM w Set the Polarity to Normal on the AWG2040 side menu and note the value displayed on the DMM m Set the Polarity to Invert on the AWG2040 side menu and note the value displayed on the DMM ft Check the difference of the two values m Check that the difference of the two values is in the range of 200 mV 4 mV g Set the AWG2040 amplitude m Enter numeric value of 2 Push 2 key m Push Hz s V key h Operate the AWG2040 contro and note the reading on DMM n Set the Polarity to Normal on the AWG2040 side menu and note the value displayed on the DMM Set the Polarity to Invert on the AWG2040 side menu and note the value displayed on the DMM s i Check the difference of the two values Check that the difference of the two values is in the range of 2V 0 022 V 4 Check CHT Repeat the Amplitude Accuracy Checks for the AWG2040 CHT 5 End procedure Retain the test hookup and control settings Check Offset Accuracy Electrical Characteristic Check
115. the extrane ous frequency component Procedure C Step 1 Select Limiter from the bottom menu Step 2 Press the CURSOR bution on the front panel to select the left right vertical bar cursor Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob set the domain to remove the extraneous frequency component Cl Step 3 Press the VALUE button on the front panel Using the general purpose knob or the numeric keys set the limit level for the magnitude The limit level is displayed at the top of the screen Cl Step 4 Select Cut under from the side menu The frequency compo nent under the limit level is cut Deleting Even or Odd Components Here is the procedure for using the Delete Even or Delete Odd item to delete the even component or add component in the discrete frequency domain Procedure C Step 1 Select Limiter from the bottom menu C Step 2 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to select the left right vertical bar cursor Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob set the domain to delete the even component or odd component oO Step 3 Select Delete Even even or Delete Odd odd from the side menu The even or odd component within the left and right vertical bar cursors is cut Figure 4A 161 shows the fundamental even and odd component EDIT Menu _ font 6 S36MAZ Fundamental Even Component Odd Component Component Figure 4A 161 Fundamental Odd and Even Components Sifting
116. the general purpose knob to set the year to 1993 g Step 5 In the same manner select Month Day and Hour from the side menu and set the values to November 12 and 15 respectively The time is displayed in 24 hour fashion C Step 6 Select Minute from the side menu C Step 7 Use the general purpose knob to set the minute value to 30 by the time signal NOTE When the setting for Hour or Minute is changed the value for seconds will be reset to 0 Date Time Display It is possible to have the date and time constantly displayed on the screen To do this use the following procedure C Step 8 Select Mise from the bottom menu O Step 9 Select Display from the side menu C Step 10 Press Date Time in the sub menu and select On The current date and time will be displayed in the upper right hand corner of the screen as shown in Figure 2 13 GPIB aus mod Figure 2 13 Date Time Display AWG2040 User Manual 2 2t Operating Examples Brightness 0A100 Setting the Display Brightness In this operation you will set the display brightness of the screen The display offers three different levels of brightness Use the following proce dure to adjust the overall dispiay brightness to the proper level g Step 11 Select Brightness from the side menu 7 Order zo Name i on F H 3 Jf Disk NYRam i i GPIB RS232C Date Time Diag Cat Figure 2
117. the root directory is selected NOTE A file hierarchy with multiple layers can be created on the disk using up to 54 characters including the character The shorter the directory name is the deeper the levels that you can create When the directory display becomes too large for the display area win dow the initial section is omitted Example Creating a Directory For example to create a sub directory called AWG2040 such as root direc tory AWG2040 DIR perform the following steps Root directory AWG2040 DIR if the AWG2040 directory has been created ahead of time when its power is switched on the files under the AWG2040 directory are automatically loaded into internal memory by the LOAD SAVE menu Auto Load setting UTILITY Menu The following procedure assumes that the current directory is the root directory If the current directory is not the root directory use Change Direc tory to change the current directory to the root directory See the Step 5 and the following steps oO Step 1 Select Disk from the bottom menu A list of the files and directories in the root directory of the inserted floppy disk is displayed on the screen See Figure 4E 4 Catalog Disk on the CRT screen shows that the current directory is the root directory GPIB Triggered mode Stopped Type f Disk Catalog Pisk S free hate amp Time comment 5 Rename 93 13 16 93 11 18
118. the same pattern is set for the marker 1 as well Settings Waveform points 512 Clock frequency 1 0 GHz Output time 512 ns Appendix C Sample Waveform Library Waveform for Magnetic Disk Readout MDSK_RD WFM Made with the convolution waveform editor Option 09 Lene a send oieticage 1 6689 MARKERT 9 HARKERZ O Figure C 14 Waveform for Magnetic Disk Readout Description Created using the waveform editor and the optional convolution waveform creation function oN This is the waveform for reading stored data written with 13 MDSK_WR WFM This is a waveform created assuming a Gaussian pulse GAUSS_P EQU with a system impulse response of 1 pulse width 32 ns clock 1 0 GHz 256 points Settings Waveform points 768 Clock frequency 1 0 GHz Output time 768 ns AWG2040 User Manual C 18 Appendix D Miscellaneous General Description This appendix covers the following items Horizontal axis scaling Sampling theorem Differentiation Integration Random rnd function Pattern code a Logical operation a Fast Fourier Transforms FFT Repackaging for shipment m Factory settings Horizontal Axis The horizontal axis scaling uses linear interpolation Scaling Points before conversion O Points after conversion f x o Mig Xi x Xiet Figure D 1 Linear Interpolation AWG2040 User Manual D 1 Appendix D Miscellaneous H
119. to define the frequency domain for drawing the magnitude or phase Use the CUR SOR button to toggle between the left and right vertical bar cursors Step 3 Press Draw Area in the sub menu and select Mag magnitude or Phase phase Step 4 Press the VALUE button on the front panel Using the general purpose knob move the point cursor to the location of the new point Pressing the VALUE button will toggle the direction of movement from horizontal X to vertical Y and vice versa The location of the point cursor is displayed in the upper right hand corner of the screen in X frequency and Y magnitude or phase coordinates Step 5 When you have placed the point cursor at the desired location select Add Draw Point from the sub menu to add a point at that loca tion EDIT Menu AWG2040 User Manual it is possible to add points outside the area defined by the vertical bar cursors However such points will be ignored when Execute is pressed NOTE It is not possible to draw more than one point at the same location on the horizontal axis If you attempt to do this a message will appear asking you to confirm that you want to change the level of the existing point Press O K or Cancel in response to this mes sage Cl Step 6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to add several new points oO Step 7 To delete a point that you have added with Add Draw Point move the point cursor to that point and select Delete Draw Point The point wil
120. underscore to the right and thus reduce the amount of change for general purpose knob turning to 1 10th C Step 3 Turn the general purpose knob to change the value Numeric Specification Example Turning the general purpose knob one click clockwise increases the value of the underscored digit by 1 Turning it one click counterclockwise decreases the value by 1 For example if the value is 173 0 and the cursor is under the 7 turning the general purpose knob clockwise or counterclockwise changes the value as shown below If the underscored value is already 1 turning the general purpose knob counterclockwise does not decrease the value any further 173 0 173 0 183 0 163 0 193 0 E 203 0 23 00 213 0 13 00 Turning clockwise Turning counterclockwise When the value has already been increased to the maximum allowable value for the parameter turning the general purpose knob further clockwise has no effect Similarly when the value has already been decreased to the minimum allowable value for the parameter turning the general purpose knob further counterclockwise has no effect 2 21 Operating Examples In this section we will use simple examples to illustrate the basic proce dures for waveform output on the AWG2040 Six examples will be given these are listed below Buttons and menu items to be used will be shown to the left and a description of the corresponding operation will appear on the right First of all you should
121. until the trigger signal is applied Selecting STOP in the side menu during waveform output will cause waveform output to stop at that point The STOP signal will also cause the current step to return to the Step 1 waveform The waveforms for each step in the autostep file are output in accor dance with the output parameters amplitude offset clock and filter set for each step in the autostep editor AWG2040 User Manual 40 15 MODE Menu Setti ng Trigger The external trigger gate signal is input from the TRIGGER INPUT connec Parameters for an tor on the front panel External Trigger Use the Slope Polarity Level and impedance items in the side menu of g ate the MODE menu to set trigger gate parameters for an external trigger gate signal Slope Fere This item sets the slope for the external trigger signal Press the Slope Negative button in the side menu and select either Positive or Negative When Positive is selected the output is triggered at the rising edge of the external trigger signal when Negative is selected the output is triggered at the falling edge of the external trigger signal Polarity Gated mode eos This item sets the polarity for the gate that outputs the waveform or se Wegative quence with an external gate signal Press the Polarity button in the side menu and select either Positive or Negative When Positive is selected the waveform or sequence is output while the level of the gate signal i
122. waveform is inserted right before the active vertical bar cursor However when the cursor is at the end of the waveform the data is inserted directly after the cursor C Step 3 After setting the position to insert the other waveform select Insert Other Waveform from the side menu A list of waveform files is displayed Data placed into the paste buffer with Cut or Copy is listed at the top of the file list with the name Paste Buffer The data in the paste buffer can be inserted into any desired location by selecting this item EDIT Menu oO Step 4 Use the general purpose knob to select the waveform file to be inserted from the file list Select the waveform for Inserting Paste f wavelormt DC LWEM DEZ WEM RAMP WEM SAMPLE 1 WEM SAMPLE 2 WEM SQUARE WEM TRIGRGLE WEM i i i Figure 4A 41 List of Files for Insertion O Step 5 Select the Show Catalog Entry from the sub menu The wave form for the selected file is displayed 356 Points samasse Arsensuerceseesermassticssnsgescessnice esesuacanate Figure 4A 42 File Waveform Display AWG2040 User Manual 4A 63 EDIT Menu C Step 6 Select O K from the sub menu The wavetorm from the selected file is inserted right before the active vertical bar cursor Select Cancel to cancel the waveform insertion When O K or Cancel is selected the display returns to the menu d
123. which the waveform point size has been set to 512 and the interval value has been set to 384 The copied waveform will be pasted at intervals of 384 Starting from points 0 384 and 768 and so the waveform will overlap in phase between points 384 511 and 768 895 Asa result the amplitude in these areas will be doubled EDIT Menu AWG2040 User Manual i TOF Value 6 G60 wsmmmscemmemesesemsemes 2 lue 0 0246 0 384 511 768 895 1023 Figure 4A 69 Waveform Copying number of points in waveform gt Interval value g Step 15 Select Go Back from the current sub menu The display moves from the Multiple Copy sub menu to the side menu 4A 87 EDIT Menu 4A 88 Convoluta Convolution Calculations The Convolute menu item appears when two or more waveforms are being edited It is used to convolute the section of the waveform between the two vertical bar cursors in one editing area with the waveform between the vertical bar cursors in another editing area The result is normalized The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Convolute item m Source Operation More 4 of 4 Convolute Go Back Execute See Opening and Selecting Editing Areas on page 4A 16 for further in formation on designating multiple editing areas On a discrete system convolution is called discrete convolution The con volution y n of waveform x n and wavefor
124. within 150 ns of the end of waveform output see Td7 in Figure B 1 SYNC Delay within 60 ns from the external trigger see Td3 in Figure B 1 Digital Data Out Option 03 Skew Between Data within 250 ps B 8 Appendix B Performance Characteristics Electrical Characteristics Characteristics Description Auxiliary Input TRIGGER Accuracy 5 of Level 0 1 V Pulse Width 10 ns minimum with an amplitude of 0 2 V Sensitivity 0 2 Vp p minimum with a square wave of 1 MHz Maximum Input Volts 10 V DC peak AC when an input impedance of 1 kQ is selected 5 V DC peak AC when an input impedance of 50 Q is selected Delay To marker from trigger see Td2 in Figure B 1 Internal Clock Within 45 ns 3 clocks at 650 MHz or greater Within 60 ns at less than 650 MHz External Clock Within 45 ns 3 clocks Jitter Internal Clock Within 0 5 clocks at 650 MHz or greater Within 0 8 ns at less than 650 MHz External Clock Within 0 5 clocks ize Trigger Hold Off 500 ns maximum STOP TRIGGER Pulse Width 100 ns minimum Maximum Input Volts OVto 5 V DC peak AC Delay 100 ms maximum AUTO STEP TRIGGER Pulse Width 100 ns minimum OV to 5 V DC peak AC 100 ms maximum Maximum Input Volts AWG2040 User Manual B Appendix B Performance Characteristics Electrical Characteristics Characteristics Description Auxiliary Input Continued EXTERNAL C
125. x Xi Xe Xn n are given as follows E n V n o2 n Even if the initial random distribution is not normal if a reasonably large value for n is used the arithmetical mean x of a considerably large number of variables will be close to the normal distribution in actuality 12 is used for n uniform random numbers are accumulated n times and their arithmetical mean is derived as the ultimate Gaussian dis tribution random number The following algorithm ig Used to generate uniform distribution random numbers seed n 253 0 x seed n 1 1 0 mod 16777216 ran seed n 16777216 Appendix D Miscellaneous Pattern Codes On the AWG2040 it is possible to select the coding system used when pattern strings are output If the code will be affected by the immediately preceding data the data item just before the first item of data will be calcu lated as 0 The following tables show the coding systems a NRZ Normal data format Pattern Output Data NRZI The data changes when a 1 is received Each pattern is made up of 2 data items Example Peper fr RZ The data always returns to 0 Each pattern is made up of 2 data items D 6 Appendix D Miscellaneous a MFM Modified FM Each pattern is made up of 2 data items In the table below data in parentheses indicates the immediately preceding data of the data for which coding is being attempt
126. 0 internal memory RAM Up to 400 files depending on size can be saved in the internal memory NOTE The data in this instrument s internal memory is lost when the power is switched off Therefore you must save any necessary data to mass memory Like internal memory the AWG2040 internal nonvolatile memory NVRam can hold up to 400 files The NVRam has 512 kbytes almost all of which is used for saving files The contents of this memory are retained even when the power is switched off The capacity of a floppy disk depends on its format Disks can use directory hierarchies and files can be stored in each of the directories The extension for a directory is DIR For further information on creating directories see the explanation in Using the Disk Menu in Section 4E UTILITY Menu Figure 4D 1 shows the relationship for loading and saving among the differ ent types of memory AWG2040 Internal Memory Digital Strage Ocilloscope Figure 4D 1 Relationship Between Memory and Execution of Load Save 4D 2 LOAD SAVE Menu LOAD SAVE Menu Figure 4D 2 shows the configuration of the LOAD SAVE menu Structure MENU Button Bottom Menu Side Menu Bottom Menu Side Menu r Load Load _ Load All t Change Directory ro Disk r Save t Save All Change Directory L Save as ASCII Save r Load Load All Load Device NVRam m S
127. 0K ECL compatible Connector SMB Digital Data Out Option 03 Data DO to D7 Clock 100K ECL compatible SMB Output Signal Level Connector Appendix B Performance Characteristics Electrical Characteristics Characteristics Description Auxiliary Input TRIGGER Threshold Level 5Vto5V Resolution o t V Impedance 1 kQ 50Q Connector BNC STOP TRIGGER Threshold Level TTL Impedance 10 KQ Connector SMB AUTO STEP TRIGGER Threshold Level TTL Impedance 10 kQ Connector SMB EXTERNAL CLOCK lt Impedance 50 O AC Coupling Connector SMB SLAVE CLOCK Threshold Level 100K ECL Impedance 50 Q terminated to 2 0 V CRT Display Area Resolution Display 13 2 cm 5 2 inches horizontally by 9 9 cm 3 9 inches vertically 640 H x 480 V pixels AWG2040 User Manual Appendix B Performance Characteristics Electrical Characteristics Characteristics Description Function Generator Waveform Shape Sine Triangle Square Ramp Pulse Output Parameter Frequency 1 000 000 Hz to 10 000 00 MHz Amplitude 20 mV to 2 V into 50 Q can be set in 1 mV increments Offset 1 000 V to 1 000 V into 50 Q can be set in 1 mV increments Polarity Normal Invert Duty 0 to 100 Pulse only can be set in 1 increments Operating Mode Continuous mode Auxiliary Output Marker 2 V into 50 Q generated at the starting point of the waveform The duty ratio
128. 1 Setting the Date amp Time and Adjusting the Brightness UTILITY Date Time 2 24 in Example 1 you will set the date and time on the instrument s built in clock and adjust the brightness of the screen Setting the Date and Time In this operation you will set the date and time on the instrument Be sure to do this when using the instrument for the first time Once set there will usually be no need to reset these values However if the instru ment has not been used for an extended period of time the date and time may be incorrect in such cases you should set these values again using the same procedure The date and time are important as they are used as a time stamp when creating or editing files In this example you will set the date to November 12 1993 and the time to 15 30 using the following procedure C Step 1 Press the UTILITY button in the MENU column C Step 2 Select Date Time from the bottom menu The menu shown in Figure 2 12 will appear GPIB Continuous made Stopped Pee ie Pa Pa P Month j ba Lay i my 1i Hov 93 y Nay l eua j IREN Day y E E EN Palia Hour 11 bd Minute E Disk NYRam GPIB Misc Diag Cal Figure 2 12 Menu Display showing Date Time item selected Operating Examples 1993 Minute 30 E Display Date Time Off C Step 3 Select Year from the side menu oO Step 4 Turn
129. 10 24 MHz will result in a waveform point value of 10 24 MHz 20 kHz 512 points When creating a new waveform file the point value is set to the default value of 1024 The waveform point value can be set to any value up to 262144 However the waveform memory the memory used to output the waveform is 1M words or 4M words when Option 01 is installed If the waveform point value is set longer than the current waveform data new points with a value of zero are added at the right end of the waveform On the other hand if the waveform point value is set shorter than the current waveform data points are deleted from the right end Procedure To set the waveform point size to 512 C Step 1 Select Setting from the bottom menu C Step 2 Select Waveform Points from the side menu O Step 3 Use the numeric keys or the general purpose knob to enter a value of 512 In the case of the numeric keys press 5 1 2 and ENTER in that order AWG2040 User Manual 4A 33 EDIT Menu Horiz Unit MARKER TG NARKERZD 4A 34 Pont Time Setting Horizontal Axis Units Horiz Unit sets the units for the horizontal axis for the displayed waveform in either time or number of points The following diagram shows the menu configuration seta os i m Point Setting More 1 of 2 Horiz Unit Time Each time the Horiz Unit button in the side menu is pressed the units toggle between Time and Point When Ti
130. 14 Setting the Display Brightness oO Step 12 Turn the general purpose knob to set the brightness to the proper level The brightness can be changed between 0 and 100 in 1 incre ments the default setting is 70 This completes the Example 1 scl 20 0 2 26 Operating Examples Example 2 Output of In Example 2 you will output a waveform using the sample waveform library a Waveform Usin g disk a standard accessory included with the instrument the Sample i Waveform Library Loading Sample Waveforms Disk The sample waveform should be loaded from the floppy disk to the internal memory of the instrument LOAD SAVE C Step 1 Press the MENU column LOAD SAVE button Device C Step 2 Select Device from the bottom menu a C Step 3 Select Disk from the side menu Disk Load Oo Step 4 Select Load from the bottom menu oO Step 5 Insert the sample waveform library disk that comes with this instrument into the floppy disk drive NOTE Do not remove the floppy disk while the floppy disk drive is operat ing This can destroy the data and cause errors SZ Figure 2 15 Inserting the Floppy Disk AWG2040 User Manual 2 27 Operating Examples The files will be displayed in the lower box of the LOAD menu Figure 2 16 shows how the files on the sample waveform library disk are displayed on the screen Catalog Memory Free 2867KB Name Type Size Date amp Time Comment j i Load All
131. 2 Mbytes 15 sectors 2HD 720 Kbytes 9 sectors 2DD 640 Kbytes 8 sectors 2DD IBM PC PC9800 OES 3 1 Format normally used on personal computer format selected with AWG2040 2 Not regular format but can be read and written 3 Can not be read or written NOTE The IBM PC and J3100 2DD formats are the same Thus use the IBM PC 2DD format for J3100 2DD disks C Step 5 After selecting the format select Execute from the sub menu This starts the disk formatting During formatting a message to that effect Formatting disk is displayed on the screen NOTE A disk with its write prevent tab in the write protected position cannot be formatted Slide the tab to the write enable position then try again See the discussion below of write prevention When formatting is complete the message on the screen will disappear and an empty file list will appear with the format type and available disk space shown in the upper right hand corner C Step 6 Select Go Back from the sub menu The system returns from the Format current sub menu to the previous side menu o Step 7 Pressing the eject button on the right side of the disk drive ejects the floppy disk Handling Floppy Disks To prevent disks from being damaged and to ensure the integrity of the data stored on them you should be careful of the following 4E 6 UTILITY Menu a Do not place disks near a strong magnetic field or near a ferromagnet
132. 2 shows data before shifting The right side of the figure shows the result of shifting the data between the cursors solid vertical lines by 0 5 units to the right In the example of Figure 4A 62 the data location must be determined 0 5 units to the left of each point in order to achieve the 0 5 unit shift to the right Linear interpolation is used in this example to determine the data location Original Data Data Shifted to Right by 0 5 Figure 4A 62 Data Shifting AWG2040 User Manual 4A 75 EDIT Menu 4A 80 When the resulting data is output through an appropriate filter the waveform will be shifted to the right by 0 5 units After the shift operation is completed the data point at the position of the left cursor is lowered This is a side effec of the interpolation process Following are several ways that you can preven this data lowering phenomenon E Increase the size of the area Set the Cursor Point setting to Exclude Apply smoothing there are waveforms for which smoothing may not be effective Increasing the Size of the Area Data that is identical across the operation can be acquired by increasing the size of the area Figure 4A 63 Smooth data is acquired when this area is shifted as shown by the right example of Figure 4A 63 Original Data Data Shifted by 0 5 to Right Figure 44 63 Increasing the Size of the Area The smooth data results when using linear interpolation b
133. 2040 User Manual 4A 173 EDIT Menu Inserting a Sequence File iha Select a sequence file in the Catalog to display the Insert Contents of Se Sequence quence item in the side menu When this item is selected the contents of the sequence file are developed and inserted into the Destination list NOTE When creating sequence file you cannot use as sources sequence files that contain other sequence file If you try to do this a mes sage will be displayed telling you that you cannot In this case you can use the Insert Contents of Sequence item to develop the sequence and insert it Procedure O Step 1 Select Operation from the bottom menu I Step 2 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel oO Step 3 Use the general purpose knob to select the line where the developed sequence file is to be inserted from the Destination list The developed file is inserted directly before the inverted display cursor in the Destination list C Step 4 Press the VALUE button on the front panel oO Step 5 Use the general purpose knob to select the sequence file from the Catalog The Insert Contents of Sequence item will appear in the side menu Ol Step 6 Select Insert Contents of Sequence from the side menu The contents of the selected sequence file are inserted directly before the inverted display cursor in the Destination list 4A 174 EDIT Menu Sequence File Display Show Use Show Overview from the bottom menu to display
134. 2040 includes the following standard accessories Part Number Manual User Manual 070 8957 01 Programmer Manual 070 8657 02 Floppy disk Sample Waveform Library Disk 3 5 inch 063 1705 00 Performance Check Disk 063 1707 00 Sample program 063 1708 00 Power cord 125V 6A 161 0230 01 Optional Accessories The following optional accessories are recommended for use with the instrument Part Number Service Manual English 070 8963 00 Performance Check Adjustment Disk 063 1707 00 Front Cover 200 3232 00 Accessory Pouch 016 1159 00 GPIB Cable 012 0991 00 50Q BNC Cable 012 1342 00 50Q BNC Cable double shielded 012 1256 00 50Q SMB Cable 012 1458 00 509 SMB BNC Cable 012 1459 00 509 BNC Terminator 011 0049 01 50Q BNC Power Divider 015 0660 00 400 MHz BNC Low Pass Filter 015 0659 00 200 MHz BNC Low Pass Filter 015 0658 00 100 MHz BNC Low Pass Filter 015 0657 00 Fuse 6A Fast UL198G 3AG 159 0239 00 Fuse cap 200 2264 00 Fuse 5A T IEC127 159 0210 00 Fuse cap 200 2265 00 Introduction Appendix B Performance Characteristics The performance characteristics on the AWG2040 can be divided into three categories Nominal Traits General characteristics are described not by equipment performance and limits but by such things as memory capacity Warranted Characteristics Warranted characteristics are described in terms of quantifiable perfor mance limits which are guaranteed Typical Characteristics Typical characteri
135. 8 points 4 2048 points ml WAVE 1 WFM 1024 points i WAVE 2 SEQ 24 points WAVE 3 WFM 1548 points gt Figure 4B 5 Waveform Memory Divisions In the three types of waveform shown above the largest waveform file is the sequence file WAVE 2 SEQ measuring 2024 points 24 points are added to this waveform to make 2048 points a multiple of 32 and the waveform memory is divided up into segments of this size In the initial division at the end of the WAVE 1 WFM data 1024 points of data are added at the 0 point of the next waveform WAVE 2 SEQ In this a manner waveforms whose point size is less than the segment of waveform memory are supplemented with the initial data for the next waveform When a sequence file is loaded into waveform memory in Waveform Ad vance mode the required waveform memory length is the point size for division multiplied by the number of tiles In some cases the size of the memory used may be much greater than the amount of source data NOTE When the memory length required after data loading is greater than the waveform memory the sequence file cannot be expanded into waveform memory Also it is not possible to select Waveform Advance mode after this type of sequence file has already been loaded into waveform memory AWG2040 User Manual 4B SETUP Menu Setting Clock Source and Frequency Clock The Clock item is used to set the clock source and the clock fr
136. 82 the waveform point size has been set to 1024 and Step has been set to 2 The pattern is repeated twice Only the Step parameter is set for the Gray Code pattern option AWG2040 User Manual 4A 105 EDIT Menu 44 106 DATA S ie Ss DATA ae a DATA 4 DATA DATA Figure 4A 82 Gray Code Pattern Display Example of Waveform Data Creation In the following operation you will replace the data between the vertical bar cursors with a Count Up pattern with the waveform point size set to 1024 Procedure E m o Step 1 Select Standard Waveform from the bottom menu Step 2 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel Using the general purpose knob move the left and right vertical bar cursors all the way to the left and right respectively so the entire editing area is selected Step 3 Select Pattern from the side menu then select Count Up by turning the general purpose knob or pressing the Pattern button in the side menu Step 4 Select Step from the side menu Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob set the step to 2 Step 5 Select Max from the side menu Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob set the end point for the Count Up pattern to 255 Step 6 Select Min from the side menu Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob set the starting point for the Count Up pattern to 0 Step 7 Select Execute from the side menu The data between the vertical bar cursors
137. 88 parallel interface 29 CLK IN Connector This connector is used for external clock input It requires an external signal of up to 1 Vp p 30 BUSY OUT Connector This connector is used for output of a busy signal TTL level The busy signal is output while the CH1 waveform is being output The output resis tance is 51Q 31 SYNC OUT Connector This connector is used for output of a synchronous signal TTL level The synchronous signal is output at the starting point for CH1 waveform output The output resistance is 51Q 32 AUTO STEP IN Connector This connector is used for input of an autostep signal TTL level in Auto step mode the autostep signal changes the waveform file currently being output to the next file 33 STOP TRIG IN Connector This connector is used for input of the trigger signal TTL level used to stop waveform output Overview CRT Display oo 1624 pts 3 0000 anamannan 14 Hue 8 0808 i T a 5 Cut Copy to Buffer 4 0000 MARKERI 8 i i i cass MARKERZ 01 T More 7 ofS i eine x Seear Zoom Setting l Unda Standard Close Oper Waveform Write GPIB iggered mode Catalog Memory Free 3853KB Typ Name Date amp Time ent Ave you sure you want to delete SAMPLE 1 WFEM 2 O rener rA Rename Comment f capy rt
138. A 91 Expanding Waveform Data reese 4A 125 Figure 4A 92 Shift Register Configuration Menu 4A 126 Figure 4A 93 Register Values and Taps 0 essere ee eees 4A 127 Figure 44 94 Sample Settings for Register Values and Taps 4A 128 Figure 44 95 Timing Display seee eset tere eeeeeee 4A 132 Figure 44 96 Waveform Editor Table Display Menu Structure 4A 133 Figure 4A 97 Table Display Screen esse eee rere 4A 135 Figure 44 98 Numeric Displays for Waveform Data 4A 138 Figure 44 99 Example of Equation File Data and Resulting Waveform a Cc 4A 141 Figure 4A 100 Equation Editor Menu Structure 6 eee eee ee 4A 143 Figure 44 101 Equation Editor CRT Display 5 5 4A 145 Figure 4A 102 Menu With Operation Selected 0 eee eee 4A 147 Figure 44 103 Component Menu se sree cree een eees 4A 149 Figure 4A 104 Trigonometric Function Waveform Expressed With Variable X 0 06 ccc cece eee eee ete nee e eee nn enes 4A 151 Figure 4A 105 Trigonometric Function Waveform Expressed With Variable to cc ec eee cee eee tent e ee enes 4A 152 Figure 44 106 Equation Using exp Figure 44 107 Equation Using log ssr sere eee ress Figure 4A 108 Equation Using In e seen reer e eee Figure 4A 109 Equation Using sqrt 62 2 2 seer eee e eee Figure 4A 110 Equation Using abs eeee
139. ARKER area as determined by the Set Result to item the results are displayed as follows DATA selected in Set Result to Comparison data value Result waveform level 1 000 FFE in hexadecimal format 0 000 7FF in hexadecimal format Destination gt Source Destination e Source MARKER selected in Set Result to Comparison data value Result MARKER Destination gt Source Destination e Source Procedure in this example we will designate the portion of the waveform between the vertical bar cursors in editing area 1 as the reference Source and then compare it with the waveform between the vertical bar cursors in editing area 2 The procedure begins from the point at which two waveforms have been selected in the waveform editor Designating the Section for Comparison C Step 1 Select Select Open from the bottom menu C Step 2 Select Waveform from the side menu This waveform will be the reference for comparison C Step 3 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel AWG2040 User Manual 4A 91 EDIT Menu 4A 92 g Step 4 Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob set the positions of the left and right vertical bar cursors to define the section of the waveform for comparison In this example we wili set the left cursor to point 128 and the right cursor to point 639 NOTE The value indicated by A shows the difference in points between the left and ri
140. C 14 Continuous When a trigger signal is received the waveform for the Current step is output repeatedly To stop the continuous output change temporarily to Step Selecting STOP from the side menu will also stop the output but this will also return the current step to Step 1 Step When a trigger signal is received the waveform for the current step is output once only Each time a trigger signal is received the current waveform is output once While waveform output is in progress even if the next trigger signal is received it is ignored C Step 7 Press the Manual button on the front panel to generate the trigger signal The waveform for the current step will be output in accor dance with the Run setting C Step 8 Select Next Step from the sub menu to proceed to the next step When a step signal is received during waveform output output for the current step will stop at the end of that waveform and the waveform for the next step will be loaded into waveform memory and the AWG2040 will wait for the trigger signal oO Step 9 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 to output the waveforms for each step At the last step selecting Next Step will cause the AWG2040 to return to the Step 1 waveform C Step 10 Select Go Back from the sub menu The side menu for the Autostep menu item will reappear ee g Step 11 To return from the current step to the first step select STOP in the side menu The same thing will happen when a stop signal
141. Checked Operating mode Slave on page B 3 Equipment Required Three 50 Q coaxial cables BNC connector two 50 Q coaxial cables GMB SMB connector an oscilloscope a function generator and an AWG2040 X NOTE The X of AWG2040 X means an additional AWG2040 Arbitrary Waveform Generator Prerequisites The AWG2040 meets the prerequisites listed on page E 7 Procedure 4 Install test hookup and set test equipment controls a Hook up the oscilloscope Connect the AWG2040 CH1 output through a BNC coaxial cable to the oscilloscope CH1 vertical input connector m Connect the AWG2040 x CH1 output through a BNC coaxial cable to the oscilloscope CH2 vertical input connector b Hook up the function generator m Connect the function generator output through a BNC coaxial cable to the AWG2040 Xx TRIGGER INPUT connector c Hook up the AWG2040 X and AWG2040 Connect the AWG2040 rear panel MASTER CLOCK OUT con nector through a coaxial cable SMB SMB connector to the AWG2040 X rear panel SLAVE CLOCK IN connector Connect the AWG2040 rear pane l SLAVE CLOCK IN connector through a coaxial cable SMB SMB connector to the AWG2040 X rear panel MASTER CLOCK OUT connector see Figure E 11 Performance Tests to SLAVE CLOCK IN to MASTER CLOCK OUT to MASTER CLOCK OUT Under Test AWG2040 to SLAVE CLOCK IN Oscilloscope
142. Close the menu for naming the file is not displayed Instead the system immediately returns to the initial menu and the file created is saved with the existing file name in internal memory Close without Writing When this item is selected the system returns to the initial menu without saving the created or edited file to internal memory In this case a message asking you if it is ok to erase the created data is displayed on the CRT screen Reply O K or Cancel Write When Write is selected the file name menu is displayed If you input or change the file name then select the sub menu O K item the created or edited waveform data is saved into internal memory with that file name and the system returns to the editor it has been in If the file name is changed the old file is left as is and a new file is created with the new file name If you select Cancel the input file name is canceled and the system returns to the editor without saving the data into internal memory Although the created or edited data is not saved at this time it is retained for further editing AWG2040 User Manual 4A 21 EDIT Menu Naming a File When saving a newly created file a file name must be created The menu for creating a file name is the same for all the editors Procedure C Step 1 Select Close Write from the bottom menu C Step 2 Select Write and Close from the side menu Figure 4A 13 shows the menu for inputting a file name __
143. Description The AWG2040 is a portable arbitrary waveform generator equipped with a differential output channel and capable of generating both arbitrary and standard function waveforms This arbitrary waveform generator provides these major features custom waveforms for simulation and testing m waveforms that can not be generated with function generators As an arbitrary waveform generator the AWG2040 has a clock frequency of 1 GHz an 8 bit DA converter and a 1M word waveform memory or 4M word memory when Option 01 is installed for high quality waveform generation and differential output to one channel It can also generate a two channel arbitrary marker output to accompany waveform output The AWG2040 also has a digital out function when Option 03 is installed for direct output of the digital data for the arbitrary waveform in the waveform memory without going through the D A converter This instrument has five editors for making waveform files Each editor is equipped with a variety of editing functions as described below 1 Waveform Editor creates waveform data This editor can display its data in three formats graphical table and timing and the data can be edited in the format appropriate for the application Furthermore the waveform editor can edit up to three waveform files at the same time thus easing the creation of related waveform files 2 Sequence Editor creates sequences of waveforms by combining wave
144. Disk AWG2040 User Manual 4E 7 UTILITY Menu 4E 8 Make Directory Change Directory Creating and Changing Directories When there are many files it becomes difficult to manage them Placing the files of the same type into one single directory makes it easier to manage the files In addition to files directories can also contain sub directories With directo ries hierarchical structures can be constructed with successive directories Directories are distinguished by their names The original directory that contains all the files and directories is called the root directory and the directories within it are called sub directories This instrument can make directories to manage files the same as with MS DOS Directories are created with the Make Directory side menu item The suffix DIR is attached to created directories To operate on a certain file within a given sub directory it is necessary to move to that sub directory Thus use the Change Directory side menu item to move to the desired sub directory The next directory is now the object of any future operations and is called the current directory The LOAD SAVE menu can be used to change directories too The setting of the LOAD SAVE menu Auto Load item determines the cur rent directory at power on When the Auto Load item is set to Disk the directory AWG2040 is automatically selected In this case this AWG2040 sub directory must exist If Auto Load is Off
145. EXT CLOCK IN connector through an adapter BNC female female anc a coaxial cable SMB BNC to the output head of the RF signal generator see Figure E 21 Adapter ed Output Head Sey to EXT CLOCK IN AWG2040 RF Signal Generator Slasieral Figure E 21 External CLOCK IN Initial Test Hookup c Set oscilloscope controls Vertical CH1 Coupling DC Scale 0 2 V div Input Impedance 50 Q Horizontal Sweep 500 ns div Trigger Source CH1 Coupling DC Slope Positive Level 100 mV Mode Auto d Set RF signal generator controls Frequency 1024 MHz Amplitude 0 4 Vpp Power On Performs sfs 2 Set AWG2040 controls and select the AWG2040 waveform file a Initialize AWG2040 controls Push UTILITY Misc Config Reset to Factory gt 0 K b Select waveform file Push SETUP Waveform Sequence Turn the general purpose knob to highlight the MODE WFM file m Push ENTER c Modify AWG2040 controls Push SETUP gt Clock Source gt External 3 Turn on the AWG2040 CH1 output Push the CH1 button so that the LED above the CH1 output connector is on 4 Check external clock operation a Check the output Check that the oscilloscope displays a sine wave with vertical 5 divisions and horizontal 2 divisions 5 End procedure Turn off the RF signal generator output and disconnect the R
146. F signal generator and oscilloscope Digital Data Out This procedure checks the AWG2040 Digital Data Out at the rear panel This Checks Opti on 03 check requires that the AWG2040 has Option 03 installed Electrical Characteristic Checked Digital Data Out on page B 4 Equipment Required Two 50 Q coaxial cable SMB BNC connector an adapter BNC male to SMA female an adapter SMA male to SMA male an adapter SMA female to SMA female an adapter BNC female to SMA male an adapter BNC female to dual banana an ECL terminator a DC power supply an oscilloscope Prerequisites The AWG2040 meets the prerequisites listed on page E 7 Procedure 1 Install test hookup and set test equipment controls a Hook up oscilloscope Connect the CLOCK output connector of AWG2040 DIGITAL OUT through the BNC SMA coaxial cable adapter BNC female to SMA male adapter SMA female to SMA female ECL terminator adapter SMA male to SMA male adapter BNC male to SMA female to the CH1 vertical input connector on the oscilloscope b Hook up DC power supply Connect the ECL terminator BIAS IN through the BNC SMB coaxial cable and adapter BNC female to dual banana to DC power supply see Figure E 22 AWG2040 User Manual j E 47 Performances Tests AWG2040 Oscilloscope to CLOCK DO D7 BNC SMA ECL Terminator SMA BNC Adapter
147. FFT if values are given from zero to the positive N 2 AWG2040 User Manual D 13 Appendix D Miscellaneous point this is enough Since the non DC components have energy dis persed on both the positive and negative sides the DC component is 2x the other components Since the DC component is scaled by 1 2 with the FFT editor DC and the other components can be handled equally Since FFT has N 2 sampling points on the discrete frequency axis between DC and the Nyquist frequency Fy the frequency resolution is Fx N 2 Since the Nyquist frequency is one half the sampling rate fs the frequency resolution can also be expressed as fs N Therefore if the sampling rate is fixed when the record length is increased the frequency resolution rises On the other hand if the record length is fixed raising the sampling rate raises the Nyquist frequency and lowers the frequency resolution Relationship Between Phase and Delay The phase is the quantitative displacement from the standard time The cos 2zft has a 0 phase but sin 2zft has a 90 degree delay The standard time is the sampling start time J COS 2n fi AY SIN 2n ft 90 Figure D 6 Phase and Delay D 14 Appendix D Miscellaneous FFT Window Functions FET calculates with limited data blocks Also since FFT calculations assume that the sampled data blocks are repeated infinitely frequency error arises from non continuities generated at the e
148. Factory gt 0 K Select waveform file m Push SETUP Waveform Sequence Turn the general purpose knob to highlight the MARKER L WFM file m Push ENTER 3 Turn on the AWG2040 CH1 output Push the CH1 button so that the LED above the CH1 output connector is on Check MARKER output low level 4 a Set MARKER level to 2 V m Push SETUP gt Marker Level gt Marker 1 Low Enter numeric value of 2 Push and 2 key in this order m Push Hz s V key Check MARKER1 low level a Check that the value displayed on the DMM is in the range of 2 0 V 0 1 V Set MARKER1 level to 1 9 V w Enter numeric value of 1 9 Push 1 and9 key in this order m Push Hz s V key Check MARKER1 low level m Check that the value displayed on the DMM is in the range of 19VE01V Performance Tests AWG2040 User Manual Change hookup Disconnect the BNC coaxial cable from the MARKER1 output connector and connect the cable to the MARKER2 output connec tor Check MARKER2 output low level a Set MARKER level to 2 V Push SETUP Marker Level gt Marker 2 Low ma Enter numeric value of 2 Push and 2 key in this order m Push H2 s V key b Check MARKER2 low level m Check that the value displayed on the DMM is in the range of 2 0V 0 1V c Set MARKER2 level to 1 9 V m Enter numeric value of 1 9 Push 1 and 9 key in this order m Push Hz s V key d Check MARKER2 low level a Che
149. Figure 4A 51 Differential Calculation 00000 0 o 4A Figure 4A 52 Example of Waveform Before Arithmetic OPGrAtONS a aira uae uh Sine gn ean tauren eaedten eesule tis 4A 7 Figure 4A 53 List of Files for Waveform Calculation 4A 7 Figure 4A 54 Selected File Waveform Display i siciescsvieedeavs 4A 7 Figure 4A 55 Waveform Addition Display 000000 4A 7 Figure 4A 56 Data Shifted Using the Right ttlem 00 4A 7 Figure 44 57 Data Compressed Using the Compress Item 4A 7 Figure 44 58 Linear Interpolation 0 00 0 00 c cece cece eee 4A 7 Figure 44 59 Quadratic Interpolation 0 0000 e eee e cece 4A 7 Figure 4A 60 Shift with Cursor Point Set to Exclude 4A 7 Figure 4A 61 Smoothing cece cece ecu ecee cesses 4A 7 Figure 4A 62 Data Shifting 00 0000000 ole nannaa 4A 7 Figure 4A 63 Increasing the Size of the Area 4 4 4A 8 Figure 44 64 Two Waveform Editing Areas Designated 4A 8 Figure 4A 65 Setting the Copy Source 4A8B Figure 44 66 Setting the Copy Destination 4A 8 Figure 44 67 Waveform Copying number of points in waveform Interval value 4A 8 Figure 4A 68 Waveform Copying number of points in waveform lt Interval value 4A 8 Figure 44 69 Waveform Copying number of points in waveform gt Interval value 4A 8 Figure 44 70 Setting t
150. Frequency dl Amplitude Offset The output parameters are applied to all waveforms Note that the pulse wave has an extra parameter Duty which is only effective for pulse waves The following sections will focus on each of the items in the side menu for each waveform type Setting the Frequency This item sets the frequency The frequency is set with a 7 digit number from 1 000000 Hz to 10 00000 MHz The frequency is set with the numeric keys or the general purpose knob Waveform periods Period are displayed at the bottom of the screen Setting the Amplitude This item sets the waveform amplitude The amplitude can be set in steps of 1 mV within the range 0 020 V 2 000 V P P value The amplitude is set with the numeric keys or the general purpose knob Figure 4F 3 shows a sine waveform whose amplitude has been set to 2 V CHI 1 0000 AN Figure 4F 3 Setting the Amplitude Setting the Offset This item sets the waveform offset The offset for each waveform can be set in steps of 1 mV within the range 1 000 V The offset is set with the numeric keys or the general purpose knob Figure 4F 4 shows the waveform used in Figure 4F 3 after an offset of 0 5 V has been applied The dotted line in the figure indicates the zero line 0 50004 a es 7 i f Figure 4F 4 Setting the Offset AWG2040 User Manual 4F 4 Hee ee Function Waveform Generator Mode Polarity J Normal
151. GE 530 CRAMP NFS 2996 COPY GEN 1468 bEXP ERU 608 DEXP BM 21428 EXP ER 608 BOUBLE EXPONENTIAL PULSI y bE LORENTZ EOG LORENTZ WPa M_DISK W WEM UIST EDU RYOUIST wea SAMPLE 1 WFN SAMPLE 2 WEN SAMPLE 3 WFM SINC Are you sure you want to T Peer delete GAUSS WIM 2 f Cancel Lock on Figure 4A 4 Menu Displayed When Delete is Selected If you select O K from the side menu the file is deleted If you decide not to delete the file select Cancel When either O K or Cancel is selected the system returns to the initial menu 4A 10 EDIT Menu OC off AWG2040 User Manual Locking and Unlocking Files Select Lock to lock or unlock a file When the file is locked it is not possible to delete the file or change the file name or the comments for that file NOTE While a locked file can have its output parameters changed with the SETUP menu the original output parameters are retained Thus when the locked file is loaded again into waveform memory the original parameters are set again Procedure Oo Step 1 Use the general purpose knob to select the file to be locked from the file list in the initial menu C Step 2 Press the Lock bottom menu button The selected file is locked and On is selected for the Lock label Locked files have next to their names in the display See Figure 4A 5 nie Catalog M
152. HUON 768 Points PEREN Clock Te 89 Hz f S12 Points eee OR AAN Clock terg He Execute Waveform Operation d Figure 44 149 Sample Convolution EDIT Menu Source Destination Operation Func type ny GHITION Math type Differential i i dates 1024 Points Clock tera Hz correlate gt o l 2648 Points l clock te 8982 SANPCE 2WFM 1624 Points j Clack 1e 9 Hz i Execute write Figure 4A 150 Sampie Correlation AWG2040 User Manual 44 207 EDIT Menu FFT Editor Option 09 Edit in Frequency Domain 4A 208 On instruments with Option 09 installed existing waveform files with the extension WFM can be edited in the frequency domain When the editor is started Fast Fourier Transformation FFT is automatically carried out and the data is transformed into the frequency domain When you leave the editor inverse FFT is carried out to convert the frequency domain data into time domain data The window function for fast Fourier transform is selected when the editor is started Within the editor filtering high pass low pass band pass band cut and clipping are possible Entering the FFT Editor This editor is not used to make new files Rather it edits existing waveform files in the frequency domain Here is the procedure for editing the FFT editor Procedure C Step 1 Press the EDIT button in the MENU column T
153. Hz calculated from the phase noise from 100 Hz to sg Boas ue oy a 200 kHz Main Output aeo DNL within 0 5 bit INL within 1 bit Output Volts 2 0 V to 2 0 V into 50 Q Amplitude No offset DC Accuracy 1 of amplitude 2 mV Offset Waveform data 7F No Filter Amplitude 20 mV Accuracy 1 of offset 5 mV Reverse Power Protection Up to 0 4 W AWG2040 User Manual Appendix B Performance Characteristics Electrical Characteristics Characteristics Description Main Output Continued Pulse Response Clock 1 GHz Waveform Data 00 and FF No Filter No offset measured in the 500 MHz BW Rise Time 2 5 ns maximum when the amplitude is greater than 1 0 V 1 5 ns maximum when the amplitude is smaller than and equal to 1 0 V Aberration within 10 when the amplitude is greater than 1 0 V within 7 when the amplitude is smaller than and equal to 1 0 V Flatness within 3 After 50 ns from rise fall edges Sine Wave Characteristics Clock 1 GHz Waveform Point 32 Frequency 31 25 MHz Amplitude 1 0 V No Filter No offset 45 dBc maximum DC to 400 MHz 50 dBc maximum DC to 400 MHz 90 dBc Hz at 10 kHz offset Auxiliary Output MARKER Level 2 0 V to 2 0 V into 50 Q 4 0 V to 4 0 V into 1M Q E E within 0 1 V i Harmonics Noise Phase Noise Accuracy BUSY Delay within 60 ns from the external trigger see Td4 in Figure B 1
154. INC EQU C 4 i ee SINC WFM 4 Squared Sine Pulse SQU_SIN EQU c 5 L SQU_SIN WFM 5 Double Exponential Pulse D_EXPEQU C 6 6 Nyquist Pulse NYQUIST EQU C 7 NYQUIST WFM 7 Linear Frequency Sweep LIN_SWREQU C 8 LIN_SWPRWFM 8 Log Frequency Sweep LOG_SWPEQU C 9 LOG_SWPWFM 9 Amplitude Modulation AM EQU C 10 AM WFM FM EQU C 11 FM WFM PWM WFM 0 12 PRBS_15 WFM C 13 MDSK_WR WFM C 14 10 Frequency Modulation 11 Pulse Width Modulation 12 Pseudo Random Pulse Waveform for Magnetic Disk 13 Writing Signal Waveform for Magnetic Disk Readout PEN 14 MDSK_RD WFM C 15 AWG2040 User Manual C 1 Appendix C Sample Waveform Library Description of Representative Waveform Files Here we will describe the 14 representative waveform files Some of the waveform files were obtained by creating an equation file in the equation editor and then compiling it to form a waveform file Others were created in the waveform editor To output a waveform file select the file in the SETUP menu Gaussian Pulse GAUSS_PWFM Made with the equation editor gaussian pulse range 6 256ns k 18e 9 pulse width k1 128e 9 peak location exp In 2 2 t k1 k8 42 Figure C 1 Gaussian Pulse Formula and Waveform Constants KO indicates the half width W50 for the pulse K1 indicates the peak loca tion of the pulse Description The waveform generated when the pulse width is taken to
155. L TRIGGER button and check that when the button is pushed the oscilloscope displays a one cycle sine wave 5 Check triggered mode with external triggering a Enable function generator output Turn on the function generator output b Check triggering Check that for each trigger supplied by the func tion generator the oscilloscope displays a one cycle sine wave 6 End procedure Turn off the function generator output and disconnect the function generator and oscilloscope Check Gated Mode Electrical Characteristic Checked Operating mode Gated on page B 3 Equipment Required Three 50 Q coaxial cables an adapter BNC T male to 2 female a function generator and an oscilloscope Prerequisites The AWG2040 meets the prerequisites listed on page E 7 Procedure 1 Install test hookup and set test equipment controls a Hook up the oscilloscope Connect the AWG2040 CH1 output connector through the coaxial cable to the CH1 vertical input con nector on the oscilloscope And attach the adapter BNC T male to 2 female to AWG2040 TRIGGER INPUT and connect through the coaxial cable to the CH2 vertical input connector on the oscillo scope b Hook up the function generator Connect the adapter on TRIGGER INPUT through the coaxial cable to the function generator output connector see Figure E 6 Performance Tests AWG2040 Oscilloscope
156. LOCK Input Frequency Range 10 MHz to 1 GHZ Sensitivity 400 mVpp 4 0 dBm Maximum Input Volts 1 0 Vpp 4 0 dBm DC 20 V SLAVE CLOCK Maximum Input Volts 2 0V to 0 0 V Frequency Range 650 MHz to 1 0 GHz Function Generator Frequency Accuracy Sine Wave Characteristics Fiatness within 1 dB 100 kHz reference Ext Trigger ___ na eee fad Td A SYNC Out Se Twi nee eee be Td4 ee Ree ee ae BUSY Out i EPE i Td7 _ CH1 apo Se Td manner Faye OO ie f wR G m Td Data Out Kok or oz o Y Y Y i le Toe cock oa eae Wg A ee eee Figure B 1 Trigger Delay B 10 Appendix B Performance Characteristics Electrical Characteristics Characteristics Description AC Power Source Voltage Range 90 VAC to 250 VAC 48 Hz to 63 Hz 90 VAC to 127 VAC 48 Hz to 440 Hz Maximum Power Consumption 300 W Maximum Current 4A Grounding Impedance The impedance for the chassis ground and power plug ground pins is 0 10 at 30 A Primary Circuit Dielectric Volt age withstand Test 1500 Vrms 50 Hz for 15 seconds without breakdown Environmental Characteristics Characteristics Description Temperature Operating 10 C to 40 C l Non operating 320 Cto t60 C Relative Humidity Operating 20 to 80 No condensation Maximum wet bulb temperature 29 4 C Non operating 5 to 90 No condensation Maximum we
157. LORERTZ WFM MDSKRD WEM waveform 2 RAMP WEM 4 cancel SENC WEM 4 SOUARE WEM ain OK zitz write eavetorn Operation Figure 4A 148 Selecting a Waveform File AWG2040 User Manual 4A 205 EDIT Menu l Operation 4A 206 Func type Convolution Correlation Math type None Differential Executing Convolution Correlation When you select Operation in the bottom menu convolution or correlation will be performed if Differential has been selected for the Math type item the calculated result will be differentiated Procedure C Step 1 Select Operation from the bottom menu oO Step 2 Press Func type in the side menu and select either Convolu tion or Correlation C Step 3 1 you wouid like to differentiate the calculated result select Differential for the Math type item Differentiation will be used when need for reading waveforms from magnetic disks C Step 4 Select Execute from the side menu to execute the operation The point count of the waveform data after operation will be the sum of the point count of the two waveform files you have selected Figure 4A 149 shows an example of convolution for which differentiation has been performed Figure 44 150 shows an example of correlation cial Figgered mode Stopped Source Destination i Operation Func type Correlation I Math type None Beer Clock Je 9 Hz Convelye gt E j sagt Siem
158. Magnitudes REX Here is the procedure for using the Shift Mag item to shift the magnitude to Shift Mag the limit level Procedure C Step 1 Select Limiter from the bottom menu C Step 2 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to select the left right vertical bar cursor Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob set the domain to be used when shifting the magnitude g Step 3 Press the VALUE button on the front panel Using the general purpose knob or the numeric keys set the limit level for the magnitude The limit level is displayed at the top of the screen O Step 4 Select Shift Mag from the side menu The entire area within the left and right vertical bar cursors will shift so the signal with the maxi mum magnitude between the cursors becomes the limit level AWG2040 User Manual 4A 223 EDIT Menu 4A 224 SETUP Menu General Description The SETUP menu is used to set a variety of output parameters used during actual output of the waveforms and sequence waveforms that have been created with the editors The menu can display output parameter values and selected items in both text form and as a graphic in other words with items connected in the form of a circuit When the power to the instrument is turned on the SETUP menu appears automatically Also when the power is switched on if you have select from Disk or from NVRam in the Auto Load item of the LOAD SAVE menu ail the files on the disk
159. Minimum Requirements Waveform Must use example equipment generator Optional test Example Tektronix AWG2040 Arbitrary Waveform Generator Purpose Checks Slave mode and Master clock Test cnc cet ET EESE ESEE Table E 3 Additional Test Equipment for Option 03 Example Tektronix Part 015 0558 00 item Description Minimum Requirements ECL Frequency DC to 10 GHz termination Adapter Connectors BNC maie to SMA female Adapter Connectors SMA male to SMA male Adapter Connectors SMA female to SMA female Adapter Connectors BNC female to SMA male DC power Output voltage 2 45 V supply Requires a TM 5000 Series Power Module Mainframe Tektronix Part 015 0572 00 Tektronix Part 015 1011 00 Tektronix Part 015 1012 00 Tektronix Part 015 1018 00 Tektronix PS 5010 Program mable DC Power Supply AWG2040 User Manual Purpose Used to check digital data output Used to check digital data output Used to check digital data output Used to check digital data output Used to check digital data output Used to check digital data output E 9 Performance Tests ee Loading Files The following steps explain how to load files from the Performance Check Adjustment disk 063 1 707 00 into internal memory 1 Push the LOAD SAVE button in the MENU column 2 Turn the disk so the side with the arrow is on top insert the disk into the AWG2040 floppy disk drive 3 Push the Device butto
160. ODAANCHNGoOHbOH A Table of Contents viii General Description 0 2 00 00 ccc cccceseeeceneeeveces 4C MODE Menu Structure 2 0 0 2 0 ccccccseececueeeces 4c Menu Functions 00 ccc ccc ceecusucsceueeeeeuees 4c MODE Menu Display 00 cccceceececeeeuenaes 4c Setting the Operating Mode 4c Cont Moda ores eena vaaawabaeeeeocs cde cies 4C Triggered Mode 2 0 0 0 cece ccc cece cee seeecceucs 4C Gated Mode ri e e a A a E EAT AERA 4C LEC AN ee CEEE EAE E TEN EEO 4C Waveform Advance Mode 00 0 cece cccceececcueveveues 4C 1 Autostep Mode cece eee ccceec cee ssseeneeuseseeseuunns 4C 1 Starting an Autostep Program 0 0c ccc e cece rara 4C 1 Setting Trigger Parameters for an External Trigger gate 40 1 Slave Mode 0 cece cc cncenusuucccesesacescuceuans 4C 1 LOAD SAVE Menu 0 0 0 0 ccc ccc cccceeccsececunnecenaunens 4D General Description 00 cece ccaeccceveneeee 4D Memory Capacity 0 0 cece cceccceeeeseueuceee 4D 4D 4D 4D 4D Loading Files from Mass Memory into Internal Memory 4D Loading Autostep Files Sas a MORE dle tio ee aed ey aa 4D Saving Files from Internal Memory to Mass Memory 4D 11 Saving Data in Text Format 0 0 00 0000 ccc ceee eee ceceece cee 4D 1 Transferring Waveform Data Directly 00 0005 4D 1 Loading Waveform Data 2 000 000 0000 ccc ccc cect eenceseeueee 4D 1i
161. OMeco paia ae Figure E 11 Slave Mode Initial Test Hookup d Set the oscilloscope controls Vertical CH1 CH2 coupling CH1 CH2 scale CH1 CH2 input impedance Horizontal Sweep Trigger Source Coupling Slope Level Mode e Set function generator controls Function Mode Parameter Frequency Amplitude Offset Output CH1 CH2 DC 0 2 Vidiv 502 500 ns div CH1 DC Positive 100 mV Auto Square Continuous 100 kHz 4 0V 2 0V Off 2 Set the AWG2040 X controls and select the waveform file AWG2040 User Manual E 25 Performance Tests E 26 Initialize ANWG2040 controls Push UTILITY Misc gt Contfig gt Re set to Factory 0 K Modify the AWG2040 X default settings Push MODE Triggered Select waveform file m Push SETUP gt Wavetorm Sequence m Turn the general purpose knob to highlight the MODE WFM file m Push ENTER to select the file Set the AWG2040 controls and select the waveform file a Check slave mode operation Initialize ANG2040 controls Push UTILITY gt Misc Config gt Re set to Factory0O K Modify the AWG2040 default settings a Push MODE Slave Select waveform file Push SETUP gt Waveform Sequence a Turn the general purpose knob to highlight the MODE WFM file m Push ENTER to select the file Turn on the AWG2040 X and AWG2040 CH1 output Push the CH1 button so that the LED above the CH1 output
162. OUT Adapter MB BNC Cable abay cD EM SMA SMA Adapter SMB BNC Cable Dual Banana Adapter Figure E 22 Digital Data Out Initial Test Hookup c Set oscilloscope controls Vertical CHi CH1 Coupling DC Scale 50 mV div Input Impedance 502 Horizontal Sweep 5 ns div Trigger Source CH1 Coupling DC Slope Positive Level 100 mV Mode Auto d Set DC power supply controls Parameter Voltage 2 45 V Output On 2 Set AWG2040 controls and select waveform file a Initialize AWG2040 controls Push UTILITY gt Misc Config Re set to Factory gt 0 K E 48 Performance Tests Floating Point Processor Check Option 09 AWG2040 User Manual b Select waveform file a Push SETUP Waveform Sequence w Turn the general purpose knob to highlight the DOUT WEM file m Push ENTER Turn on the AWG2040 CH1 output Push the CH1 button so that the LED above the CH1 output connector is on Check the digital data output signals a Check the clock output m Check that the oscilloscope displays a square wave with vertical 2 division and horizontal 2 division Check the digital data output signals a Change connection Disconnect the cable BNC SMB to CLOCK output and connect it to DO output connector b Check the digital data output a Check that the oscilloscope displays square wave with vertical 2 division and horizontal 4 division c Check another digital data output
163. On A grid will appear in the editing area NOTE The grid can be turned on and off in timing display and table dis play as well but the grid will only appear in graphic display EDIT Menu Creating a Standard Function Waveform Standard When you select the Standard Waveform item a function waveform is waveform created in the area between the specified vertical bar cursors or a waveform is created through calculation of the original waveform and a function wave form When you select Standard Waveform from the bottom menu the following items are displayed in the side menu Some of the items will change de pending on the settings For example if you press Setting in the bottom menu and Horiz Unit in the side menu and then select Point the Cycle item appears in the menu if you press Setting and Horiz Unit and select Time the Frequency item appears in the menu Type Used to select the type of function waveform w Cycle Used to set the cycle w Frequency Used to set the frequency a Amplitude Used to set the amplitude a Offset Used to set the offset Execute Used to execute the process draw the waveform Selecting Function Waveform Type and Calculation Method ae The Type item is used to select the type of function waveform to be created and the calculation method There are six choices for waveform type and three choices for calculation method making a total of 18 different ways in which this item can be set
164. RSOR button is pressed the general purpose knob can be used to scroll files in the Destination list 4 Destination Waveform Area When a Copy Cut or Insert operation is executed and a file name is en tered the waveform the file name and the point count are shown here 5 insertion Waveform Sas This area appears when Insert in the bottom menu has been selected When a waveform file for insertion is selected from the internal memory the waveform the file name and the point count are shown here EDIT Menu Split AWG2040 User Manual Splitting Waveform File Use Split to divide a waveform file into several files You can split file using either of two methods Number divisor or Size waveform point count Procedure C Step 1 Select Split from the bottom menu C Step 2 Select Waveform from the side menu oO Step 3 Using the general purpose knob select the waveform file to be divided from the Select Waveform list and then select O K The wave form you have selected will be displayed in the Source waveform dis play area SAMPLE 4 8EM SPLIT _OO WEM SPLEE_OL WER SPLIT_ 2 WEM SPL _OB WEM senl Figure 4A 142 File List C Step 4 Press Source in the side menu and select either Leave or Delete Selecting Delete will cause the Source file to be deleted after the file has been split Selecting Leave causes the Source file to be preserved after the file has been split C Step 5
165. Right or Left Shifts the area delimited by the left and right vertical bar cursors the amount specified by the Shift Scale Value item When the shift type is Right the data shifts to the right when Left the data shifts left In the example of Figure 44 56 the shift type is Right The original data shifts to the right by one sampling point Data Shifted to Right by 1 The maximum value that you can specity for a right or left shift is the number of waveform data points If a section of data is shifted beyond the maximum number of data Sampling Point i P e Sampling Point points the data contained in that section is lost after the shift OT 2 345 6 7 8 SiT ot 2 9456 7 8 8 i011 12 Originai Data Data Shifted to Right by 1 Figure 4A 56 Data Shifted Using the Right Item Expand or Compress The area delimited by the left and right vertical bar cursors is divided into two adjacent regions located between the cursors For the Compress shift type the two regions shift toward the center point For the Expand shift type the two regions shift away from the center The Shift Scale Value item determines the amount of shift for the Compress and Expand operations In the example of Figure 4A 57 the shift type is Compress The original data left side of figure is compressed as shown by the right example Data Compressed by 1 Sampling Point Sampling Point VA
166. SETUP menu Fig ure 4A 128 shows an example of the data and output waveform for an autostep file Autostep File Output Condi tions Amplitude 2 V Offset 0 V Waveform SIN 1 WFM Amplitude 1 V _ Offset 0 V SQUARE WFM Amplitude 1 V Offset 0 5 V EDIT Menu New Edit Autostep Step 1 Step 2 N 7 1 5V Step 3 ov RAMP WEM Figure 4A 128 Autostep File Data and Output Waveforms Entering the Autostep Editor Procedure C Step 1 Press the EDIT button in the MENU column The initial EDIT menu will appear g Step 2 Select More from the side menu to display the second page of the side menu More 2 of 2 C Step 3 Select Edit or New Autostep from the side menu Edit Used to select and edit an existing autostep file AST New Autostep Used to create a new autostep file The autostep editor screen will appear Saving Files and Exiting the Editor Select Exit Write from the bottom menu in the autostep editor to save the file which you have either created or edited to the internal memory of the AWG2040 and exit from the editor depending on the selected side menu item The same procedure is used to save the file and exit from the autostep editor as for the waveform editor See Saving Files and Exiting the Editor in the section on the waveform editor AWG2040 User Manual 4A 177 EDIT Menu Autostep Editor Menu Structure
167. Sampling Function SIN X X Pulse Formula and Waveform Constants kO indicates the frequency of the sine wave k1 indicates the peak location of the pulse Description In general this waveform is expressed by the following formula _ Sin 2zft V t taf This is the impulse response for the ideal low pass filter for the frequency bandwidth f At least 42 periods are required in order to use a vertical resolu tion of 8 bits Settings Waveform points 2048 Clock frequency 1 0 GHz Output time 2048 ns Appendix C Sample Waveform Library Squared Sine Pulse SQU_SIN WFM Made with the equation editor squared sine pulse range 8 4125 range 412ns 612ns cos 2 p i x 5 1 2 Fange 612ns 1624ns _SIB LWEM 4 Figure C 4 Squared Sine Pulse Formula and Waveform Description The pulse width and peak location are set with range The value for x is a value between 0 and 1 for range a b Settings Waveform points 1024 Clock frequency 1 0 GHz Output time 1024 ns AWG2040 User Manual C 5 Appendix C Sample Waveform Library C 6 Double Exponential Pulse D_LEXP WFM This is the rising and falling exponential function pulse Made with the equa tion editor double exponential pulse range 9 16240ns 3 k1 50e 9 rise time constant k2 1808e 9 fall time constant exp t k2 exp t k1 norm a ee 8 500 n l 0 BOO i Paes aa
168. Selecting Instruments Made by Other Manufacturers 4D 4 Auto k ade eussi tesit tenean e aa dia 4D 1 4D 1 4E 1 4E 1 4E 2 4E lt Disk and Nonvolatile Memory ccceecuceaeees 4E 4 Using the Disk Menu 0 0 00 c cece cece eee eceveceveveees 4E 4 Floppy Disk Format 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 c cece cece cas eeeeeeeees 4E 4 Handling Floppy Disks 2 0 0 0 0 c cece ccc ceeeen ees 4E Protecting Disks From Accidental Erasure 0005 4E 7 Creating and Changing Directories 0 0000 00 cceeee ee eee 4E Operating Files Saved to Disk 0 000 0c cece eee eae 4E 11 Locking and Unlocking a File 2 20 2c ccc cece eee ee eee 4E 12 Internal Non volatile Memory 2 000 cece ccc cee ceee eee unn 4E 12 Remote Interface l a 00 0 cece eee ccceveseccccaneuees 4E 13 GPIB a avsstvertie simi g ns a aae e qua Saas Se ga abend aaa 4E 13 Table of Contents Appendices AWG2040 User Manual GPIB Connection oo cece sn tia p ee ien ee vated erent ne des 4E 13 Setting GPIB Configuration 6 06 cece eee e ener ees 4E 13 SBS ek kav hag EE eae ee So TE 4E 15 RS 232 C Connection 6 0 6 cee eee e eee teen ene 4E 15 Setting the RS 232 C Parameters 06 sc eee scene eens 4E 15 Date and Time cece eee e cere cence nee nee en enna 4E 17 Setting the Date and Time 0 ce even eet rete ene e etree eee 4E 17 Other Settings and Displays
169. Settings for hard copy output 4E 25 Format Selecting the format 4E 25 Port Selecting the port 4E 26 Status Status display 4E 28 System System and GPIB RS 232 C status 4E 28 Yo O event reporting 4E 29 Diag Cal Diagnostics and calibration 4E 30 Diagnostics Diagnostics 4E 30 eae Calibrations Calibration 4E 31 oe interactive Test Pattern display for instrument adjustment 4E 32 AWG2040 User Manual 4E 3 UTILITY Menu Disk and Nonvolatile Save the files created with the Editor onto internal nonvolatile memory Memory and or 3 5 inch floppy disks Using the Disk Menu This item can format disks make directories on disks change the current Disk directory edit files saved to disk etc Insert the 3 5 inch floppy disk into this instrument s floppy disk drive then select Disk from the bottom menu The files saved in the root directory and AWG2040 directory are read out and displayed on the CRT screen When Disk is selected in the bottom menu the following items will appear in the side menu m Rename Delete e Delete All Lock m Change Directory Make Directory m Format The side menu is made up of 2 pages Select More to display the second page of the side menu PE EEEE Floppy Disk Format eoat This instrument can format 2DD double density and 2HD high density i disks in three different MS DOS formats IBM PC format NEC PC9800 series format and Toshiba J3100 series format Formatt
170. Stop Bits Stop Bits This item selects 1 or 2 stop bits Set this parameter to match the connected computer s stop bits Flagging Flagging This item selects None Soft or Hard This item is used by this instrument or the computer to announce that the input buffer is full Until the transmission allowed instruction is issued the other device stops the data transfer 4E 16 UTILITY Menu cc Date and Time ym D Date Time When Date Time is selected from the bottom menu a clock will appear on the screen allowing you to set the date and time The side menu will display items for Year Month Day Hour and Minute Pressing one of these items in the side menu will make it possible to set that clock parameter using the general purpose knob The set date and time are recorded as the time stamp when a file is created Figure 4E 11 shows the menu displayed when Date Time is selected GPR ifriggered mode Stopped 11 80 92 IEN Day Figure 4E 11 Menu Displayed When Date Time is Selected Setting the Date and Time Procedure C1 Step 1 Select Date Time from the bottom menu C Step 2 Select Year from the side menu Use the general purpose knob or the numeric keys to set the year oO Step 3 In the same way select the Month Day and Hour and set the month day and hour C Step 4 Select Minute from the side menu Each time the minute is set with the general purpose knob the second is res
171. Stopped rrr ce Oe Sy aay 1624 pts Yalue O 0000 pemmmmenemeemmmmsasnmmen Va Tuc G 00 IKLMNOPERST UVEXYZ 85 BOpeee 012245678 g Waveform Name WEM V C i insert character 1 0080 FRNA Co CD Moye cursi MARKERE i ji iSelect satan Open a Standard waveform l f Zoom Setting Undo t Figure 4A 13 Menu for inputting a File Name NOTE When no editing has been performed in the editor selecting the Write and Close item will not cause the menu used to enter the file name to appear the initial menu will reappear instead 4A 22 EDIT Menu AWG2040 User Manual Now input the file name oO Step 3 Use the general purpose knob to select a character C Step 4 Press the front panel VALUE button The selected character is inserted immediately before the cursor waveform Name ____ WwFM C Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until the entire file name has been en tered In this example we will enter the name SAMPLE Waveform Name WEM Up to 8 characters can be input To delete a character press the Delete key on the front panel This deletes the character right before the cursor The cursor can be moved with the front panel e and buttons NOTE The following can not be used as file names CLOCK CON AUX COM1 COM2 LPT1 LPT2 LPT3 NUL and PRN Also the
172. T na A a E a 4A 1 Figure 4A 128 Autostep File Data and Output Waveforms 4A 1 Figure 44 129 Autostep Editor Menu Structure 4A 17 Figure 4A 130 Autostep Editor CRT Display e iorno vee ceed 4A 1 Figure 4A 131 Selecting the Item for File Setting 0 ccc cee ees 4A 1E Figure 4A 132 File Selection List 0 0 000 0 aa 4A 1 Figure 44 133 Sample File Waveform Display seer rinn hanes 4A 1E Figure 4A 134 Setting a File oauan 4A 1 Figure 44 135 Clock Setting Menu n anane 4A 1E Figure 4A 136 Filter Setting Menu 00sec ceee eee 4A 1E Figure 44 137 Amplitude Setting Menu 0000 4A 1 Figure 44 138 Offset Setting Menu 0 0c cceceeeeeee 4A 1 Figure 4A 139 Marker Setting Menu o on 4A 18 Figure 44 140 Split Join Waveform Editor Menu Structure 4A 19 Figure 44 141 Split Join Waveform Editor CRT Display 4A 19 Figure 4A 142 File List 00 ouaaa nanana cece cece cece eee 4A 19 Figure 44 143 Point Sizes After Splitting Waveform File 4A 19 Figure 4A 144 Waveform File Data Before and After Copy Cut 4A 20 Figure 4A 145 Waveform File Data Before and After Insertion 4A 20 Figure 44 146 Convolution Waveform Editor Menu Structure 4A 20 Figure 4A 147 Convolution Waveform Editor CRT Display 4A 20 Figure 44 148 Selecting a Waveform File 0 0 4A 20 Figure 44 149 Sample Convolution
173. TEP IN connector on the rear panel or when Next Step under Config in the side menu is selected When the AWG2040 is waiting for a trigger signal the voltage for the first point of the waveform file to be output will be generated at the output termi nals in accordance with the amplitude and offset settings When the trigger or gate signal becomes valid for this instrument the Wait ing for Trigger display in the status area of the CRT display changes to Running and the waveform or sequence is output When output stops the status area display returns to the original Waiting for Trigger These displays may not be able to keep up if the interval between trigger signals is short When the MODE button in the MENU column is pressed a list appears showing the names of the waveforms or sequence files selected in the SETUP menu and the contents of the sequence files AWG2040 User Manual 4C 1 MODE Menu MODE Menu Figure 4C 1 shows the configuration of the MODE menu Structure MENU Button Bottom Menu Side Menu Select Item m Cont y si m Positive ee Negative Level Triggered Impedanca r 500 gg camer STOP i Positive Polarity Negative H Level 500 Gated H impedance IQ L STOP m Positive Slope Negative m Level sm MODE Burst Impedance KO Burst Count STOP si Positive Ope t Negative __ W
174. TUP Menu 4B 4 1 Display Area for CH1 Waveform Sequence Waveform Shows the waveform or sequence file waveform indicated in the CH1 file input column If the file is locked an L is shown in the upper right hand corner of this area 2 Clock Setting Shows the display of the clock source or the frequency for the internal clock 3 CH1 Output Parameter Settings Shows the filter applied to output the amplitude of the output waveform and the offset setting 4 Channel Output On Off Shows whether channel output is on or off To turn channel output on or off use the channel On Off button on the front panel 5 Marker Level Setting Shows the high level low level settings for Markert and Marker2 6 Output Parameter Status The output status of the waveform or sequence waveform is shown as follows Period Period Points Number of data points Max Upper voltage for full scale vertical axis when terminated with 50Q Min Lower voltage for full scale vertical axis when terminated with 50Q The period is the number of data points in the waveform or sequence multiplied by the clock frequency SETUP Menu Selecting the Display Format for the SETUP Menu Display Graphics Text The SETUP menu can be displayed in either graphic or text form Graphics This is the mode normally used This format displays the output parameters connected in the form of a circuit Selected parameters are indicated by a i
175. The Autostep Editor menu has the structure shown in Figure 4A 129 Autostep Editor 1 Select Operation from the bottom menu 2 Select the icon on the screen 3 Press the VALUE button Bottom Menu po Operation Jump Undo Side Menu Cut Step Copy Step Paste Step Insert New Step Append New Step Insert Current SETUP Step No To First Step ExitWrite Clock Filter Anpi Offset markiH MarkiL Mark2H Mark2L Sd Ea E To Last Step r Write and Exit Exit without Writing Write r Internal Clock _ External Clock Default Value Show Catalog Entry Clear Set Without Parameter Set m Through H 100 MHz 50 MHz m 20 MHz 10 MHz Amplitude Default Value f Offset Default Value Maker High Default Value Makert Low Default Value Maker2 High Default Value m Maker2 Low i Default Value Figure 4A 129 Autostep Editor Menu Structure 4A 178 EDIT Menu Menu Functions The following list shows the functions available for each menu item and the page on which you can find a description of that function Table 4A 8 Menu Functions Editing functions Operation Cut Step Cutting a step 4A 190 Copy Step Copying a step 4A 190 Paste Step Pasti
176. UP menu C Step 6 Select Autostep from the bottom menu The menu shown in Figure 2 55 will appear GPIB utostep mode Stopped autostep file Step f i Autostep f i cH i i Level iay Impedance o 300 H Fe A cont Trigger Gated Burst Waveform Advance i Figure 2 55 Menu Display When Autostep is Selected C Step 7 Select Config from the side menu The Config sub menu will appear C Step 8 Choose Select Autostep File from the sub menu A list of autostep files will appear 2 63 Operating Examples SAMPLE 6 AST Run CAnUAuaUs Step MANUAL 0 Next Step 2 64 Figure 2 56 Autostep File List O Step 9 Using the general purpose knob select the SAMPLE 6 AST file In this example there is only one file in the list so it will already be selected C Step 10 Select O K from the sub menu C Step 11 Press the Run button and select Continuous from the sub menu C Step 12 Press the CH1 On Off buttons on the front panel to turn on waveform output C Step 13 Press the MANUAL button on the front panel After pressing the MANUAL button check on the oscilloscope to make sure the waveform is output C Step 14 Select Next Step from the sub menu The waveform will advance to the next step C Step 15 Repeat Steps 13 and 14 to output all of the waveforms in the autostep file This completes the Example 3
177. User Manual SONY Tektronix AWG2040 Arbitrary Waveform Generator 070 8957 01 This document applies for Serial Number J310101 and above Please check for change information at the rear of this manual First Edition September 1994 Copyright Tektronix Inc 1994 All rights reserved Tektronix products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Information in this publication supercedes that in all previously published material Specifications and price change privileges reserved Printed in the U S A Tektronix Inc P O Box 1000 Wilsonville OR 97070 1000 TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc 3H PS A WARRANTY Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three 3 months from the date of shipment and that the cathode ray tubes CRTs in such products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for an additional period of nine 9 months If any such product proves defective during the initial three month period Tektronix at its option either will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor or will provide a replacement in exchange for the defective product If during the succeeding nine month period the CRT proves defective Tektronix will replace the defective CRT without charge for parts and labor In order to obtain service under this warranty Customer
178. WR invert Polarity 8 Invert f Hi ossggay i f i i a 0 30004 Ez Duty Setting the Polarity This item sets the output waveform polarity Each time the Polarity button ir the side menu is pressed the polarity toggles between Normal and Invert and the polarity of the displayed waveform is reversed See figure 4F 5 The figure below at left shows a Ramp wave whose polarity has been set to Normal the figure on the right shows a Ramp wave whose polarity has been set to Invert Polarity 1 i i f i a soney Figure 4F 5 Waveform Polarity Setting the Duty The Duty item appears in the side menu when the pulse wave is selected This item allows you to set the duty ratio for pulse waveforms The duty is set to 0 A 100 in steps of 1 The Duty item is set with the numeric keys or the general purpose knob When the duty is set to 0 or 100 the wave will be DC Figure 4F 6 shows a pulse waveform whose duty value has been set to 30 CHI 0 Se00y ___ B 5000 4 Figure 4F 6 Setting the Duty Value for a Pulse Wave 4F 6 Function Waveform Generator Mode Marker Output Marker signals are generated at the starting point for waveform data Marker 1 is a positive pulse signal while Marker 2 is the inverted Marker 1 signal These signals are output from the CH1 MARKER 1 and CH1 MARKER 2 connectors respectively on the front panel Th
179. a 18240 Points Clock 18 09 ne Figure C 5 Double Exponential Pulse Formula and Waveform Constants k1 and k2 are the rising and falling time constants respectively The peak location for the pulse is derived using the following formula ki k2 k2 ka k Description This is the waveform when a charged capacitor is discharged to the RC circuit When the time constants for charging and discharging are taken to bet and tz respectively the waveform can be expressed by the following formula va exp L exo 1 Settings Waveform points 10240 Clock frequency 1 0 GHz Output time 10240 ns Appendix C Sample Waveform Library Nyquist Pulse NYQUIST WFM Made with the equation editor nyquist pulse range 8 1624ns i k0 50e 9 data period k1 512e 9 peak location k2 6 5 excess bandwidth factor 6 to 6 5 ied dapat orien kQ 1 2 k2 t k1 Ac0 42 vas in p le t k1 kO p i t k1 k0 ptseaanecneaenaamssssaatenat e RVAST WEM 0 5800 8 000 Figure C 6 Nyquist Pulse Formula and Waveform Constants kO is the period of the digital data used in communication or recording k1 is the pulse peak location and k2 is the transient frequency band factor and is a value between 0 to 1 Description This is the impulse response of a wave shaping Nyquist filter The shoulder characteristics of this filter are referr
180. able Figure 2 22 Connections in Example 2 C Step 14 Press the CH1 On Off button on the front panel to switch on waveform output Figure 2 23 shows the channel On Off button and indicator On Off Indicators cH1 CAT __ amp MAX OPEN CIRCUIT 509 On Off Buttons Figure 2 23 Channel On Off Buttons and indicators When the Channel is on the indicator lights up and the set waveform is output from the CH1 output connector oO Step 15 Set the parameters for the connected oscilloscope as shown below and display the waveform on the oscilloscope screen Volt Div 200mV Div Time Div 20us Div Trigger Mode Auto When you change the Clock Amplitude or Offset items with the SETUP menu the waveform changes in real time This completes the Example 2 2 33 Operating Examples Example 3 Creating Files and Arbitrary Waveform Outputs EDIT When using the instrument for arbitrary waveform output you should first use the editors in the EDIT menu to create the waveform to be output In this operation you wili create an arbitrary waveform with the editors and then you will set the conditions for waveform output frequency amplitude offset etc in the SETUP menu Finally you will set the operation mode in the MODE menu to output the waveform In Example 3 we will practice the following series of operations Creating a Waveform File Creating Arbitrary Waveforms Using the Point D
181. ae amma 072 34 86 7 8 810 iT ois 34 66 7 8 910 i 12 Original Data Data Compressed by 1 Figure 44 57 Data Compressed Using the Compress item EDIT Menu The Shift Values For Selecting Expand or Compress Expand The maximum vaiue that you can specify for a shift is the number of waveform data points If a section of data is shifted beyond the maximum number of data points the data contained in that section is lost after the shift Compress The value of the shift must be less than one half the size of the area surrounded by the left and right vertical bar cursors If the Data Value item described on page 4A 78 is set to Replace the section that exceeds the position of one half the region is lost after the shift Shift Scale Value en When shifting waveform data it is possible to specify a Shift Scale Value with a precision that exceeds that of the sampling points In the AWG2040 arbitrary waveform generator values may be specified with a resolution as fine as 1 4999 point However it is not always possible to realize a shift of that precision due to the form of the waveform itself Changes in the lowest digit of the shift value will not be reflected in the output unless the amplitude of the original waveform spans the full scale of the data representation NOTE Since data values between the data points are calculated by interpolation when shifting by a fractional value certain c
182. age E 7 Procedure 1 Install test hookup and set test equipment controls a Hook up frequency counter Connect the AWG2040 CH1 o tp t connector through a BNC coaxial cable to the input connector on the frequency counter see Figure E 12 AWG2040 Frequency Counter aS aes Figure E 12 Clock Frequency Accuracy Initial Test Hookup b Set frequency counter controls CHANNEL A Termination 50Q Slope Attenuation X5 Coupling AC FREQ A AWG2040 User Manual E 27 Performance Tests 2 Set AWG2040 controls and select the waveform a Initialize ANG2040 controls Push UTILITY Misc Config Re set to Factory 0 K b Select the waveform in the FG menu Push F G Sine wave is se lected as default waveform c Turn on the AWG2040 CH1 output Push the CH1 button so that the LED above the CH1 output connector is on 3 Check clock frequency accuracy Check that the frequency counter reading is in the range 10 MHz 10 Hz 4 End procedure Disconnect the frequency counter Amplitude and Offset Accuracy Checks E 28 These procedures check the accuracy of the AWG2040 waveform output amplitude and offset NOTE The amplitude and offset accuracy checks are structured as a continuous test After Check Gain Accuracy the next test uses the control settings from the last test and uses the next step in the sequence file Check Amplitude Accuracy Electrical Characteri
183. al The clock icon shown below will be displayed on the screen ext Clk in mal The period for the output waveform is controlied by the external clock input from the CLOCK IN connector on the rear panel AWG2040 User Manual 4B 11 SETUP Menu ee Setting Filter Fitter The filters selections are 100 50 20 10 MHz and Through Procedure To set Filter perform these steps C Step 1 Select Filter from the bottom menu The filter icon will be high lighted on the screen oO Step 2 Turn the general Purpose knob to select the filter Use Amplitude and Offset to set the output amplitude and offset for the vertical axis 8 bit full scale voltage These values are terminated with 509 Setting Amplitude and Offset Figure 4B 7 shows the display when the amplitude is set to 1 V and the offset is set to 1 V Min Figure 4B 7 Amplitude and Offset Setting Setting the amplitude and offset determines Max and Min vaiues shown to the left of the waveform In the example shown in Figure 4B 7 the Max and Min values are as follows Max 1 500V 50Q Min 0 500V 50Q 4B 12 SETUP Menu Amplitude 1 offset AWG2040 User Manual Setting Amplitude Procedure g Step 1 Select Amplitude from the bottom menu The amplitude icon will be highlighted on the screen oO Step 2 Use the numeric keys or the general purpose knob to set the amplitude The output amplit
184. ame in all display formats graphic timing and table In the following section each of these items will be discussed in detail Selecting the Waveform Data Display Format View typeis The View type item allows you to set the display format for the waveform Sron data There are three choices graphic timing and table The following diagram shows the menu configuration Graphic M Timing 1 Setting More 1 of 2 View type L Table Go Back 4A 32 EDIT Menu When you open the waveform editor Graphic display is selected as the default option If you want to change the display format select Setting from the bottom menu and then View type from the side menu then select the desired format Timing or Table from the sub menu Pressing the Go Back button cancels the operation and causes the side menu to reappear See page 4A 91 for a discussion of timing display and page 4A 117 for a discus sion of table display Setting Waveform Point Count beset Waveform Points sets the number of points for waveform data The follow ing diagram shows the menu configuration f Setting More 1 of 2 Waveform Points be The following formula is used to derive the number of points per period for the waveform to be created Clock frequency No of points Frequency of output waveform For example for output of a 20 kHz sine wave setting the clock frequency to
185. an Equation File This procedure is used to create a waveform using equations 0 Step 1 Select New Equation from the side menu Figure 2 37 shows the equation editor menu GPIB Continuous mode Stopped File Name sarraret E Line i Operation cut Line i i f i Copy to Buffer Paste from Buffer i 2of2 insert other Equation Figure 2 37 Equation Editor Menu Display To initially define an equation you must specify its region in time Do this by selecting range in the component menu When a new equation file is created range 0 will automatically appear in the first line of the equation Following this notation you must input the equation end time as shown in subsequent steps Select Setting from the bottom menu When this is done the default setting 1024 for the number of points will appear If the clock frequency has been set to 1 024 MHz in the SETUP menu the value will be 0 9765625us for each point Accordingly for 1024 points the waveform period will be 1 ms C Step 2 Select Operation from the bottom menu g Step 3 Set the time from 0 to 500us Press the 5 0 0 us and 4 carriage return in order using the numeric keys and unit key or by selecting and entering these characters from the items in the compo nent menu 2 47 Operating Examples You can use the general purpose knob to select an item fro
186. ancel Q K NOTE When a new waveform file is created the marker signal for the first point of the waveform data is set to high as a default value The output level for the marker signal is set using Marker Level in the SETUP menu With 50Q termination the high level can be set between 2 0 and 1 9 V while the low level can be set between 1 9 and 2 0 V The mark er signals are output from the CH1 MARKER 1 and CH1 MARKER 2 con nectors on the front panel Procedure C Step 1 Move the left and right vertical bar cursors to define the area for marker setting then select Marker from the third page of the side menu More 3 of 3 C Step 2 Press Marker in the side menu and select which marker signal is to be set MARKER 1 or MARKER 2 C Step 3 Press the sub menu Set High or Set Low button to set the desired marker state Figure 4A 38 shows marker signal set high be tween the vertical bar cursors Set High The marker signal for the section of the waveform between the vertical bar cursors will be set to High 4A 59 EDIT Menu Set Low The marker signal for the section of the waveform between the vertical bar cursors will be set to Low Before After Figure 4A 38 Marker Signal Set High C Step 4 Select Go Back from the sub menu The display returns from the Marker sub menu to the side menu Setting a Marker Pattern In this example you will set a pattern for the marker an
187. and check to make sure that the vertical bar cursor in editing area 2 moves the same distance Procedure In the following procedure you will unlink the vertical bar cursors that you linked in the previous example while the waveform in editing area 1 is being edited oO Step 1 Select Select Open from the bottom menu C Step 2 Select Waveform2 from the side menu C Step 3 Select Setting from the bottom menu C Step 4 Select More item to display More 2 of 2 from the side menu and then select Cursor Link to C Step 5 Select Link Off from the sub menu The link will be canceled and the 1 at the top of editing area 2 will disappear 44 37 EDIT Menu Grid Off 44 38 Displaying a Grid in the Editing Area This item is used to display a grid in the editing area to make it easier to edit the waveform The following diagram shows the menu configuration f of Setting More 2 of 2 Grid On Figure 44 22 shows an example of an editing area with the grid set to On GPIB Continuous mode Stopped f Off More 2of2 Switch Cursor Isetect ononon Ja Open esas Zoom 5 H H i T Standard Gosez sens H Undo iwaveform write a i i Figure 4A 22 Grid Set to On C Step 1 Select Setting from the bottom menu QO Step 2 Select More item to display More 2 of 2 from the side menu C Step 3 Press the Grid button in the side menu and select
188. aphic Display Screen 1 File Name The name of the waveform file being edited The number preceding the file name indicates the sequential number of that editing waveform In this editor up to three waveforms can be displayed and edited at the same time If the name has not been set is displayed 2 L Value Shows the left vertical bar cursor position time or point value L and the vertical level Value When the cursor value is displayed inverted this means the cursor value can be changed with the general purpose knob or numeric keys 3 A Shows the time or point count between the left and right vertical bar cursors EDIT Menu 4 Horizontai Scroli Indicator When the display is magnified horizontally with Zoom this indicator is displayed to show which waveform point positions are in the CRT display area The area displayed on the CRT is shown with inverted display 5 R Value Shows the right vertical bar cursor position time or point value R and the vertical level Value 6 Number of Waveform Points Shows the number of points in the waveform being edited 7 Top Waveform Level Shows the top level for the waveform data displayed on the CRT 8 Vertical Scroll Indicator When the display is magnified vertically with Zoom this indicator is dis played to show where the CRT display area is in terms of the vertical axis full scale The area displayed on the CRT is shown with inverted display
189. aps button is pressed Setting Register Values Use Set All Regs in the sub menu to set all register values to 1 Sample Settings for Register Values and Taps You can easily set register and tap values as follows Register Length 3 Register Value 101 Use Set Maximal Linear Taps to set taps Figure 4A 94 shows the output for the above settings This output will be the maximum length code series Output y 1 d i 1 period _ m 7 0 1 707171 47007 0 WW Figure 4A 94 Sample Settings for Register Values and Taps Point Step Point Step is used to set how many points make up each data bit The data after Code conversion will be one item of bit data For example when NRZI is selected for Code and Point Step is set to 2 each data bit will consist of 4 points e Point Step BEE Code This command selects the code system used when data pattern strings are output The user defined code enables you to define a custom conversion table For a detailed description of each code see Pattern Codes in Ap pendix D EDIT Menu AWG2040 User Manual User defined Code Config The following process is used to execute a user defined code conversion C Step 1 Select Shift Register Generator from the side menu C Step 2 Select User defined Code Config from the sub menu oO Step 3 Define the codes as desired For the basic operations used w
190. arbitrary magnitude and phase Immediately after you select the Draw item a point cursor will appear midway between the vertical bar cursors in the center of the vertical axis The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Draw item m Add Draw Point t Delete Draw Point Mag Operation Draw Draw Area L phase Go Back Execute Figure 44 154 shows an example of the screen with the Draw item selected AWG2040 User Manual 4A 215 EDIT Menu 4A 216 ered mode File Name operation Fregi freg2 Operation Magnitude Magniiude p Gomiz Phase 153 I ot RE Phas Y 8 00660R Add quum TuT 3627MiZ Draw Point i Delete oi Draw Point Draw Area i Mag Phase aan Ga Back L rsor dir Switch point ca Figure 4A 154 Menu Displayed When Draw is Selected When you select Draw from the side menu the following items will appear in the sub menu Add Draw Point Delete Draw Point Draw Area Go Bac k and Execute Each of these items will be explained below in detail Procedure o Step 1 Select Operation from the bottom menu and then select O Draw from the side menu Step 2 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel Using the general purpose knob move the left and right vertical bar cursors
191. ard Close aveform write Zoom Setting Unde Figure 4A 10 Waveform2 Added BRAS C Step 6 Select Another Waveform from the side menu oO Step 7 Using the general purpose knob select a waveform file In this i example we will select an existing waveform file C Step 8 Select Show Catalog Entry from the sub menu This allows you to check the waveform for the selected file on the screen See Figure 4A 11 SIRE WEM Figure 4A 11 Menu Display When Show Catalog Entry is Selected AWG2040 User Manual 4A 19 EDIT Menu 4A 20 C Step 9 Select Continue from the sub menu C Step 10 Select O K from the sub menu Waveform3 will be added to the side menu and the Waveform editing area will appear on the screen See Figure 4A 12 GPIB Cantinuous mode Stopped Select La OPH Waveform f ssasnrar WER waveform2 Re BEN AIR Raum alue 0 8157 Ral ar Ti aT 1024 ps Value 0 8668 Close i i 5 Setting unde weit i waveform Figure 4A 12 Waveform3 Added The three waveform items Waveform1 Waveform2 and Waveform3 will be displayed in the side menu You will select the waveform to be edited from among these items g Step 11 Select Waveform2 from the side menu A box will appear around the editing area to indicate that this waveform has been se lected To close a waveform sel
192. ata can be inserted into a waveform or used for opera tions with waveforms by selecting Insert Other Waveform or Math from the Operation menu 4A 47 EDIT Menu Draw Function This command is used to draw points between the specified vertical bar cursors and connect these points to create an arbitrary waveform The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Draw item Draw TN Add Draw Point Delete Draw Point o Operation More 1 of 3 Draw Smooth E on Go Back Execute Figure 44 29 shows an example of the screen with the Draw item se lected This figure will be discussed in the following section Continuous mode Stopped fieesssare L824 pts i T8076 Operation Add Draw Point Delete Execute Ce Select Open i Standard closes Waveform write Zoom Setting Undo Figure 4A 29 Menu Display When Draw Item is Selected 1 Point Cursor Used to draw points When this cursor can be moved the direction in which it can be moved is shown by the arrows 2 X Y Coordinate Axis Shows the X and Y coordinates of the point cursor described in 1 above When the coordinates for a coordinate axis are displayed inverted it indi cates that the cursor can be moved in that direction 44 48 EDIT Menu 3 Button Operations Tae y GUE Switch Corser Pressing the CURSOR butt
193. ation Fi 1 FX 2 Foc n Here n is the number of waveform points and i is an integer in the range i 1 2 4n Ax int Figure D 4 quation Differentiation AWG2040 User Manual D 3 Appendix D Miscellaneous The values at the first and last points are obtained not from the center devi ation but from the following equations First point n 3f x 4F x F x pg Bile afd ead Last point P NAF Xp 2 44 x Se Sf x I ntegration The integ function integrates numerically based on a trapezoidal formula The trapezoidal formula is expressed with the following equation rax Bal et DELO A ASI ffx 2f 2 q fO n Here nis ae number of waveform points and i is an integer in the range i 1 2 f x LA Xi Xit Xi Xit Xn Figure D 5 Equation Integration D 4 Appendix D Miscellaneous The integration is actually calculated with the following formula ron 1 2 f x Aa 2f o Ana F n However the imaginary initia value f xo always takes a value of 0 tt Random rnd Function AWG2040 User Manual Arandom number generation algorithm uses an uniform distribution random generation routine and the central limit theorem to derive Gaussian distribu tion random numbers Central limit theorem when the independent random variables X1 X2 and Xa conform to an identical random distribution the mean and variance of
194. ave L Save All Save r Load LOAD SAVE GPIB Load Load Without Preamble __ Select Source Address r from Disk L Auto Load from NVRam Off Figure 4D 2 LOAD SAVE Menu Structure This item is displayed when an equation file EQU has been selected in the list of files contained in the instrument s internal memory Menu Functions The following table describes the function of each of the menu items and gives the number of the page on which you can find a more detailed ex planation of that item Table 4D 1 Menu Functions Device Selecting the device Loading files from mass memory into internal memory Saving files form internal memory to mass memory Transferring waveform data directly Auto Load Auto loading AWG2040 User Manual 4D 3 LOAD SAVE Menu LOAD Menu Di splay Figure 4D 3 shows the general display for the LOAD menu A description fo each callout follows GPIB Triggered made Stopped Catalog Memory Free 2372K8 Name Type Size Date amp Time Comment ERIR S WEM T783T OF T1 1S 72 ad DLEXPLE WFW 20848 93 11 12 12 33 EXP REM 9140 93 11 12 12 GAUSS_P WEN 9149 93 11 12 12 33 scien Wis oii iza 2096 93 11 12 12 34 Load All 32948 93 11 12 12 37 9149 93 11 12 12 36 Catalog gt NYRaM Free gt 13KB Name Type Size Date amp Time Comment SAMPLE q WM 2948 93 Tied 12 08 S 2 30 a OTT
195. aveform m Level Sa Advance Impedance 500 L STOP ee S m Positive Ope Negative H Level Autostep Impedance sa e 1Q H Config STOP Slave Figure 4C 1 MODE Menu Structure 4C 2 MODE Menu Menu Functions The following table describes the function of each of the menu items and gives the number of the page on which you can find a more detailed ex planation of that item Table 4C 1 Menu Functions Cont 4C 6 Triggered 4C 6 Gated 4C 7 Burst Setting the operating mode 4C 8 Waveform Advance 4C 10 Autostep 4C 12 Slave 4C 17 Slope 40 16 Polarity 40 16 ae Setting trigger parameters for an external trigger gate acae Impedance 4C 17 Burst Count Number of bursts 40 8 Config Et Starting an autostep program 40 13 STOP Stopping waveform output 40 5 AWG2040 User Manual 4C MODE Menu MODE Menu Display Figure 4C 2 shows the general display for the MODE menu GPIB Orn Autostep file SAMPLE AST Step 3 i Autostep iting for Trigger i Slope arses i O cHt LO Negative Sequence ae SAPTE SEN PTO WNT SPLIT O3 WME Impedance SPLE 7 02 WF i 509 SPL T 03 wei o ae i Config a H nea Cont pea Gated Burst Advance Figure 4C 2 MODE Menu CRT Display 1 Autostep Files and Step Numbers Shows the name of the currently selected autostep file and the step
196. ay area The waveform is displayed in this area The peak voltage for the waveform is shown on the vertical axis this value is determined by the amplitude or the offset setting The horizontal axis the dotted line in the center of the wave form indicates the zero line changing the offset will cause the zero line to move up or down 2 Waveform period Shows the period for the waveforms AWG2040 User Manual 4E 3 Function Waveform Generator Mode Setting the Output The following procedure is used to set the output waveform for a channel Waveform Channel Channel Since the AWG2040 has only one channel for output pressing this button will have no effect Selecting the Waveform LN NY C Step 1 Press the bottom button corresponding to the desired type of Sine angle waveform Sine Triangle Square Ramp or Puise r 1 Square Ramp Pulse Setting the Output Parameters g Step 2 Select the output parameter item from the side menu and enter a value For details see Setting the Output Parameters for the Wave form on the next page Waveform Output C Step 3 Press the ON OFF button for the channel to which the wave form is to be output The selected waveform will be continuously output to that channel NOTE in FG mode the operation is always Cont meaning that waveforms are output continuously 4F 4 Function Waveform Generator Mode Setting the Output Parameters for the Waveform
197. ayed inverted in the file list in the initial menu If it is not selected turn the general purpose knob until the name SAMPLE 2 is displayed in verted C Step 6 Select Edit from the side menu The SAMPLE 2 waveform file will appear on the screen You will now set the range for waveform creation The arbitrary waveform will be created within this range using the POINT DRAW function C Step 7 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel This will activate the vertical cursor bar in the left hand side of the screen C Step 8 Press 2 5 6 and ENTER to set the point value of the left cursor to 256 g Step 9 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel again to activate the vertical cursor bar in the right hand side of the screen g Step 10 Press 7 6 8 and ENTER to set the point value of the right cursor to 768 GPIB Continuous mode Stopped os mg nekin E br a ais 4 pts Value 9 0008 seems _ Operation Copy te Buffer Paste from Buffer Gard Selects ES pert l l TE aan Zen Setti T i Standard Chose Zuo Setting Unde waveform write Figure 2 32 Setting the Edit Range Operating Examples Operation Draw VALUE Add Draw Point AWG2040 User Manual You may now create the arbitrary waveform within the range designated by these two vertical bar cursors using the POINT DRAW function C Step 11
198. b select a sequence file the file name should end in SEQ from the file list in the initial menu The Ex pand SEQ into WFM item will appear in the side menu CO Step 3 Select Expand SEQ into WFM from the side menu You will be asked to provide a name for the resulting waveform file See Fig ure 4A 6 if necessary change the default name See Renaming a File described above GPIB Continuous mode Stopped Catalog Memory Freg 3789KE Name Tyne a2 RAEE amp Time Comment uu Expand HO_RED SEQ into ADLRED j WFM value insert character D LD Move cursor 9 10 58 2006 z330 93 09 09 10 58 Rename Comment Copy Delete Delete All Figure 4A 6 Menu Displayed When Expand SEQ into WFM is Selected 44 12 EDIT Menu AWG2040 User Manual C Step 4 Press O K to confirm the file name Press Cancel to cancel the operation if a file already exists with the same name as that designated in Step 3 selecting O K will cause a message to appear asking you to confirm that you really want to overwrite the existing file Select O K again to overwrite the existing file select Cancel to leave the existing file intact Before the sequence file is expanded into a waveform file the following message will appear asking you to confirm that you want to delete the source file Delete the sequence and all the component files oO Step 5
199. b menu to switch off smoothing Step 11 Select Execute from the sub menu The points between the vertical bar cursors will be connected with straight lines as shown in the right screen in Figure 4A 30 This is called linear interpolation Displa Linear Interpolated Display y Figure 4A 30 Smoothing NOTE To cancel drawing execution select Undo from the bottom menu The waveform before the drawing is displayed again EDIT Menu g Step 12 Select Go Back from the current sub menu The display moves from the Draw sub menu to the side menu This completes the drawing procedure Shift Function ak Use Shift to shift the waveform data in the area specified with the vertical i bar cursors in the vertical or horizontal direction The following diagram a shows the menu configuration for the Shift item r Horizontal m Shift Vertical Operation More 2 of 3 Shift Value Go Back Execute a In the horizontal direction the shift value is the number of points or time in the vertical direction the shift value is specified with the vertical value Procedure g Step 1 Move the left and right vertical bar cursors to define the section of the waveform to be shifted Then select Shift from the second page of the side menu More 2 of 3 Shift eA P Horizontal shift vertical C Step 2 Press the Shift button in the sub menu to select Horizontal The Shift sub menu i
200. backward ABW TTT tine SIRE WEM COS WEM SQUARE WEM BeLwEM f TRIANGLE WEM ERPWFEM i OMDISK_SLWEM 7 Copy KUSE WEM to buffer SAMPLE LWEM SAMPLE 2 WEM SAMPLE 3 SEa Paste SINE WER ote SEBABE WFM i from Buffer TRIARELE WEM i Show Catalog Entry oo forward Figure 4A 124 Sequence Editor CRT Display 1 File Name The name of the sequence file being edited if the name has not been set yet SEQ is displayed 2 Line The line number displayed inverted in the Destination list or Repeat column 3 Destination List of the waveform or sequence files included in the sequence file being edited EDIT Menu 4 Repeat The repetition count for the file in 3 above The waveform or sequence Tile is repeated the specified number of times This number can be set to any value that the total number of points of the files making up the sequence are up to a maximum of 1M or 4M when Option 01 is installed For example for a sequence containing only 1024 point waveform files the total of the values in the Repeat column can be set anywhere up to 1024 5 Catalog List of the waveform or sequence files in internal memory a sequence file is created by selecting files from this list 6 waveform size 32 A Waveform Size The total number of points in the waveforms in cluded in the sequence file being edit
201. be twso and the peak location is taken to be 0 can be expressed as e __ gives 2 2 In 2 fQ exp 35 and taking the Fourier transform gives v exo ne Substituting o Fljw 210 exp 22 This shows that this signal has a Gaussian form in the frequency domain as well lt Example gt When twso is 10 ns the bandwidth will be 31 2 MHz Appendix C Sample Waveform Library Settings Waveform points 256 Clock frequency 1 0 GHz Output time 256 ns Lorentz Pulse LORENTZ WFM Made with the equation editor lorentz pulse range 9 1024ns k0 20e 9 puise width k1 512e 9 peak location 1 1 2 t k1 k0 2 WEM i LORENTZ econ l 0 0007 Figure C 2 Lorentz Pulse Formula and Waveform Constants kO indicates the half width W50 for the pulse K1 indicates the peak loca tion of the pulse Description When the pulse width is taken to be teso the waveform can be expressed by the following formula Vi etal sees 1 2 tuso Settings Waveform points 1024 Clock frequency 1 0 GHz EE Output time 1024 ns AWG2040 User Manual C 3 Appendix C Sample Waveform Library C 4 Sampling Function SIN X Pulse SINC WFM Made with the equation editor sinc pulse range 6 2648ns k6 50e6 sine frequency k1 1824e 9 peak location 2048 Points Clock 16496 Hz Figure C 3
202. bottom menu This item appears when Time has been selected for Horiz Unit in the side menu under Setting in the bottom menu These items appear when Count Up or Count Down has been selected for Pattern in the side menu under Standard Waveform in the bottom menu AWG2040 User Manual 4A 101 EDIT Menu Menu Select Open Operation Cut Copy to Buffer Paste from Buffer Set Shift Invert Copy Line Exchange Line Logicai Function Data Expand insert Other Waveform Shift Register Generator Zoom Menu Functions The following list shows the functions available for each menu item and the page on which you can find a description of that function Table 44 4 Menu Functions Function Opening and selecting the editing area Editing waveform in timing display Cutting waveform Copying waveform Pasting waveform Setting waveform data Shifting waveform data Inverting waveform data Copying lines Exchanging lines Applying logical operations to lines Expanding waveform data Inserting other waveform data Pseudo random pulse generator using shift register Zooming displayed waveform data Setting Waveform Points View type Horiz Unit Clock Cursor Link to Grid Undo Standard Waveform Close Write Settings for the waveform to be edited Setting waveform point count Selecting the waveform data display format Setting horizontal axis units S
203. by fractional amounts Data values between data points are acquired by interpolation The Interpolation item selects the interpolation method used The following options are provided m Linear interpolation is appropriate if the original waveform consists of straight lines such as triangle or square waves However the peaks in waveforms with extremely sharp peaks may be slightly flattened w Quadratic interpolation is appropriate for waveforms with curves such as sine waves However in waveforms with extremely sharp peaks some peaks may become wider Linear Interpolation Figure 4A 58 provides an example of linear interpola tion If the point Xz is shifted to the left by 0 2 the new value is calculated by interpolating with the next point to the left Xi COX aa Figure 4A 58 Linear Interpolation If the coordinate of the shifted point is X2 then the value of point Yo is given by the following formula Y a 0 2 x Y 1 0 2 x Y 4A 76 EDIT Menu Quadratic Interpolation Figure 44 59 provides an example of quadratic interpolation If point Xz is shifted to the left by 0 2 the new value is calcu lated by interpolation using three points the shifted point the point preced ing the shifted point and the point following the shifted point Xt X Xe Xa Figure 4A 59 Quadratic Interpolation Quadratic interpolation is expressed as follows f x Av Bx C The coefficients A B
204. by trigger Since the output parameters set for each waveform or sequence file are part of the autostep file the output parameters can change for each waveform Split Join Waveform Editor This editor is used to split copy and cut the data in the waveform file to create smaller waveform files It is also used to insert a waveform file at a designated point in another waveform file to create larger waveform file Waveform data is displayed in graphic format EDIT Menu Initial Menu MENU Button To create or edit waveform files press the EDIT button in the MENU column to display the initial menu Figure 4A 1 shows the structure of the initial EDIT menu Initial Menu Structure Editor Bottom Menu Side Menu e AIE AA ANA Initial Menu eae i Selectin an Existing Edit TT File j m New Waveform New Equation EDIT E Graphic Display i Waveform Timi j a eu Editor Timing Display Table Display Ta etnea S New Sequence Sequence Editor New Autostep os e Autostep Editor AST Goi es muihoe as i Split Join o a cree ts ah i Waveform Wi ENTRER Convolve Convolution Waveform Editor Waveform WFM Option 09 E A Selectin Edit i E S an Existing L Frequency FFT Editor Fil Domain wrm Option 09 j are t Selectin an Existing H Expan
205. c Operations L Step 2 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel 44 70 EDIT Menu g Step 3 Using the general purpose knob move the vertical bar cursors to define the area for calculation oO Step 4 Select Dual Waveform Math from the third page of the side menu More 3 of 3 Step 5 A list of files will be displayed on the screen Using the general purpose knob select the file for which the calculations will be per formed Calculations will be executed for both the section of the wave form data being edited between the vertical bar cursors and the selected waveform file Select the waveform for math od Paste Buffer i i Waveform i RCLWEM i C2 WFM H MIRNEM 7 RAMP WER SAMPLE LWEM SAMPLE 2 WEM SIRE WFM SQUARE WERE TRIGRELE WEM Figure 4A 53 List of Files for Waveform Calculation Ol Step 6 Select Show Catalog Entry from the sub menu The waveform for the selected file is displayed See Figure 4A 54 4624 Points Figure 4A 54 Selected File Waveform Display AWG2040 User Manual 4A 71 EDIT Menu G0 Step 7 After verifying the waveform select Continue from the sub menu The waveform will disappear and the system returns to previous Dual Waveform Math sub menu oO Step 8 Select the desired calculation type from the sub menu The moment a calculation type is selected the calculation is carried out and the res
206. cal bar cursors on a data line or marker The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Shift Resister Generator item Line Clear All Taps __ Set Maximal _ Register Linear Taps Contig Set Ali Regs Cancel O K Initial Src Generator User defined it T Initial Code Code Contig fi a Me L m High Low Out VO L Invert Keep Go Back Execute Register Configuration The pseudo random pulse generator with shift register consists of 2 to 32 registers together with the register output for each and the tap of the feed back loop that performs the EX OR operation Selecting Register Config from the sub menu enables you to set the pattern for the shift register gener ator Figure 4A 92 shows the menu used to set the shift register Seqister Length 2g Point Siep Register Position eS Teggle Cursor es Toggle Jap 8 Sel 1 ett Figure 4A 92 Shift Register Configuration Menu 4A 126 EDIT Menu Use the CURSOR button on the front panel to select the items needed for the shift register The following items can be selected the general purpose knob is used to set the desired value for each item Register Length sets the length of the register a Register Position sets the position of the cursor e Point Step sets the number of points per step m Code used to select the data code Setting the Register Length The register
207. cedure CJ Step i Use the same procedure as described in Cutting a Line to line up the inverted display cursor with the line to be copied oO Step 2 Select Copy to Buffer from the side menu When Copy to Buffer is selected the line displayed inverted in the equation list is placed in the paste buffer This item has no effect on the CRT display EDIT Menu insert Other Equation oO Step 3 Use the general purpose knob to specify the position to paste the copied line with the inverted display cursor The position for pasting is directly before the inverted display cursor in the equation list C Step 4 Select Paste from Buffer from the side menu Insert Other Equation File Use Insert Other Equation to select an equation file from internal memory see Figure 44 119 An equation file is inserted from this list into the equa tion list riggered mode __ Btopped Mi MOD EOE h RLCEGU CHRP SEGU BEZP EGG ESP Ee F SAHARE EGU GAUSS P EOU GRENI LEGH HYGBISTESU H i P MODS EGU Cancel sarii SERPEN E Tmax ning rangei LSS Ea rodi i markt dift jint i FK Setting Comple Undo write Figure 4A 119 Menu Displayed When Insert Other Equation is Selected Procedure C Step 1 Use the same procedure as described in Cutting a Line to line up the inverted display cursor with the line where the other equation file is to be inserted
208. ciated with that waveform data are also cut Removing part of a waveform will naturally reduce the number of points in that waveform Figure 4A 27 shows an example of a waveform before and after a section is cut Note that only the section between the two vertical bar cursors is re moved including the bar cursors 44 45 EDIT Menu Figure 4A 27 Cutting Waveforms Waveform data that has been cut is stored in the paste buffer You can paste this data into another editing area by selecting Paste from Buffer insert it into another waveform by selecting Insert Other Waveform or use it to perform calculations with another waveform by selecting Math NOTE if you cut out waveform data by mistake select Undo from the bottom menu to restore the original waveform data Copying Pasting Waveforms copy Paste Use the Copy to Buffer and Paste from Buffer items to copy the edited to Bunter fortuner waveform area and paste it to another location The following diagram shows the menu configuration Operation More 1 of 3 Copy to Buffer Operation More 1 of 3 Paste from Buffer There are no sub menus associated with these commands when they are selected the copy or paste operation is performed instantly Marker signals associated with that waveform data are also subjected to the copy and paste operations Pasting data into a waveform will naturally increase the number of p
209. ck that the value displayed on the DMM is in the range of 1 9V 0 1 V Check MARKER output High level a Select waveform file a Push SETUP gt Waveform Sequence Turn the general purpose knob to highlight the MARKER H WFM file m Push ENTER b Set MARKER2 level to 1 9 V m Push SETUP Marker Level Marker 2 High w Enter numeric value of 1 9 Push 1 and 9 key in this order m Push H2 s V key c Check MARKER2 High level Check that the value displayed on the DMM is in the range of 19V 01V d Set MARKER2 level to 2 V Enter numeric value of 2 Push 2 key m Push Hz s V key e Check MARKER2 High level R Check that the value displayed on the DMM is in the range of 2 0 V 0 1 V E 37 Performance Tests E 38 10 Change hookup Disconnect the BNC coaxial cable from the MARKER2 output connector and connect the cable to the MARKER1 output connec tor Check MARKER output High level a Set MARKER1 level to 1 9 V m Push SETUP gt Marker Level Marker 1 High m Enter numeric value of 1 9 Push 1 and9 key in this order a Push Hz s V key Check MARKER1 High level Check that the value displayed on the DMM is in the range of 1 9 V 0 1 V Set MARKERI level to 2 V Enter numeric value of 2 Push 2 key w Push Hz s V key Check MARKER High level m Check that the value displayed onthe DMM is in the range of 2 0 V0 1 V gH Change t
210. corporates five types of editors the waveform editor the equation editor the sequence editor the autostep editor and the split join waveform editor This makes the AWG2040 perform editing according to the types of the files Instruments with Option 09 installed have a FFT editor to permit editing in the frequency domain and a convolution editor to operate the waveform convolution in high speed The EDIT menu displays a list of files stored in internal memory New files can be created or existing files can be selected from this list and edited See Section 4A for further information LOAD SAVE Menu Press the Load Save bottom button to select the appropriate menu See Section 4D for further information LOAD Menu Used when loading files from a floppy disk or non volatile internal RAM NVRam into the internal memory of the AWG2040 or from another instrument through the GPIB interface SAVE Menu Used when saving files from the internal memory of the AWG2040 to a floppy disk or to the instrument s NVRam UTILITY Menu Use the UTILITY menu to operate on the files saved to a floppy disk or the instrument s NVRam to set the parameters for the GPIB or RS 232 C inter face to execute diagnosis or calibration of the instrument See Section 4E for further information Overview AWG2040 User Manual 9 and Buttons Use the arrow buttons to shift to the right left of the input digit or cursor that indicates the input
211. correct The AWG2040 operates correctly in ambient temperatures from 10n to 40n and relative humidity from 20 to 80 If this instrument is stored at temperatures outside this usage temperature range do not switch on the power until the chassis has come within the usage temperature range For the information on the other operating environment see Appendix B Performance Characteristics NOTE if you are installing this instrument in the dedicated rack refer to the instruction sheet that comes with the rack mounting kit g Step 2 Before switching on the power double check that there is nothing blocking the flow of air at the fan and air intake holes This instrument takes in outside air and cools itself by forcibly exhaust ing air with the fan on its left side Leave space at the sides of this instru ment so that the heat generated within the instrument does not build up and harm the operation There are holes for air intake on the sides and bottom of this cabinet After switching on the power double check that the fan is turning Here are the minimums for the space at the sides of this instrument Top and rear 3 inches Left and right 6 inches AWG2040 User Manual LES Start Up Always unplug the power cord from the socket before checking the line fuse to avoid electrical shock AN C Step 3 Remove the fuse from the fuse holder on the rear panel and check the fuse To remove the fuse turn it co
212. creation EDIT Menu Operation backward ma Cut Line OC WEM EXP WEM MOIS WWM copy to Buffer TRIARCLE WFM Show Catalog Entry E forward Co i v32 7 168 AG te Move destination mode fumer Enter Repeat Show Overview ue Figure 4A 125 Sequence File Creation Example Button Functions To select files within the Destination list press the CURSOR button then select with the general purpose knob or numeric keys When the numeric keys are used input the specified line number in the Line input column at the top left of the CRT screen Pressing the VALUE or ENTER button enters this line number and moves the inverted display cursor to the specified line number When the CURSOR button has been pressed if the VALUE button or EN TER button is pressed the system goes into Insert mode Pressing either of these buttons again inserts the file selected from the Catalog into the Des tination list Pressing the gt button causes the inverted cursor to move to the right or downward Pressing the lt button causes the inverted cursor to move to the left or upward AWG2040 User Manual 4A 171 EDIT Menu Operation 4A 172 Cut Line copy to Buffer Paste from Buffer Editing Functions When you select Operation in the bottom menu the following items appear in the side menu Cut Line a Copy to Buffer u Paste from
213. d SEQ SEQ File Rename Comment _ Selecting 1 Copy an Existing lL Delete m Delete All Lock On Off Figure 4A 1 Initial EDIT Menu Structure AWG2040 User Manual 4A3 EDIT Menu Menu Functions The following list shows the functions available for each menu item and the page on which you can find a description of that function Table 4A 1 Menu Functions Edit Editing an existing file New Waveform Creating a new file WFM Waveform editor Graphic display Timing display Table display New Equation Creating a new file EQU Equation editor New Sequence Creating a new file SEQ Sequence editor Creating a new file AST Autostep editor Split join waveform editor Expanding a sequence file into a waveform file New Autostep Split join Waveform Expand SEQ into WFM Convolve Waveform Convoiution waveform editor option 09 FFT editor option 09 Edit in Frequency Domain Rename Renaming a file Comment Comment input Copy Copying a file Lock Onon 44 4 Page 4A 7 4A 7 4A 15 4A 27 4A 32 44 44 4A 32 4A 99 4A 32 4A 131 4A 7 4A 141 4A 7 4A 165 4A 7 4A 176 4A 192 4A 12 4A 202 4A 208 4A 8 4A 9 4A 9 4A 10 4A 10 4A 11 EDIT Menu CRT Display Figure 4A 2 shows the initial menu of the EDIT A description for each callout follows GPIB ontnuous mode Stopped a y gt Catalo
214. d line oO Step 3 Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob move the left cursor to the starting point for the editing operation you wish to perform C Step 4 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel again to make the tight vertical cursor active solid line O Step 5 Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob move the right cursor to the endpoint for the editing operation you wish to per form 4A 44 EDIT Menu AWG2040 User Manual cut lt _ Starting Point __ Copy EndPoint to Buffer EL E ray Paste from Buffer 1 0000 m Editing Area gt Draw MARKERT More NARKER2 Peta tandard Clase veform Write Figure 4A 26 Defining the Editing Area Subsequent editing operations will be performed in the area that you have set between the left and right vertical bar cursors The following section will describe each of the items in the side menu in detail Cutting Waveforms This command is used to remove a portion of the waveform from the editing area The following diagram shows the menu configuration Operation More 1 of 3 gt Cut Move the right and left vertical bar cursors to define the area you wish to cut and then select Cut from the side menu There is no sub menu for this command when it is selected the section of the waveform that you have defined is cut instantly Marker signals asso
215. d then create a marker signal with that pattern used as the period Marker patterns are set with the Set Pattern item Procedure C Step 1 Move the left and right vertical bar cursors to define the area for setting a marker pattern then select Marker from the third page of the side menu More 3 of 3 g Step 2 Press Marker in the sub menu and select which marker signal is to be set MARKER 1 or MARKER 2 Step 3 Select Set Pattern from the sub menu The sub menu for this item will appear C Step 4 Using the numeric keys enter the data for the marker pattern Data can be entered in either 1 bit or 4 bit increments Key Data Pressing this button toggles the increment setting from 1 Bit to 4 Bits and back again 4A 60 EDIT Menu Import Line Data Clear Pattern Pressing the Import Line Data button imports the marker data for the designated editor as pattern data When this is done the menu item will change to Clear Pattern This command is used to delete all of the pattern data that has been im ported or created When the Clear Pattern button is pressed to delete the pattern data the menu item changes back to Import Line Data User defined Code Config Used to define a custom conversion table for code conversion For detailed instructions on pattern setting see Setting Pattern Data in the timing display in this section as well as Pattern Codes in Appendix D Figure 4A 39 shows an examp
216. data items The only difference between this equation and the one expressing convolution above is the sign in the parentheses so with left right symmetrical wave forms the results will be identical Net y n Dx Mh h i o Entering the Convolution Waveform Editor In this editor you select an existing waveform file and perform either con volution or correlation and then create a new file Use the following proce dure to open the editor Procedure C Step 1 Press the EDIT button in the MENU column The initial EDIT menu will appear g Step 2 Select More from the side menu to display the third page of the side menu 3 of 3 O Step 3 Select Convolve Waveform from the side menu The convolution waveform editor screen will appear 4A 202 EDIT Menu Saving Files and Exiting the Editor Exit When you select Exit Write from the bottom menu depending on what you write have selected in the side menu a file name will be assigned to the calcu lated result and the file will be saved to internal memory after which the editor will close When you quit the editor the initial EDIT menu will reap pear The same procedure is used to save the file and exit from the convolution waveform editor as for the waveform editor See Saving Files and Exiting the Editor in the section on the waveform editor Convolution Waveform Editor Menu Structure The Convolution Waveform Editor menu has the structure shown in
217. date Date amp Time from newest to oldest Type4 Type Time Reverse Files are displayed by extension Type in alphabetical order and within each file type by creation date Date amp Time from oldest to newest AWG2040 User Manual 4E 21 UTILITY Menu Date Time on Procedure To change the order in which files are displayed to Type4 C Step 1 Select Misc trom the bottom menu C Step 2 Select Display from the side menu C Step 3 Select Catalog Order from the sub menu o Step 4 Use the general purpose knob to select Type4 C Step 5 Press the EDIT button in the MENU column Check to make sure that the files are sorted in the order you have selected Figure 4E 15 shows the files displayed in Type4 format with files sorted by extension Type in alphabetical order and within each file type by creation date Date amp Time from oldest to newest Catalog Memory Free gt 1955KB Name Type E ERU i CHIRP_S EQU 2 f BEXP_P ERU 530 93 11 10 EXPP EQU 296 93 11 18 i LORENT_P EQU 206 93 41 18 f MDISK BW EQU 538 2 11 18 P MODS EQU 4976 93 11 18 P ERI 452 93 11 38 i SOLSIN EGU 60g 93 11 10 STAIR E Edu 2698 93 11 18 TRAN VOL EQU 336 93 11 18 18 AM BOD 3 66484 93 11 18 16 17140 93 31 16 17332 93 11 16 20943 93 11 16 9140 93 11 18 40 93 11 19 Figure 4E 15 Catalog With Files Displayed in Type4 Format Date Time Display
218. de and then input the trigger signal to the master unit Master When using the AWG2040 as a master unit you should set the operating mode to Triggered Gated Burst or Waveform Advance Slave The unit is operated in the same mode as the master unit It also operates synchronously with the Trigger Gate and stop signals generated by the master unit By selecting Slave for the operating mode the clock setting in the SETUP menu is aiso set to Slave automatically General Description LOAD SAVE Menu Press the LOAD SAVE button in the MENU column to display the LOAD or SAVE menu Press the Load or Save button in the bottom menu to display the desired menu Use the LOAD menu to load files into internal random access memory from the instrument s internal non volatile RAM memory NVRam from a floppy disk Disk or from another instrument through the GPIB interface NOTE In this section the internal nonvolatile memory and the floppy disks are referred to as mass memory The SAVE menu provides the opposite function the ability to save files from internal memory of the instrument to mass memory NOTES When a sequence file is loaded or saved with the LOAD SAVE menu the waveforms and sequence files used in that sequence file are also loaded or saved AWG2040 User Manual 4D 1 LOAD SAVE Menu Memory Capacity When you exit from the EDIT menu the files you created with the editors are saved into the AWG204
219. dges of data blocks This frequency error is called leakage error The leakage error depends on the FFT window function selected The processing to bring the window function at both ends towards 0 in order to give the FFT continuity is called taper processing This instrument has the square wave window which does not apply taper processing to the time region data and five FFT window functions that do carry out taper proces sing The FET window functions in the time region correspond to filters in the frequency region This is convolution and itis well known that it has a char acteristic of sin x x for square window These filters have a high lobe at the center in other words a transmitting band width This lobe determines how great the neighboring frequency components can be separated The transmission amount for the side lobes neighboring this center lobe determines the amount of leakage Leakage is the spread of energy froma certain frequency component for the displayed frequency spectrum Fre quency components with small magnitudes are covered overall by leakage Discrete frequency component Convolution component gt or Frequency component Window function Convolution component included in real time frequency and discrete frequency waveform characteristic component Figure D 7 Concept of Convolution Figures D 8 through D 13 show the FFT window functions prepared for this instrument and their characteristics
220. e Delete Alf i l Figure 2 6 CRT Display AWG2040 User Manual 2 13 Overview 2 14 1 Status Area The status line always displays the status of the instrument no matter what menu is displayed on the screen Four items are shown on the status line the interface status see the AWG2000 Series Programmer Manual the operation mode and the trigger status see page 4C 5 and the clock icon which indicates that the instrument is busy and cannot accept key input 2 Date and Time Area The date and time are displayed here The display can be turned on and off in the UTILITY menu 3 Bottom Menu Label Display The label for the selected bottom menu item is displayed 4 Side Menu When selecting an item from a bottom menu the corresponding side menu is displayed at the right of the screen item selection numeral input and execution of functions are performed by pressing the button corresponding to the side menu item 5 Bottom Menu Press any button of the MENU column or the F G button to display the corresponding bottom menu in the lower part of the screen To select an item from a bottom menu press the corresponding button 6 Message Display This area displays inquiries or warnings for the user enclosed in a box 7 Button Operation Area Explanations of each front panel button operation for the current menu are shown in this area 8 Message Area In the event of an error
221. e Marker 2 is on the right 8 Lower Line Cursor The line cursor enclosed in a frame is inactive 9 Point Index or Time Index Shows the waveform point or time The units are set with the Setting item in the bottom menu 10 Button Operations This area shows how the front panel buttons operate in this menu VALUE CES Edit value When the VALUE button is pressed a block cursor appears within the inverted display cursor and the numeric keys can be used to input the data Pressing an arrow button lt moves the block cursor left right AS Move Line Cursor When the CURSOR button is pressed the line cursor can be moved EDIT Menu Setting AWG2040 User Manual Settings for the Waveform to be Edited Before waveform data is created you must use the side menu items of the Setting bottom menu to select the environment for editing Apart from the cardinal number settings the procedure for setting values is the same as for the graphic display See Setting for the Waveform to be Edited for a de scription of the graphic display Setting a Cardinal Number Use Radix to set a cardinal number to display waveform data in a table format Waveform data can be displayed in numeric form as Binary Hexa decimal or Real numbers When Radix is selected the following items appear in the sub menu m Binary a Hexadecimal a Real Go Back The description of these cardinal numbers is gi
222. e 0 2 V div CH1 input impedance 50 Q Horizontal Sweep 500 ns div Trigger Source CH1 Coupling DC Slope Positive Level 100 mV Mode Auto AWG2040 User Manual E 13 Performance Tests E 14 Check Triggered Mode Set the AWG2040 controls and select the waveform file a Initialize AWG2040 controls Push UTILITY Misc gt Config Re set to Factory 0 K b Select the file m Push SETUP gt Waveform Sequence m Turn the general purpose knob to display the list of waveform files and highlight the MODE WFM file Push ENTER to select the file This button is located to the lower right of the numeric keypad Turn on the AWG2040 CH1 output Push the CH1 button so that the LED above the CH1 output connector is on Check against limits Check that the amplitude of the sine wave dis played on the oscilloscope is 5 vertical divisions and that 2 horizontal divisions of the waveform are displayed Repeat this procedure connecting the oscilloscope to the AWG2040 CHT output connector and turning on the CHT output End procedure Disconnect the oscilloscope Electrical Characteristic Checked Operating mode Triggered on page B 3 Equipment Required Two 50 Q coaxial cables a function generator and an oscilloscope Prerequisites The AWG2040 meets the prerequisites listed on page E 7 Procedure Install the test hookup and set test equipment controls a Hook up the oscilloscope Connect the AWG2040 CH1 output
223. e 2 35 will be created S GPIB topped pare eee Standard waveform Waveform i Points 1024 cycle Execute i selects Oper Lura a Close i aveto ao wt Operation Zoom Setting Figure 2 35 Creating a Sine Wave 2 46 Operating Examples Type Add Noise Amplitude 3 ENTER Coc Execute Close write Write and Close C Step 7 Select Type from the side menu oO Step 8 Using the general purpose knob select Add Noise C Step 9 Select Amplitude from the side menu C Step 10 Press 3 and ENTER in that order C Step 11 Select Execute from the side menu Noise will be added to the sine wave as shown in Figure 2 36 GPIB Continuous mode Stopped Type Add Noise Offset 8 0600 i Execute MARKER 1 SS Moye Cursor alects E ioni Zo setti da Miciunige Clase Open operator Zoom Setting undo i waveform write Figure 2 36 Sine Wave With Noise Added C Step 12 Select Close Write from the bottom menu C Step 13 Select Write and Close from the side menu O Step 14 Make the file name SAMPLE 3 For details on how to input the file name see Step 24 in Example 3 in Creating a waveform file _ _ ee 2 46 Operating Examples New Equation Operation AWG2040 User Manual Creating
224. e Burst Count to set how many times the waveform or sequence wave form will be output when a trigger signal is applied Figure 4C 5 shows an example of the output in response to an external trigger signal when Burst Count has been set to 3 4C 8 MODE Menu M External Gate Signal J Output Signal Figure 4C 5 Output for External Gate Signal in Burst Mode AWG2040 User Manual 4C 9 MODE Menu 4C 10 waveform Advance Waveform Advance Mode When a sequence file has been designated in the SETUP menu Waveform Advance mode is used to advance a waveform in sequence each time a trigger is received The number of repetitions set with Repeat in the se quence editor will be ignored and the waveform will be output once only NOTE When a sequence file is expanded into waveform memory in Wave form Advance mode the waveform memory will be divided into the smallest multiple of 32 that is larger than the largest waveform in the sequence file The memory length needed will be this size multiplied by the number of files in the sequence file When the resulting length is larger than the waveform memory the sequence file cannot be expanded into waveform memory See Selecting a Waveform or Sequence File in Section 4B SETUP Menu The same output parameters amplitude offset clock and filter in the SET UP menu will be used for output of all of the waveforms in the sequence file When this instru
225. e DSO instrument connected to the AWG2040 and the transferring source from the Name column in the GPIB Source list In this example you should select Tek TDS CH1 See Figure 2 64 Catalog GPIB Source Name Loaded as Q Tek TDS REI Tek 105 REFS TOSREF tek 2488 IO Figure 2 64 GPIB Source List C Step 8 Set the DSO GPIB address to 1 and its communication mode to talk listen NOTE if the DSO GPIB debug mode is On a time out error may occur if so switch off the debug mode geet oO Step 9 Choose Select Source Address from the side menu Address Oo Step 10 Use the general purpose knob to set the address to 1 which is the same as the GPIB address of the load source DSC a1 Saad C Step 11 Select Load from the side menu When this is done the waveform data will be transferred from the DSO instrument to the AWG2040 The transferred waveform data will be loaded into the internal memory of the AWG2040 under the name shown in the Loaded as column of the GPIB Source list In this example the waveform file is named TDSCH1 WFM The clock amplitude and offset values obtained from the waveform preamble are loaded into the waveform file as setup data together with the waveform data AWG2040 User Manual 2 7 Operating Examples Load without Preamble 2 74 NOTE If the amplitude offset or clock is outside the range that can be set for the AWG2040 it is replaced with the maximum or minimum
226. e bottom menu to display menu items that magnify the display of the signal to xt x4 x8 x16 or x64 along the frequency axis Figure 4A 156 shows the magnified signa display when Zoom is selected from the bottom menu with x16 is selected Triggered mode 7 Magnitud 8 3 104d Phase 153 81deg Filter q Limiter Undo write Figure 4A 156 Magnified Signal Display In the scroll indicator at the top of the screen the section of the signal being displayed on the screen is displayed inverted You can scroll through the frequency domain outside the screen by turning the general purpose knob AWG2040 User Manual 4A 219 EDIT Menu Filter 4A 220 Selecting a Filter When Filter is selected from the bottom menu the following four frequency filters can be selected from the side menu m Low Frequency Pass Filter Low Pass This filter eliminates frequencies greater than the specified frequency m High Frequency Pass Filter High Pass This filter eliminates frequencies lower than the specified frequency w Band Pass Filter Band Pass This filter eliminates frequencies outside the specified banc Band Cut Filter Band Elim This filter eliminates frequencies in the specified band virel aay fo o BE oct F f Ka Figure 4A 158 High Pass Filter EDIT Menu AWG2040 User Manual uet Figure 4A 159 Band Pass Filter By paeme A 4
227. e cree eer t eee eee enn es Editing Phase 00 cece cece renee ere e terete Searching for Peaks 26 0 c cece eee eee ene rete Drawing Magnitude and Phase Zooming a Signal 0 eee eee eee teen eens Selecting a Filter 0 06 eee eee eee ete tenes Selecting a Limiter 0 0 60 cece eee rete teen tne teense Cutting Extraneous Frequency Components 4A 222 Deleting Even or Odd Components e rere ee eee ees 4A 222 Sifting Magnitudes 0 6 6 2 eee eee cence terete renee es 4A 223 SETUP Menu 000 cece cee cece eee e eee e en eeneeeanaeaaees 4B 1 General Description eeeeeee eee 4B 1 SETUP Menu Structure 4B 2 MENU Functions 0 0 2 cece e renee ence eee en eneneee 4B 3 SETUP Menu Display 0 ce eee crete eter ener e ee eenes 4B 3 Selecting the Display Format for the SETUP Menu 4B 5 Selecting a Waveform or Sequence File serees 4B 6 Loading Waveform Files That Are Not a Multiple of 32 4B 7 Loading Sequence Files in Waveform Advance Mode 48 8 Setting Clock Source and Frequency seeeeereeeee 4B 10 Setting Filter seeee eee 4B 12 Setting Amplitude and Offset 4B 12 Setting Amplitude 0 eee 4B 13 Setting Offset cece eee eee 4B 13 Setting Marker Level 4B 14 MODE Menu 0 cece ec cere rece ere nec e nena ee naneenes 4C 1 vii Ve NY BA OO RRRHWHONA A N
228. e duty ratio for the pulse is always set to 10 See Table 4F 1 The output impedance is 509 and mark er output is 2 0 V for high level and 0 0 V for low level AWG2040 User Manuali 4F 7 Appendices Appendix A Options and Accessories This chapter will describe the options and accessories both standard and optional available for the AWG2040 Options AWG2040 User Manual The following options are available with this instrument m Option 01 4M word waveform memory Option 03 Digital data output Option 09 FPP board FFT editor convolution Option 1R rack mount Option Bt with service manual Each of these options will be discussed in detail in the following pages Option 01 4M word Waveform Memory This option expands the waveform output memory to 4M words Option 03 Digital Data Output On AWG2040 arbitrary waveform generators for which Option 03 has been installed digital data from the waveform memory is output directly to the DIGITAL OUT connectors on the rear panei without passing through the D A converter Data Output 8 bit digital data at the ECL level D0 D7 is output from the SMB output connectors At the same time that the analog waveform is output the digital data can be obtained The output requires 50Q 2V termination Clock Output The clock at the ECL level CLOCK is output from the SMB output connec tors The same clock that is fed to this instrument s int
229. e e eee reece ees 4F 4 Setting the Output Parameters for the Waveform 4F 5 Setting the Frequency 66 cece ence eee enters 4F 5 Setting the Amplitude 20 6 6 c eee cece eee tee teres 4F 5 Setting the Offset 0 0 6 cece cece ee eee te eee een eens 4F 5 Setting the Polarity 4F 6 Setting the Duty 66 seen eee eee eee AF 6 Marker Output 4F 7 Appendix A Options and Accessories eeereeee eee A 1 Options 0 cece eee ence eee ence een ee ee ne ne nee A 1 Option 01 4M word Waveform Memory s sesesrreresrrsrret A 1 Option 03 Digital Data Output 2 6 2 2 ee ee eee A 1 Ooo MMM enw KD a t yo w eww HY UU RW OW k d Table of Contents Option 09 FPP Board FFT Editor Convolution A Option 1R Rack mount 00 ccc araara LaLa A Option B1 with service manual 00 000 0 ccc cecec cee eee A Power Cord Options 2 0 2 0 cccceucccccccuccecceauus A ACCESSOTIES oore desi cer animasi iir e E a aa A Standard Accessories ll oaase draai raaa A Optional Accessories 2 0 0 0 0 0 nannaa aeaa aaa A Appendix B Performance Characteristics B B B B B B 1 Appendix C Sample Waveform Library cccceeeceeeeeece C Introduction C Description of Representative Waveform Files C Appendix D Miscellaneous D General Description D Horizontal Axis Scaling D Sampling Theorem D Differentiation D Int
230. e maximum value designated with Max When the maximum value is exceeded the waveform will return to the initial value and begin counting up again In the example shown in Figure 4A 81 the waveform point size is 1024 Step has been set to 2 and the Min and Max values have been set to 0 and 255 respectively The pattern is repeated twice EDIT Menu Step Min a 1024 pts BATA Data pala pata DATA Bala 3 BAIS pala MARKERT a MARKER i Figure 4A 81 Count Up Pattern Display The following parameters can be set Step The number of points for each data item This value can be set tot 10 Max The maximum value for the data This value can be set any where between Min value 1 and 255 Min The minimum value for the data This value can be set anywhere between 0 and Max value 1 a Count Down Data is created sequentially decreasing from the initial value designated for Max to the minimum value designated for Min When the minimum value is exceeded the value returns to the maxi mum value and countdown begins again The values for Step Max and Min can be set in the same manner as with Count Up a Gray Code A data pattern is created in which the difference between adjacent data is only 1 bit When the 256 items of 8 bit data end the data repeats again from the beginning in the example shown in Fig ure 4A
231. e output to disk or to either the GPIB or RS 232 C interface 15 TRIGGER INPUT Connector Use this connector to input of the external trigger or gate signal This con nector can accommodate an external signal input of up to 10 V with an input impedance of 1 KQ or up to 5 V with an input impedance of 509 Overview 16 TRIGGER MANUAL Button When the operation mode is set to Triggered Burst Waveform Advance or Autostep pressing the MANUAL button will cause waveform output to begin Waveform output will proceed and stop in accordance with the mode that has been set In Gated mode the waveform will be output only as long as the MANUAL button is pressed In Cont mode pressing the MANUAL button has no effect 17 Unit Keys and ENTER Key The following unit keys are provided GHz ns MHz ns kHz ms mV and Hz sec V Press the appropriate unit key to specify the desired numeric value and unit Also if a hexadecimal radix is selected from the waveform editor table display the unit key is used to input C F Press the ENTER key to enter the numeric value and selected item 18 Numeric Keys Press the numeric keys to enter numeric data The numeric keys include the numerals 0 through 9 and the and symbols The and numer ic keys are also used to input hexadecimal A and B respectively in the waveform editor table display Hold down a numeric key as desired to repeat its input 19 FG
232. e repeated horizontally in points C Step 14 Select Execute from the sub menu If the number of points in the waveform between the vertical bar cursors in the copy source is the same as the value set for Interval the copied wave form will be displayed repeating at the interval designated with Interval in the example shown in Figure 4A 67 both the waveform point size and the Interval value are set to 512 EDIT Menu BRST 2 see eae 1924 pts i Figure 4A 67 Waveform Copying number of points in waveform Interval value if the number of points in the waveform between the vertical bar cursors in the copy source is less than the value set for Interval data at level 0 in other words a straight line will be added at the end of the waveform Fig ure 44 68 shows an example in which the waveform point size has been set to 512 and the Interval has been set to 640 Daia at level 0 has been added from point 512 to point 639 the next waveform begins from point 640 AWG2040 User Manual 4A 85 EDIT Menu 4A 86 f AST 767 Value 0 Omamma V9 16 6 6236 0 512 640 1023 Figure 4A 68 Waveform Copying number of points in waveform lt Interval value If the number of points in the waveform between the vertical bar cursors in the copy source is greater than the value set for Interval the overlapping portion will be added to the waveform Figure 4A 69 shows an example in
233. e screen before and after the data on line DATA 0 is exchanged with the data on line DATA 7 errs aad _ 1828 pta por 88 BATS SE j mA ar DATA BATA RATA cA Sty F DATA WORKERS i HAMERIO HARKERZO Before Figure 44 90 Exchanging Lines Ol Step 5 Select Go Back from the current sub menu The display returns from the Exchange Line sub menu to the previous side menu AWG2040 User Manuai 4A 123 EDIT Menu 4A 124 Logical Function Applying Logical Operations to Lines Use Logical Function to perform a logical operation for the waveform data between the designated vertical bar cursors on one line with the data on another line The result will replace the data on the line designated with Destination The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Logical Function item m AND Source _ Destination _ NAND Operation More 3 of 3 Logical Function Func Type __ Ra R Go Back EX OR Execute EX NOR Types of Logical Operations You can choose from the following six logical operation options in the Fune Type sub menu AND NAND OR NOR EX OR EX NOR See Logical Operation in Appendix D for a description of each of these operations Procedure C Step 1 Move the vertical bar cursors to define the section of the data to which a logical operation is applied Th
234. e setting for number of waveform points Waveform Points WAVEFORM POINTS lt point count gt Calculation formula When comments and waveform point sizes are written to EQA files as noted above these are reflected in the equation files EQU created when the EQA files are loaded to this instrument AWG2040 User Manual 4D 11 LOAD SAVE Menu Transferring Waveform Data Directly oe GPIB When GPIB has been selected for Device waveform data can be trans ferred directly to this instrument from supported digital storage oscillo scopes etc through the GPIB interface See Table 4D 2 for a list of supported instruments Loading Waveform Data To load a waveform file directly to this instrument from one of the instru ments for which direct transfer of waveform data is supported Procedure O Step 1 Using a GPIB cable connect this instrument to the instrument from which waveform data is to be transferred as shown in Figure 4D 6 IEEE STD 488 GPIB Cable Connector GPIB Connector AWG2040 Digital Strage Oscilloscope LO oe Pi 9 oq TE 6606 66 06 Figure 4D 6 Connecting Instruments g Step 2 Create the waveform to be transferred on the other source instrument C Step 3 Select Device from the bottom menu C Step 4 Select GPIB from the side menu A message will be displayed when Remote Port UTILITY MENU gt Misc
235. eating An Autostep File In this operation you will program waveforms to be output using the files you have created in the previous operations to form an autostep file C Step 1 Select New Autostep on the second page of the side menu in the initial EDIT menu Figure 2 44 shows the autostep editor menu NOTE Select More from the side menu to display the next page Continuous made Step Tat y Rcd sin a faba aia Sessile Operation ut l Step l copy Filter f Step Ang x offset ae a Markii f Paste Markit Step Mark2H Mark2i insert New Step Move Cursor m Previous Step Z Rezt Step FAS i Change Value Undo i dum Pe Figure 2 44 Autostep Editor Menu Display Operating Examples You will set the file for Step 1 VALUE g Step 2 Press the VALUE button on the front panel The list used to select waveforms or sequence files will appear SAMPLE S SE0 Drane i a Figure 2 45 File List SAMPLE 1 WFM C Step 3 Using the general purpose knob select the SAMPLE 1 WFM file set C Step 4 Select Set from the side menu The waveform and output parameters for the SAMPLE 1 WFM file will appear Paeeeeses AST Ste ror t i 1 J i i i kais Figure 2 46 Setting Files AWG2040 User Manual 2 55 Operating Examples More lot2 Append New Step
236. ecause the value of the data does not change when interpolating between points with the same value An unchanged data value is the same as not performing a shift However you can minimize this error by inserting an appropriate anti alias ing filter EDIT Menu Multiple Copy Multiple The Multiple Copy item appears in the menu when two or more wave Pe forms are being edited simultaneously It is used to copy the section of the waveform between the two vertical bar cursors in one editing area to the waveform between the vertical bar cursors in another editing area at the interval specified with Interval The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Multiple Copy item m Source Operation More 4 of 4 Multiple Copy 1__ ica Execute See Opening and Selecting Editing Areas on page 4A 16 for further in formation on designating multiple editing areas Procedure In this example we will copy the waveform between the vertical bar cursors in editing area 1 to editing area 2 We will start from the point at which only one waveform has been designated in the waveform editor To designate a second waveform in the waveform editor C Step 1 Choose Select Open from the bottom menu C Step 2 Select Another Waveform from the side menu g Step 3 Using the genera purpose knob select New Waveform from the waveform list and then select O K A second editing area will appear as shown
237. eck Adjustment Files 0 eseeeeneee Operating Mode Checks Check Cont Mode 0c cee ene een e teen eens Check Triggered Mode 6 eee eee cee teen teen nee Check Gated Mode 2 eee e cee eter een ences Check Burst Mode ccc cece ence eee teen e eee e ee eneneeenee Check Waveform Advance Mode 6 60 c cence eee een ees Check Autostep Mode 2 0 6 eee eee eee eee eee teen eee Check Slave Mode 2 eee eee cece terete een anne nee Clock Frequency Check 0 eeee rece cece ner e een enes Check Clock Frequency Accuracy 6 e cee e eens Amplitude and Offset Accuracy Checks seee Check Amplitude Accuracy 60 266 ce rere cere eee eects Check Offset Accuracy 0 66 c cece cee cee eee ten eres Pulse Response Checks Sine Wave Checks 20000 cee e cence reer eeee renee AUX Output Checks External Trigger Input Checks eecee ee ee een e ene External CLOCK IN Check Digital Data Out Checks Option 03 Floating Point Processor Check Option 09 E 3 E 3 E 5 E 7 E 7 E 8 E 8 E 10 E 11 E 13 E 13 14 E 16 E 19 E 20 E 22 E 24 E 27 E 27 E 28 E 28 E 30 E 32 E 34 E 35 E 41 E 45 E 47 E 49 Xi AWG2040 User Manual List of Figures Figure 1 1 Rear Panel Controls Used In StartUp 2 00 1 5 Figure 1 2 Optional Power Cords eee seen reer rene eees 1 6 Fig
238. ect that Waveform editing area from the side menu and then select Close Write from the bottom menu See Saving Files and Exiting the Editor in this section EDIT Menu Saving Files and Exiting the Editor When you select Close Write from the bottom menu the newly created or edited file currently selected in the side menu will be saved to the instru ment s internal memory and the waveform editor will disappear Close Write NOTE The procedure for saving files and exiting the editor is the same for all editors The only difference is that the Close Write item in the waveform editor changes to Exit Write in the other editors it func tions in the same manner The word Close is used in the wave form editor because more than one waveform can be opened in this editor Choices When Exiting the Editor Select Close Write from the bottom menu to display a side menu containing Write and Close Close without Writing and Write menu items These functions are explained next Write and Close When a new file is created if you select Write and Close a menu for naming the file is displayed Input the file name then select O K from the sub menu The file is saved into internal memory with that name and the system returns to the initial menu If Cancel is selected the input file name is canceled and the system returns to the editor When you exit the editor after editing an existing file and you select Write and
239. ection 1 Getting Started covers the features of the AWG2040 initial in spection and start up In particular the start up section covers the proce dures required prior to turning on the unit and points that require special care or caution Be sure to read this section carefully Section 2 Operating Basics first describes the components of the AWG2005 and their functions Then it describes the operating procedures used to output waveforms from the AWG2040 by presenting a few simple examples Section 3 Functional Operation Summary presents a basic operational overview of the AWG2040 Section 4 Reference explains the specific functions and execution method details for each menu Appendices describe option and accessories specifications sample wave form library and various miscellaneous subjects Other documentation for the instrument includes m The AWG2040 Programmer Manual Tektronix part number 070 8657 02 explains how to control the AWG2040 with a computer through the GPIB or RS 232 C interface This manual is a standard accessory m The AWG2040 Service Manual Tektronix part number 070 8963 00 provides information to maintain and service AWG2005 and provides a complete board level description of the instrument s operation This manual is an optional accessory xxix Welcome Conventions In sections 2 through 4 you will find various procedures that contain steps of instructions for you to perform T
240. ed all the files in internal memory listed in the upper screen are saved to the NVRam See Figure 2 58 Operating Examples OP IB Continuans Catabig Memory Free 3853KB Save Name Type Date amp Time Comment eect Save 3 11 11 12 12 52 93 11 11 13 14 a 2096 g in 13 14 EN 50 JSTE 13 18 T SAMPLE 6 AST 554 93 41 11 13 36 Save All Catalog NyRam Free 460KB i Name Type size Date amp Time Comment f PSE PA gg e SAMPLE 2 WEM 2096 SAMPLE 3 WEM SAMPLE 4 EQU 2 9 11 i SAMPL 3 2908 93 11 11 13 14 SAMPLE 5 SEQ 966 93 11 11 13 48 SANPLE 6 AST S54 93 11 11 13 38 l uto Loa i off Load ANVRam Figure 2 58 Files Saved in NVRam When Save is selected from the side menu only the file displayed inverted in the internal memory list is saved to NVRam Auto Load 7 Step 6 Check to make sure that Auto Load in the bottom menu is Off Off if it is not Off select Auto Load from the bottom menu then select Off from the side menu ON STBY oO Step 7 Power the instrument off then on again Loading Files The following procedure loads files into internal memory LOAD SAVE C C Step 8 Press the LOAD SAVE button in the MENU column Make sure that there are no files in the internal memory file list in the upper screen see Figure 2 59 AWG2040 User Manual 2 67 Operating Examples Load Load All 2 68 Stopped Catalog gt Mem
241. ed Along with the waveform the set waveform point count and clock frequency are displayed Figure 44 121 is an example of the display of a compiled waveform Fite Name GAUSS P EQU 3 Line gt U3 Compile Farge 6 expi pia Continue Gperation Operation Figure 4A 121 Example of Compiled Waveform Display C Step 3 Verify the waveform then select Continue Operation from the side menu The display returns to the equation editor AWG2040 User Manual 4A 163 EDIT Menu 4A 164 When an error is detected an error message is displayed at the top of the screen at high intensity and the inverted display cursor is moved to the equation or time domain with the syntactical error In this case correct the error as instructed by the message and then compile again The compiled waveform file contains the settings for the waveform point count set with Setting and the clock frequency obtained from the total time set with the range item Other output parameters are set to the default values The compiled waveform also has a vertical axis on which 1 0 is data value 0 and 1 0 is data value 254 There is no relation between these values and the actual output voltage EDIT Menu Use the sequence editor to edit files with the extension of SEQ Sequence files assemble a number of waveforms or sequence files in o
242. ed Here the output data is inverted every time when 1 appears in the codes Code Conversion Pattern Example CEELEN ee ers be motene pa foo fa weary vo BI PHASE Each pattern is made up of 2 data items Code Conversion 01 10 Example int pp 9 Jo Popeye tris fs out orp wf oae wor fo of wll w u f 2f Each pattern is made up of 2 data items In the table below data in parentheses indicates the immediately preceding data of the data for which coding is being attempted Pattern Output Data Example input Jop 9 Oo Output i oT 0 AWG2040 User Manual D 7 aww Appendix D Miscellaneous a 1 7 RLL Run length Limited Codes 2 item patterns are made up of data items and 4 item patterns are made up of 6 data items In the tabl below x indicates that this value will become 1 when the preceding bit i 0 and 0 when the preceding bit is 1 Here the output data is inverted every time when 1 appears in the codes Code attern i Patter Conversion x00000 x00001 010001 010000 Example 100 CE eee 101 000001 po 010001 007 010001 on fo fro oooi froo 700000 z 2 7 RLL 2 item patterns are made up of 4 data items 3 items pattern are made up of 6 data items and 4 item patterns are made up of 8 data items Here the output data is inverted every time when 1 appears in the codes
243. ed Main Output Offset Accuracy on page B 7 Equipment Required A 50 Q coaxial cable a 50 Q precision terminator a BNC female to dual banana adapter and a digital multimeter DMM Prerequisites The AWG2040 meets the prerequisites listed on page E 7 Procedure 1 Use the test hookup from previous check Performance Tests 2 Set the AWG2040 controls a Initialize AWG2040 controls Push UTILITY gt Misc gt Config Re set to Factory gt 0 K Set the AWG2040 controls s Push RG Sine Amplitude m Turn the general purpose knob to set the amplitude for 0 020 V Turn on the AWG2040 CH1 output Push the CH1 button so that the LED above the CH1 output connector is on 3 Check offset accuracy a Set the AWG2040 offset m Push Offset Enter numeric value of 0 Push 0 key m Push Enter key Check the reading on DMM Check that the value is in the range of OVES mv Set the AWG2040 offset a Enter numeric value of 1 Push 1 key m Push Hz s V key Check the reading on DMM Check that the value is in the range of 1 V0 015 V Set the AWG2040 offset a Enter numeric value of 1 Push 1 key m Push Hz s V key Check the reading on DMM Check that the value is in the range of 1 V 0 015V 4 Check C T Repeat the Offset Accuracy Checks for the AWG2040 CHi 5 End procedure Disconnect the DMM and 50 Q terminator AWG2040 User Manuai E 31 Performance Tests Pulse R
244. ed This fraction will form the last split waveform file In the following examples a 1024 point waveform has been split 00 WFM _O1 WFM _02 WFM Size 384 384 4 384 oa 256 4 1024 00 WFM wees O1 WFM tm 02 WFM Number 3 pat ee ee ee Rn 1024 Figure 4A 143 Point Sizes After Splitting Waveform File If Cancel is selected the file will not be created and the previous Split menu will reappear Step 10 Select Exit from the bottom menu The Split menu will disap pear and the initial EDIT menu will reappear The sequence file and split waveform files will be added to the file list in the initial EDIT menu EDIT Menu Copy Cut AWG2040 User Manual Copying and Cutting Part of a Waveform File Use Copy Cut to copy or cut a certain range of the file data and use the data that has been removed copied to create a new file Procedure C Step 1 Select Copy Cut from the bottom menu C Step 2 Select Waveform from the side menu C Step 3 Using the general purpose knob select the waveform file to be copied or cut from the Select Waveform list and then select O K The waveform you have selected will be displayed in the Source waveform display area oO Step 4 Press Operation in the side menu and select either Copy or Cut Selecting Copy does not change the Source file Selecting Cut removes the selected range of data from the Source file C Step 5 Select From from the side menu oO
245. ed This will depend on the size of the files in the list and the value set for Repeat x32 The point size when the total waveform point count is expand ed to form a multiple of 32 A The number of additional points needed when expanding the total waveform point count to form a multiple of 32 7 Button Operations This area shows how the front panel buttons operate in this menu TES go to Move destination mode When you press the CURSOR button you can scroll through the files in the Destination list or Repeat column with the general purpose knob Kumeric Enter Repeat The repetition count is set with the numeric keys Pressing the VALUE or ENTER button enters the input value into the Repeat column ALUE ENTER E5 7 amp 5 Go to Insert mode Pressing the VALUE or ENTER button puts the system into insert mode In this mode files can be selected from the Catalog and the selected files can be inserted into the Destination list Insert by ENTER VALUE aN Pressing the VALUE or ENTER button inserts the file that is displayed in verted within the Catalog directly before the inverted display cursor in the Destination list AWG2040 User Manual 44 169 EDIT Menu 4A 170 5 backward Pressing the button moves the inverted cursor left or up one step in the Destination list or Repeat column E gt forward Pressing the gt button moves the inverted cursor right or down one step in the Dest
246. ed disks are automatically labeled AWG2040 New floppy disks must be formatted before they can be used Figure 4E 2 shows the new sub menu displayed after formatting the disk 4E 4 UTILITY Menu AWG2040 User Manual GPIB Triggered mode k Stopped a Type 1BM PC 2HD Disk Catalog Disk gt Free 1423KB i Name Type Size Date amp Time comment Misc Diag Cal Figure 4E 2 Format Sub Menu Display Formatting disks Ss To format floppy disks perform these steps C Step 1 Select Disk from the bottom menu g Step 2 Insert the 3 5 inch floppy disk to be formatted into the disk drive on the right side panel of this instrument Formatting a disk destroys any data on that disk Before formatting a disk make sure it contains no data you might ever need C Step 3 Select Format from the second page of the side menu g Step 4 The currently selected format will appear in the Type item in the sub menu Select the correct format with the general purpose knob The following formats can be selected for Type e IBM PC 2HD a PC9800 2HD m J3100 2HD m IBM PC 2DD m PC9800 2DD 4E 5 UTILITY Menu When floppy disks written by this instrument are used in a personal comput er select the correct format type as indicated by Table 4E 2 Table 4E 2 MS DOS Formats for 3 5 inch Disks Format Type 1 44 Mbytes 18 sectors 2HD 1 2 Mbytes 8 sectors 2HD 1
247. ed to as cosine roll off characteristics and the bandwidth used can be varied This waveform can be expressed by the following formula zat sinz cos T sin 1 2at e at T Vi F Here T is the data period and a is a value between 0 and 1 A wider band is required for values closer to 1 where ripple is reduced and implementation is easier Settings Waveform points 1024 Clock frequency 1 0 GHz Output time 1024 ns AWG2040 User Manual C 7 Appendix C Sample Waveform Library Linear Frequency Sweep LIN_SWP WFM Made with the equation editor frequency sweep sine linear range 9 Sus k0 8e 6 sweep period k1 1e6 starting frequency k2 1006 ending frequency Sin 2 p i xk1 t 2 p ix k2 k1 42 2 k0 UN SWEWEM OT Figure C 7 Linear Frequency Sweep Formula and Waveform Constants kO is the sweep period and k1 and k2 are the starting and ending frequen cles Description This waveform can be expressed generally by the following formula t V t sin Quf t 2Qaf tat bo o Here f4 is the starting frequency fz is the ending frequency g is the initial phase and T is the sweep period To assure that the phases match when this waveform is iterated the sweep period is set to be close to an integer multiple of the reciprocal of the fith average frequency z Settings Waveform points 8000 Clock freque
248. ee 3790K6 i EEEE Name Tyne Size Date amp Time Comment f CRAMP E i CDAMP WH COPY I HE DEP OEE DEXP Wi vee eo ENE EPs ot e123456789 je AHSS f NERT iF LORENTZ EL Rename GAUSS WFM to GAUSS WFM WE sert character E Move cursor SINC EQU 530 93 99 10 58 OK SINC WFN Soda 93 09 09 10 58 Copy Delete Delete Ail i Figure 4A 3 Menu Displayed When Rename is Selected EDIT Menu Comment Copy AWG2040 User Manual Before entering the new file name you must delete the current file name oO Step 3 To delete a character press the Delete button on the front panel This deletes the character right before the cursor The cursor can be moved with the front panel lt and buttons Now input the new file name oO Step 4 Use the general purpose knob to select a character oO Step 5 Press the front panel VALUE button The selected character is inserted immediately before the cursor blinking in the file name input column C Step 6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until the entire name has been entered Up to 8 characters can be input NOTE The following cannot be used as file names CLOCK CON AUX COM1 COM2 LPT1 LPT2 LPT3 NUL and PRN Also the and characters in the character menu can not be used in file names and cannot be selected g Step 7 To enter the file name select O K To cancel that file name
249. ee Figure 4A 24 AWG2040 User Manual 4A 41 EDIT Menu 1 0879 Figure 4A 24 Adding Noise to the Sine Wave NOTE Portions of the waveform that protrude outside the editing area when the other waveform is added will be clipped 4A 42 EDIT Menu Procedure 3 Multiplying Waveforms in this example you will multiply the sine wave you created in Procedure 1 by another sine wave with a different frequency The procedure starts from where you left off in Procedure 2 C Step 1 Select Undo from the bottom menu This will eliminate the noise waveform added in Step 2 C Step 2 Select Type from the side menu Turn the general purpose knob or press the Type button in the side menu and select Mul Sine C Step 3 Select Cycle from the side menu Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob set the number of cycles for the sine wave to 30 CZ Step 4 Select Amplitude from the side menu Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob set the p p amplitude for the sine wave to 1 C Step 5 Select Execute from the side menu When you select Execute the sine wave between the vertical bar cur sors will be multiplied by the different frequency sine wave See Fig ure 4A 25 1 6800 Figure 44 25 Multiplying Sine Waves iil i AWG2040 User Manual 4A 43 EDIT Menu Operation Editing Waveforms in Graphic Display When Operation is selected with the waveform editor set to Graphic display
250. ee eee 4A 9 Copying a File 4A 9 Deleting a File 4A 10 Locking and Unlocking Files 4A 11 Expanding a Sequence File into a Waveform File 66 4A 12 Waveform Editor ccc cece eee eee e eee eeneeees 4A 15 Entering the Waveform Editor 0 s eee e eee cece ener e eee 4A 15 Opening and Selecting Editing Areas 60 6 c eee e eee eee 4A 16 Saving Files and Exiting the Editor 6 eee ee ese eee eens 4A 21 Choices When Exiting the Editor 60 e eee ence eee 4A 21 Naming a File 0 c eee eee eee eee een ene teens 4A 22 Graphic Display 0 0 6 06 c cece cee cnet ent e eee e ee 4A 27 Graphic Display Menu Structure 0 cece cece eee eee ee 4A 27 Menu Functions 2 0 0 0 ccc cece eee eee teen nets 4A 29 Graphic Display Screen 4A 30 Settings for the Waveform to be Edited 0 0 6 6 sees ce eens 4A 32 Selecting the Waveform Data Display Format 4A 32 Setting Waveform Point Count 66 cece eee eee 4A 33 Setting Horizontal Axis Units 0 606 2 e eee ee eee ees 4A 34 tN AWG2040 User Manual iji OO yy xue RP Rw YY we mH V WHO WONUVWOAnN OHO WDWH OHAOHBRRHO TOG Table of Contents Setting Clock Frequency 0000 0 006 c cece eee 4A 3 Linking the Vertical Bar Cursors 0 00 0 00 00cce ce eeeee 4A 3 Displaying a Grid in the Editing Area 0 000 4A 3 Creating a Standard Function Waveform 0 c 0 0e eee 4A 3 Selecti
251. eed Analog Circuit 3 14 Filter Four types of low pass filters are provided 10 MHz 20 MHz 50 MHz and 100 MHz All of these are filters with Bessel characteristics with a gentie shoulder to prevent overshooting or ringing from occurring with respect to the waveform These filters can be used to remove unnecessary frequency components from the waveform itself or reduce the number of components through folding when the waveform is made up of a limited number of points The marker signal is written to the waveform memory in the same manner as waveform data and output passing through the marker output amplifier The waveform passes through the filter amplifier and attenuator before being output Each filter has its own delay time The difference in time between marker output and waveform output wili vary depending on which filter is selected Block Diagram Variable Gain Attenuators The magnitude of the waveform output is determined by the combination of DAC reference voltage and attenuator As the voltage dividing ratios of the attenuators are fixed the reference voltage of the DAC is changed to vary the magnitude continuously An attenuation of up to 42 dB is possible including the change 3 dB in the reference voltage of the DAC Figure 3 12 shows the configuration of the attenuators The attenuators shown in the figure are automatically selected by means of the output voitage setting Figure 3 12 Attenuat
252. eee eee 4A 134 Table Display Screen 2 0 06 4A 135 Settings for the Waveform to be Edited c eevee eee 4A 137 Setting a Cardinal Number 600s cece eee eee es 44 137 Editing Waveform Data 6 5 cee eect eee cee eee e ene es 4A 139 Editing Waveform in Table Display 6 cess eee eens 4A 140 Cut Copy and Paste Processing Function 5 4A 140 inserting Other Waveform Data 56ers cece ees 4A 140 Equation Editor 0 sceee sence eee renee eee ee neeeees 4A 141 Entering the Equation Editor 00 e cee e eee eee eee eee 4A 142 Saving Files and Exiting the Editor 2 0 6 cee eeeee eee eee eee 4A 142 Equation Editor Menu Structure 20 02 66 cece e eee eee eee ees 4A 143 Menu FUNCTIONS 2 00 0 ec e e eee een nee een eeeees 4A 144 Equation Editor Menu Display 6 0 cere cee ener e ee eee eens 4A 145 Creating and Editing Equation Files 02 66 e sees eee eee 4A 147 Creating an Equation 0 cece ee een ene een ee 4A 147 rs Specifying the Time Domain 0 0 eee e eee 44 147 Using the Front Panel Buttons in Editing 55 4A 148 AWG2040 User Manual v TV NV ww NYP VB OW DONNA RONDA DY CO OC amp vi Table of Contents Decimal Point sc caie cece voneewen jadi seuss bbenevesc sac 4A 12 Component Menu 2 0 00 2c cece cece ce cece veeeeees 4A 14 Editing Functions 0 0 20 0 0 cece ccc ccc ccc eee caceeeetee
253. eeee neers Figure 4A 111 Equation Using int se sees reece eres Figure 44 112 Equation Using round ssseeeese eee 4A 155 Figure 4A 113 Equation Using norm sees eee renee ees 4A 156 Figure 4A 114 Equation Using max and min 4A 156 Figure 4A 115 Equation Using rnd e er eee eee e eee 4A 157 Figure 4A 116 Waveform Before Calculation 4A 158 Figure 4A 117 Waveform After Differentiation Using diff 4A 158 Figure 4A 118 Waveform After Integration Using integ 4A 159 Figure 4A 119 Menu Displayed When Insert Other Equation is Selected 0 0 cece eee cece een e eee e entree eenn eens 4A 161 Figure 4A 120 Setting Waveform Point Size s eseeees 4A 162 Figure 4A 121 Example of Compiled Waveform Display 4A 163 Figure 4A 122 Sequence File Data and Sample Waveform Display 0 2 esse cece eee rene eee teen enee 4A 165 Figure 4A 123 Sequence Editor Menu Structure 4A 167 Figure 4A 124 Sequence Editor CRT Display 4A 168 Figure 4A 125 Sequence File Creation Example 00065 4A 171 Figure 44 126 Example of Waveform Display When Show Catalog Entry is Selected 2 2 0 ce eee ene ener eee e es 4A 176 xvii ToS ewww KH RM YOU HW WAaANOON OURO O List of Figures xviii Figure 4A 127 Example of CRT Display When Show Overview iS Selected Taini eon N e E
254. efore After Figure 44 49 Normalize Calculation 4A 68 EDIT Menu Integral integrating the amplitude Before After Figure 4A 50 integral Calculation Differential Differentiating the amplitude Before After Figure 4A 51 Differential Calculation AWG2040 User Manual 4A 65 EDIT Menu Calculations With Other Waveform Data qa Use Dual Waveform Math to perform math operations with the waveform Math currently being edited and other waveform data The following calculations can be performed a Add Adds the waveform data being edited and the othe waveform file data Sub Subtracts the other waveform file data from the waveform data being edited Mul Multiplies the waveform file data being edited by the other waveform file data The region pushed out beyond the vertical axis full scale by the calculations is clipped The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Dual Wave form Math item m Add m Sub Operation More 3 of 3 Dual Waveform Math Mul m Cancel Show Catalog Entry Procedure Step 1 Create the waveform to be operated on with the other waveform file data Figure 44 52 shows the example of waveform before the arith metic operations 1824 ptes Value 6 0600 yma 1 00 1823 mal Ya lue 9 0079 MARKERI Ti i MARKER2 1 Figure 4A 52 Example of Waveform Before Arithmeti
255. eform editor See Page 4A 62 4A 140 EDIT Menu Equation Editor Use the equation editor to create or edit files with the extension of EQU Equation file data takes the form of mathematical equations An equation program file can have up to 100 lines An equation file is compiled to create a waveform file and to output the waveform Figure 4A 99 shows an example of a waveform obtained by compiling the data from an equation file and its equation Equation File range 0 5ms sin 4 pi x overview Figure 4A 99 Example of Equation File Data and Resulting Waveform AWG2040 User Manual 44 141 EDIT Menu 7 New Edit Equation L Exit Write 4A 142 Entering the Equation Editor Procedure CJ Step 1 Press the EDIT button in the MENU column The initial EDIT menu will appear oO Step 2 Select Edit or New Equation from the side menu Edit Used to select and edit an existing equation file EQU New Equation Used to create a new equation file The equation editor screen will appear Saving Files and Exiting the Editor Use Exit Write in the bottom menu to save the file which you have either created or edited to the internal memory of the AWG2040 and exit from the editor depending on the selected side menu item The same procedure is used to save the file and exit from the equation editor as for the waveform editor See Saving Files and Exiting the Editor in the section on the wavef
256. egration 252 ests ranih eana eed eian ea a D Random rnd Function D Pattern Codes D i Logical Operation D H FFT Fast Fourier Transforms D 1 Basie FET RUGS vis iria ee Be wie VASASTAN a OEA aN D 1 Record Length and Frequency Resolution D K Relationship Between Phase and Delay D 1 FFT Window Functions 0ccccccceeeveeeeuccevences D 1 Square Wave Window 2 0 cece cee ec ceucceceeceees D 1 Hanning Window meer eraa dera petes Cheucte sees avea daa oe D 1 Hamming Window 0 000 cceecccceeeeeseeecuececs D 17 Blackman Harris Window 00 0c cccceccseeeeca cae D 17 Blackman Window 00 00 cece ccc eccccaeeseeeeueeuce D 1 Triangle Wave Window 2 0 0 0 00 cece cece e rarnana D 1 Repackaging for Shipment cccceccecceeaues D 1 Factory Settings 0 ccc ecce cece ceceeuceeeueeeuns D 20 Appendix E Performance Verification Procedure E 1 Preparation 2 0 0 0 0 ccc cece ec ccce een eeeeeeenceeesaneuee E 1 Table of Contents AWG2040 User Manual Self TeStS occ ccc c cece cece cece e eee n iurien dks tridan ira Diagnostics 2 0 0 cece cece eect e eee eee ener ete eeees Calibration 0 ccc cece cece e reece ee enn e eer eeenee eens Performance Tests 0 0c ccee cence enone ener ena eenneenees Prerequisites Related Information Equipment Required c 06 cece e cece ee eee teen ene ert Loading Files Performance Ch
257. emory wame Type Fres 3786KE Size Date amp Time Comment Continuous mode Stopped ERS WER SEM ERG wx uy yE THE NEM NYQUIST ERU 686 SI WEN 2996 i 1 HEM 2996 SAMPLE 2 BEM 2996 SAMPLE 3 QF 2996 LSINC ERU 330 21428 50 538 1460 583 MAGNETIC DISK WAYEFORM DOUBLE EXPONENTIAL PULSI Edit New waveform New Equation New Sequence l i li Rename comment Copy Delete Delete AME Figure 4A 5 Menu Displayed When Lock is Selected C Step 3 Select Delete from the bottom menu Check to make sure that the words File locked is displayed in the message area to indicate that it is not possible to delete the file 4A 11 EDIT Menu oO Step 4 If you press the Lock bottom menu button again the file is unlocked and Off in the Lock label is displayed inverted Files on a floppy disk or in NVRam can be locked unlocked in the same manner with the UTILITY menu Expanding a Sequence File into a Waveform File Expand SEQ The Expand SEQ into WFM item is displayed when a sequence file has milo We been selected from the file list in the initial menu It is used to expand a waveform created from a sequence file SEQ into a waveform file WFM Procedure C Step 1 Select More from the side menu in the initial menu to display the second page of the side menu O Step 2 Using the general purpose kno
258. en select Logical Function from the third page of the side menu More 3 of 3 g Step 2 Select Source from the sub menu Turning the general purpose knob select the first data line or marker for logical operation ao Step 3 Select Destination from the sub menu Turning the general purpose knob select the other data line or marker for logical operation The calculated result will replace the data line or marker designated with Destination C Step 4 Select Func Type from the sub menu Turning the general purpose knob select the logical operation e g AND OR EX OR oO Step 5 Select Execute from the sub menu Logical operation will be performed for the selected lines g Step 6 Select Go Back from the current sub menu The display returns from the Logical Function sub menu to the previous side menu EDIT Menu Expanding Waveform Data Data Use Data Expand to expand the section between the designated vertical Expand bar cursors for all of the data lines and marker The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Data Expand item Factor Operation More 3 of 3 Data Expand Go Back Execute Procedure C Step 1 Move the vertical bar cursors to define the section of the data to be expanded Then select Data Expand from the third page of the side menu More 3 of 3 C1 Step 2 Select Factor from the sub menu Factor is used to set the degree of expansion
259. en the vertical bar cursors is inverted Oo Step 3 Select Execute from the sub menu The waveform is inverted horizontally with the specified conditions Figure 4A 35 shows an exam ple of the waveform before and after it is inverted horizontally Before Figure 4A 35 Horizontally inverted Display EDIT Menu invert i Hasan Inverting the waveform vertically C Step 4 Press the Invert button in the sub menu to select Vertical C Step 5 Select Execute from the sub menu The waveform is inverted vertically with the specified conditions Figure 4A 36 shows an example of the waveform before and after it is inverted vertically Before After Figure 4A 36 Vertically Inverted Display C Step 6 Select Go Back from the current sub menu The display returns from the Invert sub menu to the side menu AWG2040 User Manual 4A 57 EDIT Menu Clip Function lp Use Clip to clip remove any waveform data between the vertical bar cursors that is above or below the set level The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Clip item Chi Upper p gt Cle rot Lower Operation More 2 of 3 Clip Level Go Back Execute Procedure C Step 1 Move the left and right vertical bar cursors to define the editing area for clipping then select Clip from the second page of the side menu More 2 of 3 A horizontal broken line showi
260. en there is no data for CH1 on any of the steps an attempt to load the file will cause the following message for confirmation to be dis played and the file will not be loaded xxx AST has not CH1 data AWG2040 User Manual 4D 9 LOAD SAVE Menu Saving Files from Internal Memory to Mass Memory t Save If Disk or NVram has been selected for Device the Save menu appears when the Save item is selected from the bottom menu See Figure 4D 5 The same as for the LOAD menu the internal memory file list is displayed on the upper screen From this list you select the file to be saved to mass memory red mode Catalog lt Memory Free 2372KB Maine Type Size Date amp Time Comment 20948 9148 9140 9148 Save All ad 3 SWIN GE LSTAIR U WFM 2943 G3 41 12 1 Catalog gt NWRam Free 13K8 Name Type Size Bate amp Time SMe SAMPLE T GFW 2948 93 TET 12 00 MPLE 2 HEA 2948 93 11 11 12 83 BFH 2948 11 11 12 69 Dir 12 14 6 SAMPL SANPLE 4 WPH 2948 2 14 11 12 18 SAIPLE S SEG 960 98 11 19 12113 SAMPLE G AST 554 9 91 19 19 75 i l Device i CONVRam H H Figure 4D 5 SAVE Menu Procedure To Save files into mass memory from internal memory perform these steps C Step 1 Select Device from the bottom menu Step 2 Select Disk or NVRam from the side menu The same as for the LOAD menu when the Device is Disk Change
261. enerator l oouo cc cece cceccceuceccces Figure 3 4 Sample Connection 1 Figure 3 5 Sample Connection 2 Figure 3 6 Connections for Synchronized Parallel Operation with Three AWG2040 6 ce ccc c cece accu eee Figure 3 7 Waveform Timing 000c ananuna arrauna Figure 3 8 Relationship Between Memory Address Control and Waveform Memory 0 ccecccucseuvecccueees Figure 3 10 Expanding a Sequence File Figure 3 11 Relationship Between Triangular Wave Resolution and Number of Data Points Figure 3 12 Attenuators Figure 3 13 Offset Circuit Dok Que 2 4 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 E 2 5 2 7 3 3 3 7 3 3 3 1 3 11 3 18 3 14 3 15 3 15 4A 3 List of Figures AWG2040 User Manual Figure 4A 2 Display of the Initial Menu 6 2 22 seen eee 4A 5 Figure 44 3 Menu Displayed When Rename is Selected 4A 8 Figure 4A 4 Menu Displayed When Delete is Selected 4A 10 Figure 4A 5 Menu Displayed When Lock is Selected 4A 11 Figure 44 6 Menu Displayed When Expand SEQ into WEM is Selected 0 0 0 ccc e eee ee eee n eee eee eens 4A 12 Figure 4A 7 Graphic Display Screen 6 6 seeeeeesee eres 4A 16 Figure 44 8 Waveform Editor With Three Editing Areas 4A 17 Figure 44 9 Menu Display When Another Waveform is Selected o ise tinsa an etine eon coon cnn 4A 18 Figure 4A 10 Waveform2 Added n sssse
262. ent for the range of calculation for Waveform2 in order to display all of the results of calculation the Waveform editing area where the results will be displayed must be enlarged The area needed is the sum of the point sizes for the two waveforms Step 8 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel 00 Step 9 Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob set the positions of the left and right vertical bar cursors to define the section of the waveform for convolution in this example we will set the left cursor to point 0 and the right cursor to point 767 Figure 4A 70 shows the two editing areas with the vertical bar cursors in each area marking the section of the waveform to be used for convolution 2 NDSK_BR 768 pts Figure 4A 70 Setting the Area for Convolution AWG2040 User Manual 4A 89 EDIT Menu Calculating the waveforms gog Step 10 Select Operation from the bottom menu C Step 11 Select Convolute from the fourth page of the side menu More 4 of 4 When three waveform areas have been designated in the waveform editor select one of the other two editing areas as the source for wave form convolution with Source item in the sub menu C Step 12 Select Execute from the sub menu Figure 4A 71 shows the screen before and after convolution In this example the results of calculation will be displayed between the left and right vertical bar cursors in editing area 2
263. enu under Setting in the bottom menu AWG2040 User Manual 4A 133 EDIT Menu Menu Functions The following list shows the functions available for each menu item and the page on which you can find a description of that function Table 4A 5 Menu Functions Cut Cutting waveform 4A 45 44 140 Copy to Buffer Copying waveform 4A 46 4A 140 Paste from Buffer Pasting waveform 4A 46 44 140 Insert Other Waveform Inserting other waveform data 4A 62 4A 140 Waveform Points Setting waveform point count 4A 33 View type Selecting the waveform data display format 4A 32 Horiz Unit Setting horizontal axis units 4A 34 Clock Setting clock frequency 4A 35 Cursor Link to Linking the vertical bar cursors 4A 36 Radix Setting a cardinal number 4A 137 Grid Displaying a grid in the editing area 4A 38 Undo Undoing the previous operation 4 2 44 134 EDIT Menu ig 132 i otti HT Table Display Screen Figure 4A 97 shows the table display screen This section will describe each portion of the screen however descriptions of areas that are identical to the graphic display will be omitted See Graphic Display Screen for a descrip tion of the graphic display riggered mode Stopped 127 enna avi cut a Sa E aa i 129 or ttt 130 orn mi E agi pent n o Bulle Paste 133 onmi mu 134 en in gas a vit alt 136 eit nn 137 era ae emi nn from buffer
264. equency Th clock source can be set to either internal or external lf the clock source is set to external there is no need to set the frequency The product of that clock period and the number of waveform points is the period for that waveform or sequence waveform For example suppose the clock frequency is 1 GHz for a period of 1 nsec If the waveform has 128 points the period for the entire waveform is 128 nsec 128 nsec fe insec SUL Figure 4B 6 Clock and Waveform Points Procedure To set Clock perform these steps To set the Source to Internal and then set the clock frequency C Step 1 Select Clock from the bottom menu C Step 2 Press the Source button in the side menu and set it to Internal The clock icon shown below will be displayed on the screen 4B 10 SETUP Menu NOTE If Slave in the bottom menu has been selected with the MODE menu this will set the clock source to Slave Clock and the Source and internal Clock items will not appear in the menu To set either the external or internal clock it is necessary to select a mode other than Slave in the MODE Menu oO Step 3 Use the numeric keys or general purpose knob to set the internal clock frequency The clock frequency can be set in the range between 1 000000 kHz and 1 024000 GHz To set the Source to External C Step 1 Select Clock from the bottom menu C Step 2 Press the Source button in the side menu and select Extern
265. ere is the equation for linear interpolation X X FO ga Mth f i Here i is the waveform point number i takes integer values i 1 2 n NOTE The number of points can be increased or decreased but the waveform may lose its characteristics when the number of points are decreased Example 1 5 points padded to 9 points Points before conversion O Points after conversion Figure D 2 Point Padding Example 2 Reducing from 9 points to 6 Points before conversion Points after conversion Figure D 3 Point Compression Appendix D Miscellaneous Sampling Theorem When the signal is continuous and the highest frequency component of the signal is fo sampling with Te1 2fo loses none of the data contained in the signal T is the sampling interval This theorem is well known as the sam pling theorem If data is created to meet this theorem the necessary signal can be obtained sin 2x T t nT 2 2x T t nT 2 A continuous analog signal x t can be reproduced from the digital data with the above equation Differentiation The diff function calculates the central deviation as the differential value The equation below expresses the central deviation when the function f x is given at even intervals of Ax aa az EX AX F K AX PQ 5 EA in actual practice when function f x is expressed by n values the differential value f x at point x is given by the following equ
266. ern data item is 0 The preceding Source Data Pattern data item is 1 oO ao BRB U N The following Source Data Pattern data item is 0 AWG2040 User Manual 4A 115 EDIT Menu Converted Code 8 1 WN i 1 Prev Src initia Sre 1 initial Code 1 Out 1 6 Invert Keep 4A 116 Prev Code 7 The following Source Data Pattern data item is 1 Limitations w 2 3 4 and 5 can only be written at the beginning of Source Data Pattern 6 and 7 cannot be written at the beginning of Source Data Pattern a Only the data for the immediately preceding time can be referenced with 2 3 4 and 5 w 6and7 are effective as long as the pattern can be written m After the first time 6 and 7 appear 0 will be treated as 6 and 1 will be treated as 7 u 6 and 7 read the input data and search for the same pattern When the same pattern has been detected the portion of the data that has been read is returned to its original status and then the next pattern is analyzed 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 and 7 can be used together Writes the output data pattern 0O Sets the output data to LOW 1 Sets the output data to HIGH 2 Turns the inverse of the preceding Converted Code data item into output data 3 Turns the inverse of the precedi ing Source Data Pattern data item into output data The default value for the source pattern Affects output data when the Source Data Pattern is 4 and 5 and when 3 is used for Converted Code The default
267. ernal D A converter is output The output requires 502 2V termination Figure A 1 shows the digital output connectors Appendix A Options and Accessories DIGITAL OUT ECL 00000000 CLOCK Do D1 D2 D3 D4 05 D6 D7 Figure A 1 Digital Output Connectors Option 09 FPP Board FFT Editor Convolution This option adds an FPP card floating point processor for high speed internal calculations operations This option provides two additional editors an FFT editor and a convolution editor See Section 4A for more information on the FFT and convolution editors Option 1R Rack mount The AWG2040 is shipped mounted in a 19 inch wide rack In this configura tion the floppy disk drive is accessed from the front panel To change an AWG2040 into a rackmounted version contact Tektronix for information For further information regarding the rack mount adaptor see the instruction sheet that comes with the rack mount kit Option B1 with service manual This option adds a service manual Power Cord Options The following power cords are available with this instrument Table A 1 Power Cord Options Europe 220V 6A United Kingdom 240V 6A Australia 240V 6A North America 240V 6A Switzerland 220V 6A Port Number 161 0104 06 161 0104 07 161 0104 05 161 0104 08 161 0167 00 Appendix A Options and Accessories Accessories AWG2040 User Manual Standard Accessories The AWG
268. ernal circuit tests a Calibration The second procedure checks the AWG2040 internal calibration constants and changes them if needed The internal diagnostic routines check AWG2040 characteristics such as amplitude offset trigger level clock filters and attenuation The AWG2040 automatically performs the internal diagnostics at power on you can also run the internal diagnostics using the menu selections de scribed in this procedure The difference between these two methods of initiating the diagnostics is that the menu method does more detailed memory checking than the power on method Equipment Required None Prerequisites Power on the AWG2040 and allow a twenty minute warmup period before doing this procedure Procedure 1 Verify that internal diagnostics pass Do the following substeps to verify passing internal diagnostics a Display the diagnostics menu and select all tests Push UTILITY gt Diag Cal Diagnostics xxxx All See the menu in Figure E 1 The list on the left shows the tests available for diagnostics In addition to selecting all of the tests shown for diagnostics you can select only the test s you want to run using the general purpose knob In Figure E 1 the symbol to the left of Cpu indicates that test is one of the tests selected The Interactive Test area is reserved for manufacturing at the factory E 3 Self Tests E 4 GPIB Continuous mode Stopped
269. ernal memory list in the upper box on the screen Turn the general purpose knob to scroll through the list of files displayed in the lower box on the screen For explanations of the waveform in each file see Sample Waveform Library in Appendix C NOTE The sample waveform library disk files are locked and is dis played next to their names You must unlock these files before you can edit them AWG2040 User Manual 2 29 Operating Examples SETUP Waveform Sequence 2 30 Setting the Output Parameters These parameters are used for waveform output C Step 7 Press the MENU column SETUP button The SETUP menu is displayed GPB onno samen CONtINUOUS Mode poea ORR EM e waveform Sequence ae Filter Amplitude Offset i Clock 7 Marker Level Figure 2 18 SETUP Menu oO Step 8 Select Waveform Sequence from the bottom menu Operating Examples GAUSS_P WFM C Step 9 Tum the general purpose knob to develop the waveform file list Select the file GAUSS_P WFM from this list Select Waveform Sequence AMLWEM B_LERP WFM FEM WER LIRSWP WEM LOG_SWP WEM i LORENTZ WEM i MOSK_RD WFM i i MOSK WR WEM HYQUIST WEM PRES 1S WEM PULSSFI WEM i PHM WEM j Figure 2 19 Waveform File List OK C Step 10 Select O K from the sub menu The selected file will be con firmed and the output conditions will be automatically set Figure 2 20 shows
270. ertical cursors will be connected in asmooth curve using spline interpolation as shown in Figure 2 34 GPIB Continuous mode PSSAMPLE 2 1923 pts 188708 a Delete AEPA Draw Point Smooth i BA Off Ge Back MARKERI 6 a Laa oe P n Wa y E Switch Cursor Selects a Standard Closes Open Zoom Setting f Unda waveform write Figure 2 34 Connecting the Points Closes C Step 19 Select Close Write from the bottom menu write wrie and C Step 20 Select Write and Close from the side menu se The data for the SAMPLE 2 waveform file will be updated and the initial EDIT menu will reappear 2 44 Operating Examples New Waveform Standard Waveform Amplitude ENTER Execute AWG2040 User Manual Creating Waveforms Arithmetically You will now add a noise waveform to the sine waveform C Step 1 Select New Waveform from the side menu in the initial EDIT menu C Step 2 Select Standard Waveform from the bottom menu C Step 3 Select Amplitude from the side menu CC Step 4 Press 1 and ENTER in that order oO Step 5 Check to make sure that the parameters for other items in the side menu are set to the values shown below If they are different change them to the values shown below Type Sine Cycle 1 0 Offset 0 0000 C Step 6 Select Execute from the side menu The sine wave shown in Figur
271. ertical shift The waveform can be shifted between 1 0000 and 1 0079 for the full scale of the vertical axis A positive shift moves the waveform up a negative shift down However any points shifted beyond the vertical full scale are clipped C Step 8 Select Execute from the sub menu The waveform is shifted vertically with the specified conditions Figure 4A 32 shows the wave form between the vertical bar cursors shifted up 0 3 point Before After Figure 4A 32 Vertically Shifted Display C Step 9 Select Go Back from the sub menu 4A 52 EDIT Menu Scaling Function sence Use Scale to change the scale for the waveform data between the vertical bar cursors Executing scaling changes the waveform data The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Scale item Horizontal New Size Vertical gt Origin m Scale Operation More 2 of 3 gt Scale Factor Go Back Execute Procedure C Step 1 Move the left and right vertical bar cursors to define the editing area for scaling then select Scale from the second page of the side menu More 2 of 3 Scale R r Horizontal Scaling Vertical C Step 2 Press the Scale button in the sub menu to select Horizontal The Scale sub menu item selects the direction in which the data be tween the vertical bar cursors is scaled L Step 3 Select Factor or New Size from the
272. es not alter the file size In the SETUP menu when you select a file whose size is not a multiple of 32 data at the 0 point is added to the end of that waveform in waveform memory to make it a multiple of 32 after which the file is loaded The follow ing message is continuously displayed above the waveform display area Message Not multiple of 32 points added AWG2040 User Manual 4B i w SETUP Menu 4B 8 0 224 255 After Figure 4B 4 Adding Data In Figure 4B 4 the waveform size is 225 points before additional data is loaded 31 points of data at level 0 5 at the 0 point for the waveform are added in the waveform memory from point 225 to point 255 to make it a multiple of 32 after which the waveform file is loaded Loading Sequence Files in Waveform Advance Modi When a sequence file is loaded to waveform memory in Waveform Advance mode with the MODE menu the waveform memory will be divided into the smallest multiple of 32 that is larger than the largest waveform in the se quence file In the example given here a sequence file called AWG2040 SEQ made up of the files shown in the table below has been loaded Sample Sequence File Contents Waveform Point Size 1024 10244 1000 File Name Waveform WAVE 1 WFM WAVE 2 SEQ WAVE 3 WFM SETUP Menu It is expanded in the waveform memory as shown in Figure 48 5 below a 2048 points gt 204
273. es the block cursor to the top digit of the subsequent waveform point or time value g Step 6 Data can be input with the numeric keys Pressing numeric or character keys unrelated to the cardinal number you have designated will have no effect on the data When a number or character is input the block cursor moves to the next character to the right AWG2046 User Manual 44 139 EDIT Menu Operation Waveform Copy to Buffer Cut Paste from Buffer Insert Other Editing Waveform in Table Display Use Operation to edit waveform data for the area between the upper and lower horizontal line cursors The following list shows the names and functions of the items in the side menu m Cut Cutting waveform m Copy to Buffer Copying waveform a Paste from Buffer Pasting waveform u Insert Other Waveform Inserting other waveform data Cut Copy and Paste Processing Function Use these functions cut copy to the buffer and paste to any other time or point value within the waveform data area between the upper and lower line cursors The functions for these items are the same as for the corresponding items in waveform editor graphic display See Pages 4A 45 to 4A 46 Inserting Other Waveform Data Use Insert Other Waveform to insert data from another waveform at a designated point in the waveform being edited The functions of this item are the same as for the Insert Other Waveform item for the graphic display of the wav
274. esponse Checks E 32 This procedure checks the pulse response characteristics of the AWG2040 output waveforms at amplitudes of 0 5 and 1 V Electrical Characteristic Checked Main Output Pulse Response on page B 8 Equipment Required A 50 Q coaxial cable and an oscilloscope Prerequisites The AWG2040 meets the prerequisites listed on page E 7 Procedure 1 Install test hookup and set test equipment controls a Hook up the oscilloscope Connect the AWG2040 CH1 output connector through the coaxial cable to the CH1 vertical input con nector on the oscilloscope see Figure E 14 AWG2040 Oscilloscope fs 1G SSS Figure E 14 Pulse Response Initial Test Hookup b Set oscilloscope controls Vertical CH1 Coupling DC Scale 0 2 V div Input impedance 50 Q Horizontal Sweep 1 ns div Trigger Source CH1 Coupling AC Slope Positive Level ov Mode Auto 2 Set the AWG2040 controls and select the waveform file a Initialize AWG2040 controls Push UTILITYMisc sConfig gt Re set to Factory 0 K Performance Tests b Select waveform file Push SETUP Waveform Sequence Turn the general purpose knob to select the PULSE WFM file s Push ENTER Turn on the AWG2040 CH1 output Push the CH1 button so that the LED above the CH1 output connector is on Check pulse response at 1 V amplitude a Check rise ti
275. et without Parameter Clear Append New Step Selecting Cancel will cancel the setting operation and the previous menu will appear Use Set Without Parameter instead of Set when you want to designate the waveform without changing the parameters The default parameters will be set when the editor is opened using New Autostep or when a waveform is designated for a new step added with Insert New Step or Append New Step The default values for the output parameters are shown below Clock 1 000 000GHz Filter Through Ampl 1 000V Offset 0 000V Mark1H 2 0V MarkiL 0 0V Mark2H 2 0V Mark2L 0 0V Use Clear to delete the file setting for the current step To add a step O Step 8 Select More from the side menu to dispiay More 2 of 2 and then select Append New Step The instrument will proceed to Step 2 See Adding a Step in this manual Repeat this procedure to create the program Changing Parameters It is possible to change the output parameters for a file that has been set These changes are only applied to the autostep file the original parameters for the files at each step do not change Procedure oO Step 1 Use the lt and buttons on the front panel or the Jump item in the bottom menu to move to the step whose parameters you want to change C Step 2 Select Operation from the bottom menu C Step 3 Turn the general purpose knob to select the parameter to be changed C Step 4 Press the VALUE button o
276. et to 00 When the time is set the minute is set at the same time the second is reset to 0 The second is also reset to 00 when the hour is set with Hour The date and time can be permanently displayed on the screen if desired See Date Time Display on page 4E 22 AWG2040 User Manual 4E 1 UTILITY Menu Other Settings and Displays imc Use the Misc item to set or display the following MUS w Display Brightness Setting the Display Brightness Catalog Order Setting the Order of Files Date Time Date Time Display w Config Reset to Factory Factory Settings Secure Erase Memory Deleting Data From Memory Remote Port Remote Port Settings m Hardcopy Format Selecting the Hard Copy Output Forme Port Selecting the Hard Copy Output Port Status System System and GPIB RS 232 C Status VO I O Event Reporting Setting the Display LE The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Display item Display r Brightness m Namel m Name2 H Timet Misc Display Catalog Order Time2 t Type Type2 m Type3 Type4 off Date Time On In this section we will discuss the Brightness Catalog Order and Date Time items in the sub menu 4E 18 UTILITY Menu Setting the Display Brightness The AWG2040 screen has three levels of brightness These levels are set with the Brightness item Procedure To set the screen bri
277. etting clock frequency Linking the vertical bar cursors Displaying a grid in the editing area Undoing the previous operation Creating standard waveform data Saving files and exiting the editor 4A 102 Page 4A 16 4A 107 4A 45 44 107 4A 46 44 107 4A 46 4A 107 4A 107 4A 119 4A 120 4A 121 4A 123 4A 124 4A 125 4A 62 44 126 4A 126 4A 96 4A 131 4A 32 4A 104 4A 33 4A 32 4A 34 4A 35 4A 36 4A 38 4 2 4A 104 4A 21 EDIT Menu AWG2040 User Manual ai Select i Ope i DATA DATA DATA DATA BATA DATA MARKERT Timing Display Screen Figure 4A 80 shows the timing display screen This section will describe each portion of the screen however descriptions of areas that are identical to the graphic display will be omitted See Graphic Display Screen for a description of the graphic display Stopped Operation Copy ta Buffer Paste i from Buffer T taf T i More 1of3 zoom ee Standard Close i Setting ugdo ce write Figure 4A 80 Timing Display 1 DATA 7 DATA 0 This area shows the timing for each of the data lines 7 0 Data line 7 is the MSB The number next to the line number 7 0 indicates the value of state at the time or point where of the active vertical bar cursor is located 2 Marker This area shows the timing for the marker The number to the righ
278. form files created with the waveform editor 3 Equation Editor creates files with equations and compiles them into waveform files 4 Autostep Editor programs waveform files including output conditions in steps 5 Split Join Waveform Editor When editing waveforms of 256k words or larger you can split the waveform file remove the part you want to edit and insert data into the file AWG2040 User Manual Overview An FFT editor and a convolution waveform editor are provided with AWG2040 units that include Option 09 These editors support frequency domain editing and convolution caiculations As a function generator this instrument can generate sine waves triangle waves square waves ramp waves and pulse waves It can set the frequen cy amplitude offset polarity and other factors for each of these waveforms The AWG2040 has a 3 5 inch floppy disk drive and non volatile memory for storing created waveform data and parameter settings Each of these stor age devices can store the files created with the editors You control this instrument by way of its front panel hierarchical menu dis play system or its rear panel GPIB or RS 232 C interfaces Waveforms can be transferred directly through the GPIB interface from a digital storage oscilloscope Such direct waveform transfers allow for many types of ap plications with other measurement equipment and computers Supported equipment includes our major digital storage
279. g side menu Remote Port sub menu Acable is connected between the computer and this instrument s RS 232 C connector This instrument must be configured as the data communications equipment DCE and the host computer must be configured as the data terminal equipment DTE Setting the RS 232 C Parameters The RS 232 C parameters for both devices must match to allow communica tion between this instrument and the host computer Before communicating with the connected computer the RS 232 C parameters are set with the menu in Figure 4E 10 Press the side button for the desired parameter and select it with the general purpose knob topped riggered mode Baudrate Bata Bits Parity Stop Bits Flagging i Data Bits 8 Parity None Stop bits i Flagging None Figure 4E 10 Menu Displayed When RS232C is Selected 4E 15 UTILITY Menu Baudrate Baudrate This item sets the transmission rate The transmission rate of 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19200 can be selected with the general purpose knob Set this parameter to the same value as set on the computer Parity Parity This item sets the error detection method The genera purpose knob is used to select parity of None Odd or Even Set this parameter to match the connected computer s parity Data alts Data Bits This item selects 7 or 8 data bits Set this parameter to match the connected computer s data bits
280. g Memory Free 3789KB Name Type Size Date amp Time Comment CORP EGU 540 93 00 09 10 53 CRAMP WEN 2996 93 09 09 10 54 COPY 1 WFA 1468 93 09 09 10 54 DEXP EQU 608 5 DEXP WMO 21428 DOUBLE EXPONENTIAL PULSE New EQU eas Waveform if 044 ep Sea INSERT 1 WEN 504 LORENTZ EQU 6N 93 89 Mise LORENTZ WFM 2996 93 89 256 2M DISK N 1348 MAGNETIC DISK WAYEFORR HSE 886 NYQUIST 2996 SAMPLE WEM 2998 SAMPLE 2 WFH 2900 0S7 SAMPLE 3 WEH 2996 18 58 SINE EQu 5309 93 09 09 18 58 l i Rename Comment copy Delete Delete All i i i i i i Figure 4A 2 Display of the Initial Menu 1 Catalog Memory The display list shows the files in internal memory 2 Free Memory Available internal memory is indicated 3 Scroll Indicator The file area of memory displayed on the screen is indicated by an inverted display area in the scroll indicator Up to 20 files can be displayed on the screen To display more files scroll the screen up or down by turning the general purpose knob AWG2040 User Manual 4A 5 EDIT Menu 4A 6 4 File List This list displays the files in the internal memory of the instrument The display gives the following information about the file Name Type Size Date amp Time and Comment Select a file by turning the general purpose knob The selected file will appear inverted on the display Name Files saved in interna
281. ge 0 25 Us 0 5 range 33ys 66ys 05 range 66us 100s 0 5 range 0 100p1s diff Differentiating the waveform in Figure 4A 116 gives the waveform shown in Figure 4A 117 AWG2040 User Manual 4A 157 EDIT Menu zz The 1924 Poinis Clock ieddadao nz Figure 4A 116 Waveform Before Calculation iverview LE 1024 Points Cleck 10240600 Hz Figure 4A 117 Waveform After Differentiation Using diff See Differentiation in Appendix D for a discussion of the algorithms for diff functions amp jnteg Integrates the function over the range specified with range Specified with integ The integ comprises an entire line After integ specify normalization norm as necessary 4A 158 EDIT Menu Example range 0 25 Us 0 5 range 33us 66us 0 5 range 66ps 100us 0 5 range 0 1 00s integ norm Figure 44 116 shows the waveform before integration Figure 44 118 shows the waveform after integration Figure 4A 118 Waveform After Integration Using integ See Integration in Appendix D for a discussion of the algorithms for integ functions a mark MARKER 1 Sets the marker for the range set with range After compiling there is no marker display but the set marker can be verified with the waveform editor The mark statement comprises an entire line For example when mark 1 i
282. gger Input Auxiliary Input and Waveform Output 2 7 2 8 2 8 Table of Contents Memory Control 2 ce cece cree ene e eee eee nneenee 3 10 Memory Address Control 00 00 cece eect ene teen ee 3 10 Waveform Memory 0 0 0 0 0 ec cee cence tence nents 3 11 Loading Sequence Files 00 00 00 0 ce eee cee eee teens 3 12 D A Converter cece eee c cece e renee ener e ee eeeeenees 3 13 Digital Data Output Option 03 6 cece cere renee eee 3 13 Data Length 0 cece cece eect eee nee een e tence teen nee 3 13 Analog Circuit ssssesersresererenrrrerensrnrrereess 3 14 3 14 3 15 3 15 Reference introduction ee 4 1 Menu items Available With Each Editing Function 5 4 1 EDIT Menu 002s eee c creer ee ence eee nen nena eneneeenetes 4h 1 General Description 0 cece cece eee e eee n een en eee 4A 1 Initial MENU kee cence ene teenie eeeennes 4A 3 Initial Menu Structure 20 nee ee nes 4A 3 Menu Functions 2 0 e ce cece tenner ene eee e ere nane 4A 4 CRT Display 0 0 6 0 cece cece ee eee erent eee e eens 4A 5 Creating or Editing a File 2 00 0 02 eee eee nee nner eens 4A 7 Creating a New File 00 0 0 eee cece ener eee ences 4A 7 Editing an Existing File 0 2 2 6 2 cee eee eens 4A 7 Using File Editing Functions 00 secs cece c eens 4A 8 Renaming a File 0 0 0 02 ccc eee e teens 4A 8 Comment Input 0 6 2
283. ght vertical bar cursors This value includes the point occupied by the cursor so the number of points in the waveform is A 1 C Step 5 Select Waveform2 from the side menu This waveform will be compared to the reference waveform O Step 6 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel C Step 7 Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob set the m m positions of the left and right vertical bar cursors to define the section of the waveform for comparison In this example we will set the left cursor to point 128 and the right cursor to point 895 Step 8 Select Operation from the bottom menu Step 9 Select Compare from the fourth page of the side menu More 4 of 4 Figure 4A 72 shows the menu with the Compare item selected When three waveform areas have been designated in the waveform editor select one of the remaining two editing areas as the source for waveform comparison with Source item in the sub menu EDIT Menu AWG2040 User Manual ntinuous mods Operation maang 1824 pts i Set Result to i MARKER 1 Go Back Execute closes write i Standard Vavetorm Zoom Setting Open j Figure 4A 72 Menu Display When Compare is Selected Cl Step 10 Select Set Result to from the sub menu and keep pressing this button until MARKER is selected This item is used to select where the results of comparison will be dis played
284. ghtness C Step 5 Select Misc from the bottom menu C Step 6 Select Display from the side menu C Step 7 Select Brightness from the sub menu C Step 8 Use the numeric keys or general purpose knob to input the appropriate display brightness The display brightness can be adjusted in steps of 1 in the range 0 100 The default display brightness is 70 GPIB Triggered mode Stopped vigh a Catalog order Name apie RS222 Date Tim Figure 4 12 Setting the Display Brightness AWG2040 User Manual 4E 19 UTILITY Menu Setting the Order of Files pass Use this item to set the order in which files are displayed in the catalog You can display files sorted by file name date and time or file type extension Figure 4E 13 shows the screen when Catalog Order has been chosen frorr the sub menu GPIB Triggered mode Stopped Brightness Catalog Display Order Namis Reverse gt Fite Tite Reverse Type Type Name Reverse i i x Type Tine F 3 Type Tinc Reverse E gt l D RS232C Date Time piagztak a GPIB Figure 4E 13 Menu Displayed when Catalog Order is Selected The files in the catalog are displayed in the initial EDIT LOAD SAVE and UTILITY menus Changing the file order in a catalog will change the order in all menus Figure 4E 14 shows the list of files as shown in the initial EDIT menu
285. gnostics tests can also be initiated by selecting the Diagnostics item These diagnostics are helpful when repair ing this instrument When the Diagnostics item is selected the list of diag nostics items shown in Figure 4E 21 will appear Figure 4E 21 Diagnostics List At the top of the diagnostics menu there are three columns giving the status ofthe diagnostic tests The meaning of these three columns is as follows Diagnostics This column gives the name of the diagnostic test item The diagnostics may be executed individually or all together FPP is valid if Option 09 is installed Result This column gives the results of each test item If no error is found in a test item Pass is displayed If an error is found Fail is dis played If Option 09 is not installed the corresponding diagnostic items are not displayed and only is displayed in their place NOTE The waveform outputs obtained with an instrument that has not passed all its tests are not reliable m Code This column indicates an error code for the item where the error was detected UTILITY Menu Calibration NOTE If an error occurs contact our representative closest to you Procedure C Step 1 Select Diag Cal from the bottom menu C Step 2 Select Diagnostics from the side menu C Step 3 Turn the general purpose knob to select the desired diagnostic item To execute all the tests one after another select All C Ste
286. gure 4E 1 UTILITY Menu Structure 4E 2 UTILITY Menu Menu Functions The following table describes the function of each of the menu items and gives the number of the page on which you can find a more detailed ex planation of that item Table 4E 1 Menu Functions Disk Using the disk menu 4E 4 Rename Renaming a file 4A 8 4E 11 Delete Deleting a file 4A 10 4E 11 Delete All Deleting all files 4A 10 4E 11 Lock Locking and unlocking a file 4A 11 4E 12 Change Directory Changing directories 4E 8 Make Directory Creating directories 4E 8 Format Floppy disk format 4E 4 NVRam Internal non volatile memory 4E 12 GPIB GPIB configuration 4E 13 Talk Listen Address Waveform Transfer s N Talk Only Setting the operating mode 4E 14 Off Bus RS232C RS 232 C parameters 4E 15 Baudrate Setting the baud rate Data Bits Setting the number of data bits Parity Setting the parity 4E 16 Stop Bits Setting the number of stop bits Fiagging Setting flags Date Time Setting the date and time 4E 17 Misc Other settings and displays 4E 18 Display Setting the display 4E 18 Brightness Setting the display brightness 4E 19 Catalog Order Setting the order of files 4E 20 Date Time Date Time display 4E 22 Config Configuration 4E 23 Reset to Factory Factory settings 4E 23 Secure Erase Memory Deleting data from memory 4E 24 Remote Port Remote port settings 4E 24 Hardcopy
287. h type of operations gt AND Appendix D Miscellaneous AWG2040 User Manual D 11 Appendix D Miscellaneous w TLL 75 Appendix D Miscellaneous FFT Fast Fourier Transforms FFT is an algorithm for fast calculation of discrete Fourier transform FFT transforms the time axis signal onto the frequency axis FFT can also pro vide the frequency component magnitudes and phases With the FFT editor you can use inverse FFT IFFT to generate the real time data from the frequency component magnitudes and phases Basic FFT Rules FFT discrete Fourier transforms any number of sample points but certain rules must be followed 1 The Record Length must be a Power of 2 The FET calculations can only be used when the record length is an power of 2 2 4 8 2 The minimum record length for the this instru ment is 512 points and the maximum record length is 16384 points Ifthe record length is not a power of 2 the waveform is edited expand ed to a power of 2 Then when the editing is complete and the waveform is saved the waveform is reduced to its original record length by inter polating the data Therefore itis recommended to use the rec
288. haracter istics of the original waveform may be fost Therefore a filter must be inserted to prevent aliasing If the changes in the waveform are extremely smooth fractional shift amounts may not result in the intended effect Procedure oO Step 1 Specify the region to be shifted with the left and right vertical bar cursors and select the Region Shift item on the fourth page of the side menu More 4 of 4 g Step 2 Select the shift type by pressing the sub menu Type button C Step 3 Select Shift Scale Value from the sub menu C Step 4 Enter the shift amount using either the general purpose knob or the numeric keys The shift value can also be displayed as a time value C Step 5 If other settings related to the shift need to be specified select the Config item from the sub menu See the Other Shift Settings item on page 4A 76 for more information C Step 6 Select Execute from the sub menu The waveform in the edit region will be shifted with the specified conditions AWG2040 User Manual 4A 75 EDIT Menu Other Shift Settings config The following parameters can be set from the Config item Interpolation Selecting the interpolation method Data Value Handling of overlapping regions in the shift result Cursor Point Interpolation of the data on the cursors Smooth Points Setting the smoothing width at the data boundary positions Interpolation interpolation The data is resampled when shifting
289. he Area for Convolution 0 4A 8 Figure 44 71 Convolution 00 0 ccc cc cece cc cece ccc ceee 4A 9 Figure 4A 72 Menu Display When Compare is Selected 4A Figure 44 73 Comparison Without Hysteresis 4A 9 Figure 44 74 Comparison With Hysteresis 4A 9i Figure 4A 75 Zoom Menu ooreo naana naroa oa 4A 9 Figure 4A 76 Horizontal Zoom 2 2 2 0 cece cece eee e cece ees 4A 91 Figure 4A 77 Vertical ZOOM 0000 cece eceeneeceeeccceees 4A 98 Figure 4A 78 Timing Display 000 cce ccc eee eeeeaee 4A 96 Figure 4A 79 Waveform Editor Timing Display Menu Structure 4A 101 Figure 4A 80 Timing Display 000 0 cece cc ccc ceccee cece 4A 106 Figure 44 81 Count Up Pattern Display 000005 4A 108 Figure 4A 82 Gray Code Pattern Display 0 4A 10 Figure 44 83 Setting Waveform Data to High Low 4A 10 Figure 4A 84 Pattern Data Setting Menu Figure 4A 85 Setting Pattern Data List of Figures AWG2040 User Manual Figure 4A 86 User defined Code Conversion MON ayparan conte 4A 114 Figure 4A 87 Shifting Waveform Data 66 e secre reese ee 4A 120 Figure 4A 88 inverting Waveform Data SALE 4 26 cjg inside deawas a 4A 121 Figure 4A 89 Copying Lines 6 seer erence ete eee 4A 122 Figure 44 90 Exchanging Lines 66 seers renee tener e eee 4A 123 Figure 4
290. he external trigger signal simultaneously to the AWG2040 instruments Use Gated mode when you need a continuous synchronous output for a certain period of time A synchronous output is created from the time the gate signal is True until it becomes False To output the waveform again from the beginning you should reset the output using STOP in the side menu AWG2040 User Manual Block Diagram Master Parallel Output Synchronous with the Clock Signal When connecting two or more instruments together for parallel output use the MODE menu to designate one instrument as the master unit by select ing an operating mode other than Slave and the other as the slave unit by selecting Slave for the operating mode As shown in Figure 3 6 the master clock output on the master AWG2040 instrument is connected to the slave clock input on the slave AWG2040 instrument using a 50Q SMB cable Slave 1 Slave 2 or SLAVE SLAVE CLOCK IN CLOCK IN E S MASTER CLOCK OUT 502 SMB Cable 500 SMB Cable MASTER CLOCK OUT Figure 3 6 Connections for Synchronized Parallel Operation with Three AWG2040 When this is done the instrument designated as the slave unit operates in the following manner The clock signal from the outside that is entered through the SLAVE CLOCK IN connector is sent to the memory address control The clock signal is also sent to the MASTER CLOCK OUT connector so it can be used by t
291. he hookup a Disconnect the BNC coaxial cable terminator and adapter BNC to dual banana from the DMM input connector Hook up the oscilloscope Connect the AWG2040 MARKER output connector through the coaxial cable to the CH1 vertical input con nector on the oscilloscope see Figure E 17 AWG2040 Oscilloscope Figure E 17 Marker Waveform Initial Test Hookup Performance Tests c Set oscilloscope controls Vertical CH1 CH1 Coupling DC CH1 Scale 1 V div CH1 Input Impedance 50 Q CH2 Scale 2 V div CH2 Input Impedance 1 MQ Horizontal Sweep 200 ns div Trigger Source CH1 Coupling AC Slope Positive Level OV Mode Auto 11 Set the AWG2040 controls and select the waveform file a Initialize AWG2040 controls Push UTILITY Misc gt Config Re set to Factory gt 0 K b Select waveform file e Push SETUP gt Waveform Sequence a Turn the general purpose knob to highlight the MARKER WEM i ma file m Push ENTER AWG2040 User Manual 12 Turn on the AWG2040 CH1 output Push the CH1 button so that the LED above the CH1 output connector is on Check MARKER output waveform a Check the oscilloscope display for a 1 ps 2 Vp p square wave Change hookup Disconnect the BNC coaxial cable to the MARKER1 output connector and connect the cable to the MARKER2 output con nector Check MARKER2 output waveform a Chec
292. he initial EDIT menu will appear oO Step 2 Select More from the side menu to display the third page of the side menu 3 of 3 oO Step 3 Using the general purpose knob select the waveform file WEM from the file list The Edit in rredueney Domain item is added to the side menu oO Step 4 Select Edit in Frequency Domain from the side menu The menu for selecting the window function is displayed See Figure 44 151 EDIT Menu Triggered mode GPIB Selec window FFT window Type Hanning Hamming Blackinan Harris f Blackman i Triangle Select FET window Type by using retary knob and press O K side button Figure 44 151 FFT Window Selection Menu go Step 5 Using the general purpose knob select the window function When you enter the FFT editor you must select the window function This instrument has the following six FFT windows w Rectangle a Hanning a Hamming m Blackman Harris Blackman Triangle For repetitive waveforms in which the waveform data starting point and ending point match the rectangle window is usually used For details on the window functions see the FFT Fast Fourier Transforms description in Appendix D C Step 6 Next select O K from the side menu to enter the FFT editor The time domain data is transformed into the frequency domain To cancel the FFT operation select Cancel This returns the system to the initial EDIT menu
293. he other slave instrument For details see Slave Mode in Section 4C MODE Menu Block Diagram Timing of Trigger Input Auxiliary Input and Waveform Output Figure 3 7 shows the output timing relationship among the SYNC OUT BUSY OUT waveform and MARKER signal when a trigger signal is applied from the outside to the AWG2040 For details see Appendix B Performance Characteristics Trigger Input Signal Slope Positive Td3 Twt SYNC Signal Output TTL i Tat MARKER Signal Output 1 Vpp i Td2 Waveform Output i i 1 Vep ae Ti BUSY Signal Output 5 FTE Td1 2 5 ns 42 ns Varies depending on the filter Td2 Max 48 ns Td3 Max 60 ns Td4 Max 60 ns Td7 Max 150 ns Note When an internal clock of 1GHz is used Tw1 100 ns Typical value Figure 3 7 Waveform Timing AWG2040 User Manual 3 9 Block Diagram Memory Control Start Address Waveform Length Number of Bursts Memory Address Control This controls the address needed to read out the data in waveform memory The first address for the waveform loaded to waveform memory is loaded to the address counter The length of the waveform data is loaded to the length counter The address counter designates the starting point for the waveform while the length counter designates the endpoint for the waveform In Burst mode for the operating mode the number of bursts is loaded to the burst counte
294. hed beyond the full scale of the vertical axis by scaling is clipped EDIT Menu C Step 10 Select Execute from the sub menu The waveform is scaled with the specified conditions Figure 4A 34 shows an example of Factor being used to enlarge the section of the waveform between the vertical bar cursors In this exam ple the waveform has been enlarged 1 5 times vertically around the reference line manna 1288 pts Figure 4A 34 Display Expanded to x1 5 Vertically C Step 11 Select Go Back from the sub menu The system moves from the Scale sub menu to the previous side menu AWG2040 User Manual 4A 55 EDIT Menu invert 4A 56 invert Hariznntal Vertical Gaaraa EP agg oe ais lie SB Invert Function Use Invert to invert the waveform data in the area specified with the vert ical bar cursors either up down or left right The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Invert item Invert lt Horizontal Operation More 2 of 3 Invert GoBack Vertical Execute Procedure C Step 1 Move the left and right vertical bar cursors to define the editing area for inversion then select Invert from the second page of the side menu More 2 of 3 Inverting the waveform horizontally C Step 2 Press the Invert button in the sub menu to select Horizontal The Invert selects the direction in which the waveform data betwe
295. hen defining codes see User defined Code Contig on page 4A 113 C Step 4 Select Go Back to return to the Shift Register Generator menu oO Step 5 Select Register Config from the side menu oO Step 6 Set the values for Register Length and Point Step as well as the register value and tap C Step 7 Press the CURSOR button to select Code menu item A knob icon will appear in the upper left side of the Code selection menu O Step 8 Turn the general purpose knob to select user defined E Step 9 Press O K in the sub menu to confirm the settings The Shift Register Generator menu will automatically reappear oO Step 10 Using the general purpose knob define the data line and area where the pattern will be inserted J Step 11 Press Execute in the sub menu The result will be inserted between the cursors on the data line selected in the previous step Creating the M Series Pseudo Random Signal An M series pseudo random signal has a length of 2 1 assuming the number of levels for the shift register is n In this example we will create an M series pseudo random signal of 215 1 bits 15 levels with 2 points for each step This signal is included on the Sample Waveform Library Disk that came with the AWG2040 Procedure g Step 1 Select Setting from the bottom menu O Step 2 Select Waveform Points from the side menu Then set the waveform point size to 65534 using the numeric keys The waveform point si
296. i enne I Dar ET E EES NAAA dete Inserting the SETUP Menu Waveforms and Output Parameters Tabie of Contents AWG2040 User Manual Menu Functions 0 00 cece ee eee eee tence ee 4A 194 Split Join Waveform Editor Display seer sere sere eres 44 195 Splitting Waveform File 6 2 6 eee e reece nee erent es 44 197 Copying and Cutting Part of a Waveform Fils scare twee ate tea a 4A 199 Inserting Waveform File 0 0 6 6 e ee eee e reer etree ent eee eens 4A 200 Convolution Waveform Editor Option 09 sseeeee 4A 202 Entering the Convolution Waveform Editor sseeeeees 4A 202 Saving Files and Exiting the Editor se seers eee e ee ee es 4A 203 Convolution Waveform Editor Menu Structure 66 scenes 4A 203 Menu Functions 0 c eee nee eee een n nen renee eee 4A 203 Convolution Waveform Editor Menu Display 6 6seereeee 4A 204 Selecting a Waveform File u seers e cece cece ete etter eres Executing Convolution Correlation FFT Editor Option 09 e esses eeee eee e renee neces Entering the FFT Editor o i eee e ener eee escent eeeee Saving Files and Exiting the Editor FFT Editor Menu Structure 2 0 2 0 eee eee ener Menu Functions 000 c cee eee erent e ete eee e renee es FFT Editor Menu Display 6 0 eee ence erent Editing in the Frequency Domain 0 6 6 seer eter tenet eee Editing Magnitude 0 e ce
297. ic substance that may cause them to be magnetized as this will corrupt the data stored on the disk and result in errors Do not expose disks to direct sunlight or high temperatures for long periods of time Also avoid storing them in places subject to extreme cold or high humidity When bringing disks into a room from outside do not use them immediately let them become acclimated to the environ ment before use Do not touch the recording medium on the surface of the disk Finger prints on the surface of the disk may cause the heads to skip resulting in errors When storing disks for long periods of time be sure to place them in their protective cases u Be sure to place labels in the proper location on the disks Do not press the eject button on the disk drive to eject the floppy disk while the indicator light is lit This may cause the data stored on the disk to become corrupted resulting in errors Protecting Disks From Accidental Erasure There is a write protect tab on the underside of the floppy disk To lock the disk press this tab down toward the edge of the disk to expose the little hole underneath as shown in Figure 4E 3 Locking the disk will prevent it from being written to or erased To unlock thedisk and enable it to be writ ten to or erased move the tab back toward the center of the disk so it covers the hole Write enable Write protect Figure 4E 3 Write Protect Tab on a Floppy
298. id injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures Injury Precautions Use Proper To avoid fire hazard use only the power cord specified for this product Power Cord Avoid Electric To avoid electric shock or fire hazard do not apply a voltage to a terminal that is Overload outside the range specified for that terminal i Ground the Product This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord To avoid electric shock the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground Before making connections to the input or output terminals of the product ensure that the product is properly grounded Do Not Operate To avoid electric shock or fire hazard do not operate this product with covers or Without Covers panels removed Use Proper Fuse To avoid fire hazard use only the fuse type and rating specified for this product AWG2040 User Manual XXV Operator s Safety Summary Do Not Operate in Wet Damp Conditions Do Not Operate in Explosive Atmosphere To avoid electric shock do not operate this product in wet or damp conditions To avoid injury or fire hazard do not operate this product in an explosive atmosphere Product Damage Precautions Use Proper Power Source Provide Proper Ventilation Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures xxvi Do not operate this product from a power source that applies more tha
299. ignated with the component menu and the equation can be created Figure 4A 102 shows a menu with Operation in the bottom menu selected GPIB Triggered mode Stopped ooo File Name i b Operation Line gt sattuessa EF to Buffer Paste from Buffer word Table f f ey FS cos epil k gt Bera fool i int isqrt x i maxi ming ranged i insert endi mark di ff integ Other Equation lo Cursor made Setting Compile Figure 4A 102 Menu With Operation Selected Creating an Equation Specifying the Time Domain The equation must specify the time domain If the time domain is not de fined this is an error The time domain is specified with range When making a new equation file range 0 is input in the first line of equa tion Next the time is specified This setting is valid until the next range item is specified With the first range specification any number of lines of equation can be input Text written after the range on the same line is invalid Here is the format for the range item range Equation starting time Equation ending time Specification of subsequent time ranges use the component menu range item The clock frequency is obtained from the total time period set with range and the waveform point count set with Setting thus Waveform point count Clock frequency Equation period
300. illoscope Frequency range to 1 8 GHz Dynamic range 80 dB Tektronix 497P or 2712 Purpose Signal termination Signal interconnection Signal interconnection Signal interconnection Signal interconnection DC block Signal interconnection Signal interconnection Signal interconnection Checks output signals Used in many procedures Checks output signals Performance Tests Table E 1 Test Equipment Cont i tL tn item Description Minimum Requirements Frequency Frequency range counter 1 MHz to 100 MHz Accuracy lt 0 2 ppm Digital DC volts range multimeter 0 05 Vto 10V Accuracy 0 1 Function Output voltage generator 7Vto7V RF signal Frequency range generator 245 MHz to 1050 MHz Performance Check Must use example listed disk Example Tektronix DC 5010 Program mable Universal Counter Timer with Option Precision time base Fluke 8842A Tektronix FG 5010 Program mabie Function Generator Tektronix SG 504 Signal Gener ator Tektronix Part 063 1707 00 Purpose Used to check clock frequency Used throughout the checks to measure voltage Used to input the trigger signal Used to input the ex ternal clock signal Used throughout the checks to provide waveform files manea Requires a TM 5000 Series Power Module Mainframe Table E 2 Additional Test Equipment for Optional Check Slave Mode Item Description
301. in Figure 4A 64 AWG2040 User Manual 4A 81 EDIT Menu 44 82 GPIB Continious mode Stopped Select Open favetornt kxaaa eae WEN 3 LEEETTIEY TN 1024 pts Ve Another Waveform zoom unde Standard Close Setting Waveform writ Figure 4A 64 Two Waveform Editing Areas Designated To select the area for waveform copying C Step 4 Select Waveform1 from the side menu to designate this wave form area as the source for copying C Step 5 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel g Step 6 Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob move the vertical bar cursors to designate the section of the waveform to be copied In this example we will set the left cursor to point 256 and the right cursor to point 767 NOTE Copying will include the point at which the cursor is located The value indicated by A at the top of the waveform area indicates the difference of number of points between the two cursors so the number of points that will be copied will be this value plus one point EDIT Menu Select open iseesanee __ 1024 pts Wave form rreng BEM reseeaaae LI A 1623 R 1023 1924 pts Value 8 09 aa TIE 0 6500 year Another waveform tandard k se H H F parie zoom Setting Unda veform write Figure 4A 65 Setting the Copy Source Setting the Destination for Waveform Copying
302. in which two editing areas have been created and Cursor Link to has been selected 1024 pts SAT Eep w Continuous mode Stopped Setting PIETTTT ITT 1924 pts __ E Link Off Go Back Select Open Operation Zoom H l u Standard o ume waveform Clase writ Figure 4A 21 Sub Menu Display When Cursor Link to is Selected 4A 36 EDIT Menu AWG2040 User Manual The 1 at the top of editing area 2 indicates that this area has been linked to editing area 1 Procedure In the following procedure you will link the vertical bar cursors in editing area 2 Waveform to the ones in editing area 1 Waveform1 while editing area 1 is being edited C Step 1 Select Select Open from the bottom menu C Step 2 Select Waveform2 from the side menu C Step 3 Select Setting from the bottom menu 0 Step 4 Select More item to display More 2 of 2 from the side menu and then select Cursor Link to g Step 5 Select Waveform1 from the sub menu 1 will appear at the top of editing area 2 O Step 6 Select Go Back from the sub menu The Setting side menu will reappear C Step 7 Select Select Open from the bottom menu C Step 8 Select Waveform1 from the side menu C Step 9 Press the front panel CURSOR button QO Step 10 Using the general purpose knob move the active vertical bar cursor in editing area 1
303. ination list or Repeat column Creating and Editing Sequence Files Select Operation in the bottom menu to create or edit a sequence file After you have done this you can select a waveform or sequence file from Cata log and then put together a sequence and set the number of repetitions for that file to create the sequence file Creating a Sequence File In this example you will create a new sequence file C Step 1 Select Operation from the bottom menu 0O Step 2 Use the general purpose knob to select the file from the Cata log to insert into the Destination list C Step 3 Press the VALUE button or ENTER button on the front panel The file selected from the Catalog is inserted into the Destination list The file being inserted is placed directly before the inverted display cursor When the file is inserted the inverted cursor will move to Repeat on the same line g Step 4 Use the numeric keys to input the repetition count then press the ENTER button to enter the value The inverted cursor will move to Destination on the next line The default value for repetition counts is 1 If there is no need to change this value press the gt button The inverted cursor will move to Destina tion on the next line C Step 5 Repeat steps from 2 to 4 to create the desired sequence The programmable sequence length may be up to the waveform memory size 4M words when Option 01 is installed Figure 44 125 shows an example of sequence
304. ints as desired C Step 6 To delete a draw point added with Add Draw Point move the point cursor to the point to be deleted then select Delete Draw Point This deletes the point if Delete Draw Point is pressed repeatedly the added points closest to the point cursor are deleted in order C Step 7 Press the Smooth button in the sub menu to switch on smooth ing AWG2040 User Manual 4A 49 EDIT Menu 4A 50 Smosth Spline Interpolated Smoothing Smoothing can be toggled on or off by pressing the Smooth button When smoothing is on the waveform data is spline interpolated and the curve outside the left and right vertical bar cursors and the placed points are connected with a smooth curve When smoothing is off the interpolation is linear and the curve outside the left and right vertical bar cursors and the placed points are connected with a straight line When the vertical bar cursors are at both ends of the wave form being edited the start and end point of the waveform are given the value to be smooth waveform as the repetition waveforms regardless of whether smoothing is set to on or off Step 8 Select Execute from the sub menu The points between the vertical bar cursors will be connected with smooth curves as shown in the left screen in Figure 44 30 This is called spline interpolation Step 9 To return to the original waveform select Undo from the bottom menu Step 10 Press the Smooth button in the su
305. irectory to be deleted AWG2040 User Manual 4E 11 UTILITY Menu 4E 12 Lock on otf Locking and Unlocking a File This item locks a file When a file is locked the file can neither be changed nor erased This item locks and unlocks a file the same as the Lock item in the EDIT menu See Page 4A 11 Internal Non volatile Memory Files saved to the internal non volatile memory can be operated with this bottom menu When NVRam is selected from the bottom menu the Re name Delete Delete All and Lock side menu items are displayed These functions can rename delete and lock files These items are the same as those in the EDIT menu See Page 4A 8 to 4A 11 Figure 4E 8 shows the menu displayed when NVRam is selected from the bottom menu GPIB Triggered mode Stopped l NyRam Catalog NyRam Free 13KB pe Name Type Size Date amp Time Cemment ee Rename 3 HFM PLE 4 EQU MPLE 4 8PM 2948 93 11 17 W LE S SEG 968 93 11 17 SANPLE 6 AST S54 2 V4 49 12019 Delete All Lock On GPIB RS232C Bate Timej Misc Diag Cal i Figure 4E 8 Menu Displayed When NVRam is Selected UTILITY Menu Remote Interface This instrument s rear panel has two remote control interface ports IEEE STD 488 GPIB and RS 232 C A computer can be used to control the instrument remotely through these interfaces The port is selected using the Remote Port item UTILITY menu Mise
306. is played before Insert Other Waveform was selected MARKER 0 Figure 4A 43 Inserting Waveforms 4A 64 EDIT Menu Single Waveform Calculations aaee The Single Waveform Math item allows you to perform mathematical Math calculations for the waveform itself Calculations are applied to the portion of the waveform between the vertical bar cursors u Absolute Determines the absolute value for the amplitude Square Doubles the absolute value for the amplitude If the amplitude is a negative number the calculated result is also negative w Cube Triples the amplitude Square Root Determines the square root for the absolute value of the amplitude If the amplitude is a negative number the calculated result is also negative m Normalize Normalizes the amplitude between 1 0 and 1 0 m Integral Integrates the amplitude u Differential Differentiates the amplitude The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Single Wave form Math item l m Absolute Square Cube Square Root i m Normalize m Integral __ Go Back Differential oi a Execute 7 Type i Single Waveform __ Operation More 3 of 3 Math Procedure To derive the Absolute value for the amplitude of a sine wave between the vertical bar cursors ag Step 1 Create the sine wave to be subjected to Absolute operation Figure 4A 44 shows the sine wave before calc
307. is installed Figure 3 9 shows the configuration of the waveform memory 1 M Words 4 M Words bito l Waveform Data 8 bis m E bit 1 8 1 Multiplexer Multiplexer Marker 1 1 bit Marker 2 1 bit bit 9 128K X 32 bits 32 5 MHz Clock Figure 3 9 Waveform Memory AWG2040 User Manual 3 11 Block Diagram 3 12 Loading Sequence Files When a sequence file has been selected with Waveform Sequence in the SETUP menu the contents of the sequence file will be expanded into the 1M words waveform memory or 4M words waveform memory in the case ol Option 01 Table 3 1 shows an example of a sequence file that contains another sequence Table 3 1 Sample Sequence Files Sequence File EXAMPLE SEQ File Name Repetition Count AAA WFM XXX SEQ BBB WFM 5 Configuration of XXX SEQ File Name CCC WFM DDD WFM Repetition Count The AWG2040 has no sequence memory When a sequence file has been selected in the SETUP menu the waveform is expanded like a long filmstrip as shown in Figure 3 10 When Waveform Advance mode has been selected the waveform memory is divided into the first multiple of 32 that is larger than the largest waveform in the sequence file waveform data is expanded in each of these divisions Biock Diagram AAA WFM x 3 XXX SEQ x 4 CCC WFM x 2 DDD WFM x 4 BBB WFM x 5 1 M words 4 M with Option 01 Waveform Memory Figure 3
308. is re ceived through the STOP TRIG IN connector on the rear panel Figure 4C 8 shows an example of the output in response to the external trigger signal for both Run settings Continuous and Step when an auto Step file with the attributes shown in the table below has been selected with the Autostep menu item Sample Autostep File Contents File Name Output Condi tions li 5V WAVE 1 WFM Amplitude 1 5 Offset 0 V WAVE 2 SEQ WAVE 3 WFM Waveform Step 1 Amplitude 1 0 V Offset 0 V Amplitude 2 0 V Offset 0 V Step 3 MODE Menu External Trigger Signal f Step Signal Output Signal Set to Continuous Output Signal Set to Step WW iV L Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 1 Figure 4C 8 Output in Response to External Trigger Signal when Run is set to Continuous and Step Output m When a trigger signal is applied if Run is set to Continuous the wave form will be output continuously If Run is set to Step the waveform will be output once only This autostep file contains a sequence file consist ing of two waveform types combined in a sequence in this case the values for number of repetitions set for the individual waveforms are ignored a When a step signal is generated the next waveform is loaded into waveform memory and the voltage for the 0 point of that waveform is generated this voltage is maintained
309. isted in Appendix D 4E 23 UTILITY Menu 4E 24 Secure Erase Memory Remote Port GPIB RS232C Deleting Data From Memory Use this item to delete the data stored in the internal memory and the non volatile RAM NVRam This will also cause all values with the exception of Date Time date and time to be restored to their default settings Default settings consist of the factory settings and the following items Remote Port GPIB GPIB Operating Mode Talk Listen GPIB Address 1 RS 232 C Parameters Baudrate 9600 Data Bits 8 Parity None Stop Bits 1 Flagging None Once deleted data cannot be restored Procedure C Step 1 Select Mise from the bottom menu C Step 2 Select Config from the side menu oO Step 3 Select Secure Erase Memory from the sub menu O Step 4 The following message will appear asking you to confirm that you really want to delete the data from memory Initializes both catalog memory and NVRam then puts all setups in the factory defaults Answer Cancel or O K If you select O K all data will be deleted from memory and settings will be restored to factory defaults and then the SET UP menu will appear Remote Port Settings This instrument s rear panel has two remote control interface ports IEEE STD 488 GPIB and RS 232 C Select the desired port depending on which interface you will be using Procedure C Step 1 Select Mise from the bottom menu UTILITY
310. it keys will change the unit to that value and will confirm the number that has been entered If you press the unit key before inputting a numeric value only the unit will change the numeric value that is currently displayed will be unaffected NOTE After a value has been entered if you proceed to another menu item without first pressing either a unit key or ENTER the input operation will be canceled the value you have entered will be discarded and the previous value will be retained If you attempt to enter a value outside the allowable range whether too high or too low the value will change to the closest allowable value in other words either the minimum or the maximum value Example 2 Offset numeric input Offset in SETUP menu This example changes the offset from 1 000 V to 0 030 V 30 mV The input is as shown in this table Tabie 2 2 Numeric Value Input Example 2 Input Key Numeric Value Column Numeric Value Status 1 000V Before input 3 3 During input 0 30 eeen aaalllt kHz ms mV 0 030 V Entered in this case pressing 07 3 Hz sec V also enters a value of 0 030 V The unit is displayed as V AWG2040 User Manual 2 19 Basic Menu Operation 2 20 Using the General Purpose Knob When the knob icon is displayed on the CRT screen numeric values can be set using the general purpose knob and the lt left down and gt right up buttons When setting nu
311. itches off auto loading When from Disk or from NVRam is selected from the side menu ad vance the procedure below woo oO Step 3 Switch the AWG2040 power off then on again Select the LOAD SAVE menu on the front panel to check that files are automatical ly loaded from mass memory to internal memory AWG2040 User Manual 4D 1 LOAD SAVE Menu Supported Floppy Disk Files Table 4D 3 shows a list of file name extensions denoting the type of disk file that can be loaded to the internal memory of the AWG2040 Table 4D 3 Supported Floppy Disk Files Extension Description Result of Load Operation Waveform data files saved in ISF format Instrument Specific Format using the waveform save function in the S34TDS1 Data Manager software SF WVN WFB and WFM files are automatically con verted into WFM files in the AWG2040 instrument s internal format and then stored in inter nal memory When this is done except for the WFM file the name of the file is retained as is with only the extension changed to WFN In the WFM file file name and exten sion are as itis ASF Waveform data files saved us ing the waveform save function in the S37UTO1 Utility software Waveform data files saved in binary format on a DSA600A series instrument WFB WFM Waveform data files created in i a TDS series instrument EQA files are automatically co
312. iting area 1 is displayed for creating a new waveform C Step 2 Press Select Open from the bottom menu In the side menu Waveform1 refers to the waveform file in editing area 1 C Step 3 Select Another Waveform from the side menu A file list will appear allowing you to select the waveform file to be displayed in editing area 2 The top item in the list New Waveform is used to create a new wave form file The subsequent items are the names of existing waveform files See Figure 4A 9 Continuous mode Stopped Select Open Select Waveform Rew Wavelornt CBAMP WEM CePY LWFM BERP_WEM ESP WFM GAUSS WEM IBSERT 1 WEM og i LORERTZ WFM SE E oaa M BISK WWM H BROUIST WEM i Cancel SAMPLE IWFM i S MPLE ZWFM SAMPLE Z WEM QK close write Undo Operation Zoom seing Figure 4A 9 Menu Display When Another Waveform is Selected C Step 4 Using the general purpose knob select New Waveform The new waveform file created in this step will be assigned to editing area 2 g Step 5 Select O K from the sub menu When this is done Waveform2 will be added to the side menu and the Waveform2 editing area will appear on the screen See Figure 4A 10 EDIT Menu GPIB ontiquaus mide Select open Waveforat aaaaneae KEM Wave torn tessar UI Another waveform Stand
313. itrary Waveform Generator performs as warranted The procedures are arranged in nine logical groupings presented in the following order Operating Mode Checks Clock Frequency Check Amplitude and Offset Accuracy Checks Pulse Response Checks Sine Wave Checks AUX Output Checks External Trigger Input Checks External CLOCK IN Check Digital Data Out Checks These procedures extend the confidence level provided by the internal diagnostic and calibration routines described on page E 3 aaee Prerequisites The tests in this subsection comprise an extensive valid confirmation of performance and functionality when the following requirements are met You must have performed and passed the calibration procedure de scribed in Self Tests the previous subsection The AWG2040 must have passed the calibration procedure mentioned above or must have been adjusted using the adjustment procedure in section 5 at an ambient temperature between 15 C and 25 C must have been operating for a warm up period of at least 20 minutes and must be operating at an ambient temperature between 10 C and 40 C NOTE For operation to specified accuracy allow the AWG2040 to warm up at least 20 minutes before doing the performance tests AWG2040 User Manual Performance Tests Item Description Precision termination Adapter Adapter BNC dual input TEE adapter Adapter DC Block BNC cable 3 required SMB cable 2
314. ize is not a multiple of 32 is output data at the 0 point is added to the end of the waveform to make the waveform size a multiple of 32 after which it is loaded to waveform memory For details see Selecting a Waveform or Sequence File in Section 4B SETUP Menu 4A 26 EDIT Menu Graphic Display In graphic display waveforms are created and edited being displayed in graphic form The horizontal axis indicates time or number of points while the vertical axis indicates the levels Waveforms are displayed at each data point in 8 bit resolution On the left beneath the waveform is an indicator showing whether the marker signal is high or low All editing operations are performed between the two vertical bar cursors Graphic Display Menu Structure Figure 44 17 is a diagram showing the menu structure in graphic display This is not a complete list for a complete list see the diagram at the beginning of the section on each menu An ellipsis next to an item in the side menu indicates that there is a sub menu below that item listing additional choices Commands in the sub menu are executed with the Execute command when Go Back is selected the sub menu disappears and the side menu reappears Bottom Menu m SelecOpen Waveform Editor AWG2040 User Manual H Operation Side Menu Sub Menu tr Waveform H Waveform2 ft Waveform3 1 Another Waveform m Cut t Copy to B
315. izontal zoom items and the second page contains the vertical zoom items antinuous mode Stepped Zoom H Zoom Horizontal vertical Zoomin i Zoom in i f f Horizontal Yertical l Zoom out Zoom out f i i i Horizontal vertical iy Zoom fit Zeom fit v Horizontal vertical pan Pan H More H More 2082 iSelect i Opern Horizontal Zoom in Operation Setting Unda Write Figure 4A 75 Zoom Menu Horizontal Zooming When the waveform is enlarged horizontally using the Horizontal Zoom in item three additional items are displayed in the side menu Horizontal Zoom out m Horizontal Zoom fit a Used to reduce the waveform Used to return to normal waveform size x1 Used to scroll through the waveform when it is enlarged Horizontal Pan Procedure C Step 1 Select Zoom from the bottom menu C Step 2 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel 4A 96 EDIT Menu g Step 3 Using the general purpose knob move the active vertical bar cursor to the center of the position at which you want the waveform to be displayed Horizontal waveform enlargement will be centered around the active vertical bar cursor C Step 4 Select Horizontal Zoom in from the side menu The waveform will be enlarged horizontally Before Figure 4A 76 Horizontal Zoom Step 5 Select Horizontal Zoom in again
316. k the oscilloscope display for a 1 us 2 Vp p square wave Change the hookup and set test equipment controls a Hook up the oscilloscope s Attach the adapter BNC T male to 2 female to the AWG2040 TRIGGER INPUT connector Disconnect the BNC coaxial cable on the AWG2040 MARKER2 output connector and connect it to the adapter BNC T male to 2 female on the AWG2040 TRIGGER INPUT connector Performance Tests E 40 a Connect the SYNC OUT connector on the rear panel of AWG2040 through the coaxial cable BNC SMB to the CH2 vertical input connector on the oscilloscope b Hook up the function generator m Connect the function generator output through a BNC coaxial cable to the adapter on the AWG2040 TRIGGER INPUT connec tor see Figure E 18 to SYNC OUT SMB BNC Cable Oscilloscope Figure E 18 SYNC Delay Initial Test Hookup c Set oscilloscope controls Vertical CH1 Coupling CH1 Scale CH1 Input Impedance CH2 Coupling CH2 Scale CH2 Input impedance Horizontal Sweep d Set function generator controls Function Mode Parameter Frequency Amplitude Offset CH1 DC 2 Vidiv 1MQ DC 2 Vidiv 1MQ 20 ns div Square Continuous 100 kHz 4 0V 2 0V Performance Tests 17 Set the AWG2040 controls Push MODE Triggered 18 Check SYNC delay Check that the SYNC rising edge Channel 2 is delayed by 60
317. l be deleted if you press Delete Draw Point several times in succession the points that you have added will be deleted in sequence starting with that nearest to the point cursor Ol Step 8 Select Execute from the sub menu The points that you have added will be connected to the magnitude or phase on the area defined by the left and right vertical bar cursors Figure 44 155 shows an example of a magnitude drawn between the A i vertical bar cursors Piai 4A 211 EDIT Menu GPIB ooo Triggered mode EXP file Name pes Freqi Freq2 Operation Magnitude Magnitade 21 47 2972d8 Sot 7 MHZ Phase Ph 7 bende Add 9 omiz peepi Draw Point Delete Draw Point E E Draw Area Go Back i i i Execute Switch point cursor dir Zoom Filter Limiter p Exits i Undo Write Figure 44 155 Drawing a Magnitude Cl Step 9 To cancel the execution of a draw operation select Undo from the bottom menu The screen will revert to the waveform before Execute was selected NOTE When you quit and once again enter the waveform editor the points you have drawn will disappear g Step 10 Select Go Back from the sub menu The system returns from the Draw sub menu to the previous side menu This concludes the draw process 4A 218 EDIT Menu Zooming a Signal Zoom Select Zoom from th
318. l be displayed as shown in Figure 4E 19 Model AWG 2040 Version FVIE OG CPU Board SRAM 512K Bytes DRAM 6M Bytes FPP Board installed Clock Board installed CHT installed EHI Digital Out Net installed GPIB RS232C Address i Configuration Taik Listen PSC 1 Header t verbose 1 Data Source CH1 Destination GPIB WERP Encdg Rpbinary Width Z Debug Snoop 0 Delay 0 258 Up Time 0 075 hours Figure 4E 19 Menu Displayed When System is Selected UTILITY Menu 1 O Event Reporting FE Use this item to display event reporting for the GPIB or RS 232 C interface 1 0 See the programmer s manual for more information on event reporting Procedure C Step 1 Select Misc from the bottom menu Step 2 Select Status from the side menu C Step 3 Select 1 0 from the sub menu Event reporting will be displayed as shown in Figure 4E 20 F Event aueue avah Pend i f i l i agl Figure 4E 20 O Event Reporting AWG2040 User Manual 4E 2 UTILITY Menu F Diag Cal 4E 30 Diagnostics Diagnostics and Calibration Use this item to run the diagnostics function or to calibrate the instrument Diagnostics This instrument is equipped with diagnostics functions to comprehensively test itself This makes it possible to check whether the instrument is operat ing correctly A series of tests are automatically carried out when this instru ment is started These same dia
319. l memory are displayed in this column Type Name extensions of each file are displayed in this column Name extensions are WFM EQU SEQ and AST The file is identified by its name extension for each editor Size The memory occupied by each file is indicated in bytes Date amp Time The date and time the file was saved in the internal memory is displayed in this column Comment Any comment defined for the file is displayed EDIT Menu Creating or Editing a File Select one of the items from the side menus in the initial menu to create a new file New Waveform New Equation New Sequence or New Auto step or to edit an existing file Edit Creating a New File New New When a New command New Waveform New Equation New Sequence Waveform Equation or New Autostep is selected a new file will be created by the appropriate rials aac editor New New sequence Autostep Procedure as C Step 1 Press the EDIT button in the MENU column to display the initial menu oO Step 2 Select one of the following editors in the side menu depending on what type of file you wish to create m New Waveform Waveform editor a New Equation Equation editor a New Sequence Sequence editor New Autostep Autostep editor To select the autostep editor select More from the side menu in the initial menu and then select Autostep Editor from the second page of the side menu oO Step 3 Select an editor and create
320. le 4A 3 Differences Between the Shift Operations Table 44 4 Menu Functions Table 4A 5 Menu Functions Table 4A 6 Menu Functions Table 4A 7 Menu Functions Table 4A 8 Menu Functions Table 4A 9 Menu Functions Table 4A 10 Menu Functions 0 0 eee eee eee ere nee Table 4A 11 Menu Functions 0 00 e ee eee eens Table 4B 1 Menu Functions 0 0 cece eee eee eee Table 4C 1 Menu Functions 666 esse ee eee ee eee eee Table 4D 1 Menu Functions 00 02 eee cece eee eee Table AD 2 Supported Instruments 2 6 eee e ee eee Table 4D 3 Supported Floppy Disk Files 5 55 Tabie 4E 1 Menu Functions 6 eee eee eee eee Table 4E 2 MS DOS Formats for 3 5 inch Disks Table 4E 3 Format Extensions 6 60s eee e reece reese Table 4F 1 Frequency Waveform and Marker Signal Data Table A 1 Power Cord Options Table D 1 Factory Settings essere eee eee eens Table E 1 Test Equipment 26 eee eee Table E 2 Additional Test Equipment for Optional Check Slave Mode 6c cece eee renee eee teen ence Table E 3 Additional Test Equipment for Option 03 Table E 4 File List for Performance Check Adjustment Disk Point Count 60 ee tenes xxii Getting Started Overview This section describes the features of the AWG2040 initial inspection and start up Product
321. le of pattern data being entered Pattern length 0 sestineammumeenteeammrmaente 1 Paint Step gt 4 i curscr Position 8 E el lii i 0 Y key q other Numeric key Toggle Carser Enter Pattern and Press O K Figure 4A 39 Entering Pattern Data g Step 5 When you have finished creating the pattern data select O K The marker data between the left and right vertical bar cursors will be replaced with the pattern data that you have created To cancel the operation select Cancel Whichever option you select O K or Cancel the menu that was displayed before Set Pattern was selected wili reap pear C1 Step 6 Select Go Back from the sub menu The display returns from the Marker sub menu to the side menu AWG2040 User Manual 4A 61 EDIT Menu Insert Other 4A 62 Waveform Inserting Other Waveforms Use Insert Other Waveform to insert other waveforms into any desired location within the waveform being edited The following diagram shows the menu configuration Show Catalog Continue Enti j Insert Other ry Operation More 3 of 3 Waveform Cancel O K Procedure C Step 1 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel oO Step 2 Use the general purpose knob to move the active vertical bar cursor to the position where the other waveform is to be inserted MARKER 6 Figure 4A 40 Defining the Location for Insertion The other
322. left part of Figure 4A 74 shows a hysteresis comparison between a triangular wave as Waveform2 and a square wave as Waveform1 with the results output to the MARKER display area in the Waveform2 area The figure on the right has been provided as an aid to understanding this process In hysteresis comparison the waveform only becomes high level when the destination waveform exceeds the level above the Source waveform set for Hysteresis The waveform only becomes low level when the destination waveform exceeds the level below the Source waveform set for Hysteresis Comparison is only performed for the section of the Waveform2 between the vertical bar cursors in this example from point 0 to point 1023 44 94 EDIT Menu Source signal level Hysteresis value Source signal level Hysteresis value ae 4 Source signal level i i Figure 4A 74 Comparison With Hysteresis Cl Step 13 Select Go Back from the current sub menu The display moves from the Compare sub menu to the side menu AWG2040 User Manual 44 95 EDIT Menu Ylegasssss 1624 pts 6 5630 Zooming Waveforms The Zoom item is used to enlarge or reduce the waveform being displayed either horizontally or vertically This process is for display purposes only it does not affect the waveform data The side menu consists of 2 pages the first page contains the hor
323. litude offset clock and filter will be used for output of all of the waveforms in the sequence file AWG2040 User Manual 4C 11 MODE Menu Autostep 4C 12 a The number of repetitions for all of the waveforms in the sequence file will be ignored and each waveform will be output once only The se quence file has another sequence file made up of two more waveform types these are also output once only Autostep Mode Use Autostep mode to start an autostep file created with the EDIT menu Autostep editor An autostep file stores a program that specifies a waveform or sequence file and output parameters clock frequency amplitude filter etc for each step In Autostep mode when a step signal is received the waveform or se quence waveform for the next step is loaded into waveform memory and output when the trigger signal is received The waveform for each step can be output continuously or once only depending on the setting for the Run output parameter The output parameters will also change for each step The Autostep mode step signal can be generated from the AUTO STEP IN connector or by pressing the Next Step button in the Contig sub menu Just as in other operating modes the Autostep mode trigger signal can be generated from the INPUT connector on the front panel or by pressing the MANUAL button on the front panel NOTE During Autostep mode the output parameters can not be changed with the SETUP menu When Aut
324. ll cause the number of output channels to increase The clock signal received from the master unit is output from the MASTER CLOCK OUT connector on the slave unit When AWG2040 instruments are connected in parallel loop through con nection should be used as shown in Figure 4C 10 Master Slave 1 Slave 2 t gt _ S SSS SLAVE Hi SLAVE CLOCK IN so Jlf CLOCK IN MASTER 50Q SMB Cable MASTER 50N SMB Cable CLOCK OUT CLOCK OUT Figure 4C 10 AWG2040 Synchronous Operation NOTE Each meter of the 502 SMB cable has delay of around 5 ns so the cables used to connect clock output and clock input should be as short as possible Synchronous operation is possible in Triggered Gated Burst and Wave form Advance modes It is not possible in Continuous and Autostep modes AWG2040 User Manual 4C 1i MODE Menu 4C 18 NOTE In order to perform synchronous operation waveforms with the same point size must be present on both master and slave units In addition the clock on the master unit should be at least 650 MHz The waveform will not be correctly output with clocks lower than this When Slave in the bottom menu is selected that instrument will function as a slave unit To return that instrument to master operation select an operat ing mode other than Slave for example Cont Triggered etc NOTE When you change to slave mode the clock on the master unit must be turned off First change the mode to slave mo
325. lly Shifted Display sees 4A 52 Figure 4A 32 Vertically Shifted Display eeeer eee eres 4A 52 Figure 44 33 Display Expanded Horizontally s 0 4A 54 Figure 4A 34 Display Expanded to x1 5 Vertically 4A 55 Figure 44 35 Horizontally Inverted Displayen e a wees 4A 56 Figure 4A 36 Vertically Inverted Display sseeeeee eee 4A 57 Figure 44 37 Display of Waveform Clipped Above Clip Level 4A 58 Figure 4A 38 Marker Signal Set High s ee eeee seen eee 4A 60 Figure 4A 39 Entering Pattern Data 2 6 esses eee ee eee ees 4A 61 Figure 44 40 Defining the Location for Insertion 4A 62 Figure 4A 41 List of Files for Insertion 0 1 see seen eee 4A 63 Figure 4A 42 File Waveform Display eeeee eens 4A 63 Figure 4A 43 Inserting Waveforms ese seer seen eens 4A 64 XV BOnNOHHO AN GREN ol 22 wre ey N Pw Ows List of Figures xvi Figure 4A 44 Waveform Example before Calculation 4A Figure 4A 45 Absolute Calculation n u aoaaa 4A Figure 4A 46 Square Calculation 0000 000 0000 cece cece cece 4A Figure 44 47 Cube Calculation no a 0000 ccc araa 4A t Figure 44 48 Square Root Calculation 0000 4A Figure 44 49 Normalize Calculation 0c ceeeuee 4A Figure 4A 50 Integral Calculation 0 00 ccc ce ccc ccc cee e ees 4A
326. ludes not only waveform data but also output parameters When you select a file with the Waveform Sequence item the AWG2040 output parameters change to those specified in the file and the waveform output reflects waveform data in the file After selecting a fil do not change an output parameter with the SETUP menu unless a procedure instructs you to do so During the proce dures if you are unsure that the AWG2040 settings still match the file s settings select the waveform again using the Waveform Sequence item on the SETUP menu Table E 4 File List for Performance Check Adjustment Disk EDIT Menu SETUP Menu No File Name Marker Setup Usage Wim Wim Shape Point Clock Filter Ampi Offset 4 MODE WFM Cont Mode 1024 1 024GHz Through 1V OV Triggered Mode Gated Mode Burst Mode Slave Mode 2 MODE_ADV SEQ We Waveform ADV 1 WFM Ee 1024 MHz Through 1V ov Advance Mode ADV 2 WFM ra at Vf 1024 1MHz Through 1V ov V W 3 MODE_AST AST Autostep Step 1 AST 1 WFM 1024 500kHz Through 1V ov Mode Step 2 AST 2 WFM ANAN 1024 1MHz Through 1V ov 4 PULSE WFM cana Pulse 1024 1 GHz Through 1V ov Response AWG2040 User Manual F 11 Performance Tests Table E 4 File List for Performance ee Disk Cont EDIT Menu Wim Wim Shape Point No File Name ae eee Setup Usage Clock Filter Ampi Offset 5 SINE WFM Sine Wave 32 1GHz
327. m Generator Mode Table 4F 1 Frequency Waveform and Marker Signal Data Point Count Waveform 10000 points 1000 100 Frequency THz lt f lt 100 kHz 100 kHz lt f lt 1 MHz 1MHz sf lt 10 MHz Marker Signal 1000 points 100 10 Function Generator Figure 4F 1 shows the configuration of the menus in FG mode Menu Structure MENU Button Bottom Menu Side Menu Select Item r Frequency H Amplitude Sine Offset Normal Polarity invert m Frequency Amplitude Triangle Offset Normal Polarity Invert m Frequency pr Amplitude EG Square Offset Polarity p Nommal Invert r Frequency Amplitude Ramp Offset Polarity _____F Normal Invert r Frequency Amplitude Offset Pulse Normal Polarity invert Duty Figure 4F 1 FG Mode Menu Structure 4F 2 Function Waveform Generator Mode Function Generator Figure 4F 2 shows the general display for the FG mode menu A description for each callout follows Menu Display Running spo tes Sine Frequency 19 00000MHZ i EHI 0 50007 Amplitude 1 6009 Z Offset Sq ee 0 0004 0 50004 gt period 106 0000ns ge A Fee Ramp puise Figure 4F 2 FG Mode Menu Display areas channel CHI EE triangle Square 1 Channel waveform displ
328. m h i can be expressed by the following formula where N is the number of data items y n x Onin f 0 The operation expressed by this formula is called convolution Procedure oo ae With the waveform between the vertical bar cursors in editing area 1 as the Source in this example we will perform convolution between this waveform and the one in editing area 2 In this example a Gaussian pulse of 256 points is used for Waveform1 while a magnetic disc waveform of 512 points is used for Waveform2 The procedure begins from the point where both waveforms have been designated for the editing area The Gaussian pulse waveform is included on the sample waveform library disk that came with the instrument Setting the convolution range C Step 1 Select Select Open from the bottom menu C Step 2 Select Waveform1 from the side menu C Step 3 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel T Step 4 Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob set the positions of the left and right vertical bar cursors to define the section of the waveform for convolution In this example we will set the left cursor to point O and the right cursor to point 255 EDIT Menu C Step 5 Select Waveform2 from the side menu C Step 6 Select Setting from the bottom menu C Step 7 Select Waveform Points from the side menu and using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob set the waveform point size to 768 512 points is suffici
329. m the bottom menu C Step 2 Select Waveform from the side menu oO Step 3 Using the general purpose knob select the waveform file to be inserted from the Select Waveform list and then select O K The wave form you have selected will be displayed in the Source waveform dis play area Z Step 4 Select Insertion from the side menu oO Step 5 Using the general purpose knob select the waveform file for insertion into the Source file from the Select Waveform list and then select O K The waveform you have selected will be displayed in the Insertion waveform display area C Step 6 Select insert to from the side menu 4A 200 EDIT Menu g Step 7 Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob designate a point value for the position in the Source waveform at which you want to insert the data C Step 8 Select Execute from the side menu You wili be asked to enter a file name for the waveform file that will be created C Step 9 Enter the file name To confirm the file name select O K To cancel the operation select Cancel When you select O K a new waveform file will be created in which the Insertion waveform has been inserted into the Source waveform This waveform will be displayed in the Destination waveform area Source Waveform Destination Waveform _CopyiCut j aa a ALASE FEES E P 0 512 1023 y 512 1535 2047 Insertion Waveform p 3 1023 Figu
330. m within the component menu After selecting an item press the VALUE button or EN TER button on the front panel to enter the selected item into the equation list In addition to selecting the carriage return mark you can also insert a carriage return by pressing the key on the front panel Now you will create the equation for the time region set in the previous step oO Step 4 For the equation enter 0 5 sin 4 pi x Input O 5 sin 4 pi x with the numeric keys or from the component menu 3 o Step 5 in the same manner input the data as shown in Figure 2 38 range t0 S00us7 8 See In 4ep pax ri nge 500 is intios Figure 2 38 Equation List input Compile C Step 6 Select Compile from the bottom menu After the compiling is complete the waveform data is created from the equation and the resultant waveform is displayed on the screen Fig ure 2 39 shows the compiled waveform data 2 48 Operating Examples Continue Operation Exit write A write and Exit AWG2040 User Manual CRIB e es ee File Name a l N DN AOA S A 4824 Points Clock 1624060 H2 P i Continue Operation j l i f T Setting compie i i Figure 2 39 Display of Compiled Waveform Data C Step 7 Select Continue Operation from the side menu to return the system to the previous equa
331. make sure the power to this instrument has been turned on see Section 1 Start Up for instructions on how to do this Example 1 Setting the Date amp Time and Adjusting the Brightness Example 2 Output of a Waveform Using the Sample Waveform Library Disk Example 3 Creating Files and Arbitrary Waveform Outputs Creating a Waveform File Creating Arbitrary Waveforms Using the Point Draw Function Creating Waveforms Arithmetically Creating an Equation File Creating a Sequence File Creating an Autostep File Setting the Output Parameters Setting Operation Mode and Waveform Output Example 4 Loading and Saving Files Example 5 Loading Waveforms From Other Instruments Example 6 Using the Waveform Function Generator When a detailed description of a function is needed at the operation stage see the section dealing with that particular menu 4A 4F NOTE These examples do not cover all of the functions and special features of the instrument The purpose of the examples is only to give you practice in executing basic operations on the instrument Necessary Equipment The following equipment is needed to execute Examples 1 6 Digital storage oscilloscope Tektronix TDS series or equivalent 50Q cables 2 GPIB cable 1 50Q terminator 1 Sample waveform library disk included with the instrument as a standard accessory m Signal generator tt tt AWG2040 User Manual 2 23 Operating Examples Example
332. me Check that the rise time of the waveform displayed on the oscilloscope from the 10 point to the 90 point is 1 5nsor less b Check aberrations s Set oscilloscope sweep to 20 ns div Check that the aberrations of the displayed waveform are within 7 c Check flatness a Set oscilloscope sweep to 200 ns div m Check that the flatness of the displayed waveform is within 3 after 50 ns from the rising edge Check pulse response at 2 V amplitude a Change the oscilloscope controls Vertical CH1 CH1 scale 0 5 V div Horizontal Sweep 1 ns div b Change the AWG2040 controls m Push SETUP gt Ampl to change the amplitude for CH1 m Press the numeric key 2 and press the units key V to select an amplitude of 2 V c Repeat substeps 4a through c checking to the follow limits Rise time 2 5 ns maximum Aberrations 10 maximum Fiatness 3 maximum Check pulse response for CHT Repeat this Pulse Response Check procedure using the AWG2040 CH1 output and selecting the waveform and setting controls for CHT End procedure Disconnect the oscilloscope AWG2040 User Manual E 33 Performance Tests Sine Wave Checks This procedure checks the sine wave characteristics of the AWG2040 outpul waveforms Electrical Characteristic Checked Main Output Sine Wave Character istics on page B 8 Equipment Required A 50 Q coaxial cable a DC block an adapter N male to BNC female and a spectrum analyzer
333. me is selected the Clock item is added to the side menu and the clock frequency can be set Time Sets the horizontal axis unit to time The cursor position data at the top of the CRT is displayed in time and data can be edited in time units Point Sets the horizontal axis unit to points The cursor position data at the top of the CRT is displayed in points and data can be edited in points In Figure 4A 19 the display on the left shows the horizontal axis unit set to Point while the display on the right shows this value set to Time Figure 4A 19 Setting the Unit for the Horizontal Axis When the horizontal axis unit is changed even if you switch to table or timing display mode the horizontal axis there is changed too EDIT Menu Clock AWG2040 User Manual Setting Clock Frequency When the unit of the horizontal axis is time the clock frequency can be set The following diagram shows the menu configuration Setting More 1 of 2 gt Horiz Unit Time Clock Select Clock from the side menu to set the clock frequency This parameter determines the time between the data points the inverse of the clock fre quency For example when the maximum clock frequency on the AWG2040 is set to 1 024 GHz waveform data can be edited at a resolution of 0 9765625 ns Figure 4A 20 shows the setting menu for Clock Setting F waveform Paints i024 View type graphic
334. ment goes into Waveform Advance mode it waits for a trigger to be generated This trigger can be generated from the external trigger signal applied to the TRIGGER INPUT connecto y pressing the MANUAL button on the front panel i Sig is When Waveform Advance is selected the following items will be displayed in the side menu Slopei a Level impedance STOP The Slope Level and Impedance items are used to set the trigger condi tions for the external trigger signal Figure 4C 6 shows an example of the output in response to an external trigger signal when a sequence file with the attributes shown in the table below has been selected in the SETUP menu MODE Menu Sample Sequence File Contents No of repetitions Output Condi tions File Name Waveform WAVE 1 WFM WAVE 2 SEQ WAVE 3 WFM External Trigger Signal i j Output Signal 1V WAVE1 WFM WAVE2 SEQ WAVES WFM WAVE1 WFM Figure 4C 6 Output for External Trigger Signal Output u When the waveform is output once a voltage for the data at the 0 point of the next waveform is generated This voltage is maintained until a trigger signal is applied m Selecting STOP in the side menu during waveform output will cause waveform output to stop at that point The stop signal will also cause the sequence to return to the first waveform in the sequence m The same output parameters amp
335. meric values in this manner the value in the num ber column will be increased or decreased for the underscored and upper digits Values will decrease when the general purpose knob is turned coun terclockwise and increase when the general purpose knob is turned clock wise Values cannot be changed outside the parameter range Figure 2 10 shows the general purpose knob and arrow buttons Figure 2 11 shows the knob icon and the underscore in the menu column of numeric input cursor VAWE Arrow Buttons General Purpose Knob Figure 2 10 General Purpose Knob and Arrow Buttons oecon e ee Clock 1 009900GHZ Underscore Figure 2 11 Knob Icon and Underscore When a numeric value has been changed using the general purpose knob there is no need to confirm it by pressing the ENTER key on the front panel The numeric value is entered automatically without pressing the ENTER key To change a value using the general purpose knob perform the following steps Basic Menu Operation AWG2040 User Manual C Step 1 Press the bution for the menu item you want to change Ol Step 2 Press the lt and buttons to specify the digit to be the index for input The amount of change obtained by turning the general purpose knob is controlled with the front panel lt and keys Press the key to move the underscore to the left and thus raise the amount of change to 10x Or press the gt key to move the
336. mode to Triggered and generate the trigger signal with the TRIGGER MANUAL button to control the wave form output Triggered oO Step 4 Select Triggered from the bottom menu When you select this item the side menu lists external trigger parameters which allow you to set them Figure 2 53 shows the menu set for Triggered mode AWG2040 User Manual 2 61 Operating Examples MANUAL 2 62 CHI Waveform 500 Gated Burst Cont Autostep Slave Advance i Figure 2 53 Menu Display When Triggered is Selected Figure 2 54 shows the MANUAL button and the TRIGGER INPUT connector for inputting an external trigger signal MANUAL Button TRIGGER INPUT Connector 1K SHOV 600 545V Figure 2 54 MANUAL Button and TRIGGER INPUT Connector This procedure does not use an external trigger signal Rather it generates the trigger signal when the MANUAL button is pressed C Step 5 Press the MANUAL button Check the oscilloscope to see that each time you press the MANUAL button a set waveform is output once Operating Examples Autostep Config Select Autostep File AWG2040 User Manuat Autostep Mode Using the following procedure you can set the operation mode to Autostep and use the MANUAL button to generate a trigger signal and control step waveform output NOTE When the operation mode is set to Autostep it is not possible to change the output parameters in the SET
337. mooth Points 2 00 c eee erre 4A 7i Increasing the Size of the Area l l auauua 4A 81 Multiple Copy 2 0 0 cece cece cece eee e ence ee nrnna 4A 8 Convolution Calculations 4A 8i Comparing Waveforms 4A 9 Zooming Waveforms 000 c cece 4A 9t Horizontal Zooming 2 005 4A 9t Vertical Zooming 1 0 cece cece cece ener eaeenes 4A Timing Display 0 0 0 cc cee cece cece eee AEREA 4A 96 Timing Display Menu Structure 2 0 cece eee eee ee 4A 106 Menu Functions 20 0 0 0 ccc e ce cececeeceasseusceeseuucuns 4A 10 Timing Display Screen 0 0 0 c eee e cece cece ee eeeee 4A 10 Settings for the Waveform to be Edited 000 eee 4A 10 Creating Standard Waveform Data cc ccece eee ees 4A 10 Pattorn Types aane aig Oa cece ena wala gaa bees 4A 10 Example of Waveform Data Creation 000 4A 10 Editing Waveform in Timing Display 00000 0c0 cee 4A 101 Cut Copy and Paste Processing Function 4A 10 Setting Waveform Data 2 0 0 0 0 00 cece cece cece eee 4A 107 Table of Contents Setting Data to High Low 0 cere eee seen 4A 108 Setting Pattern Data 0 cee ec eee e eee 4A 109 Entering Pattern Data and Pattern Length 4A 109 Changing the Data Bits sees eee eee eee 4A 110 POOR is ci0 ign gags ES ans ea Ld he eia ITA HE 4A 111 Patter Code sch ba eee es
338. ms Arithmetically 00 000 0 0000e Creating an Equation File l a cc cece cece eee ee Creating a Sequence File 00 2 0 eee ee eee Creating Autostep Files 2 0 00 e eee Setting the Output Parameters 0 0 0 ccc eee Setting Operation Mode and Waveform Output Example 4 Loading and Saving Files Saving FES etara a Meena tach tee Mahe cea Loading Files wines eet sGaccei ed eatea AULO Load inode teas yiceree nelonhe ud uar a a Ae ba wea ds Date Time Display sos cai cesses cea ced vais sacs svaeesadvcedges Example 5 Loading Waveforms From Other Instruments Example 6 Using the Waveform Function Generator CH1 Waveform Settings 2 0 60 e eee ee cence eee CH2 Waveform Setting 0 0 c cece cece eee eee Waveform Output 2 0 0 ccc cece cece en eceeseas Functional Operation Summary Introduction 0 cece cece cece eee ce ee eeenenaeenes Block Diagram 0 ccececeecuceces Clock Generator Trigger Control Operations in Trigger Mode 2 0 cece cece ese eee aes COntMode 22 2 icles Sai caw nes Bah aoe wah veatan Ms Triggered and Burst Modes 00 00c aes Gated MOG iivs nenad enata aaa A Parallel Operation 00 0 ccc ccc cece cece cece aeeeeens Simple Parallel Operation 1 0 0c cee eee Simple Parallel Operation 2 0 00 000 eee Parallel Output Synchronous with the Clock Signal Timing of Tri
339. msessoanesmesa alue 77 DATA 78 R es DATA 61 BATA 51 DATA 41 i gt BATA i DATA DATA DATA MARKERT 0 MARKERZ 01 Figure 4A 83 Setting Waveform Data to High Low g Step 6 Select Go Back from the current sub menu The system moves from the Set sub menu to the previous side menu 4A 108 EDIT Menu Setting Pattern Data Set Use Set Pattern to designate pattern data for the part of a data line or Pattern marker between the designated vertical bar cursors Figure 4A 84 shows the pattern data menu that appears when you select Set Pattern from the sub menu Point Step i oa fund 270 key z other Numeric key Q 1 Toggle Cursor Enter Pattern and Press O K Figure 4A 84 Pattern Data Setting Menu When the designated pattern is shorter than the area between the vertical bar cursors the pattern data is repeated You can create a variety of bit strings for the same pattern data by selecting Code in the menu Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to select the items needed for setting the pattern data The foliowing items can be selected use the gener al purpose knob to set the desired value Cursor Position sets the position of the cursor m Point Step sets the number of points per step m Code used to select the data code Entering Pattern Data and Pattern Length To enter the pattern data press the CURSOR b
340. n along the bottom menu to select Disk The menu in Figure E 3 appears 4 Select the Load All button along the side menu to load all files in the root directory on the disk into the AWG2040 internal volatile memory Or turn the general purpose knob to highlight the file you want to load and select Load The display indicates which file it is loading When loading is complete the clock icon disappears Push the floppy drive button and remove the disk from the floppy drive 6 Push any button in the MENU column other than LOAD SAVE to exit the menu Catalog Memory E Free 387KB Load me Type Size Date amp Time Comment E Load Destination _ Load All Catalog Disk A Free gt 1020KB Name Typ Date amp Time Comment Eo fi i AMPLI TIDE MODULATION DOUBLE EXPONENTIAL PU FREQUENCY MODULATION GAUSSIAN PULSE Change Directory AMA Load Off Figure E 3 LOAD Menu E 10 Performance Tests Performance Table E 4 lists the waveform files on the Performance Check Adjustment disk 063 1707 00 that are used in these performance tests the AWG2040 Check A djustment front panel settings that each file sets up and the performance test that Files uses each file NOTE The files on the Performance Check disk are locked the files names are displayed with so the data in these files cannot be changed unless the lock is opened The file data inc
341. n the voltage specified To prevent product overheating provide proper ventilation lf you suspect there is damage to this product have it inspected by qualified service personnel Safety Safety Terms and Symbols Terms in This Manual These terms may appear in this manual WARNING Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result in injury or loss of life CAUTION Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to this product or other property Terms onthe Product These terms may appear on the product DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the marking WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the marking CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product AWG2040 User Manual xxvi Operator s Safety Summary Symbols onthe The following symbols may appear on the product Product 4 A DANGER Protective Ground ATTENTION High Voltage Earth Terminal Refer to Manual Certifications and Compliances m Double Insulated CSA Certified Power CSA Certification includes the products and power cords appropriate for use in Cords the North America power network All other power cords supplied are approved for the country of use xxviii Related Manuals AWG2040 User Manual Welcome This is the User Manual for the AWG2040 Arbitrary Waveform Generator S
342. n the front panel The menu for that parameter will appear 0O Step 5 Set the parameters as desired See the descriptions of the individual parameters on the following pages EDIT Menu Clock External Clock Default value Internal Oo Step 6 Select O K from the side menu The parameters will be up dated to the selected items or set values Selecting Cancel will cancel the setting operation and the previous menu will reappear Clock Settings Select Clock using the general purpose knob Then press the VALUE button on the front panel The menu shown in Figure 4A 135 will appear iggered mode Stopped Operation i A i se External H Net RED i N FTiter Tnrough Gack i api T6607 L i Hea a Default HarkiL Value i Mark2H Wark2i cancel dump amp Q Io Write i i Figure 4A 135 Clock Setting Menu Set the clock source and the clock frequency by selecting the appropriate items in the side menu i Internal Clock Selects the internal clock Use the numeric keys or the general purpose knob to set the internal clock frequency External Clock Selects the external clock The external clock signal is input through the CLOCK IN connector on the rear pane of the instrument Default Value Sets the internal clock frequency to the default value of 1 000000 GHZ AWG2040 User Manual 4A 185 EDIT Menu Afte
343. nal Turn function generator output on Check gated mode with positive gate signal Check that the oscillo scope displays a sine wave while the function generator gate signal amplitude is 1 V or greater see Figure E 7 Gated level is set to 1 V Waveform k Output i i ont a i I UA 4 Gate t 4 Signal CH2 Figure E 7 Relationship between 1 Volt or Greater Gate Signal and e Waveform Output Signal Change the AWG2040 trigger polarity to negative Push MODE gt Po larity to change the polarity to Negative E 18 Performance Tests f Check gated mode with a negative gate signal Check that the oscilloscope displays a sine wave while the function generator gate signal amplitude is 1 V or less 6 End procedure Turn the function generator output off and disconnect the function generator and oscilloscope Check Burst Mode Electrical Characteristic Checked Operating mode Burst on page B 3 Equipment Required A 50 coaxial cable and an oscilloscope Prerequisites The AWG2040 meets the prerequisites listed on page E 7 Procedure 1 Install test hookup and set test equipment controls a Hook up the oscilloscope Connect the AWG2040 CH1 output connector through the coaxial cable to the CH1 vertical input con nector on the oscilloscope see Figure E 8 AWG2040 Oscilloscope Figu
344. nated vertical bar cursors The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Set item _ Impot Line Data Clear Pattern m Line P 1Bit t Set High t Key Data 4 Bits Operation More 1 of 3 Set Set Low Go Back Initial Sroc 4 Set Pattern pam User defined Code Config 0 0 1 Initial Code High Low Out VO Invert Keep Cancel O K AWG2040 User Manual 4A 107 EDIT Menu Setting Data to High Low Set set Use Set High and Set Low to set the data lines or marker in the area desig High Low nated by the designated vertical bar cursors to either High or Low Procedure C Step 1 Select Set from the side menu displayed oO Step 2 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel C Step 3 Using the general purpose knob move the vertical bar cursors to designate the area for the High or Low state C Step 4 Select Line from the sub menu Using the general purpose knob select the data line DATA 7 DATA 0 or the marker MARKER1 MARKER2 that you want to set to High or Low C Step 5 Select Set High or Set Low to set the state between the vertical bar cursors for the selected line Set High Sets the state to High Set Low Sets the state to Low Figure 44 83 shows an example in which the state of the DATA 3 line between the vertical bar cursors has been set to Low a i 1024 pis Value 77mme
345. ncy 1 0 GHz Output time 8 us Appendix C Sampie Waveform Library AWG2040 User Manual Log Frequency Sweep LOG_SWRWFM Made with the equation editor frequency sweep sine log range 11us kd 11e 6 sweep period ki 1e6 starting frequency k2 106 ending frequency k In k2 k1 sin 2 p i k1 kO k3 exp k3 x 1 os SWP wEM Figure C 8 Log Frequency Sweep Formula and Waveform Constants kO is the sweep period and k1 and k2 are the starting and ending frequencies Description This waveform can be expressed generally by the following formula t Vit sin 2f li inf Jat 0 1 0 Here f4 is the starting frequency fz is the ending frequency p is the initial phase and T is the sweep period To assure that the phases match when this waveform is iterated the sweep period is set to be close to an integer multiple of the reciprocal of the average frequency h in A Appendix C Sample Waveform Library Settings Waveform points 8800 Clock frequency 800 MHz Output time 11 us Amplitude Modulation AM WFM Made with the equation editor amplitude modulation ange 0 0 250s N k1 4000 modulation frequency k2 16e6 carrier frequency k3 0 5 modulation degree 1 k3 c0S 2 p i k1 t cos 2p i k2 t hornm d 32606 Pointe clock 1 3808 Hz Figure C 9 Amplitude Modulation Formula and Waveform
346. ndard Close o write i Zoom Setting undo aveform i Figure 4A 8 Waveform Editor With Three Editing Areas When there is more than one waveform displayed in the waveform editor the following menu items will be added Cursor Link to will be added to the Setting menu item See page 4A 36 Cursor Link to Used to link the cursors in different editing areas a Three additional commands Multiple Copy Convolute Compare will be added to the Operation menu item See pages 4A 81 4A 88 and 4A 91 respectively Multiple Copy Used to copy a waveform in one editing area that has been designated with the vertical bar cursors into another editing area in the space designated with the vertical bar cursors in that area using the interval specified with Interval Convolute Used to perform convolution operations for the waveform in one area in the space designated with the vertical bar cursors with the part of a waveform in another editing area desig nated by the vertical bar cursors in that area Compare Used to compare the waveform in the area desig nated by the vertical bar cursors with the waveform in another editing area AWG2040 User Manual 4A 17 EDIT Menu 4A 18 Procedure In this example you will select three waveforms in the waveform editor The following procedure starts in the initial EDIT menu C Step 1 Select New Waveform from the side menu The ed
347. neeus 4A 1 Cutting a line Copying and Pasting a Line n uau 00000 c eee ccc eee aeeeee Insert Other Equation File Setting Waveform Point Count 00005 Compiling Equations into Waveform Data Sequence Editor ccc cee cceseceneee Entering the Sequence Editor Saving Files and Exiting the Editor 00 0 Sequence Editor Menu Structure 0 0 00 cc cceeceeeeeeees Menu Functions 0 0 0 0 cece cece nec cseeecceeues Sequence Editor Menu Display Creating and Editing Sequence Files Creating a Sequence File Button Functions Editing Functions Cutting a Line Copying and Pasting a Line l a oaaao ran eee e ceca ees Catalog File Waveform Display inserting a Sequence File Sequence File Display 0 0 Autostep Editor Entering the Autostep Editor 2 0 0 0 0 cece ccc cce cece ccna aa Saving Files and Exiting the Editor Autostep Editor Menu Structure Menu Functions sro sereo aras cece cence eate EA EAE NNE Autostep Editor Menu Display 0 00 000000 ccceccceeueees Creating and Editing Autostep Programs 0000 cece eeee Setting Files Filter Settings Amplitude Settings Offset Settings Marker Settings n a naunan nannaa Editing Functions euaaaaaesrurner eadarra anrora Cutting a Step cic eevidedeeivescasdimcndecass Copying and Pasting a Step Adding a Step er
348. ng Function Waveform Type and Calculation Method 0 cc cece cee eee eens 4A 3 Setting the Parameters for Function Waveforms 4A 4 Procedure 1 Creating a Sine Wave 0 000005 4A 4 Procedure 2 Adding a Waveform to Existing Data 4A 4 Procedure 3 Multiplying Waveforms 0 0005 4A 4 Editing Waveforms in Graphic Display 0000 4A 4 Setting Editing Areas 0 cece ccc cence eens 4A 4 Cutting Waveforms 0 0 cece cece cece cece eevee eens 4A 4 Copying Pasting Waveforms 0 0 cece cece nee een 4A 4 Draw Function 2 dove vas seu ease beaild seu ele bee 4A 4 SHCRUACTON os ics 0ss facets iy ariane ain SiMe dad aaa ured sure Oh 4A 5 Scaling Function 2 0 cece cece eee 4A 5 MWO FUNGUO siret eraa Eoaea beet dead e a Ea 4A 5 Clip Function 2 6 uenti nnp casa ve leaeds cesmbureens 4A 5 Setting a Markel sn 2 5inansele densa eaces eden va ase 4A 5 Setting a Marker Pattern 2 0 0 0 0 ccc cece ceca 4A 6 Inserting Other Waveforms 2 0 0 0 00 0 cece cece eee 4A 6 Single Waveform Calculations 0 0 0 0 cee 4A 6 Calculations With Other Waveform Data 4 7 Specified Region Shift l ll aaun cee cee eee 4A 7 The Shift Values For Selecting Expand or Compress 4A 7 INfemPOlation i e Sanewee ye Se ranea e E aes 4A 71 Data Value asss sap apera aS bes Sadie be vie alana 4A 7i C tsor POINT ease eeta h gine EEE ATAATA 4A 7i S
349. ng a step 4A 190 Insert New Step Adding a step 4A 191 Append New Step Adding a step 4A 191 Insert Current SETUP inserting the SETUP menu waveforms and output 4A 191 parameters Jump Jumping to a step Undo Exit Write Undoing the previous operation Saving files and exiting the editor Items selected on the screen Clock Clock settings Waveform Sequence Setting files Filter Filter settings Amplitude Amplitude settings Offset Offset settings Marker Marker settings AWG2040 User Manual 4A 179 EDIT Menu Autostep Editor Menu Display Figure 4A 130 shows the general autostep editor display A description for each callout follows Waiting for Trigger Operation cut step Step Paste insert New Step i i dump Figure 4A 130 Autostep Editor CRT Display 1 File Name The name of the autostep file being edited if the name has not been set yet xkexKEKX AST is displayed 2 Step No Indicates the step number in the program In the example shown in the figure above the step shown is step 2 out of a total of 6 3 CH1 File Setting Area Indicates the waveform and output parameters for the file in the step indi cated by 2 The file and waveform output parameters may be changed 4A 180 EDIT Menu 4 Clock Frequency Shows the clock frequency for the file designated in 2 The clock frequency can be cha
350. ng bandwidth Compared to FFT processing using a hanning window the degree of separation between two frequencies is greater as can be seen in Figure D 10 This window is particularly effective for separat ing close frequencies 0 dB ad 3 dB Bandwidth 20 1 30 40 Highest La Side Lobe 60 eet es ee 43 dB Window Function Freq Magnitude Figure D 10 Hamming Window and Frequency Characteristic Blackman Harris Window Of the six window functions in this instrument the Blackman Harris window has the broadest transmission bandwidth and therefore lowest frequency resolution and the lowest side lobe transmission and therefore lowest leakage This window is particular ly suited for observing wide range frequency spectra 0 dB 3 dB Bandwidth 20 40 1 66 60 80 Highest Side Lobe 100 110 92 dB Window Function Freq Magnitude Figure D 11 Blackman Harris Window and Frequency Characteristic AWG2040 User Manual D 17 Appendix D Miscellaneous Blackman Window The Blackman window suppresses the side lobe magnitudes in the frequency region lower than the hamming window does and suppresses leakage even farther However it has inferior frequency resolution 0 dB 3 dB Bandwidth 20 1 68 W Highest 60 Side Lobe 80 58 dB Window Function Freq Magnitude Figure D 12 Blackman Window and Frequency Characteristic Triangle Wave Window The triangle wave window is a convolution of two s
351. ng one of the following methods amp Enter the desired value using the numeric keys Turn the general purpose knob to set the desired value In the following section we will explain these numeric input methods in more detail 2 16 Basic Menu Operation Using the Front Panel Numeric Keys To specify numeric values with the numeric keys ENTER key and unit keys on the front panel perform the following steps oO Step 1 Press the button for the menu item you want to change oO Step 2 Use the numeric keys to input the desired value o Step 3 Press one of the unit keys or the ENTER key Figure 2 8 shows the menu displayed when Amplitude is selected from the SETUP menu In this figure the numeric keys are used to change the ampli tude Here the asterisk in the numeric input column indicates that the value is being input Press the front panel ENTER key to enter the value and remove the asterisk GPIB Triggered mode Waiting for Trigger Period 1 24us Points 1824 Max 9 50004 5092 Min 8 50009 5002 g i H fitter pore Offset Figure 2 8 Numeric Input Using Numeric Keys Numeric input keys Four types of keys are used to enter numeric values the numeric keys 0 9 the unit keys GHz ns MHz us kHz ms mV and Hz s V the delete key and the ENTER key These are shown in Figure 2 9 AWG2040 User Manual 2 17 Basic Menu Operation 2 18 N GHzins F 7 J NE
352. ng the clip level will appear g Step 2 Press the Clip button in the sub menu to select Upper or Lower The Clip sub menu item selects the area of the waveform data between the vertical bar cursors to be clipped Either the area above the clip level Upper or below the clip level Lower can be selected C Step 3 Select Level from the sub menu g Step 4 Use the numeric keys or the general purpose knob to input the clip level C Step 5 Select Execute from the sub menu The waveform is clipped with the specified conditions Figure 4A 37 shows the waveform clipped above 0 3 Before After Figure 44 37 Display of Waveform Clipped Above Clip Level 4A 58 EDIT Menu Operation More 3 of 3 Marker Go Back AWG2040 User Manual g Step 6 Select Go Back from the sub menu The display returns from the Clip sub menu to the side menu Setting a Marker The Marker item is used to set the marker signal shown at the bottom of the screen for the section of the waveform between the vertical bar cursors This signal may be set to high low or pattern The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Marker item __ Import Line Data Clear Pattern m Set High Key Data 1Bit M Set Low d 4 Bits Initial Src Set Pattern i User defined 4 co Code Contig initial Code Lz High Low Out VO i Invert Keep C
353. nge NVRam m Editing files saved onto internal nonvolatile memory NVRam GPIB u Setting GPIB Configuration See Programmer manual for details RS232C a Setting RS 232C parameters See Programmer manual for details Date Time m Setting the Date and Time Misc Setting the Display Brightness Setting the Order of Files m Date Time Display m Factory Settings m Deleting Data From Memory n Remote Port Settings a Settings for Hard Copy Output m System and GPIB RS 232 C Status a V O Event Reporting See Programmer Manual for details Diag Cal Diagnostics and Calibration AWG2040 User Manual 4E 1 UTILITY Menu UTILITY Menu Structure MENU Button UTILITY ______ Bottom Menu Disk r NVRam GPIB RS232C Date Time Figure 4E 1 shows the configuration of the UTILITY menu Side Menu Sub Menu Rename Delete Delete All Lock Change Directory Make Directory Format Rename Delete Delete All Lock Talk Listen Address Waveform Transfer Talk Only Off Bus Baudrate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flagging Year Month Day Hour Minute m Brightness Display Catalog Order Date Time m Reset to Factory h MISC bn Diag Cat Config Secure Erase Memory Remote Port m Format Port r System VO Hardcopy Status Diagnostics Calibration Interactive Test Fi
354. nged 5 Button Operation This area shows how the front pane buttons operate in this menu Move Cursor Output parameters can be selected by turning the general purpose knob 5 i Previous Step Pressing this button at a programmed step moves to the previous step Next Step Pressing this button at a programmed step moves to the next step ys Change Value Pressing the VALUE button makes it possible to set the selected output parameter Use the general purpose knob to select the output parameter to be set Creating and Editing Autostep Programs Select Operation from the bottom menu to create or edit autostep pro grams Up to 100 steps can be programmed If blank steps exist in the autostep program that has been created these steps will be deleted when you quit the editor When using autostep files created on another instrument in the AWG series besides the AWG2040 in some cases there may be no data designated for CH1 of that file When the files are loaded from disk into the AWG2040 the data for all channels other than CH1 will be ignored and only the steps for which data has been set for CH1 will be read in The file will not be loaded if there is no CH1 data for any of the steps AWG2040 User Manual 4A 181 EDIT Menu Setting Files The following procedure is used to set a new file at each step Procedure C Step 1 Select Operation from the bottom menu To designate a file for step 1 C Step 2 U
355. nt directory changes to the AWG2040 directory you just made and the directory display becomes Catalog Disk AWG2040 At this time the AWG2040 directory is empty See Figure 4E 7 GPIB i Triggered mode Stopped Type IBM PC 2HD Disk Catalog Disk SAWGI04ON Free 1346KB fun Name Type Size Date amp Time Comment Change Directory e ake Directory biore 2of2 cl ab e fam GPIB RS232C Date Time Diag Cal Misc Figure 4E 7 File List for a Newly Created Directory This completes the move of the current directory to the AWG2040 sub directory Files and new directories can be created in this directory Next here is how to return the current directory to the root directory g Step 8 Again select Change Directory from the side menu Only is displayed in the directory list Select O K from the sub menu Selecting from the directory list moves the current directory to the directory one above In this case that is the root directory so the system is back where it started Operating Files Saved to Disk The side menu has Rename Delete and Delete All for file operating These items are the same as those in the EDIT menu See Page 4A 8 to 4A 11 These functions can rename and delete files Directories can also be deleted by selecting the Delete item However this is only possible when there are no files and directories at levels below the d
356. nu ise aK Right peak Left peak Editing Phase Here is the procedure for editing the phase Procedure C Step 1 Select Operation from the bottom menu C Step 2 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to select the left right vertical bar cursor Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob move the active vertical bar cursor to the frequency to be edited C Step 3 Press the VALUE button on the front pane and select Phase The knob icon is displayed on the Phase side oO Step 4 Using the general purpose knob or the numeric keys change the phase oO Step 5 To change the phase for another frequency press the CURSOR button on the front panel and use the general purpose knob to move the active vertical bar cursor to the frequency to be edited Next repeat Steps 3 and 4 Searching for Peaks Select Operation from the bottom menu to display the Right peak and Left peak items on the side menu These items detect the signal peaks Right peak Each time this item is selected the signa peak to the right of the active vertical bar cursor will be detected and the cursor will move to that point Left peak Each time this item is selected the signal peak to the left of the active vertical bar cursor will be detected and the cursor will move to that point Drawing Magnitude and Phase Use Draw to draw points between the left and right vertical bar cursors and then connect the points to create an
357. nverted display around them these values may be changed See Figure 4B 2 Text This mode shows the output parameters in text form Figure 4B 3 shows the SETUP menu displayed in text mode GPIB Continuous mode Running Check Pe ea Filler firoughl Period 22ans amplitude 1 0085 paints 224 offset ey Max 8 5080 5062 Markeri Markert L Marker2 Marker2 hin 8 5600 SeC putput CHI Off il Quipat TH ott i ake Display Clock Filter T aepinudel Offset Marker Graphics Levet mo i ca Figure 4B 3 SETUP Menu Text Mode AWG2040 User Manual 4B 5 SETUP Menu Selecting a Waveform or Sequence File Waveform Sequence The first step in setting the waveform output parameters is to select the waveform or sequence file Each waveform or sequence file has output parameter settings attached to it When a file is selected the output parameters are also automatically changed to the settings for that file A file newly created with the editor has the default output parameters set in it Clock 1 GHz can aiso be set using the editor Filter Through Amplitude 1V Offset OV Marker Level High 2V Marker Level Low oV Procedure To select a waveform or sequence file C Step 1 Select Waveform Sequence from the bottom menu The wave form display area will be highlighted on the screen g Step 2 Turn the general purpose knob to open the file list Use
358. nverted into EQU files in the AWG2040 instrument s internal format and then stored in inter nal memory When this is done the name of the file is retained as is with only the ex tension changed to EQU When the following items are written to the EQA file these items are reflected in the EQU file COMMENT lt comment gt WAVEFORM POINTS lt point count gt Equation files in MS DOS text EQA format created in a PC editor etc All of these files are displayed in the Catalog menu screens for Disk in the UTILITY menu and Device Disk in the LOAD SAVE menu the same as files with other extensions The extension for each file is shown in the Type column NOTE As with other files on the instrument the Rename Delete Delete All Lock and other operations can be performed for these files and they are also subject to the Load All and Auto Load operations in the LOAD menu If unexpected file formats or file contents are encountered when loading ISF WVN WFB or EQA files an error usually results and Invalid file format or a similar message is displayed 4D 16 General Description UTILITY Menu Press the MENU column UTILITY button to display the UTILITY menu The bottom menu contains the Disk NVRam GPIB RS232C Date Time Misc and Diag Cal items Use these items to do the following Disk a Disk format u Editing files saved onto disks m Disk directory creation and current directory cha
359. nywhere between 2 0 V and 1 9 V in minimum increments of 0 1 V G0 Step 4 Select Markert Low from the side menu The Markert icon will be highlighted on the screen oO Step 5 Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob set the Marker Low level This value can be set anywhere between 1 9 V and 2 0 V in minimum increments of 0 1 V NOTE The high level will always be greater than the low level Even if you attempt to set the high value below the low level the low level will become lower to compensate Use the same procedure to set the level for Marker2 4B 14 MODE Menu General Description Press the MODE button in the MENU column to display the MODE menu The MODE menu is used to set the operating mode for waveform output for the waveform whose output conditions have been set in the SETUP menu This menu contains items used for m setting the trigger mode for waveform or sequence waveform output m setting the trigger mode for waveform output for individual files within sequence files and autostep files when the AWG2040 is being used in parallel with other units determin ing whether that AWG2040 instrument will be used as a master or slave unit The trigger and gate operations can be performed with external signals from the TRIGGER INPUT connector or by pressing the MANUAL button on the front panel Autostep operation is performed in response to an external signal supplied from the AUTO S
360. o keep those instructions clear and consistent this manual uses the following conventions a Names of front panel controis and menu item names are printed in the manual in bold with the same case e g initial capitals all upper case as they appear on the unit itself u Instruction steps are numbered When the number is omitted there is only one step m When menu items are displayed in the manual the menu type either bottom menu side menu or sub menu is distinguished and indicated as shown below Side Menu or Sub Menu Bottom Menu Consecutive button operations are expressed as shown below Setting bottom View type side gt Timing sub This expression describes the following button operations 1 Selecting the Setting item from the bottom menu 2 Selecting the View type item from the side menu 3 Selecting the Timing item from the sub menu Trademarks Epson is a registered trademark of Epson America Inc IBM is a registered trademark of international Business Machines PC9800 is a trademark of NEC Corporation J3100 is a trademark of Toshiba Corporation MS DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Postscript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated XXX Welcome Contents se cece eee List of Figures List of Tables 4 General Safety Summary Welcome esee eee Related Manuals Conventions
361. oints in that waveform 4A 46 EDIT Menu Procedure g Step 1 Specify the waveform to be copied with the left and right vertical bar cursors Select Copy to Buffer from the displayed side menu When Copy to Buffer is selected the waveform data between the vertical bar cursors including the left and right vertical bar cursor data is copied into the paste buffer Marker signals associated with that waveform data are also subjected to the copy and paste operations This operation does not affect the display on the CRT C Step 2 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel C Step 3 Use the general purpose knob to specify the position to paste the data with whichever of the vertical bar cursors is active The data is pasted directly before the active vertical bar cursor However when the cursor is at the end of the waveform the data is inserted directly after the cursor C Step 4 Select Paste from Buffer from the side menu Figure 4A 28 shows an example of a waveform before and after additional data is pasted into that waveform AWG2040 User Manual After Figure 4A 28 Pasting Waveforms When you select Paste from Buffer the waveform data copied to the paste buffer in the Copy process will be inserted in front of the active vertical bar cursor When the active vertical bar cursor is at the end of the waveform the data will be inserted after the active vertical bar cursor The paste buffer d
362. omponent menu contains the elements used to create an equation The menu consists of two pages The first page contains functions opera tors constants variables and syntax items The second page contains characters and symbols These items are selected with the general purpose knob Use Word Table under Operation to move between pages 5 Button Operation This area shows how the front panel buttons operate in this menu ES Go to cursor mode When you press the CURSOR button the line cursor within the inverted cursor in the equation list can be moved with the general purpose knob ES 25 Go to insert mode When the VALUE or ENTER button is pressed the system goes into a mode in which you can insert an item into the equation list from the component menu Pressing the VALUE or ENTER button again shifts the state to Insert word described below VALUE ENTER Ca CD insert word Pressing the VALUE or ENTER key inserts the item selected from the component menu into the equation list CURSOR C Go to Scroll mode When you press the CURSOR button the inverted cursor in the equa tion list can be moved with the general purpose knob Move cursor Turning the general purpose knob moves the line cursor in the equation list EDIT Menu AWG2040 User Manua Creating and Editing Equation Files Select Operation in the bottom menu to create or edit an equation file When this item is selected the time range can be des
363. on toggles the active vertical bar cursor from left to right and back again Pressing the VALUE button toggles the direction in which the point cursor can be moved from up down to left right and back again Procedure C Step 1 Move the left and right vertical bar cursors to define the area within which the waveform will be drawn and then select Draw from the side menu The point cursor will appear in the middle of the vertical axis between the left and right vertical bar cursors Step 2 Press VALUE button on the front panel oO Step 3 Use the general purpose knob to move the point cursor to the location where you want to place a point Each time the VALUE button on the front panel is pressed the direction of movement for the point cursor switches between horizontal X and vertical Y The X Y coordinates for the point cursor position are dis played at the bottom right of the CRT display C Step 4 Select Add Draw Pointfrom the sub menu to place the draw point Pee Se yeas Draw points can be placed outside the left and right vertical bar cursors However such points are not drawn when Execute is pressed NOTE You cannot set multiple draw points above the same horizontal position If you try to do so the system asks you if you want to change the level for the point already above the horizontal position To do so select O K To abort the operation select Cancel g Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to place as many po
364. on toggles the selected vertical bar cursor from right to left and back again You can move the selected cursor using the general purpose knob or the numeric keys 2 38 Operating Examples 5 1 ENTER Ee cS Standard Waveform Type Sine Cycle 2 ENTER Cl Step 4 Press the following key sequence 5 1 1 ENTER This sets the point value for the right side vertical bar cursor to 511 see Figure 2 26 ontinuous mode Copy to buffer from Buffer fio Draw a More Select Open tandard Coser faveform write Zoom Setting Figure 2 26 Setting the Point Value for the Right Side Vertical Bar Cursor C Step 5 Select Standard Waveform from the bottom menu C Step 6 Select Type from the side menu g Step 7 Turn the general purpose knob to select Sine C Step 8 Select Cycle from the side menu C Step 9 Press 2 and ENTER in that order to set the number of cycles for the sine wave to 2 2 36 Operating Examples C Step 10 Select Execute from the side menu Execute A two cycle sine waveform is created between the vertical bar cursors see Figure 2 27 Continuous mode Stopped y i Standar T023 PRS 186 Amplitude 2 0000 Offset 6 6008 MARKER TO f i MARKERT 6 Execute Mote Cursor H 7 closes Selects Ope ji F a Operatic Zoom Setting
365. or External Trigger Signal in Triggered Mode oo ccc cece ccc en ces cs ene ece 4C 6 List of Figures AWG2040 User Manual Figure 4C 4 Output for External Gate Signal in Gated Mode 4C 8 Figure 4C 5 Output for External Gate Signal in Burst Mode 4C 9 Figure 4C 6 Output for External Trigger Signal 5 40 11 Figure 4C 7 Autostep File List 0 0 2 6 see e eee ee eters 40 13 Figure 4C 8 Output in Response to External Trigger Signal when Run is set to Continuous and Step ee eee 4C 15 Figure 4C 9 Slope and Level Controls 66 s seer eee eee 4C 16 Figure 4C 10 AWG2040 Synchronous Operation 55 4C 17 Figure 4D 1 Relationship Between Memory and Execution of Load SaVe secties ecer ionika ieiki iii n brii iad 4D 2 Figure 4D 2 LOAD SAVE Menu Structure eeer eens 4D 3 Figure 4D 3 LOAD Menu CRT Screen Display 505 40 4 Figure 4D 4 LOAD Menu 4D 8 Figure 4D 5 SAVE Menu 4D 10 Figure 4D 6 Connecting Instruments 4D 12 Figure 4D 7 GPIB Source List 6 eee e eee esters 4D 13 Figure 4D 8 List of Supported Models Made by Other Manufacturers 0 0 0 0 c eee eer eect eee e eens 4D 14 Figure 4 1 UTILITY Menu Structure 6c errr reece ees 4E 2 Figure 4E 2 Format Sub Menu Display 0e 4E 5 Figure 4E 3 Write Protect Tab on a Floppy Disk 4E 7 Figure 4E 4 File and Directory Dis
366. or and the caret cursor in the equation list with the general purpose knob Each time you press the CURSOR button the cursor that can be moved with the general purpose knob toggles between the inverted cursor and the caret cursor The caret cursor can also be moved with the and keys on the front panel While the inverted cursor can be moved with the general purpose knob you can also move the inverted cursor directly to the desired line by using the numeric keys to enter the desired line number VALUE ENTER Buttons After the CURSOR button has been pressed pressing the VALUE or ENTER button makes it possible to select an item with the general purpose knob from the component menu in this state pressing the VALUE or ENTER button again inserts the items selected into the equation list At this time input with the numeric and unit keys is also possible EDIT Menu Decimal Point When Option 09 is installed all internal calculations use 32 bit floating point precision IEEE 754 compatible If Option 09 is not installed 32 bit fixed precision is used when precision is not required minimum unit 15us or greater When precision is required 32 bit floating point precision IEEE 754 compatible is used For fast and highly precise calculations we recommend that Option 09 be installed Component Menu The component menu contains the items used to set the time range as well as functions operators variables constants syntax i
367. or in the NVRam are loaded automatically into internal memory If the waveform or sequence file being selected with the SETUP menu the last time you switched off the power exists in internal memory when you switch on the power then that file will be selected The bottom menu consists of seven items the six output parameters that you can set Clock Waveform Sequence Filter Amplitude Offset and Marker Level and the Display item which allows you to set the format for menu displays To set these items press the corresponding button in the bottom menu and use the general purpose knob or the numeric keys to set the desired value A waveform or sequence file that is created with the editor has the default output parameters set in it When the output parameters are changed with the SETUP menu the new settings are saved automatically together with the waveform data in the file If the file is locked the output parameters can be changed but the changes are not written to the waveform file For further information on locking files see Locking and Unlocking Files item in the section on editors When the operating mode is Autostep the output parameters cannot be changed at all AWG2040 User Manual 4B 1 SETUP Menu SETUP Menu Figure 4B 1 shows the configuration of the SETUP menu Structure MENU Button Bottom Menu Side Menu Select Item Internal Clock Clock Source cadens 4 External Slave Clock
368. ord length of a power of 2 when accurate data is needed 2 Nyquist Frequency and Aliasing FFT transforms the sampled data on the time axis into data on the discrete frequency axis from 0 Hz to the maximum permitted frequency The maximum permitted frequency is called the Nyquist frequency and is 1 2 the sampling rate if the signal has frequency components above the Nyquist frequency they appear on this limited discrete frequency axis too They appear as no different than noise aliased from the Nyquist frequency For example if there is a signal 5 MHz above the Nyquist frequency it appears as if it is 5 MHz below the Nyquist frequency On the other hand in the D A conversion a frequency component is output aliased above the Nyquist frequency To deal with aliasing first it is necessary to sample with a clock greater than double the highest frequency component in the signal Second a low pass filter is required to block any signal above the Nyquist frequen cy Record Length and Frequency Resolution The frequency spectrum frequency range and resolution depend on the time axis sampling rate and the record length N For the given data length on the time axis FFT has frequency components from N 2 to N 2 1 However when the real number data on the time axis is transformed FFT gives results symmetrical about 0 Hz DC Because of this symmetry all the necessary frequency data is contained between 0 and N 2 1 Thus with
369. ore the inverted display cursor in the Destination list EDIT Menu C Step 5 Select Paste from Buffer from the side menu Each time Paste from Buffer is selected the line copied into the paste buffer with the copy processing are pasted into whatever line you want Catalog File Waveform Display cies Use this item to observe the waveforms of the files being assembled into the Entry sequence Procedure C Step 1 Select Operation from the bottom menu oO Step 2 Use the general purpose knob to select the file you want to observe from the Catalog oO Step 3 Select Show Catalog Entry from the side menu The waveform is displayed and the file name the vertical axis voltage the waveform point count and the clock frequency data are shown Figure 4A 126 is an example of waveform display for when Show Cata log Entry is selected OPIR Stopped File Name Line Operation SINE SOUE TRH i FO 5004 256 Points Clock 2Se O8 82 Continue Wavelorht size 4006 4224000 AG 2 Go to Insert mode Humeric Enter Repeat ee l pate i Show i ye Exits Operation Overview ungs write Figure 4A 126 Example of Waveform Display When Show Catalog Entry is Selected Operation iit g Step 4 After observing the waveform select Continue Operation from the sub menu to return to the sequence editor AWG
370. orm output stops as soon as the external gate signa becomes invalid At the next external gate signal the waveform or sequence resumes from the waveform level at which it was kept stopped When Gated is selected the following items will be displayed in the side menu a Polarity a Level Impedance a STOP The Polarity Level and Impedance items are used to set the gate condi tions for the external gate signal Figure 4C 4 shows the output for an external gate signal AWG2040 User Manual 4C 7 MODE Menu External Gate Signal Output Signal Figure 4C 4 Output for External Gate Signal in Gated Mode Burst Mode Burst In Burst mode when a trigger signal is generated the designated waveform or sequence waveform is output the number of times specified with the Burst Count item When this instrument goes into Burst mode it waits for a trigger to be generated The trigger can be generated from the external trigger signal applied to the TRIGGER INPUT connector or by pressing the MANUAL button on the front panel During waveform output if the MANUAL button is pressed or another external trigger signal is generated such a trigger has no effect When Burst is selected the following items will be displayed in the side menu Slope Level Impedance m Burst Count STOP The Slope Level and Impedance items are used to set the trigger condi tions for the external trigger signal Burst Count Us
371. orm editor When you compile the equation then exit the equation editor the waveform file and the equation file are saved in internal memory with the same name but different extension NOTE if there is already a waveform file in internal memory with the name the compiled waveform file will be given a message is displayed asking if you are sure you want to overwrite the old file Answer either Cancel or O K EDIT Menu Equation Editor Equation Editor Menu Structure The equation editor menu has the structure shown in Figure 4A 100 Bottom Menu Operation Setting H Compile h Undo Exit Write Side Menu Cut Line Copy to Buffer Paste from Buffer Word Table Insert Other Equation Waveform Points Write and Exit Exit without Writing Write Figure 44 100 Equation Editor Menu Structure This item appears when Operation in the bottom menu has been selected AWG2040 User Manual 4A 143 EDIT Menu Menu Functions The following list shows the functions available for each menu item and the page on which you can find a description of that function Table 44 6 Menu Functions Operation Editing function 4A 160 Cut Line Cutting a line 4A 160 Copy to Buffer Copying a line 4A 160 Paste from Buffer Pasting a line 4A 160 Word Table Changing the component menu 4A 149 Insert Other Equation Inserting other equation file 4A 161 Setting Waveform Points Se
372. ors Offset This block is used to apply an offset voltage to the output The circuit is a current source capable of both discharge and sink the offset voltage is calculated as an output with accurate 50Q termination Figure 3 13 shows the offset circuit a When this circuit is terminated with 509 an offset of up to 40mAX25Q 502 50Q 1V is applied When not terminated the signal may be distorted about 2 5V or more Output 40 mA impedance ANN 9 gt gt 500 il Figure 3 13 Offset Circuit AWG2040 User Manual 3 15 Reference Introduction Sections 4A through 4F will describe in detail the functions contained in each of the menus Section 4A EDIT Menu Section 4B SETUP Menu Section 4C MODE Menu Section 4D LOAD SAVE Menu Section 4E UTILITY Menu Section 4F FG Menu Each section will describe menu functions in the following order Menu Structure Each menu will be shown in a diagram listing the menu items from left to right with the highest menu level on the left and the lowest menu level on the right There are three types of menus the bottom menu the side menu and the sub menus An ellipsis in a side menu item indicates that it has a sub menu If a menu has many levels there will be a De scription section at the beginning which shows the detailed menu configurations for that function Menu Functions This is a list showing the menu functions and
373. ory Free 3867KB Name Type Size Date amp Time Comment i j i Catalog NyRam Free 480K8 Name Type Size Date amp Time Comment SAMPLE Sih 7 TE 13 08 O p ES SAMPLE 3 WEM 3 i SAMPLE 4 EQU SAMPLE 4 WEN MPLE F SEQ MPLE 6 AST Auto Load Of Device CONVRam Figure 2 59 Internal Memory File List C Step 9 Select Load from the bottom menu Here NVRam is selected in the Device bottom menu C Step 10 Select Load All from the side menu When this item is selected all the files in the NVRam listed in the lower screen are loaded into internal memory See Figure 2 60 Operating Examples OPIS Continucus mode Catalog Memory Free 3853K8 Name Type Size Date amp Time Comment PSANPLE T WEN 3506 SE TI TT 13 88 SAMPLE 2 WEN 2908 O3 EL TE T3218 2996 93 41 11 13 12 452 SB 11 17 13 14 g 1 13 14 1 11 13 18 VE 13 30 toad Catalog N Ram free 460KB Name Type Size Comment SAMPLES E WFN gr i SAMPEE 2 if Xi SAMPLE F WFat SAMPLE 4 EGU AMPLE 4 WEN SMPLE 5 SEQ AMPLE G AST Device coNvRam Auto Load ont Figure 2 60 Files Loaded into Internal Memory When you select Load from the side menu the file displayed in inverted video in the NVRam list is loaded into internal memory Auto Load Using the Auto Load process it is possible to automatically load files from a designated de
374. oscilloscopes as well as the digital storage oscilloscopes of other leading manufacturers i Initial Inspection 1 2 Before unpacking the AWG2040 from its shipping carton inspect it for signs of external damage If the carton is damaged notify the carrier The carton contains the basic instrument and its standard accessories Refer to the Standard Accessories list in Appendix A This instrument was thoroughly inspected for mechanical and electrical defects before shipment It should be free of mars or scratches and meet or exceed all electrical specifications To confirm this inspect the instrument for physical damage incurred in transit and test the electrical performance by following the Performance Check section of the Service Manual Ifa discrep ancy is found contact your local Tektronix Field Office or representative NOTE At installation time save the shipping carton and packaging materi als for repackaging in case shipment becomes necessary Start Up This section describes the procedures required prior to turning on the AWG2040 eee Installation Before you begin refer to the Operator s Safety Summary at the front of this manual for power source grounding and other safety information Before you use the instrument ensure that it is properly installed and pow ered on To properly install and power on the instrument perform the follow ing steps oO Step 1 Check that the operating environment is
375. ose write write and Close s VALUE Cc AWG2040 User Manual This completes the waveform creation Next name the waveform file and exit the waveform editor C Step 22 Select Close Write from the bottom menu C Step 23 Select Write and Close from the side menu The display used to enter the file name will appear C Step 24 Input SAMPLE 1 as the file name Use the general purpose knob to select S from the character menu Then press the VALUE button S is inserted into the file name input column In the same manner input A M P L E 1 see Figure 2 29 GPIB iContinusus mode Stopped errirri ty f Clase 1624 pts 5 insert character Pees cancel lt gt oo Meve curser 1 806 MARKERT MARKER Select Open peration Zoom Setting Figure 2 29 Naming a File 2 39 Operating Examples 2 40 C Step 25 When you finish inputting the file name select O K from the sub menu The system returns to the initial menu and displays the waveform file created see Figure 2 30 The extension WFM will be displayed after the file name this indicates that the file is a waveform file GPIB Continuous mode Stopped Catalog Memory Free gt 2864KR Name Type Size Date amp Time Comment Q i 2096 93 1 1 13 08 Edit F New Waveform New Equation New Sequence
376. ostep is selected the following items will be displayed in the side menu Slope mw Level Impedance m Config STOP The Slope Level and Impedance items are used to set the trigger condi tions for the external trigger signal MODE Menu Starting an Autostep Program Config tion for the Config item Use Config to select autostep files and set output conditions and to proceed to the next step The following diagram shows the menu configura m Continuous gt Sepctauccap rie gt Se Autostep Config __ Bo Back OSER rue Next Step Procedure O Step 1 Select Autostep from the bottom menu C Step 2 Select Contig from the side menu C Step 3 Choose Select Autostep File from the sub menu When this item is selected the list of autostep files created with the autostep editor is displayed See Figure 4C 7 SAMPLE ZAST SAMPLE BAST Figure 4C 7 Autostep File List C Step 4 Use the general purpose knob to select the file to open from the displayed list of autostep files C Step 5 After selecting the file to confirm the selection select O K from the sub menu To cancel the file selection select Cancel When you select O K the autostep program opens C Step 6 Press Run in the sub menu and select either Continuous or Step AWG2040 User Manual 40 13 w MODE Menu 4
377. ous Mode Set the operation mode to Cont Bei MODE fh a C Step 1 Press the MODE button in the MENU column Figure 2 51 shows the MODE menu AWG2040 User Manual 2 59 Operating Exampies Running CHT lreieeared i Waveform s Triggered Gated Burst Advance es Slave h f i Figure 2 51 MODE Menu Cont C Step 2 Select Cont from the bottom menu This operation mode continuously outputs the set waveform Also Running is displayed in the trigger status area on the upper right section of the screen to show that the set waveform is being output CH1 C Step 3 Press the CH1 On Off button on the front panel to enable waveform output When the output is On the On Off indicator lights up This operation outputs the specified waveform from the CH1 output connector Set the oscilloscope appropriately to display the waveform on the oscilloscope screen You can use the marker output from the front panel of the instrument as the external trigger for the oscilloscope The marker signal is high at the 0 point of the waveform for the default value See Figure 2 52 The marker signal can be set to any point using the waveform edit function 2 60 Operating Examples R 1033 alue 1 8879 SAMPLE 1 LEN 1023 pts i E para Marker signal high at point 0 Figure 2 52 Setting the Marker Default Triggered Mode In the following steps set the operation
378. p 4 Select Execute from the side menu The selected diagnostics items are executed If the test finishes without a problem Pass is displayed on the Result column If an error occurs Fail is displayed if the instrument fails a test an error code is displayed in the Code column Calibration This instrument is equipped with the system to calibrate itself This enables the AWG2040 to operate with greater precision A series of calibrations is carried out automatically when this instrument is started up These same calibrations can also be initiated by selecting the Calibration item NOTE The AWG2040 must complete its warm up about 20 minutes and stabilize before calibration When the Calibration item is selected the list of calibration items shown in Figure 4E 22 will appear AWG2040 User Manual 4E 31 UTILITY Menu Figure 4E 22 Calibration List The calibration menu is divided into three columns Calibration Result and Code The Result and Code columns are the same as for the diagnostics menu Procedure C Step 1 Select Diag Cal from the bottom menu C Step 2 Select Calibration from the side menu J Step 3 Select Execute from the side menu The calibration item is carried out If the calibration finishes without a problem Pass is displayed on the Result column if an error occurs Fail is displayed If the instrument fails a calibration an error code is displayed in the Code column NOTE lf an er
379. pecified marker signals The maximum output level is 2 V with a 50Q termination 4 CH1 Waveform Output Connector Provides the normal waveform output from the CH1 connector and the inverted waveform output from the CHT connector The maximum output level is 2 V with a 50Q termination Do not apply any external voltage to the output connector of this instrument Doing so can harm this instrument 5 Waveform Output On Off Buttons and Indicators Press the waveform output on off buttons to switch the output on and off When set to on the LED indicator is lit and a waveform is output When set to off the LED indicator is extinguished and a waveform is not output 6 CLEAR MENU Button Press this button to cancel any entering alphanumeric input and return the system to the data before input Also for a side menu item with at tached to it pressing this button returns the system from the sub menu lower level menu to the side menu Using remote commands the user may delete a message that has been entered in the message area see page 2 13 Overview 7 ON STBY Button When the principal power switch on the rear panel has been pressed to supply power to the standby circuit this button can be pressed to provide power to the other circuits of the instrument Normally this button is used as a power switch MENU E O 8 0 S 0 MODE TRIGGER gt MANUAL O er
380. perform these steps C Step 1 Select Device from the bottom menu C Step 2 Select Disk or NVRam from the side menu When the Device is Disk the Change Directory item is displayed on the side menu When this item is selected the current directory can be changed This item is the same as the Change Directory item on the UTILITY menu See the explanation in Using the Disk Menu in Section 4E UTILITY Menu There is no directory hierarchy for the NVRam C Step 3 Select Load from the bottom menu 4D 8 LOAD SAVE Menu g Step 4 Use the genera purpose knob to select files to load into internal memory from the mass memory file list C Step 5 Select Load from the side menu The selected file is loaded into internal memory When Load All is selected from the side menu all the files in the speci fied mass memory for a disk the current directory are loaded into internal memory NOTE When Load or Load All is executed if there is already a file in internal memory with the same name as a file to be loaded the system displays a message asking you whether or not to overwrite the file now in internal memory with the one being foaded Answer O K or Cancel Loading Autostep Files Some files created on other instruments in the AWG series other than the AWG2040 may have no data set for CH1 When loading an autostep file to the AWG2040 from disk only the steps for which CH1 data has been set will be read in Wh
381. play in the Root Directory 4E 9 Figure 46 5 Directory Name Input 06 secre eee e eee 4E 10 Figure 4E 6 Directory Displayed When Change Directory is Selected os oere boani nee ARELA Eor Oa AAE aE 4E 10 Figure 4E 7 File List for a Newly Created Directory 4E 11 Figure 4E 8 Menu Displayed When NVRam is Selected 4E 12 Figure 4E 9 Menu Displayed When GPIB is Selected 4E 13 Figure 4E 10 Menu Displayed When RS232C is Selected 4E 15 Figure 4E 11 Menu Displayed When Date Time is Selected 4E 17 Figure 4E 12 Setting the Display Brightness 000 4E 19 Figure 4E 13 Menu Displayed when Catalog Order is Selected 4E 20 Figure 4E 14 Catalog Files ee cece eee e eee ener 4E 21 Figure 4E 15 Catalog With Files Displayed in Type4 Format 4E 22 Figure 4E 16 Date Time Display 0ee ee eee eee e eee 4E 23 Figure 4E 17 Format Selection Menu 0 0 e seer renee 4E 25 Figure 4E 18 Port Selection Menu 5 eee reece ener eens 4E 26 Figure 4E 19 Menu Displayed When System is Selected 4E 28 Figure 4E 20 I O Event Reporting 6 see ee eee eens 4E 29 Figure 4E 21 Diagnostics List 25 2s seer rene ee eens 4E 30 Figure 4 22 Calibration List 2 0 66 scene eee eee teens 4E 32 Figure 4F 1 FG Mode Menu Structure 026s eee e eee eens 4F 2 Figure 4F 2 FG Mode Menu Display
382. plitude will be updated to the value you have set 4A 187 EDIT Menu Offset Settings Using the general purpose knob select offset and then press the VALUE button on the front panel The menu shown in Figure 4A 138 will appear peration Offset FB agv Default R Value Marka TZ oeae Harkat 73 87 i i j Cancel OK l Figure 4A 138 Offset Setting Menu Select the appropriate item in the side menu and set the offset Offset Offset Select this item and use the numeric keys or the general purpose knob to set the desired offset value Default Default Value Yalue This item sets the offset to the default value of 0 000 V After setting the offset select O K from the side menu The value for offset will be updated to the value you have set 4A 188 EDIT Menu Marker 1 Marker High Low MarkerZ Marker2 High Low Defauit value Marker Settings Select MarktH 77 _ MarktL ___ Mark2H or MarkaL 777 with the general purpose knob and then press the VALUE button on the front panel Figure 44 139 shows an example in which Mark1H has been selected CPB Triggered mode Stopped Aap fe se ottset i warkih RERA Default Value Cancel Harkat EN T Samd A dump Figure 4A 139 Marker Setting Menu Select the appropriate item in the side
383. quare windows half the width of the window Therefore the triangle wave window frequency spectrum is the product of the square wave win dows 3 dB Bandwidth 1 28 Highest Side Lobe 27 dB Window Function Freq Magnitude Figure D 13 Triangle Window and Frequency Characteristic D 18 Appendix D Miscellaneous Repackaging for Shipment If this instrument is shipped by commercial transportation use the original packaging material Unpack the instrument carefully from the shipping container to save the carton and packaging material for this purpose If the original packaging is unfit for use or is not available repackage the instrument as follows C Step 1 Obtain a corrugated cardboard shipping carton having inside dimensions at least six inches greater than the instrument dimensions and having a carton test strength of at least 275 pounds C Step 2 If the instrument is being shipped to a Tektronix Service Center for repair or calibration attach a tag to the instrument showing the following owner of the instrument with address the name of a person at your firm who may be contacted if additional information is needed complete instrument type and serial number and a description of the service required g Step 3 Wrap the instrument with polyethylene sheeting or equivalent to protect the outside finish and prevent entry of packing materials into the instrument g Step 4 Cushion the instrument on all
384. quipment controls a Hook up the oscilloscope Connect the AWG2040 CH1 output connector through the coaxial cable to the CH1 vertical input con nector on the oscilloscope see Figure E 9 Performance Tests AWG2040 mM 5 SEEEEEET 00O ea 7 Oscilloscope RSsoomacimims Figure E 9 Waveform Advance Mode Initial Test Hookup b Set oscilloscope controls Vertical CH1 coupling CHi scale CH1 input impedance Horizontal Sweep Trigger Source Coupling Slope Level Mode CH1 DC 0 2 V div 509 200 us div CHi DC Positive 100 mV Normal Set the AWG2040 controls and select the waveform file a Initialize ANG2040 controls Push UTILITY Misc Contfig gt Re set to Factory0 K b Set AWG2040 controls u Push MODE Waveform Advance Slope to highlight Positive c Select waveform file Push SETUP Waveform Sequence m Highlight the MODE_ADV SEQ file using the general purpose knob Push ENTER to select the file Turn on the AWG2040 CH1 output Push the CH1 button so that the LED above the CH1 output connector is on Check waveform advance mode with manual triggering Repeatedly push the AWG2040 MANUAL TRIGGER button and check that the oscilloscope alternately displays two different frequency sine waves at each manual trigger End procedure Disconnect the
385. r The address and length counters operate with a clock signal that is 1 32 of the clock signal from the clock generator When the number of bursts has been loaded to the burst counter the waveform is output the designated number of times Figure 3 8 shows a block diagram illustrating the relationship between memory address control and waveform memory Burst Counter End of Waveform Clock 1 32 Figure 3 8 Relationship Between Memory Address Control and Waveform Memory 3 10 Block Diagram Waveform Memory The waveform memory has a capacity of 1 M words with each word com posed of 10 bits Each bit is composed of four SRAMs of 32k x 8 bits Of the 10 bits 8 are used for waveform data and the other two are used for the Markeri and Marker2 signals When a file has been selected with the Waveform Sequence item in the SETUP menu the marker data and waveform data that are actually output are stored in this memory As the waveform memory must read at a high speed of 1 024 GS second the waveform data is multiplexed subjected to parallel series conversion in 32 word increments For this reason the memory element itself is operated by a 1 32 clock signal The length of the waveform data can be set between 32 points and 1M or 4M when Option 01 is installed in multiples of 32 Even when the sequence file has been expanded the total number of points of waveform data must not exceed 1M or 4M when Option 01
386. r setting the clock source and clock frequency select O K from the side menu The values for clock source and clock frequency will be updated to the values you have set Filter Settings Using the general purpose knob select Filter and then press the VALUE button on the front panel The menu shown in Figure 4A 136 will appear ww liflggeredmode Stopped dump i of E aa Figure 4A 136 Filter Setting Menu Using the general purpose knob select the type of filter After selecting the filter type select O K from the side menu The filter type will be updated to what you have set 4A 186 EDIT Menu AWG2040 User Manual Amplitude Default value Amplitude Settings Using the general purpose knob select Aap ___ and then press the VALUE button on the front panel The menu shown in Figure 4A 137 will appear GPIB ared mode Stepped Operation on Anp i itude 1009 Value Default narka 2 arka 776 84 Jump write Figure 4A 137 Amplitude Setting Menu Select the appropriate item in the side menu and set the amplitude Amplitude Select this item and use the numeric keys or the general purpose knob to set the desired amplitude value Default Value This item sets the amplitude to the default value of 1 000 V After setting the amplitude select O K from the side menu The value for am
387. ral purpose knob set Point Step to 2 2 Point Step Rage C Step 17 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to select Code oO Step 18 Using the general purpose knob select NRZ EDIT Menu a i zoom AWG2040 User Manual C Step 19 Select O K from the sub menu oO Step 20 Select Execute from the sub menu The timing display shown below will appear The following figure shows the first 1024 points of the data ATL assis C Step 21 Select Go Back from the sub menu NOTE 2 1 is not a multiple of 32 Therefore when performing continu ous output of a pseudo random signal you should designate a suitable number of repetitions in the sequence editor to form a multiple of 32 In this example you should set the number of repeti tions to 16 Zooming Waveforms Use Zoom in the bottom menu to horizontally enlarge or reduce the wave form being displayed The function for this item is the same as for the Zoom item in for waveform editor graphic display See Page 4A 96 Table Display To show the table display for the waveform editor using the View type item in the Setting menu 3 Procedure C Step 1 Select Setting from the bottom menu oO Step 2 Select View type from the side menu Three items will be displayed in the sub menu Graphic Timing and Table C Step 3 Select Table from the sub menu The table display of the waveform editor will appear See Figure 44 95
388. raw Function Creating Waveforms Arithmetically Creating an Equation File Creating a Sequence File Creating an Autostep File Setting the Output Parameters Setting Operation Mode and Waveform Output Creating a Waveform File Use the waveform editor graphic display to create a waveform file by per forming the foliowing steps g Step 1 Press the EDIT button in the MENU column Figure 2 24 shows the initial menu displayed GPIB Continuous mode Stopped Catalog Memory Free 3867KB Date amp Time Comment New Waveform New Equation ener eae New Sequence 7 Comment f Copy Delete Delete Ail i Rename i f i Figure 2 24 Initial Menu 2 34 Operating Examples New waveform CURSOR AWG2040 User Manual C Step 2 Select New Waveform from the side menu Figure 2 25 shows the waveform editor graphic menu The default for the number of points in the waveform is 1024 Continuous mode mma 138 1024 pts Yalue 0 0006 panssa 1 00790 copy to Buffer ji Renee Paste from Buffer H J q WARKER 1 Standard closes waveform write Select open Zoom Setting i Unda i io Figure 2 25 Waveform Editor Graphic Menu C Step 3 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to activate the right side vertical bar cursor it becomes a solid line Pressing the CURSOR butt
389. rce Data Pattern Converted Code x lf 6 and 7 are used 2 intial Sr 0 Initial Code 0 Out 1 0 High Low Source Data Pattern Converted Code 077 00000001 076 j 00000010 177 00000100 176 00001000 067 00010000 066 00100000 167 01000000 166 10000000 In the case of the above conversion the data will be as follows 4A 118 EDIT Menu importing Waveform or Marker Data as Pattern Data import This command is used to import the selected bit data as pattern data It can Line Data be used to perform code conversion even for waveform data The commands in the Import Line Data menu will change depending on whether or not there is data in the pattern data area When there is no data the Import Line Data command will appear in the sub menu When data has been entered this command will change to Clear Pattern Procedure C Step 1 Select Set from the side menu oO Step 2 Select the data to be imported and then use the cursors to specify the required range C Step 3 Select Set Pattern from the sub menu CC Step 4 if pattern data exists press Clear Pattern button in the sub menu to clear the existing data Ol Step 5 Select Import Line Data from the sub menu The selected bit data will be read into the pattern data input area Clear Pattern dex When data has been entered in the pattern data input area the Import Line Pattern Data item in the sub menu will change to Clear Patte
390. rder The file data contains waveform file names in sequence their repetition counts and the sequence waveform output parameters Sequence Editor Figure 4A 122 shows an example of the data in a sequence file and the waveform display for that data Sequence File Number of repetitions 2 File name Waveform WAVE 1 WFM WAVE 2 WFM WAVE 3 WFM ameer y BR y s R Y heck zezao STIS Polfts Check 12 09 H Figure 4A 122 Sequence File Data and Sample Waveform Display AWG2040 User Manual 4A 165 EDIT Menu i New di Fait Sequence Exit Write 4A 166 Entering the Sequence Editor Procedure Step 1 Press the EDIT button in the MENU column The initial EDIT menu will appear C Step 2 Select Edit or New Sequence from the side menu Edit Used to select and edit an existing sequence file SEQ New Sequence Used to create a new sequence file The sequence editor screen will appear Saving Files and Exiting the Editor Use Exit Write in the bottom menu to save the file to the internal memory of the AWG2040 and exit from the editor depending on the selected side menu item The same procedure is used to save the file and exit from the equation editor as for the waveform editor See Saving Files and Exiting the Editor in the section on the waveform editor EDIT Menu Operation Show Overview Undo Exit Write
391. re 4A 145 Waveform File Data Before and After insertion If Cancel is selected the file will not be created and the previous Insert menu will reappear C Step 10 Select Exit from the bottom menu The Insert menu will disap pear and the initial EDIT menu will reappear The newly created waveform file will be added to the file list in the initial EDIT menu AWG2040 User Manual 4A 201 w EDIT Menu Convolution Waveform Editor Option 09 Convelve Waveform On instruments with Option 09 installed high speed convolution and cor relation can be performed for up to 32 K words of waveform data in existing waveform files those with the extention WFM The number of points in the waveform after calculation will be the sum of the point count of the two selected waveform files The calculated amplitude wil be normalized NOTE The calculated result of waveform consisting of P number of points and N number of points will be P N 1 For the sake of conve nience however on this instrument a final value of 0 0 is added so the result is P N On discrete systems the convolution y n of waveform x n and waveform h i is expressed by the following formula Here N is the number of data items The operation expressed by this formula is called convolution Net y n Xx Mh i 0 Alternately the correlation y n of waveform x n and waveform h i is ex pressed by the following formula Here N is the number of
392. re E 8 Burst Mode initial Test Hookup b Set oscilloscope controls Vertical CH1 CH1 coupling DC CH1 scale 0 5 V div CH1 input impedance 502 Horizontal Sweep 500 ns div AWG2040 User Manual E 19 Performance Tests E 20 Trigger Source CH1 Coupling AC Slope Positive Level OV Mode Auto Set the AWG2040 controls and select the waveform file a Initialize ANG2040 controls Push UTILITY Misc Contfig gt Re set to Factory gt 0 K b Modify the AWG2040 default settings Push MODE Burst Burst Count to highlight Burst Count w Input the burst count of 60 000 using the numeric key Push ENTER to enter the burst count c Select the file a Push SETUP Waveform Sequence m Highlight the MODE WFM file using the general purpose knob Push ENTER to select the file Turn on the AWG2040 CH1 output Push the CH1 button so that the LED above the CH1 output connector is on Check Burst mode with manual trigger Push the AWG2040 MANUAL TRIGGER button and check that the oscilloscope momentarily about 60 ms displays a sine wave after the MANUAL TRIGGER button is pushed End procedure Disconnect the oscilloscope Check Waveform Advance Mode Electrical Characteristic Checked Operating mode Waveform Ad vance on page B 3 Equipment Required A 50 Q coaxial cable and an oscilloscope Prerequisites The AWG2040 meets the prerequisites listed on page E 7 Procedure Install test hookup and set test e
393. reen is reversed Then set the polarity to Normal Figure 2 66 shows the screen when the output parameters are set fora pulse waveform Operating Examples Running Pulse Frequency 7 So8C0OMHZ CHT 1 0000V Amplitude f Offset 9 500 Polarity ie Normal Invert Perio 7 e00006uS Channel cH l E Triangle Square Figure 2 66 Output Parameter Setting Display This completes the pulse wave output parameter setting Now you will check the actual waveform on the oscilloscope screen Waveform Output Connect the AWG2040 to an oscilloscope with a 50Q cable and a 502 termination as shown in Figure 2 67 The waveform output for this instru ment is calibrated for a 50Q load AWG2040 Oscilloscope 500 Cable Figure 2 67 Connections for Example 6 AWG2040 User Manual 2 77 Operating Examples CH1 C Step 10 Press the CH1 On Off button on the front panel to switch the output on The On Off indicators should light up In this operation the waveform outputs continuously from the output connector Set the oscilloscope appropriately to display the waveform on the oscilloscope screen This completes the Example 6 2 78 Functional Operation Summary AWG2040 User Manual Introduction This summary presents functional block diagrams explains each block and gives some operating precautions which
394. required SMB BNC cable 2 required Test oscilloscope Spectrum analyzer Load all the files from the Performance Check Adjustment disk 063 1707 00 that is provided as a standard accessory into AWG2040 internal memory For instructions on loading files see Loading Files on page E 10 Related Information Read Preparation and Conventions on page E 1 Also if you are not familiar with operating the AWG2040 refer to Instructions for Operation before doing any of these procedures Equipment Required The following equipment is required to check the performance of the AWG2040 Table E 1 Test Equipment Minimum Requirements Impedance 50 Q 0 1 Connectors BNC Connectors BNC female to dual banana Connectors BNC female to N male Example Tektronix Part 011 0129 00 Tektronix Part 103 0090 00 Tektronix Part 103 0045 00 Connectors BNC Connectors BNC female to female Tektronix Part 103 0030 00 lektronix Part 103 0028 00 Impedance 50 Q Frequency 10 kHz to 21 GHz Connectors N male to female Impedance 50 Q Connectors BNC Length 43 inches Impedance 50 Q Connectors SMB Length 100 cm Impedance 50 Q Connectors SMB to BNC Length 100 cm Bandwidth gt 500 MHz Tektronix Part 015 0509 00 Tektronix Part 012 0057 01 Tektronix Part 012 1458 00 Tektronix Part 012 1459 00 Tektronix TDS500 Series Digitiz ing Oscilloscope or 2400 Series Digitizing Osc
395. rn 8 1 Prev Code is 0 Prev Code is 1 Prev Src is 9 Prev Src is 1 Next Src is Next Src is 1 Inserting a Blank Line Pressing the ENTER key causes a blank line to be inserted above the data item marked by the cursor NOTE Blank lines cannot be inserted if there are more than two consecu tive blank lines or if there are more than 16 lines in all Defining Data Move the cursor to the desired location to enter a value on the numeric keys The value at that location will be replaced by the one you have en gt tered Enterable values will vary depending on the location of the cursor In the Source Data Pattern area only numeric keys 0 through 7 are opera tional in the Converted Code area only numeric keys 0 through 3 are operational Deleting Data Pressing the delete key will delete the data indicated by the cursor When a data item is deleted all of the subsequent data items will move forward one space If there is no data at the cursor position the cursor will move one position to the left Deleting a Line When all of the data on the line indicated by the cursor has been deleted that line will also be deleted and all subsequent data will move up one line Setting Items Used to write the pattern for input data 0 Data at that position is LOW 1 Data at that position is HIGH The preceding Converted Code data item is 0 The preceding Converted Code data item is 1 The preceding Source Data Patt
396. rn Pressing the Clear Pattern button will delete all pattern data Shifting Waveform Data shift Use the Shift function to shift the data between the designated vertical bar cursors in individual data lines or markers by the specified points or time The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Shift item r Line Operation More 2 of 3 Shift 4_ KS ok Execute AWG2040 User Manual 4A 119 EDIT Menu 4A 120 Procedure o o Step 1 Move the vertical bar cursors to define the part of the waveform data to be shifted then select Shift from the second page of the side menu More 2 of 3 Step 2 Select Line from the sub menu Turning the general purpose knob select the data line DATA 7 DATA 0 or marker MARKER1 or MARKER2 on which the data is to be shifted Step 3 Select Value from the sub menu Using the general purpose knob or the numeric keys input the shift point value Value sets the amount of the shift in points or time The range for the shift value is designated waveform point size To shift the data be tween the vertical bar cursors to the right enter a positive value points that shift out beyond the right cursor will be shifted in from the left To shift the data to the left enter a negative number points that shift out beyond the left cursor will be shifted in from the right Step 4 Select Execute from the side menu The waveform data is
397. ror occurs contact our representative closest to you Pattern Display For Instrument Adjustment emale This item is used when adjusting the instrument As it is not used for opera tion a description is omitted here a 4E 32 Function Waveform Generator Mode General Description Press the front panel F G button to switch this instrument from arbitrary waveform generation mode into function waveform generation FG mode Select the desired waveform with the bottom button Then set the output parameters with the side button Hereafter function waveform generator mode will be referred to as FG mode NOTE FG mode is an independent of the MENU column arbitrary wave form generation mode menus Therefore the output parameters set with the SETUP menu and the operation mode set with the MODE menu have no effect in FG mode The following waveforms may be selected from the bottom menu Sine wave Triangle wave Square wave Ramp wave Pulse wave The following output parameters for these waveforms may be set from the side menu Frequency Amplitude Offset Polarity Polarity Duty pulse wave only When a sine wave is selected a 50 MHz filter is inserted When a waveform other than sine wave has been selected Through no filter will be selected Table 4F 1 shows the relationship among the frequency the waveform and the marker signal data point count AWG2040 User Manual 4F 1 Function Wavefor
398. rrerrrrrrerrerrret 4A 19 Figure 4A 11 Menu Display When Show Catalog Entry is Selected vce Fak caw vieneacd ae ea en on eas ROI EE KF 4A 19 Figure 4A 12 Waveform3 Added 6 seeeeeeeeer rer eters 4A 20 Figure 44 13 Menu for Inputting a File Name sees 4A 22 Figure 4A 14 Fraction Processing Menu sssree eee es 4A 24 Figure 4A 15 Fraction Processing sssseecseee sere sees 4A 25 Figure 4A 16 Fraction Processing seeeeereee sree re ees 4A 25 Figure 4A 17 Waveform Editor Graphic Display Menu Structure 4A 28 Figure 44 18 Graphic Display Screen 2 seen eee eees 4A 30 Figure 4A 19 Setting the Unit for the Horizontal Axis 4A 34 Figure 44 20 Menu Display When Clock is Selected 4A 35 Figure 44 21 Sub Menu Display When Cursor Link to is Selected 2 0 ccc ee cee nt ee tennes 4A 36 Figure 4A 22 Grid Setto On 2 0 0 ee eee eect etter eee 4A 38 Figure 4A 23 Creating a Sine Wave 06 cere sees ee eee 4A 41 Figure 4A 24 Adding Noise to the Sine Wave s 4A 42 Figure 4A 25 Multiplying Sine Waves 0s ee eeee eens 4A 43 Figure 4A 26 Defining the Editing Area crete 4A 45 Figure 44 27 Cutting Waveforms 4A 46 Figure 4A 28 Pasting Waveforms 4A 47 Figure 44 29 Menu Display When Draw Item is Selected 4A 48 Figure 4A 30 Smoothing see eee ee etter rete ees 4A 50 Figure 4A 31 Horizonta
399. rument i it must be nudtipie of 32 i ny 71 009 please select action tancel MARKERT MARKER2 1 Leave enn sae pe eo cnet a a ae it is Lee seem Sa Select co ae seh a Standard Open aperang Zoom Setting Unde waveform Figure 44 14 Fraction Processing Menu g Step 7 Select the fraction processing method from the side menu As soon as the method is selected the file will be saved to internal memory under the file name that you have entered and the initial menu will reappear If you select Cancel the entered file name will become invalid and the previous editor will reappear 4A 24 EDIT Menu Any one of the following four processes can be selected Append 0 Data at the 0 level will be added to the end of the waveform data to create a waveform file whose size is a multiple of 32 Before After Figure 4A 15 Fraction Processing Expand The waveform data will be expanded to create a wave form file whose size is a multiple of 32 Before Figure 4A 16 Fraction Processing Expand with Clock The waveform data will be expanded to create a waveform file whose size is a multiple of 32 At the same time the clock frequency will be increased to the same extent and saved to the file pO Eaa anaana AWG2040 User Manual 4A 25 EDIT Menu Leave as it is The file will be created without changing the waveform size NOTE When a waveform whose s
400. s are expressed in deg 44 212 EDIT Menu 3 Freq2 Magnitude Phase This section shows the frequency magnitude and phase for the position of the right vertical bar cursor 4 Scroll Indicator This item shows the position of the display area within the overall waveform The area displayed on the screen is displayed inverted 5 Magnitude Display Area This area displays the magnitudes for the frequency components 6 Phase Display Area This area displays the phases for the frequency components 7 Left Vertical Bar Cursor The left cursor indicates the left starting point for editing When active the cursor will be brightly highlighted 8 Right Vertical Bar Cursor The right cursor indicates the right end point for editing 9 Button Operations This area shows how the front panel buttons operate in this menu CURSOR x ES switch V Bar cursor Pressing the CURSOR button toggles the active vertical bar cursor between left and right as es Change Magnitude Pressing the VALUE or ENTER button puts the system into a mode in which the magnitude at the frequency of the active vertical bar cursor can be changed es eS Change Phase Pressing the VALUE or ENTER button puts the system into a mode in which the phase at the frequency of the active vertical bar cursor can be changed AWG2040 User Manual 4A 213 EDIT Menu Operation 44 214 CURSOR C Move Bar cursor When Draw
401. s higher than the gate level set with the side menu Level item When Negative is selected the waveform or sequence is output while the level of the gate signal is lower than the set gate level Level ee This item sets the trigger gate level for an external trigger gate signal Press the Level button in the side menu then set the level with the numeric keys or the general purpose knob The trigger gate level can be set in the range 5 0 V to 5 0 V in steps of 0 1 V Positive Going Edge Negative Going Edg Trigger Level can be Adjusted Vertically Pee Trigger Slope can be Positive or Negative Figure 4C 9 Slope and Level Controls 4C 16 MODE Menu Impedance es Either of two values 1 kQ or 509 can be selected for the input impedance 1k when the external trigger gate signal is entered The maximum input voltage will be 10 V when the input impedance is 1 kQ and 5 V when the input impedance is 50Q The trigger signal is entered through the TRIGGER INPUT connector on the front panel Slave Mode Slave A cable is used to connect the MASTER CLOCK OUT connector on the rear panel of the master AWG2040 with the SLAVE CLOCK IN connector on the rear panel of the slave AWG2040 The clock signal causes the slave unit to operate synchronously with the master unit Connecting a slave unit wi
402. s input nothing else can be input on that line AWG2040 User Manual 4A 156 EDIT Menu Operation 4A 160 Cut Line Copy Paste to Buffer from Butter Editing Functions When you select Operation in the bottom menu the following items appear in the side menu Cut Line m Copy to Buffer m Paste from Buffer x Word Table Insert Other Equation Cutting a line Use Cut Line to cut out a line in the equation list Procedure O Step i Select Operation from the bottom menu 0 Step 2 Pressing the CURSOR button on the front panel twice puts the system into scroll mode Pressing the CURSOR button toggles the unit between cursor mode and scroll mode Cursor mode Line cursor moves between items in the equation list item by item Scroll mode A inverted line cursor moves through the lines in the equation list line by line g Step 3 Use the general purpose knob to move the displayed inverted cursor to the line to be deleted from the created equation list O Step 4 Select Cut Line from the side menu When Cut Line is selected the line displayed inverted in the equation list is deleted The deleted line is placed in the paste buffer To restore this line to its original state select Undo from the bottom menu or Paste from Buffer from the side menu Copying and Pasting a Line Use the Copy to Buffer and Paste from Buffer items to copy a line in the equation list and paste it to another line Pro
403. sed when the waveform is output Entering the Waveform Editor New a Procedure waveform C Step 1 Press EDIT in the MENU column The initial EDIT menu will appear C Step 2 Select Edit or New Waveform from the side menu Edit Use this command to select and edit an existing waveform file WFM m New Waveform Use this command to create anew waveform file As a result of the procedure described above the waveform editor will appear on the screen The waveform editor can be displayed in one of three formats graphic timing or table the default setting is graphic display Figure 4A 7 shows an example in which an existing waveform file has been selected ne Et AWG2040 User Manual 4A 15 EDIT Menu Select Open 4A 16 GPIB Cantinuous mode Stopped Copy to Buffer from Buffer MARKERT 1 More MARKER 1 Select Open Standar lose ting 4 f jard l Zoom Setting i Undo waveform write Figure 4A 7 Graphic Display Screen Opening and Selecting Editing Areas Up to three waveforms can be displayed and edited in the waveform editor at the same time This makes it easy to edit several related waveforms Figure 4A 8 shows an example in which three waveforms are displayed In this example the box around the Waveform2 area shows that this waveform is selected and is currently being edited EDIT Menu wave forms f zsessa WEM Sta
404. sides by tightly packing dunnage or urethane foam between the carton and the instrument allowing for three inches of padding on each side including top and bottom Ol Step 5 Seal the carton with shipping tape or with an industrial stapler oO Step 6 Mark the address of the Tektronix Service Center and your return address on the carton in one or more prominent locations AWG2040 User Manual D 19 Appendix D Miscellaneous Factory Settings D 20 When Reset to Factory is selected from the UTILITY Misc menu this instrument s parameters are reset to the values they had at the factory Table D 1 lists these factory settings Table D 1 Factory Settings Setup Menu Clock Frequency 1 000 000 GHz Clock Source Internal Filter Through Amplitude 1 000 V Offset 0 000 V Marker 1 Marker 2 High 2 0 V Low 0 0 V Display Graphics MODE Menu Operating mode Positive Triggered Siope Gated Polarity Positive Level Impedance Autostep Run Continuous Burst Count LOAD SAVE Menu Device Auto Load UTILITY Menu Misc Display Brightness 70 Misc Display Catalog Order Name1 Misc Display Data Time Off Misc Hardcopy Format BMP Misc Hardcopy Port Disk Diag Cal Diagnostics All Diag Cal Calibrations All Appendix D Miscellaneous Table D 1 Factory Settings Cont ee A CC NC FG Menu Function waveform Selection Sine Frequenc
405. siew Figure 4A 111 Equation Using int a round Rounds off the fraction to obtain the integer Example range 0 100 us round 5 sin 2 pi x 5 Figure 4A 112 Equation Using round norm Normalizes the range specified with range and scales the ampli tude values so that the maximum absolute value is 1 0 i e a value of 1 0 or 1 0 The norm statement comprises an entire line Example range 0 100 us sin 2 pi x rnd 10 norm 4A 155 EDIT Menu Figure 4A 113 Equation Using norm m max Takes the larger of two values min Takes the smaller of two values Example range 0 100 ps sin 2 pi x range 0 50yus min v 0 5 range 50us 100ps max v 0 5 Figure 4A 114 Equation Using max and min m rnd integer from 1 to 16777215 When an argument is specified generates a random number sequence using that argument as the initial value If the argument is omitted 1 is used 4A 156 EDIT Menu Example range 0 100 us md 2 3 overview 18 Figure 4A 115 Equation Using rnd See Random Function in Appendix D for a discussion of the algorithms for rnd functions aa Example diff Differentiates the function over the range specified with range Specified with diff The diff comprises an entire line ran
406. sin 2 pi 1e4 t overview pa i 1024 Points Clock 18240000 Hz Figure 4A 105 Trigonometric Function Waveform Expressed With Variable t exp log in Exponential function common log function natural log function The log and In arguments must be positive Example range 0 50 us 1 exp 5 x range 50us 100yus exp 5 x overview i po 1626 Paints Clock 10246800 Hz Figure 4A 106 Equation Using exp 4A 152 EDIT Menu Example range 0 100 us log 10 x 0 1 overview aaron 1024 Points Clock 10240006 Hz Figure 4A 107 Equation Using log Example range 0 100 ps In 2 x 0 2 Someta 4624 Points Clock 16240000 Hz Rasssssnernesiesceessceeerrenesereteeretncteaceteeteoteerasesse senetae assenaar Figure 4A 108 Equation Using In sqrt The square root the argument must be a positive value Example range 0 100 us sqrt sin pi x AWG2040 User Manual 4A 153 EDIT Menu Figure 4A 109 Equation Using sqrt a abs The absolute value Example range 0 100 ps abs sin 2 pi x 1624 Points Clock 19246060 Hz Figure 44 110 Equation Using abs int Truncates the fraction to obtain the integer Example range 0 100 us int 5 sin 2 pi x 5 44 154 EDIT Menu AWG2040 User Manual over
407. sing the general purpose knob select the item for which a file will be set on CH1 SeETERES ASTI lack Figure 4A 131 Selecting the Item for File Setting g Step 3 Press the VALUE button on the front panel A list of files that can be set will appear Select the waveform Sequence o ERP WFM GAUSS WFM LORENTZ WEM MOSKWR WEM io RYOHSLWFM H RAMP WEM SAMPLE 1 WFM SAMPLE ZWEM SQUARE WE SOU_SIN WFM STARV WFM TEST SEQ Figure 4A 132 File Selection List 4A 182 EDIT Menu C Step 4 Using the general purpose knob select the desired file cries o Step 5 If you want to check the waveform of the selected file select Entry Show Catalog Entry from the side menu SNe LWEN oy eel Se 1624 Points Clock 12 09 Hz Figure 4A 133 Sample File Waveform Display The waveform for that file will appear along with the waveform point count the clock frequency and the voltage value o Step 6 Select Continue from the sub menu The menu shown before you selected Show Catalog Entry will reap pear set C Step 7 Select Set from the side menu The selected file will be inserted and the output parameters for that waveform will be set RIEL SE Step ToT Llock Marki LEO i Mark2H x Mark2L 8 0 Figure 4A 134 Setting a File AWG2040 User Manual 4A 183 EDIT Menu 4A 184 S
408. st of files stored in internal memory at the top of the screen under the name shown in the Loaded as column Data transfers can include not only waveform data but output settings such as clock frequency and amplitude as well When the clock frequen cy and amplitude exceed the allowable setting range in the SETUP menu these values will be replaced with the nearest allowable value in other words the maximum or minimum value When Load Without Preamble from the side menu is selected wave form data is loaded by itself i e without output settings In such cases the output parameters are set to their default values AWG2040 User Manual 4D 1 rs LOAD SAVE Menu Selecting Instruments Made by Other Manufacture The following procedure is used to select digital storage oscilloscopes mad by other manufacturers The procedure up to Step 5 is the same as that for loading waveform data Procedure oO Step 6 Using the general purpose knob select Others from the GPIB Source list Step 7 Press the Load button in the side menu A list of models will appear Catalog GPIB Source S40G0CH2 WE 54600 CHI S4660CH3 WEM 54606 CH4 S46G0CH4 FM 54500CH KFH 54500CH2 WFH 54500 BF 5450 Figure 4D 8 List of Supported Models Made by Other Manufacturers NOTE Contacta Tektronix sales office in the event that waveform transfer is not possible from an instrument made by another manufacturer due to an upgrade or
409. stic Checked Main Output Amplitude DC Accu racy on page B 7 Equipment Required A 50 Q coaxial cable a 50 Q precision terminator a BNC female to dual banana adapter anda digital multimeter DMM Prerequisites The AWG2040 meets the prerequisites listed on page E 7 Procedure i Install the test hookup and set test equipment controls a Hook up DMM Connect the AWG2040 CH1 output through a 50 Q coaxial cable a 50 Q precision terminator and an adapter BNC to dual banana to the DMM INPUT connector see Figure E 13 Performance Tests AWG2040 Dual Banana Adapter Figure E 13 Amplitude Accuracy Initial Test Hookup b Set DMM controls Mode VDC Range Auto Input Front 2 Set the AWG2040 controls a Initialize ANG2040 controls Push UTILITY Misc gt Config gt Re set to Factory0 K b Set the AWG2040 controls a Push F G gt Pulse Duty Turnthe general purpose knob to set the value for 100 Push ENTER c Turn on the AWG2040 CH1 output Push the CH1 button so that the LED above the CH1 output connector is on Check amplitude accuracy a Set the AWG2040 amplitude Push Amplitude m Enter numeric value of 20 Push 2 and 0 key in this order u Push kHz ms mV key b Operate the AWG2040 control and note the reading on DMM Set the Polarity to Normal on the AWG2040 side menu and note the value displayed on the DMM Set
410. stics are described in terms of typical or average performance for the AWG2040 The characteristics described herein are not absolutely guaranteed AWG2040 User Manual Appendix B Performance Characteristics Nominal Traits This section will describe general characteristics of the AWG2040 These can be divided into two main categories electrical characteristics and me chanical characteristics Electrical Characteristics Characteristics Description Arbitrary Waveforms Memory Waveform 1 Mx 8 bits 4 Mx 8 bits Option 01 32 to multiple of 32 up to memory length 1 Mx 2 bits 4M x 2 bits Option 01 Data Points of Waveform Marker NVRAM Catalog Memory 4M bytes 10 M bytes Option 01 Clock Generator Frequency Range 1 000 000 kKHzA1 024 000 GHz Resolution 7 digits Reference Oscillator Nominal Frequency 16 77721 MHz Main Output DAGO oe i Resolution 8 bits Amplitude Range 20 mV to 2 V into 50 Q Resolution imV Offset Range 1 000 V to 1 000 V into 50 Q Resolution 5 mV Impedance a Appendix B Performance Characteristics Electrical Characteristics Characteristics Description Operating Modes Continuous Generates the waveform or sequence continuously Triggered Output quiescent until triggered by an GPIB external or manual trigger then generates a waveform or sequence only one time Burst Output quiescent until
411. sub menu The magnification for scaling can be set with either Factor or New Size Factor The waveform data between the vertical bar cursors is x panded reduced by this ratio This parameter is linked with New Size Factor can be set within the range 100 in steps of 0 01 However the total number of points for the entire waveform can not exceed 262144 so if x100 scaling would give more total points than that the maximum setting factor drops to the one that gives 262144 points A negative factor reverses the waveform between the vertical bar cursors creating a mirror image Scaling with a factor under 1 00 and greater than 1 00 0 99 reduces the waveform horizontally between the vertical bar cursors and reduces the number of points for the entire waveform Scaling with a factor greater than 1 00 or less than 1 00 expands the waveform horizontally between the vertical bar cursors and increases the number of points for the entire waveform New Size This parameter expands reduces the waveform data be tween the vertical bar cursors in units of points This parameter is linked with Factor The limit on the range of New Size is that the number of points between the vertical bar cursors can not be increased to more than x100 their original number and the number of points for the entire waveform can not exceed 262144 g Step 4 Use the numeric keys or general purpose knob to input the scaling factor or the number of points
412. t Keep fs ee ts Aala Go Back 4 Prev Src 8 8 8 5 Prev Sre is f Efo oo o Prev Code is 6 Next Src is 2 Prev Code Prey Code is 17 Next Src is 1 3 Frev Sre sert empty ine S re g OO O OO O elect Open Close write Standard Unao waveform zoom Setting Figure 4A 86 User defined Code Conversion Menu Step 3 Define the codes as desired see Basic Operations on the following page Step 4 Select Go Back to return to the Set Pattern menu Step 5 Define the pattern data using the same procedure as in steps 6 10 of the sample process for defining pattern data Step 6 Press the CURSOR button to select Code menu item A knob icon will appear in the upper left side of the code selection menu Step 7 Turn the general purpose knob to select user defined Step 8 Press O K in the sub menu to execute code conversion The result will be inserted between the cursors on the data line defined in Step 1 Basic Operations Moving the Cursor To move the cursor turn the general purpose knob The cursor can be moved throughout the area where data has already been defined plus one more space From the Source Data Pattern item the cursor moves to the Converted Code item When the cursor reaches the last data item it will return to the beginning The cursor can also be moved using the left and right arrow buttons EDIT Menu Source Data Patte
413. t bulb temperature 40 0 C Altitude Operating To approx 4 5 km 15 000 ft Maximum operating temperature decreases 1 C each 300 m above 1 5 km To approx 15 km 50 000 ft Non operating AWG2040 User Manual B 11 Appendix B Performance Characteristics Environmental Characteristics Characteristics Description Dynamics Vibration Operating Shock 0 33 mmp p 10 to 55 Hz 15 minutes Non operating 294 m s 30 G half sine 11 ms duration Safety Third Party Certification UL1244 CSA C22 2 No 231 IEC 1010 1 Electromagnetic Compatibility United States Meets FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Subpart B Class A Europe Emissions Enclosure EN55022 Class B EN60555 2 Power Line Harmonics and EN55022 Class B AC Main immunity Enclosure IEC 801 3 Electromagnetic Field Radiation 3 V m 27 MHz to 500 MHz IEC 801 2 ESD 8 kV sae AC Main IEC 801 4 1 kVpk 5 50 ns Tr Th 5 KHz Germany Meets Vig243 Installation Requirements Power Consumption A R Fully Loaded 300 watts max Maximum line current is 4 Arms at 50 Hz 90 V line Surge Current 30 A peak for lt 5 line cycies after product has been off for at least 30 s Cooling Clearance Top 7 5 cm 3 inches Side 15 cm 6 inches Rear 7 5 cm 3 inches B 12 Appendix B Performance Characteristics Typical This section will describe the typical characteristics for
414. t by 0 5 Figure 4A 60 Shift with Cursor Point Set to Exclude Snooth t Points When the Cursor Point is Include the points on the left and right vertical bar cursors are interpolated Smooth Points This item specifies the smoothing width with points at the data boundary positions Smoothing is only performed over the points specified for the area around the boundary positions No smoothing is performed if this point is set to zero Points can be set within the range 0 through 20 Smoothing is performed on a specified region without regard for the shitt The smoothing technique used takes the average of the point itself and the two adjacent points three points as the new value of the point Smoothing is performed over regions centered on the end points of the pre shift region and the post shift region respectively and is extended in both directions by the smoothing points 44 78 EDIT Menu Figure 4A 61 shows an example of smoothing The original data appears on the left and the smoothed data is on the right Before Smoothing After Smoothing Figure 4A 61 Smoothing NOTE Since smoothing is equivalent to low pass filtering features of the original waveform can be lost resulting in significant changes to the waveform To acquire appropriate output waveforms experiment with a variety of values for the Smooth Points parameter Side Effects from Shifting The left side of Figure 44 6
415. t of the word MARKER1 and MARKER2 indicates the marker state at the time or point where the active vertical bar cursor is located 3 Button Operations This area shows how the front panel buttons operate in this menu 4A 103 EDIT Menu Setting Standard Waveform 4A 104 Pattern SESS Switch Cursor Pressing the CURSOR button toggles the active vertical bar cursor between left and right CAS Move Cursor When the CURSOR button is pressed the vertical bar cursor can be moved Settings for the Waveform to be Edited Before waveform data is created you must use the Setting item in the side menu to set the environment for editing The method used to set values is the same as for the graphic display See Setting for the Waveform to be Edited for a description of the graphic display Creating Standard Waveform Data Use this item to create waveform data in the area between the designated vertical bar cursors The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Standard Waveform item r Step t Max Min ae m Step RERE Count Down Max Count Up Standard Waveform Gray Code Step i Execute Pattern Types Use this item to select the waveform to be created You can choose from the following three pattern options Count Up Data is created sequentially increasing from the initial value designated with Min to th
416. t this button to cancel the most previous operation for example Execute calculations in the Math sub menu or Marker settings or Cut Paste Insert or other operation Pressing Undo again will cancel the Undo operation and restore the waveform to the status before Undo was pressed O K Select this button to confirm that you really want to perform an operation or to respond to a query when a popup menu has appeared A warning mes sage will appear when it is necessary to confirm an operation in this manner If you are sure you want to execute the operation press this O K button Cancel This button is usually displayed along with the O K button Select it when you want to cancel an operation You may also use the CLEAR MENU bezel button for this purpose Continue This item appears in the side menu when a panel containing an error mes sage appears on the screen or when the Show Catalog Entry or Show Overview command is used to display a waveform in graphic form Pressing this button causes the panel to disappear You may also use the CLEAR MENU bezel button for this purpose General Description AWG2040 User Manual EDIT Menu To use the AWG2040 to output arbitrary waveforms you must first create a file for the waveform to be output There are four file types each created by a different editor Files created in this manner will have an extension after the file name that identifies what type of file they are
417. tem selects the direction in which the waveform data between the vertical bar cursors is to be shifted C Step 3 Select Value from the sub menu o Step 4 Use the general purpose knob or the numeric keys to input the shift point value This value will be expressed as either number of points or time depending on the horizontal unit setting the value set with Horiz Unit under Setting Horizontal shift This command allows you to shift all of the points or time values in the whole editing area it can be set to either a positive or a negative value When the shift value is positive the waveform moves to the right when it is negative the waveform moves to the left Data that protrudes outside the range defined by the vertical bar cursors as a result of shifting is added to the end of either the right or left vertical bar cursor depending on whether the shift value is positive or negative C Step 5 Select Execute from the sub menu The waveform is shifted horizontally with the specified conditions Figure 44 31 shows the waveform between the vertical bar cursors shifted right 128 points AWG2040 User Manual 4A 51 EDIT Menu WEIS Before Figure 4A 31 Horizontally Shifted Display Vertical shift Vertical C Step 6 Press the Shift button in the sub menu to select Vertical g Step 7 Select Value from the sub menu Use the general purpose knob or the numeric keys to input the shift point value e V
418. tems and characters You can use these items to create equations and enter comments ee To display the other page of the menu press Word Table in the side menu 2oF2 under Operation Figure 4A 103 shows the two pages of the component menu TAT cos exp integ nor r word Table fat Figure 4A 103 Component Menu AWG2040 User Manual 4A 149 EDIT Menu 44 150 Syntax Items These are parentheses and for specifying the order of opera tions Each opening left parenthesis must be paired with a closing right parenthesis When there are two arguments for example range max min they are separated with a comma Variables Here are the variables that can be used in an equation t Time from the head of that range statement x Variable taking on a value from 0 0 to 1 0 within that range statement v Variable showing the current value of the waveform data at that position Operators 57 yea These add subtract multiply or divide the components The priorities are the same as usual for these four operators and have priority over and A Expresses exponents Only integers can be raised to a higher power has the same priority as and Therefore parentheses are required to give priority to multiplication Example pi 2 3 x where 2 3 two raised to the third power Comment Comments are preceded
419. the SETUP menu with the file GAUSS_P WFM selected ninuaus mode Running EEOSE f Waveform sequ Ehi wa Lo Period 25608 bonen Points 256 Max 8 5000 309 f Hin 0 5000V 509Q Fitter Amplitude Offset arker GEES bevel Terb Figure 2 20 GAUSS_PWFM File Output Parameters AWG2040 User Manual Operating Examples NOTE The selected file is locked Therefore although changes can be made to the waveform clock filter amplitude offset and other output conditions these changes cannot be saved to the file MODE C Step 11 Press the MENU column MODE button The MODE menu is displayed The files selected from the SETUP menu are displayed in the MODE menu GPIB Continuous made Running CHI Waveform Triggered Gated Burst Autostep Slave Figure 2 21 MODE Menu cont C Step 12 Select Cont from the bottom menu When Cont is selected the waveform is continuously output Waveform Output oO Step 13 Connect this instrument and the oscilloscope with a 50Q cable and a 50Q termination as shown in Figure 2 22 This instrument s wave form output is calibrated to a 50Q load 2 32 Operating Examples CH1 AWG2040 User Manual AWG2040 Oscilloscope PAET mi a leo S Let 000 CH1 500 Termination 50N C
420. the file The file name in the upper left of the screen has not yet been assigned so it is extension Editing an Existing File at To edit an existing file select Edit and perform the following steps Procedure Cc Step 1 Press the EDIT button in the MENU column to display the initial menu oO Step 2 Turn the general purpose knob to select a file from the internal memory file list displayed in the initial menu C1 Step 3 Select Edit from the side menu The system automatically enters the editor appropriate for the file type extension so the selected file can be edited AWG2040 User Manual 4A 7 EDIT Menu Rename 4A 8 Using File Editing Functions The following operations can be performed for the file that has been created a Rename Renaming a file Comment Comment input m Copy Copying a file Delete Deleting a file NOTE When the file is locked indicated by an asterisk displayed in front of the file name it is not possible to change the file name enter a comment or delete the file See Locking and Unlocking Files in this section Renaming a File The Rename item is used to change a file name Procedure oO Step 1 Use the general purpose knob to select the file to be renamed from the initial menu file list CO Step 2 Select Rename from the bottom menu The menu for changing the file name is displayed See Figure 4A 3 GPIB Cantinuous mode f Catalog Memory Fr
421. the following substeps to verify passing of internal adjustments a Display the calibration menu Push UTILITY Diag Cal Calibra tion See the menu in Figure E 2 The list on the left shows the tests available for calibration You can select only the Setup CH1 test GPIB pagea Diagnostics Al Test Front Panel Execute cn a i Tn pa fo 3 i Disk N Ram GPIB RS232C i Date Time Misc Diag Cal y Figure E 2 Calibration Menu 5 Self Tests E 6 b Run the adjustments routine Select Execute from the side menu This executes the AWG2040 calibration routines automatically c Wait The internal calibration does an exhaustive verification of proper AWG2040 function While this verification progresses the clock icon appears on screen When finished the resulting status will appear on the screen d Confirm that no failures are found Verify that no failures are found and reported on screen If the calibration displays FAIL as the result consult a qualified service technician for further assistance 2 Return to regular service Push any button other than UTILITY in the MENU column to exit the calibration menu NOTE When the AWG2040 is powered off while the calibrations is executed the calibration data in the memory may be loss Performance Tests This subsection contains a series of procedures for checking that the AWG2040 Arb
422. the left and right respectively to encompass the entire editing area If they are not use the general purpose knob to set them in this manner Step 4 Press the Type button in the side menu and select Sine g Step 5 Select Cycle from the side menu Use the numeric keys or the general purpose knob to set the number of cycles for the sine wave to 2 oO Step 6 Select Amplitude from the side menu Use the numeric keys or the general purpose knob to set the p p amplitude for the sine wave tol C Step 7 Select Execute from the side menu When Execute is selected the sine waveform is created between the vertical bar cursors with the set parameters See Figure 4A 23 EDIT Menu niisuous mode t Copy to Buffer Setting Figure 4A 23 Creating a Sine Wave Procedure 2 Adding a Waveform to Existing Data in this example you will add noise to the sine wave you created in Proce dure 1 The procedure starts from where you left off in Procedure 1 o Step 1 Select Type from the side menu Turn the general purpose knob or press the Type button in the side menu and select Add Noise g Step 2 Select Amplitude from the side menu Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob set the p p amplitude for the noise to 0 1 C Step 3 Select Execute from the side menu When you select Execute a noise waveform will be added to the sine wave displayed between the left and right vertical bar cursors S
423. the number of the page on which you can find a description of that function s CRT Display This shows a typical screen for that menu and a brief explanation Description This section gives a detailed explanation of the functions in each menu It includes examples with step by step instructions showing how the function is used Menu items in the text are shown in a bold typeface Menu Items Available With Each Editing Function Menu items for the bottom and side sub menus are shown with the words enclosed as shown below to make them easy to distinguish from one another Bottom Menu Side Menu or Sub Menu AWG2040 User Manual 4 1 Introduction More tots H Go Back i Execute g Undo 4 Cancel Continue a d More When the side menu consists of two or more pages this item is used to display the next page In the example shown at left the side menu being displayed consists of three pages and the first page is currently being displayed Go Back This item is displayed when you select a side menu item that has a sub menu It allows you to escape from the sub menu and return to the side menu level The CLEAR MENU bezel button can also be used for this purpose Execute Select this button to execute the currently selected menu function For example in the Draw menu pressing this button will cause the waveform to be drawn in the Shift menu it will cause the waveform to move Undo Selec
424. the waveform for the Overview created or edited sequence file Procedure C Step 1 Select Show Overview from the bottom menu The waveform will be displayed together with such information as the voltage indicated by the vertical axis the waveform point count and the clock frequency Figure 44 127 shows an example of a waveform dis play with the Show Overview item selected GPIB iggered mode Stepped File Name Show Line i i Overview omtinue peration 1 oe I Operation i Figure 4A 127 Example of CRT Display When Show Overview is Selected C Step 2 After observing the waveform select Continue Operation from the side menu to return to the sequence editor AWG2040 User Manual 4A 175 EDIT Menu Autostep Editor 4A 176 Use the autostep editor to edit files with the extension of AST Autostep files are created by programming waveforms or sequence files Files created with the autostep editor are started up using Autostep in the MODE menu Each time an autostep signal is received the waveform changes to the next waveform in line with the program The waveform is output when a trigger signal is received Each waveform or sequence file contains the output conditions that have been set for that file so the output conditions can be changed for each waveform At this point of time it is not possible to change the output parameters in the
425. these procedures read Overview and Basic Menu Operation in section 2 of this manual These instructions describe the AWG2040 front panel controls and menu system Throughout the procedures in this section the following conventions apply Each test procedure uses the following general format a Title of Test Equipment Required m Prerequisites m Procedure Appendix E Performance Verification Procedure a Each procedure consists of as many steps substeps and subparts as required to do the test Steps substeps and subparts are sequenced as follows 1 First Step a First Substep a First Subpart w Second Subpart b Second Substep 2 Second Step Instructions for menu selection follow this format FRONT PANEL BUT TON Main Menu Button Side Menu Button For example Press UTILITY Misc Config Reset to Factory gt 0 K m Where instructed to use a front panel button key or knob or select from the MENU column or from a bottom or side menu the name of the item appears in boldface type push MODE or select Triggered in the bottom menu E 2 Diagnostics AWG2040 User Manual Self Tests This subsection describes how to use AWG2040 internai self test routines No equipment is required to do these procedures The self tests include these internal routines a Diagnostics This self test procedure uses internal routines to verify that the AWG2040 functions and passes the int
426. this instrument through a GPIB cable To transfer waveform data through the GPIB interface the remote port must be set to GPIB and the GPIB operating mode must be set to Waveform Transfer If this is not done the following message will appear when you select the GPIB item The GPIB configuration is not Waveform Transfer and the Remote Port is not GPIB to match the transfer operation Are you sure of changing the parameters x aenal Selecting O K in the sub menu at this point will cause the remote por to be set to the GPIB interface and the GPIB operating mode to be set to Wave form Transfer automatically Table 4D 2 shows a list of instruments for which direct transfer of waveform data to this instrument is supported LOAD SAVE Menu Table 4D 2 Supported Instruments Manufacturer Model Tektronix TDS Series Digital Storage Oscilloscope TDS300 Series TDS400 Series TDS500 A Series TDS600 A Series 2400 Series Digital Storage Oscilloscope 2430 A 2432 2440 2200 Series Digital Storage Oscilloscope 2212 2221A 2224 2232 11K Series Digital Storage Oscilloscope 41201 A 11401 11402 A 11403 A DSA Series Digitizing Analyzer DSA601 A DSA602 A RTD720 Waveform Digitizer 9500 Series First Data Cache 9503 9504 Use together with RTD710 A Sony Tektronix gi RTD710 Series Waveform Digitizer RTD710 A TAwG 2000 Series Arbitrary Waveform Generator AWG2005 AWG2020
427. tination is indicated with an arrow oO Step 4 Select Execute from the sub menu The data is copied with the specified conditions Figure 44 89 shows the screen before and after the section of waveform data between the vertical bar cursors on line DATA 0 is copied to line DATA 7 Figure 44 89 Copying Lines g Step 5 Select Go Back from the current sub menu The display returns from the Copy Line sub menu to the previous side menu EDIT Menu Exchanging Lines Exchange Use Exchange Line to take the data between the designated vertical bar iets cursors on one line and interchange it with the data on another line The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Exchange Line item Source i Destination Operation More 2 of 3 Exchange tne E Go Back Execute Procedure C Step 1 Move the vertical bar cursors to define the section of the data to be exchanged Then select Exchange Line from the second page of the side menu More 2 of 3 oO Step 2 Select Source from the sub menu Turning the general purpose knob select one of the data lines or marker for data interchange oO Step 3 Select Destination from the sub menu Turning the general purpose knob select the other data line or marker for data interchange C Step 4 Select Execute from the sub menu The data will be exchanged as designated Figure 4A 90 shows th
428. tion of the clock generator Frequenc ete CLOCK IN Reference Oscillator Clock Output Figure 3 3 Clock Generator Trigger Control AWG2040 User Manual In trigger control the operating mode in the MODE menu on the AWG2040 is controlled The signal for the selected clock source is input to this block Normally the output for the clock generator is used Operations in Trigger Mode Depending on which trigger mode is selected the following operations are possible Cont Mode The clock signal is sent to the memory address control continuously regard less of whether or not there is a trigger signal Block Diagram Triggered and Burst Modes When an external trigger signal is received from the TRIGGER INPUT connector on the front panel or when a trigger signal is generated by press ing the MANUAL button on the front panel or when a trigger command is entered from the GPIB interface the clock signal is sent to the memory address control and an output signal synchronous with the trigger signal is generated The clock signal stops at the end of the waveform Gated Mode A clock signal is sent continuously to the memory address control while the gate signal either the external gate signal from the TRIGGER INPUT con nector on the front panel or the signal sent when the MANUAL button on the front panel is pressed is TRUE Parallel Operation When output of two or more channels is required there are two wa
429. tion edit menu C Step 8 Select Exit Write from the bottom menu C Step 9 Select Write and Exit from the side menu g Step 10 Make SAMPLE 4 the file name For details on how to input the file name see Step 24 in Example 3 in Creating a waveform file C Step 11 When you are finished inputting the file name select O K from the sub menu The equation file GAMPLE 4 EQU and the waveform file SAM PLE 4 WFM of compiled data with the same name are created and the system returns to the initial menu See Figure 2 40 2 49 Operating Examples GPIB apped Free 3854K8 Comment Catalog Memory New Waveform i New Equation New Sequence More tof2 i l T Lock Rename comment Copy Delete i Delete All on Figure 2 40 Initial Menu File List 2 50 Operating Examples Creating a Sequence File In this procedure you will create a sequence file that combines two files the waveform file created with the waveform editor SAMPLE 1 WFM and the waveform file created with the equation editor and then compiled SAM PLE 4 WFM New Cl Step 1 Select New Sequence from the side menu Sequence Figure 2 41 shows the sequence editor menu CPI Continuous mode Stepped File Name i eetasers Line i i Catalog li Cut Line capy to Buffer
430. tion generator controls Function Mode Parameter Frequency Amplitude Offset Output CH1 DC 0 2 V div 502 500 us div CH1 DC Positive 100 mV Normal Square Continuous 1 Hz 4 0V 2 0V Off 2 Set the AWG2040 controls and select the waveform file a Initialize AWG2040 controls Push UTILITY Misc Config gt Reset to Factory0 K b Modify AWG2040 default settings Push MODE Autostep Slope to highlight Negative a Push Config from the side menu to display its sub menu m Push Run from the sub menu to highlight the Continuous Select Select Autostep File from the sub menu to choose trom the file list for CH1 m Turn the general purpose knob to highlight the MODE_AST AST file a Push O K 3 Turn on the AWG2040 CH1 output Push the CH1 button so that the LED above the CH1 output connector is on 4 Check autostep mode with external triggering Turn the function generator output on a Check that the oscilloscope alternately displays two different frequency sine waves with periods of 1 ms and 0 5 ms 5 End procedure Turn the function generator output off and disconnect the function generator and oscilloscope E 2 Performance Tests E 24 Check Slave Mode This procedure checks AWG2040 operation of the slave mode NOTE This Slave Operation check has been factory verified The check is performed only as necessary Electrical Characteristic
431. to any value between 2x and 10x 0 Step 3 Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob set the degree of expansion C Step 4 Select Execute from the sub menu The section of the wave form between the vertical bar cursors will be expanded to the desig nated degree and the waveform point size will increase accordingly Figure 4A 91 shows the screen before and after the data between the vertical bar cursors is expanded by a factor of 2 wR Ba MARKERTE WARKERZE i AKER Before Figure 44 91 Expanding Waveform Data ee C Step 5 Select Go Back from the current sub menu The display returns from the Data Expand sub menu to the previous side menu AWG2040 User Manual 4A 125 EDIT Menu Operation More 3 of 3 Shift Register __ le insert Other Waveform Shift Register Generator Register Config Inserting Other Waveform Data Use Insert Other Waveform to insert data from another waveform at a designated point in the waveform being edited This item is located on the third page More 3 of 3 of the side menu The functions of this item are the same as for the Insert Other Waveform item for the graphic display of the waveform editor See Page 4A 62 Pseudo Random Pulse Generator Using Shift Register Use Shift Register Generator to set a pseudo random pulse pattern using a shift register for the data between the designated verti
432. to talk listen and also the general pur pose knob and the numeric keys set the GPIB address for this instrument The GPIB address setting range is 0 30 Other devices on the bus cannot use the address number allocated to this instrument Waveform Transfer Select Waveform Transfer mode to download waveform data In this mode waveform data does not go through the controller it is downloaded directly to the internal memory of the instrument from a digital storage oscilloscope or other instrument See Table 4D 2 in Section 4D LOAD SAVE menu for a list of supported instruments Actual waveform transfer is performed using the LOAD SAVE menu See Page 4D 12 Talk Only Select Talk Only to output a hard copy of the waveform data When the Port setting is GPIB UTILITY menu Misc bottom menu gt Hardcopy side menu gt Port sub menu pressing the HARDCOPY button on the front panel causes a hard copy of the waveform to be output Off Bus Select Off Bus to disconnect the AWG2040 from the GPIB bus UTILITY Menu RS232C AWG2040 User Manual RS 232 C Use the RS 232 C interface on the rear panel to allow remote control by a host computer These are simple descriptions of the RS 232 C connection and RS 232 C parameter setting For further details see the AWG2040 Programmer Manual RS 232 C Connection To select the RS 232 C port select RS232C for Remote Port UTILITY menu Mise bottom menu gt Confi
433. triggered by an GPIB external or manual trigger then generates a waveform or sequence up to 65536 times Gated Same as Continuous mode except waveforms or sequences are output for the duration of the gated signal Waveform Advance Output quiescent until triggered by an GPIB external or manual trigger then generates the waveform sequence in the sequence file one time and waits the trigger for the next waveform output Autostep Output quiescent until triggered by an GPIB external or manual trigger then generates the waveform sequence in the autostep file When an auto step signal is received from the rear panel or the command is given manu ally the instrument moves to the next waveform or sequence waveform in the autostep file The output parameters amplitude offset etc are changed Slave Receive the master clock signal higher than 650 MHz from the Master AWG2040 for the parallel operation Filters Low pass filter with Bessel characteristics 100 MHz 50 MHz 20 MHz 10 MHz AWG2040 User Manual B 2 Appendix B Performance Characteristics Electrical Characteristics Characteristics Description Auxiliary Output MARKER Level 2 0 V to 2 0 V into 50 Q Hi Lo Resolution 0 10 V Number of Marker 2 Connector BNC BUSY Level Positive polarity TTL puise Output Resistance 51Q Connector SMB SYNC Level Positive polarity TTL pulse Output Resistance 510 Connector SMB SYNC Level 10
434. ts When Key Data is set to 4 Bits a hexadecimal number 4 bit data is entered each time one of the numeric keys is pressed In the diagram shown below numeric key values of 0 1 and 2 have been entered in that order 8006 OC key 800T ST key 0010 T key 0 E key 1 7F key 44 110 EDIT Menu Point Step Point Step is used to set how many points make up pattern data per bit The data per bit after Code conversion will be one item of pattern data For example when NRZ is selected for Code and Point Step is set to 2 each pattern will consist of 2 points To set the point size for each item of pattern data press the CURSOR button on the front panel and then select Point Step A knob icon will ap pear to the left of the Point Step area Q Point Step ee Pattern Code Code is used to select the coding system used when the pattern strings are output Depending on the designated length of the area between the vertical bar cursors the code may be cut off in the middle To select the code use the following procedure Procedure g Step 1 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel and select Code A knob icon will appear in the upper left hand corner of the Code area Code o Step 2 Using the general purpose knob select the desired code from the choices listed The following 8 code options are available NRZ NRZI RZ MFM BI PHASE f 2t 1 7 RLL 2 7 RLL user defined The user defined code
435. tting waveform point count 4A 162 Compile Compiling equations into waveform data 4A 163 Undo Undoing the previous operation 4 2 Exit Write Saving files and exiting the editor 4A 21 4A 142 4A 144 EDIT Menu Equation Editor Menu Display Figure 4A 101 shows the general equation editor display A description for each callout follows Stopped E SQUARE 0 Penra a Operation Be eapi Malis pi sxj 1 38s In Seep jsx 41 3 in Sezsp i x x Pp ed A pe ured Se 1 1138 ini ts2epiex Cut Line Wet T3 S IC1Sa dep Lan 1 Sas ing Seep bax Copy to Buffer Paste i from Buffer woe _ i a cosC expe k J pi x t d H gt l Leg int sarti x t v maxed ming rangel Y randi inti insert L reli markt ditfilintegi EHER Setting Compile write i Figure 4A 101 Equation Editor CRT Display 1 File Name This is the name of the file being edited If the file has not been named yet the display is EQU 2 Line This is the line number of the equation or range displayed inverted within the equation list 3 Equation List An equation list contains two components equations and a range for which the equations apply The equation is input from the component menu with the numeric keys or unit keys AWG2040 User Manual 4A 145 EDIT Menu 4A 146 4 Component Menu The c
436. ude can be set to any value between 0 020 V and 2 000 V in minimum increments of 1 mV NOTE The amplitude set gives the top and bottom voltage values for the waveform editor full scale in the waveform display area not the peak to peak value of the waveform Setting Offset Procedure C Step 1 Select Offset from the bottom menu The offset icon will be highlighted on the screen oO Step 2 Use the numeric keys or the general purpose knob to set the desired offset The offset may be set to any value between 1 000 V and 1 000 V in minimum increments of 1 mV 4B 13 SETUP Menu Setting Marker Level Marker Level There are two markers Markeri and Marker2 Each of these can be set to either High and Low level These voltages are values terminated with 509 For information on marker settings see the section on the waveform editor In the case of graphic display these values are set with Operation bottom menu Marker sub menu In the case of Timing display these values are set with Operation bottom menu Set sub menu Line In the case of table display they are set with the cursor and the numeric keys Procedure C Step 1 Select Marker Level from the bottom menu C Step 2 Select Markeri High from the side menu The Marker1 icon will be highlighted on the screen E Step 3 Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob set the Markert High level This value can be set a
437. uffer Paste from Buffer m Add Draw Point Draw Delete Draw Point Smooth f m Shift Shift Value m Scale r Factor Scale New Size 2 Origin 2 I Invert Invert A Clip Hip oe Level r Set High Marker SetLow Set Pattern H Insert Other Waveform Show Catalog Entry H Single Waveform Math Type m Add Sub Dual Waveform Math Mul Show Catalog Entry p 4 Source Multiple Copy Interval Convolute 1 Source P Source Compare t M Hysteresis t Set Result to tl ttt tnt 4A 27 EDIT Menu 4A 28 Bottom Menu Side Menu Sub Menu r Operation mee r Type Region Shift _ _ _ Shift Scale Value m Horizontal Zoom in Config Horizontal Zoom out Horizontal Zoom fit 3 Horizontal Pan 3 H Zoom H Vertical Zoom in Vertical Zoom out 4 M Vertical Zoom fit 4 Vertical Pan 4 Waveform Points View type Timing Table Horiz Unit t Setting 5 Glock r Waveformx H Cursor Link to 1 _ Waveformxx Link Off w Grid m Undo m Type pos 6 Standard gt cle 6 Waveform Toqueney Amplitude t Offset r Write and Close Close Write Close without Writing Write Figure 4A 17 Waveform Editor Graphic Display Menu Structure 4 2 3 4 5 6
438. ulations are performed Figure 4A 44 Waveform Example before Calculation AWG2040 User Manual 4A 65 EDIT Menu C Step 2 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel Oo Step 3 Using the general purpose knob move the left and right vertical bar cursors to define the area for calculation C Step 4 Select Single Waveform Math from the third page of the side menu More 3 of 3 oO Step 5 Press the Type button in the sub menu and select Absolute C Step 6 Select Execute from the sub menu The absolute value will be derived for the section of the waveform between the vertical bar cursors Figure 4A 45 shows the waveform after calculation Figure 44 45 Absolute Calculation oO Step 7 Select Go Back from the sub menu The display returns from the Single Waveform Math sub menu to the side menu 4A 66 EDIT Menu The following diagrams show examples of a waveform before and after various calculations are performed Square Doubles the absolute value for the amplitude Before After Figure 4A 46 Square Calculation Cube Triples the amplitude Before After Figure 4A 47 Cube Calculation AWG2040 User Manual 4A 67 EDIT Menu Square Root Determines the square root for the absolute value of the amplitude fPstkessad E 4324 pis Before After Figure 4A 48 Square Root Calculation Normalize Normalizes the amplitude B
439. ults are displayed on the CRT screen The display returns to the menu on display before Dual Waveform Math was selected Fig ure 4A 55 displays the waveforms added Add between the vertical bar cursors 1 0670 MARKERT T 4 parenz l Figure 4A 55 Waveform Addition Display if you select Cancel the menu returns to the menu on display before Dual Waveform Math was selected without any calculations being made Data placed into the paste buffer with Cut or Copy is listed at the top of the file list with the name Paste Buffer When this item is selected an opera tion is carried out with the data in the paste buffer 44 72 EDIT Menu Specified Region Shift Region The Region Shift item shifts a user specified region of a waveform in one Shift of the following ways m Right or left w Expand out from the center a Compress in toward the center If the specified amount of the shift is less than the sampling interval the original waveform is resampled using data interpolation to derive the shifted values The Region Shift item has the following menu configuration Right e yoe z Left ie Expand Compress Shift Scale Value Interpolation E Ae Operation More 4 of 4 Region Shift Add Data Value l Replace pe OM aT Exclude xt Cursor Point __ Include Go Back j Go Back L Execute Smooth Points Table
440. unter clockwise with a screwdriver while pushing it in See Figure 1 1 for the fuse location There are two types o fuses that may be used Here are the fuse types and ratings Fuse Part Fuse Cap Part Fuse Number Number 25 inch x 1 25 inch UL 198G 3AG 159 0239 00 200 2264 00 6A FAST 250 V 5 mm x 20 mm IEC 127 5A 1 159 0210 00 200 2265 00 250 V pamanna NOTE The second fuse listed in the table above is approved under the IEC standards This fuse is used in equipment sold in the European market ag Step 4 Check that you have the proper electrical connections The AWG2040 operates at the following power supply voltage Line Voltage Range 90 V 250 V Line Frequency 48 Hz 440 Hz 90 V 127 V 48 Hz 63 Hz 127 V 250 V Maximum Power 300 W Instruments are shipped with a power cord appropriate for use with normal 115 V power systems If the AWG2040 is to be used with 230 V power it must be replaced with one appropriate for the power source used See Figure 1 2 Optional Power Cords for the available power cord types Ol Step 5 Connect the proper power cord from the rear panel power connector to the power system Start Up Q Step 6 Push the PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH shown in Figure 1 1 on the rear panel of this instrument Power is now applied to the standby circuit of this instrument Power On Power Connector
441. ure 1 3 ON STBY Switch 0000 000 scee ence eee eer e neces 1 7 Figure 2 1 Front Panel Overall View es seer eeer ee eees 2 3 Figure 2 2 Front Panel Button Detail see seers renee 2 5 Figure 2 3 Side Panel crrrr cece nent ees 2 9 Figure 2 4 Rear Panel Overall View sees eee en ees 2 10 Figure 2 5 Rear Panel Detail 6 serene eee 2 11 Figure 2 6 CRT Display 6 06s eres eee reet 2 13 Figure 2 7 Menu Buttons and Bezel Buttons 2 15 Figure 2 8 Numeric Input Using Numeric Keys 2 17 Figure 2 9 Numeric Keys Unit Keys Delete Key and ENTER Key 2 0 0 0 00 c ee cece ce ere erect eee ent e eens 2 18 Figure 2 10 General Purpose Knob and Arrow Buttons 2 20 Figure 2 11 Knob Icon and Underscore 2 seers eres 2 20 Figure 2 12 Menu Display showing Date Time item selected 2 24 Figure 2 13 Date Time Display 05 seer e reer neers 2 25 Figure 2 14 Setting the Display Brightness 2 26 Figure 2 15 inserting the Floppy Disk 20 6 sees ee eee ee 2 27 Figure 2 16 Sample Waveform Library Disk Files 2 28 Figure 2 17 CRT Screen Display When Load All is Selected 2 29 Figure 2 18 SETUP Menu 5 6 cee eee eee t een eens 2 30 Figure 2 19 Waveform File List 2 20 sess renee eee 2 31 Figure 2 20 GAUSS_PWFM File Output Parameters 2 31 Figure 2 21 MODE Menu
442. ure 2 65 Screen When Pulse Set channel i Ney CHI sine AWG2040 User Manual 2 7 Operating Examples Frequency es 1 Mig ass a CRD 1 000000MHz Amplitude Offset Buty Polarity Jt Normal WF invert 2 76 Set the frequency to 1 MHz O Step 3 Select Frequency from the side menu oO Step 4 Press 1 and the MHz us key to input the frequency with the numeric keys and unit key O Step 5 To set the frequency with the general purpose knob select the index digit for input with the arrow buttons on the front panel Press the button to move the underscore to the left or press the button to move the underscore to the right Turn the general purpose knob with the index digit selected to get a 1 MHz frequency You will set the amplitude to 1 V the offset to 0 5 V and the duty ratio to 30 C Step 6 Select Amplitude from the side menu Use the general purpose knob or numeric keys to set an amplitude of 1 000 V C Step 7 Select Offset from the side menu Use the general purpose knob or numeric keys to set an offset of 0 500 V C Step 8 Select Duty from the side menu Use the general purpose knob or numeric keys to set a duty ratio of 30 When using the numeric keys press 3 0 and ENTER in that order g Step 9 Check that when you press the Polarity button in the side menu the polarity toggles between Normal and Invert and the polarity of the pulse wave on the sc
443. utton on the front panel and select Cursor Position A knob icon will appear to the left of the Cursor Position area The value next to Cursor Position in the menu indicates the current position of the cursor Pattern Length 60 Ramat bright Postion 22 ENEN 9011010001010110011110001901181010111100 AWG2040 User Manual 4A 109 EDIT Menu Now you can use the numeric keys to enter the pattern data Any value up to 32 768 bits can be entered for pattern data However only 40 bits can be displayed on the screen at one time use the general purpose knob to scroll through the rest of the data The inverted display area in the Pattern Length area indicates the portion of the pattern data currently being displayed on the screen Pattern length indicates the length of the pattern data that has been en tered This value will increase each time more pattern data is entered Changing the Data Bits Key ae When entering pattern data you can enter data either 1 bit at a time for 4 Bits each keystroke or 4 bits at a time depending on the setting for Key Data in the side menu Key Data 1 Bit When Key Data is set to 1 Bit the 0 key has a value of 0 and the other numeric keys have a value of 1 meaning that 1 bit data is inserted each time one of these keys is pressed In the diagram shown below numeric key values of 0 1 0 and 1 have been entered in that order yee Poson f aior 2 o key 1 other Numeric key Key Data 4 Bi
444. value for the output pattern Affects output data when the Source Data Pattern is 2 and 3 when 2 is used for Converted Code and when Out 1 0 is set to Invert Keep Determines the handling of 1 0 for data converted using Converted Code High Low 1 data HIGH 0 data LOW Invert Keep 1 output is inverted 0 data is output as is Sample Conversion 1 When Source Data Pattern is unaffected by other conditions Intial Sr 0 Initial Code 0 Out 1 0 High Low EDIT Menu Source Data Pattern Converted Code In the case of the above conversion the data will be as follows ee leon a ele ee a Oe Da ee FB Ga eM a ER a et a a Position Source Data Pattern Converted Code Result NOTE 1 3 of 30 in pattern 11 starting from position 0 is the inverse of the 0 in the Source Data Pattern at position 1 2 2 of 20 in pattern 10 starting from position 4 is the inverse of result 1 at position 3 3 2 of 20 in pattern 10 starting from position 6 is the inverse of result 0 at position 5 When Out 1 0 is set to invert Keep for the same tsble the data will be as follows Result 2 When Source Data Pattern is affected by other conditions u lf 4 and 5 are used Intial Sr 0 Initial Code 0 Out 1 0 High Low AWG2040 User Manual 4A 117 EDIT Menu Source Data Pattern Converted Code Pattern If 6 and 7 are used 1 intial Sr 0 Initial Code 0 Out 1 0 High Low Sou
445. value that can be set if an attempt is made to transfer a waveform that exceeds any of these ranges a message to that effect is dis played If Load Without Preamble in the side menu is selected the waveform preamble will not be loaded in other words only the waveform data will be loaded In such cases all parameters will be set to their default values This completes the Example 5 Operating Examples wud i The instrument is equipped with a waveform function generator for generat Examp eo Using NEn a l form functi Pressing the F G butt the front ing simple waveform functions Pressing the F on on the front pane Waveform Function will change the mode to function generator FG mode and enable you to Generator set various waveform parameters In Example 6 select pulse wave and set the following parameters Frequency 1 MHz Amplitude 1V Offset 0 5 Duty ratio 30 FG C C Step 1 Press the front panel F G Function Generator button The FG mode menu is displayed Waveform Settings is CI Step 2 Select Pulse from the bottom menu Putse Figure 2 65 shows a pulse waveform displayed within the frame on the screen Continuous mode Running i Pulse CHI 0 50004 ae Amplitude 1 0007 i Offset i 6 0004 i i i i i 0 5000V Polarity Period 56 i Orestes acs eect E A 5 xT Toa i triangle Square Ramp DORES Fig
446. ven below Binary 8 bit waveform data is created using the 0 or 1 numeric keys Hexadecimal Waveform data is created using the 0 9 and A F numeric keys When the cardinal numbers are changed to Hexadeci mal numeric keys and unit keys are allocated to A F Real The data is input as with regular number input by pressing numeric keys then pressing the ENTER key to enter the number Any real number Real up to the vertical axis full scale can be entered in the graphic display The markers are displayed in binary notation even when the cardinal num bers are set to Hexadecimal or Real Procedure C Step 1 Select Setting from the bottom menu oO Step 2 Select Radix from the second page of the side menu More 2 of 2 oO Step 3 Select the desired cardinal number Binary Hexadecimal or Real from the sub menu Figure 4A 98 shows how the same waveform data is displayed in each of the cardinal numbers 4A 137 EDIT Menu Binary Hexadecimal Real DSTA MARKER POINT INDEX DATA MARKER POINT INDEX DATA MARKER POINT HABE y 2S G 7ER OY 429 1181 4881 88 129 D 98 129 0 7087 89 138 1181 1618 968 136 Da 88 138 7s 88 131 1101 1616 og 121 DA 8G 131 8 7165 86 1320 1161 1811 ge 132 BB og 132 0 7244 60 133 1101 1100 490 133 OC o 133 6 7323 09 134 119i 1180 99 134 D ge 134 0 7323 08 135 H81 HA Bg 135 D 8e 135 0742 08 136 1181 1167 00 136 D 08 136 0 7492 69 137 110111190 98 137 DE 08 137 0 7480 06
447. vice into the instrument s internal memory when the power to this instrument is turned on You can do this with the following procedure Auto Load C Step 11 Select Auto Load from the bottom menu ml C Step 12 Select from NVRam from the side menu from NYRam ON STBY i C Step 13 Power the instrument off then on again Check to make sure that the designated files were loaded from the NVRam to the internal memory when the power to this instrument was turned on This completes the Example 4 AWG2040 User Manual 2 69 Operating Examples 2 70 Also note that files are loaded saved in the same manner when the Device is set to Disk For a floppy disk hierarchical file structures can be created using directories See the explanation in Using the Disk Menu in Section 4E UTILITY Menu NOTE You must format new floppy disks For further information on format ting disk see the explanation in Using the Disk Menu in Section 4E UTILITY Menu Operating Examples Example 5 Loading Waveforms From Other Instruments This instrument can transfer waveforms via a GPIB cable from a digital storage oscilloscope DSO etc See page 4D 7 for a list of instruments from which waveforms can be transferred in Example 5 you will transfer waveforms from a Tektronix TDS series digital storage oscilloscope C Step 1 Connect the AWG2040 and the other instruments as shown in Figure 2 61
448. waveforms These examples are designed to help you gain a basic understanding of the instrument Overview The instrument can be divided into three main areas the front panel the rear panel and the side panel In this section we will list the names and functions of the parts in each of these areas We will also list typical display messages that appear on the screen and what they mean Front Panel Refer to Fig 2 2 1 2 9 r ae AWG2040__arertiuny WAVEF RM GENERATOR j MeN OseTue QCURSOR OVALUE HARDCOPY O MODE oO O cor mes Wo a OWS e 0 oO Cif Gls alae 5 A 0 OCHi 5 OCHS OCH Cc MARKER 1 MARKER 2 seman ei i i IOLOlOjO I oO o iv LEAR Figure 2 1 Front Panel Overall View AWG2040 User Manual Overview 1 Bottom Buttons Use the seven bottom buttons to display corresponding menus Pressing any button in the MENU column or the F G button displays its correspond ing menu These menus are generally the highest level menus 2 Side Buttons Use the five side buttons to select the side menus displayed on the right side of the screen Selecting any item from bottom menu displays a side menu The side menu is generally a lower level menu 3 MARKER 1 and MARKER 2 Output Connectors These provide the user s
449. waveforms and output parameters that are currently set in the SETUP menu at the current step Jumping to a Step Use Jump in the bottom menu to go quickly to a certain step in the autostep program Using the items in the side menu you can jump to the first step the last step or to any step in between Step No Used to move to a step other than the first or last step Use the numeric keys or the general purpose knob to enter the number of the desired step To First Step Used to move to the first step To Last Step Used to move to the last step AWG2040 User Manual 4A 191 EDIT Menu Split Join Waveform Editor Split f Join waveform Exit The waveform editor on the AWG2040 can edit waveforms of up to 256 K words The instrument has a 1 M word waveform memory 4 M word when Option 01 is installed so when editing waveforms larger than 256 K words you must use the split join waveform editor to remove the part to be edited or divide the waveform into editable sections The split join waveform editor is used to edit waveform files those with the extention WFM The editor is used to perform the following actions Divide a file into several smaller files Copy or cut a certain range from the file data and create a new file using the data that has been removed Insert data from one file into another file and create a new file Entering the Split Join Waveform Editor Use the split join waveform
450. will be replaced by the Count Up pattern that you have designated Figure 4A 81 shows the Count Up pattern created with the values used in this example EDIT Menu Editing Waveform in Timing Display Operation Use Operation to edit the waveform data in a variety of ways The side menu is made up of 3 pages To get to the next page of the menu select More The following list shows the names and functions of the items in the side menu w Cut Cutting waveform Copy to Buffer Copying waveform m Paste from Buffer Pasting waveform m Set Setting waveform data w Shift Shifting waveform data a Invert Inverting waveform data a Copy Line Copying lines s Exchange Line Exchanging lines a Logical Function Applying logical operations to lines Data Expand Expanding waveform data Insert Other Waveform Inserting other waveform data a Shift Register Generator Pseudo random pulse generator using shift register Cut Copy and Paste Processing Function cur Copy Use these functions cut copy to the buffer and paste to any other time or fo Gutler point value within the waveform data area between the vertical bar cursors The functions for these items are the same as for the corresponding items in Paste waveform editor graphic display See Pages 4A 45 to 4A 46 from Buffer Setting Waveform Data Set Use Set to designate data for each data line and marker in the editing area between the desig
451. without error Pass is displayed and the system moves on to the SETUP menu if an error is detected Fail and the error code are displayed You can exit this state and operate this instrument but until the error is corrected the waveform outputs can not be relied on If an error is detected contact our nearest representative To exit the diagnostics calibration system press any of the buttons The system moves on to the SETUP menu NOTE When the power is switched on this instrument is calibrated but in order to preserve the precision of this instrument after the comple tion of the warm up or temperature changes recalibrate this instru ment For details on how to calibrate see the explanation of the Calibration item on the UTILITY menu in Section 4 If this instrument is exposed to temperatures outside its usage temperature range and the chassis temperature is inappropriate an error will occur during the calibration when the power is switched on If this happens wait till the chassis temperature is appropriate then switch the power on again Power Off C Step 9 Toggle the ON STBY switch Operating Basics AWG2040 User Manual Introduction This section will discuss the following Overview The names of the parts of the instrument and their functions Basic Menu Operation Operations commonly performed on the instrument and how to enter numbers Operating Examples Simple examples showing how to output
452. y 10 000 00 MHz Amplitude 1 000V Offset 0 000V Polarity Normal Pulse Duty 50 The following UTILITY menu settings are not affected by Reset to Factory Remote Port GPIB Address GPIB operating mode Setting the RS 232C parameters Date Time AWG2040 User Manual D 21 Preparation Conventions AWG2040 User Manual Appendix E Performance Verification Procedure This subsection describes the verification procedures in this section indi cates when to use the procedures and gives conventions used in their structure The procedures in this section are Self Tests Performance Tests These procedures verify the AWG2040 Arbitrary Waveform Generator func tionality Which procedure to do depends on your goal To quickly confirm that the AWG2040 functions correctly and was ad justed properly do the procedures under Self Tests which begin on page E 3 Advantages These procedures are short require no external equip ment and perform extensive functional and accuracy testing Use them to quickly determine if the AWG2040 is suitable for putting into service such as when it is first received For a more extensive confirmation of performance do the Performance Tests beginning on page E 7 after doing the Self Tests Advantages These procedures involve direct checking of warranted specifications They require more time and suitable test equipment See Equipment Required on page E 8 Before starting any of
453. y baw ed HEA tinaa deea E 4A 111 Clearing Pattern Data 4A 111 Shifting Waveform Data 0 6 c ee eee eee ee 4A 119 inverting Waveform Data 4A 120 Copying Lines ee eee ee 4A 121 Exchanging Lines 00 eee et eee eee eee nee 4A 123 Applying Logical Operations to Lines 6 esse ees 4A 124 Types of Logical Operations sse secre eee 4A 124 Expanding Waveform Data 62 sce e sess eee e eens 4A 125 Inserting Other Waveform Data 55 e sere e beeen eee 4A 126 Pseudo Random Pulse Generator Using Shift Register 4A 126 Register Configuration 0 6 0 06 cece c eee eee eee 4A 126 Setting the Register Length 6 see eee eee eee 4A 127 Entering the Register Value and Setting Taps 4A 127 Clearing All Taps 2 60 06 66sec ee eee tere eee eens 4 127 Setting the Maximum Length Code Series for Taps 44 128 Setting Register Values 25 cece cece ences 4A 128 Sampie Settings for Register Values and Taps 4A 128 POINUSIED 2 cece sa baes onsa te See hae ced ened ae 4A 128 User defined Code Config 20 2000 cee cece 4A 129 Creating the M Series Pseudo Random Signal 4A 129 Zooming Waveforms 66 6 e cece cece eee eee eens 4A 131 Table Display 0 0 6 ccc e eee eee eee eee n eens 4A 131 Table Display Menu Structure 2 0 6 c eee eee ences 4A 133 Menu Functions 0 062 c ee eee eee e
454. ys in which this can be achieved simple parallel operation using marker and external trigger signals or parallel operation synchronous with the clock signal Simple Parallel Operation 1 Connect the marker output on the master AWG2040 instrument to the TRIGGER INPUT connector on the slave instrument Figure 3 4 shows an example of two instruments connected in this manner AWG2040 Master AWG2040 Slave TRIGGEF INPUT Trigger Source 50Q BNC Cable Figure 3 4 Sample Connection 1 NOTE Marker and signal output will be slightly delayed with respect to the trigger signal Also the marker should be set in the editor to be high at the start of the waveform Block Diagram Simple Parallel Operation 2 Figure 3 5 shows a method of connection in which the external trigger signal or gate signal are applied simultaneously to the AWG2040 AWG2040 Master AWG2040 Slave TRIGGER INPUT 50N BNC Cable 50Q BNC Cable Figure 3 5 Sample Connection 2 NOTE The 502 cables connecting the trigger source to the AWG2040 instruments should be of the same length When there is only one trigger source output connect it to the AWG2040 instruments using the shortest 502 cables of an identical length and a Fadaptor In Triggered or Burst mode an output synchronous with the trigger signal can be obtained by applying t
455. ze needed to display all the bits of the pseudo random signal is given by the following formula Value for Point Step x 2 1 2x 215 1 65534 4A 129 EDIT Menu 44 130 oO Step 3 Select Shift Register Generator from the third page of the side menu More 3 of 3 C Step 4 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel oO Step 5 Using the general purpose knob move the vertical bar cursors to designate the area to which pseudo random signals are inserted In this example we will set the left cursor to point 0 and the right cursor to point 65533 C Step 6 Select Line from the sub menu Turning the general purpose knob select DATA7 for which you want to set the pattern C Step 7 Select Register Config from the sub menu C Step 8 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to select Register Length QO Step 9 Using the general purpose knob set the register length to 15 Register Length BE oO Step 10 Select Clear All Taps in the sub menu to delete all taps oO Step 11 Select Set All Regs in the sub menu to set all registers to 1 oO Step 12 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to select Regis ter Position g Step 13 Using the general purpose knob set the Register Position to 13 oO Step 14 Press the VALUE button on the front panel to set the tap Register Position BR ie g Step 15 Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to select Point Step C Step 16 Using the gene

Sony AWG2040 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents